Vfd150c43a Manual

2011-01-08
5011694701-2CE1
PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.

AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive
is made.
DANGER
Even if the power has been turned off, a charge may still remain in the DC-link
capacitors with hazardous voltages before the POWER LED is OFF. Please do
not touch the internal circuit and components.
There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards.
These components are especially sensitive to static electricity. Please do not
touch these components or the circuit boards before taking anti-static
measures. Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
Ground the AC motor drive using the ground terminal. The grounding method
must comply with the laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be
installed.
DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature,
direct sunlight and inflammables.
Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3
CAU TION
directly to the AC mains circuit power supply.

Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain the AC motor
drives.
Even if the 3-phase AC motor is stop, a charge may still remain in the main
circuit terminals of the AC motor drive with hazardous voltages.
If the AC motor drive is stored in no charge condition for more than 3 months,
the ambient temperature should not be higher than 30 C. Storage longer than
one year is not recommended, it could result in the degradation of the
electrolytic capacitors.
NOTE
The content of this manual may be revised without prior notice. Please consult our distributors or download the most updated
version at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation
Table of Contents
SUMMARY OF UPDATES .............................................................................................................0-1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................1-1
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................2-1
CHAPTER 3 UNPACKING .............................................................................................................3-1
CHAPTER 4 WIRING .....................................................................................................................4-1
CHAPTER 5 MAIN CIRCUIT TERMINALS ..................................................................................5-1
CHPATER 6 CONTROL TERMINALS ...........................................................................................6-1
CHAPTER 7 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ..................................................................................7-1
CHAPTER 8 OPTION CARDS.......................................................................................................8-1
CHAPTER 9 SPECIFICATION .......................................................................................................9-1
CHAPTER 10 DIGITAL KEYPAD.................................................................................................10-1
CHAPTER 11 SUMMARPY OF PARAMETERS..........................................................................11-1
CHPAPTER 12 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER SETTINGS ...................................................12-1
CHAPTER 13 WARNING CODES ...............................................................................................13-1
CHAPTER 14 FAULT CODES AND DESCRIPTIONS.................................................................14-1
CHAPTER 15 CANOPEN OVERVIEW ........................................................................................15-1
CHAPTER 16 PLC FUNCTION....................................................................................................16-1
Application
Control BD V1.00;
Keypad
V1.00;
Summary of UpdatesC2000 Series
Summary of Updates
The following changes summarize the differences to the C2000 Simplified Manual, Version
5011694700.
Chatpers
[Table of Content]
Changes
Detail
New
New Chapters:
Chapter 2 Installation
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview
Chapter 16 PLC Function
(Applicable model, AC motor drive selection)

Applicable model
AC motor drive selection
[01 Introduction]
New
Frame FRAME A~H
KPC-CC01 digital keypad
Update Serial number
[02 Installation]
New
Mounting clearances and wiring information
Update
Unpacking details moved to CH3
[03 Unpacking]
New
FRAME F~H
FRAME H secure the drive
FRAME F~H lifting weight
[04Wiring]
New
RB-RC power protection system diagram
Updates Wiring diagram 1, 2
Control circuit description
Figure1,2
Figure 3 FRAME E-H DC-LINK
[05 Main circuit terminal]
New
Main circuit terminal specification FRAME F~H
Update Main circuit terminal diagram 3
Terminal signs +1, - and description
Main circuit terminal specifications
Frame A~E (max. and min. wire gauge,torque, note, diagram)
[06 Control circuit
New
Steps to removes the key cover and wiring
terminal]
Removable terminal block figure
Update Control terminal specification: wire gauge, torque,
Descripton and factory settings: MI11~MI8 terminals, SG+ & SG- terminals
Steps to remove the terminal block
[08 Option cards]
New
Steps to remove key cover
EMC-D611A I/O & Relay extension card
EMC-PG01L PG card and wiring diagrams(can be operate by
Pr.10-00~10-02)
EMC-PG01O PG card and wiring diagrams(can be operate by
Pr.10-00~10-02)
EMC-PG01U:
description, wiring diagram, terminal Screw Sepecifications
EMC-PG01R:
description, wiring diagram, terminal Screw Sepecifications
CMC-MOD01:
feature, product file, CMC-MOD01 installation to C2000, parameter setting for
Ethernet, removal, basic register, LED indicator& troubleshoots
CMC-PD01:
feature, product file, installation, LED indicator& troubleshoots
CMC-DN01:
feature, product file, LED indicator& troubleshoots
CMC-EIP01:
feature, product file, installation, Connecting CMC-EIP01 to VFD-C2000,
parameter setting for Ethernet, removal, basic register, LED indicator&
troubleshoots
0-1
EMC-COP01: RJ45 Pin definition, Specification

RJ45 (Socket) for digital keypad
Option card diagrams for Slot 1~3
EMC-D42A: Descriptons for COM and MI10~MI13
EMC-R6AA: Description
EMC-PG01O PG OUT V+, V-, A/O, B/O, Z/O
Remove ABZ1 Encoder signal type, AB2 Pulse signal type
New
230V FRAME F specification
460V FRAME F~H specification
Operation temperature and protection level
Update 230V/460V
Nomal load: carrier frequency
Operational voltage range
230V
EMC Filter EMI Filter
460V EMI Filter Description and Note
Control method
Certification
Delete 230V/460V
Heavy load& Normal load: load capacity and max. output frequency (Hz)
Torque characteristic
Overload capacity
Ambient temperature
*Reduced by 2%Irated/1
New
Digital Keypad: KPC-CC01 Function
Update Keypad picture
Descriptions of Keypad Functions
Change LED keypad to KPC-CE01
CANopen~RUN
CANopen~ERR
ONLY LED change to KPC-CE01
Remove Digital keypad operation procedure
New
Group 00
Parameters Pr.00-00 Settings: 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 93
Pr.00-04 Settings: 2~8, 21,24~31
Pr 00-05
Pr.00-25~Pr.00-50
Pr.01-46
Pr.02-54
Pr.03-31~03-33
Pr.04-30~04-44
Group 5
Pr.05-00 Settings: 4, 5, 6, 12
Pr.05-33~05-43
Pr.06-17~06-22 Settings: 66~107, 111
Pr.06-55~06-73
Pr.10-22
Pr.11-41~11-46
Update Goup 00
Pr00-09 Reserved
Pr.00-10 Settings: 1~3
Pr. 00-12 point-to-point position mode
Pr.00-14 Reserved
Pr.00-17
Normal load 230V (460V)
1-15HP [1-20HP]
2~15KHz
20-50HP [25-100HP]
2~10KHz
60-100HP [125-475HP] 2~09KHz
Heavy load
1-475HP
2~6KHz
Update
[09 Specification]
[10 Digital Keypad]
[11 Summary of
Parameters]
0-2
Summary of UpdatesC2000 Series

Pr.00-19 PLC Command Mask
Pr.00-20 Source of Master Frequency CommandAUTO
Pr.00-24 Memory of Frequency Command
Pr. 02-01~02-08 Settings: 6, 10, 18, 31~33, 35, 37, 41~47, 49, 54~70
Pr.00-14 Reserved
Group 01
Pr. 01-02~01-06, 01-20~01-21, 01-36~01-40: Factory Settings
Goup 02
Pr.02-09 1: up/down constant speed (Pr.02-10)
Pr.02-11
Pr.02-13~02-17 Settings: 10, 13, 14, 39, 40, 43~49, 51, 52
Pr.02-19 Terminal counting value attained (returns to 0)
Pr.02-20 Preliminary counting value attained (not return to 0)
Pr.02-33 Output Current Level Setting for Multi-function External Terminals
Pr.02-34
Pr.02-35
Pr.02-37
Pr.02-48
Goup 03
Pr.03-00~03-02 Settings: 11, 12~17, 18~19
Pr.03-10
Pr.03-20~03-23 Settings: 19~23
Pr.03-26~03-30
Factory settings in 03-20~03-23, 03-21 03-24
Group 04
Pr.04-15~04-29
Group 05
Pr.05-01 Settings: 10~120% of drives rated current
Pr.05-06~05-09, 05-18~05-21 setting range
Pr.05-12~05-13
Group 06
Pr.06-00~06-01
Pr.06-03~06-04
Pr.06-07
Pr.06-10
Pr.06-12
Pr.06-17~06-22 Settings: 15, 17,19,20,21,25,28,29,32,39,40,52,53,64,65
Pr.06-31~06-54
Group 07
Pr.07-05
Pr.07-07
Pr.07-10
Pr.07-24~07-27
Pr.07-29
Pr.07-31~07-33
Group 08
Pr.08-00
Pr.08-20
Group 09
Pr.09-30
Pr.09-35
Pr.09-37~09-39
Pr.09-43
Pr.09-45
Group 10
Pr.10-00
Pr.10-17~10-18
Pr.10-21
Group 11
Pr.11-00
Pr.11-03~11-06
Pr.11-08
0-3
[13 Warning Codes]
[14 Fault Codes and

Descriptions]
Pr.11-10
Pr.11-24
Pr.11-28~11-34
Pr.11-40
Remove Pr. 01-47~01-50
New
LCM display screen example
Error code:
SE3, PGFB, Cldn, Cadn, CFrn, PLSF, PCGd, PCbF, PCnL,
PCCt, PCSF, PCSd, PCAd, Ecby
Update LED display content
ANL description
Remove LCM display example
All display icons
New
Fault display screen example
Fault code:
ovA, ovd, ovn, ovS, PWR, uC, LMIT, ryF, PGF5, ocU, ocV,
OPHL, OPHL, OPHL, TRAP
Update LCM display icons
Fault codes:
CE1, CE2, CE3, CE4, CE10, CP10 ,
dEb, Uocc A, Vocc B, Wocc C
Remove LED display content
Fault code:
UC1, UC2
0-4
Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series
Chapter 1 Introduction
Receiving and Inspection
After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following:
1.
Please inspect the unit after unpacking to assure it was not damaged during shipment.
2.
Make sure that the part number printed on the package corresponds with the part number indicated
on the nameplate.
3.
Make sure that the voltage for the wiring lie within the range as indicated on the nameplate.
4.
Please install the AC motor drive according to this manual.
5.
Before applying the power, please make sure that all the devices, including power, motor, control
board and digital keypad, are connected correctly.
6.
When wiring the AC motor drive, please make sure that the wiring of input terminals R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3 and output terminalsU/T1, V/T2, W/T3 are correct to prevent drive damage.
7.
When power is applied, select the language and set the parameter groups via the digital keypad
(KPC-CC01).
8.
After applying the power, please trial run with the low speed and then increase the speed gradually
to the desired speed.
Nameplate Information
AC Dr ive Model
Input Voltage/Curr ent
MODEL:VFD007C43A
INPUT:
Normal Dut y: 3P H 380-4 80V 5 0/60 Hz 4 .3A
Heavy Duty: 3PH 38 0-480V 50/ 60Hz 4. 1A
Output Voltage/Cur rent
OUT PUT:
Normal Dut y: 3P H 0-480 V 3A 2 .4KVA 1HP
Heavy Duty: 3PH 0-4 80V 2.9A 2 .3K VA 1HP
F requenc y Range
F irmware Vers ion
F REQ UENCY RANGE :

Normal Duty: 0- 600Hz
Heavy Duty: 0- 300Hz
Versio n: V0.30
Certifications
Seri al Number
007C43A7T 9300002
DE LTA EL ECTRO NICS. INC.
MA DE IN X XX XX XX
1-1
Model Name
VFD 007 C 43 A
Versi on type
Inpu t vo ltage
23:2 30V 3-PHASE
43:4 60V 3-PHASE
C2000 serie s
Appli cabl e motor c apac ity
007 :1HP(0.75 kW)~ 3350 :475HP(3 35kW
Refer to the spec ifications for detail s
Series name(Variable Frequ ency Drive)
Serial Number
007C43A0 T 9 30 0002
Production numb er
Production we ek
T: Tauyuan W: Wujian
S: Sha nghai
460V 3-PHASE 1HP(0.75kW)
1-2
Production year
Production factory
Mo del numbe r
Dimensions
Frame A
VFD007C23A; VFD007C43A/E; VFD015C23A; VFD015C43A/E; VFD022C23A; VFD022C43A/E;
VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/E; VFD040C43A/E; FD055C43A/E
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
A1
W1
H1
D1*
S1
130.0
250.0
170.0
116.0
236.0
45.8
6.2
22.2
34.0
28.0
[5.12]
[9.84]
[6.69]
[4.57]
[9.29]
[1.80]
[0.24]
[0.87]
[1.34]
[1.10]
D1*: Flange mounting

NOTE: Model VFD007C43E; VFD015C43E; VFD022C43E; VFD037C43E; VFD040C43E; VFD055C43E will be available for
ordering soon. Please contact your local distributor or Delta representative for detailed launch schedule.
1-3
Frame B
VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD075C43A/E; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/E; VFD150C43A/E
See Detail A
See Detail B
Detail A (Mounting Hole)
Detail B (Mounting Hole)

Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
B1
W1
H1
D1*
S1
190.0
320.0
190.0
173.0
303.0
77.9
8.5
22.2
34.0
28.0
[7.48]
[12.60]
[7.48]
[6.81]
[11.93]
[3.07]
[0.33]
[0.87]
[1.34]
[1.10]

NOTE: Model VFD075C43E; VFD110C43E; VFD150C43E will be available for ordering soon. Please contact your local distributor
or Delta representative for detailed launch schedule.
1-4
Frame C
VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD185C43A/E; VFD220C23A; VFD220C43A/E; VFD300C43A/E
See Detail A
See Detail B

Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
C1
W1
H1
D1*
S1
250.0
400.0
210.0
231.0
381.0
92.9
8.5
22.2
34.0
50.0
[9.84]
[15.75]
[8.27]
[9.09]
[15.00]
[3.66]
[0.33]
[0.87]
[1.34]
[1.97]

NOTE: Mode VFD185C43E; VFD220C43E; VFD300C43E will be available for ordering soon. Please contact your local
distributor or Delta representative for detailed launch schedule.
1-5
Frame D
D1: VFD300C23A; VFD370C23A; VFD370C43A; VFD450C43A; VFD550C43A; VFD750C43A
D2: VFD300C23E; VFD370C23E; VFD370C43E; VFD450C43E; VFD550C43E; VFD750C43E
D
W
W1
D1
D2
H3
H1
H2
SEE DETAIL A
S2
SEE DETAIL B
S1
S1
DETAIL A
(MOUNTING HOLE)
DETAIL B
(MOUNTING HOLE)
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
D1
D2
W1
H1
H2
H3
D1*
D2
S1
S2
330.0
275.0
285.0
550.0
525.0
492.0
107.2
16.0
11.0
18.0
[10.83] [11.22] [21.65] [20.67] [19.37]
[4.22]
[0.63]
[0.43]
[0.71]
275.0
492.0
107.2
16.0
11.0
[20.67] [19.37]
[4.22]
[0.63]
[0.43]
[12.99]
330.0
688.3
285.0
550.0
[12.99]
[27.10] [10.83] [11.22] [21.65]
525.0
18.0
76.2
34.0
22.0
[0.71]
[3.00]
[1.34]
[0.87]
1-6
Frame E
E1: VFD450C23A; VFD550C23A; VFD750C23A; VFD900C43A; VFD1100C43A
E2: VFD450C23E; VFD550C23E; VFD750C23E; VFD900C43E; VFD1100C43E
W
W1
H3
H1
?
?
H2
D1
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
E1
E2
W
370.0
[14.57]
H
-
W1
300.0 335.0
H1
589
H2
H3
D1*
560.0 528.0 143.0
D2
S1, S2
S3
18.0
13.0
18.0
22.0
34.0
92.0
[11.81] [13.19 [23.19] [22.05] [20.80] [5.63] [0.71] [0.51] [0.71]
370.0 715.8 300.0 335.0
589
560.0 528.0 143.0
18.0
13.0
18.0
[14.57] [28.18] [11.81] [13.19 [23.19] [22.05] [20.80] [5.63] [0.71] [0.51] [0.71] [0.87] [1.34] [3.62]
1-7
Frame F
F1: VFD900C23A; VFD1320C43A; VFD1600C43A; F2: VFD900C23E; VFD1320C43E; VFD1600C43E
W
W1
See Detail A
D1
H3
H2
H1
See Detail A
S3
D2
1
3
3
2
See Detail B
S1
S1
S2
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
F1
F2
H1
H2
H3
420.0
300.0 380.0 800.0 770.0 717.0
[16.54]
[11.81] [14.96] [31.50] [30.32] [28.23]
420.0 940.0 300.0 380.0 800.0 770.0 717.0
[16.54] [37.00] [11.81] [14.96] [31.50] [30.32] [28.23]
Frame
F1
92.0
[3.62]
92.0
[3.62]
35.0
[1.38]
35.0
[1.38]
22.0
[0.87]
22.0
[0.87]
F2
W1
D1*
D2
S1
S2
S3
124.0
[4.88]
124.0
[4.88]
18.0
[0.71]
18.0
[0.71]
13.0
[0.51]
13.0
[0.51]
25.0
[0.98]
25.0
[0.98]
18.0
[0.71]
18.0
[0.71]
1-8
Frame G
G1: VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A; G2: VFD1850C43E; VFD2200C43E
W
H3
H1
H2
W1
S3
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
G1
500.0
[19.69]
G2
W1
H1
H2
H3
S2
S3
397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0

[15.63] [217.32] [39.37] [37.91] [35.97] [0.51]
26.5
[1.04]
27.0
[1.06]
500.0 1240.2 397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0

[19.69] [48.83] [15.63] [217.32] [39.37] [37.91] [35.97] [0.51]
26.5
[1.04]
27.0
[1.06]
22.0
[0.87]
34.0
[1.34]
117.5
[4.63]
1-9
S1
Frame H
H1: VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A
H2: VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1
H3: VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
H1
H2
H3
W
H
D
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
H1
H2
H3
H4
700.0
398.0
630.0 290.0
1435.0 1403.0
[27.56]
[15.67]
[24.80] [11.42]
[56.50] [55.24]
700.0 1745.0 404.0 800.0
500.0 630.0 760.0 1729.0
1701.6
[27.56] [68.70] [15.91] [31.50]
[19.69] [24.80] [29.92] [68.07]
[66.99]
700.0 1745.0 404.0 800.0
500.0 630.0 760.0 1729.0
1701.6
[27.56] [68.70] [15.91] [31.50]
[19.69] [24.80] [29.92] [68.07]
[66.99]
1-10
Frame
H1
H2
H3
H5
1346.6
[53.02]
1346.6
[53.02]
1346.6
[53.02]
D1
D2
D3
45.0
[1.77]
51.0 38.0 65.0
[2.01] [1.50] [2.56]
51.0 38.0 65.0
[2.01] [1.50] [2.56]
D4
D5
D6
204.0 68.0 137.0

[8.03] [2.68] [5.39]
204.0 68.0 137.0
[8.03] [2.68] [5.39]
1-11
S1
S2
S3
1
2
3
13.0 26.5 25.0
[0.51] [1.04] [0.98]
13.0 26.5 25.0
[0.51] [1.04] [0.98]
13.0 26.5 25.0 22.0 34.0 117.5
[0.51] [1.04] [0.98] [0.87] [1.34] [4.63]
Digital Keypad
KPC-CC01
1-12
Chapter 2 InstallationC2000 Series
Chapter 2 Installation
The appearances shown in the following figures are for reference only.
Airflow direction:
(Blue arrow) inflow
(Red arrow) outflow
Single drive: installation
Side-by-side installation(Frame A-C)
(Frame A-H)
Multiple drives: side-by-side installationFrame A,B,C, G, H
Multiple drives: side-by-side installation (Frame D, E, F) Install a barrier between the drives.
2-1
Multiple drives side-by-side installation in rows (Frame A,B,C )

Ta: Frame A~G
Ta*: Frame H
For installation in rows, it is recommended installing a barrier between the drives. Adjust the size/depth of
the barrier till the temperature measured at the fans inflow side is lower than the operation temperature.
Operation temperature is the defined as the temperature measured 50mm away from the fans inflow
side. (As shown in the figure below)
Minimum mounting clearance

Frame
A (mm)
B (mm)
C (mm)
D (mm)
A~C
60
30
10
D~F
100
50
200
100
350
200 (100, Ta=40)
Frame A VFD007C23A; VFD007C43A/E; VFD015C23A; VFD015C43A/E; VFD022C23A;

VFD022C43A/E; VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/E; VFD040C43A/E; VFD055C43A/E;
Frame B VFD055C23A; VFD75C23A; VFD075C43A/E; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/E;
VFD150C43A/E;
Frame C VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD185C43A/E; VFD220C23A; VFD220C43A/E;
VFD300C43A/E;
Frame D VFD300C23A/E; VFD370C23A/E; VFD370C43A/E; VFD450C43A/E; VFD550C43A/E;
VFD750C43A/E;
Frame E VFD450C23A/E; VFD550C23A/E; VFD750C23A/E; VFD900C43A/E; VFD1100C43A/E;
Frame F VFD900C23A/E; VFD1320C43A/E; VFD1600C43A/E;
Frame G VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A; VFD1850C43E; VFD2200C43E;
Frame H VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A; VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1;
VFD3550C43E-1;VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E;
NOTE
1.
It is the minimum distance required for frame A~D. If drives are installed closer than the minimum mounting clearance, the
fan may not function properly.
2.
Model VFD007C43E; VFD015C43E; VFD022C43E; VFD037C43E; VFD040C43E; VFD055C43E; VFD075C43E;

VFD110C43E; VFD150C43E; VFD185C43E; VFD220C43E; VFD300C43E will be available for ordering soon. Please
contact your local distributor or Delta representative for detailed launch schedule,
2-2
NOT E
The mounting clearances shown in the left figure are NOT for installing the
drive in a confined space (such as cabinet or electric box). When installing
in a confined space, besides the same minimum mounting clearances, it
needs to have the ventilation equipment or air conditioner to keep the
surrounding temperature lower than the operation temperature.
The following table shows heat dissipation and the required air
volume when installing a single drive in a confined space. When
installing multiple drives, the required air volume shall be multiplied
by the number the drives.
Refer to the chart (Air flow rate for cooling) for ventilation equipment
design and selection.
Refer to the chart (Power dissipation) for air conditioner design and
selection.
Air flow rate for cooling

Flow Rate (cfm)
Model No.
VFD007C23A
VFD015C23A
VFD022C23A
VFD037C23A
VFD055C23A
VFD075C23A
VFD110C23A
VFD150C23A
VFD185C23A
VFD220C23A
VFD300C23A/E
VFD370C23A/E
VFD450C23A/E
VFD550C23A/E
VFD750C23A/E
VFD900C23A/E
VFD007C43A/E
VFD015C43A/E
VFD022C43A/E
VFD037C43A/E
VFD040C43A/E
VFD055C43A/E
VFD075C43A/E
VFD110C43A/E
VFD150C43A/E
VFD185C43A/E
VFD220C43A/E
VFD300C43A/E
VFD370C43A/E
VFD450C43A/E
VFD550C43A/E
External Internal
14
14
10
40
66
58
166
166
146
179
179
228
228
246
224
14
10
10
10
40
66
58
99
99
126
179
179
179
14
14
14
12
12
12
30
30
73
73
73
112
14
14
14
21
21
21
30
30
30
Total
14
14
10
54
80
73
178
178
158
209
209
301
301
319
336
14
10
10
10
54
80
73
120
120
147
209
209
209
Flow Rate (m3/hr)

External Internal
24
24
17
68
112
99
282
282
248
304
304
387
387
418
381
24
17
17
17
68
112
99
168
168
214
304
304
304
2-3
24
24
24
20
20
20
51
51
124
124
124
190
24
24
24
36
36
36
51
51
51
Total
24
24
17
92
136
124
302
302
268
355
355
511
511
542
571
24
17
17
17
92
136
124
204
204
250
355
355
355
Power dissipation of AC motor

drive
Power Dissipation
Loss External
Internal Total
(Heat sink)
33
27
61
56
31
88
79
36
115
113
46
159
197
67
264
249
86
335
409
121
529
455
161
616
549
184
733
649
216
865
913
186
1099
1091
220
1311
1251
267
1518
1401
308
1709
1770
369
2139
2304
484
2788
33
25
59
45
29
74
71
33
104
103
38
141
116
42
158
134
46
180
216
76
292
287
93
380
396
122
518
369
138
507
476
158
635
655
211
866
809
184
993
929
218
1147
1156
257
1413
367
561
503
571
681
771
771
Power dissipation of AC motor

drive
Power Dissipation
Loss External
Internal Total
(Heat sink)
1408
334
1742
1693
399
2092
2107
491
2599
2502
579
3081
3096
687
3783
4589
5772

Flow Rate (m3/hr)
Flow Rate (cfm)

Model No.
External Internal
VFD750C43A/E
VFD900C43A/E
VFD1100C43A/E
VFD1320C43A/E
VFD1600C43A/E
VFD1850C43A/E
VFD2200C43A/E
186
257
223
224
289
30
73
73
112
112
Total
External Internal
216
330
296
336
401
454
454
316
437
379
381
491
51
124
124
190
190
Total
VFD2800C43A/E
769
1307
6381
VFD3150C43A/E
769
1307
7156
VFD3550C43A/E
769
1307
The required airflow shown in chart is for installing single drive in a
confined space.
When installing the multiple drives, the required air volume should
be the required air volume for single drive X the number of the
drives.
Model VFD007C43E; VFD015C43E; VFD022C43E; VFD037C43E;
VFD040C43E; VFD055C43E; VFD075C43E; VFD110C43E;
VFD150C43E; VFD185C43E; VFD220C43E; VFD300C43E will be
available for ordering soon. Please contact your local distributor or
Delta representative for detailed launch schedule.
8007
The heat dissipation shown
in the chart is for installing
single drive in a confined
space.
When installing the multiple
drives, volume of heat
dissipation should be the
heat dissipated for single
drive X the number of the
drives.
Heat dissipation for each
model is calculated by rated
voltage, current and default
carrier.
Derating curve diagram: Normal Duty

Setting = 0 or 2
Setting =1
(40: UL open-type)
(30: UL type1 or open type_size by size)
Setting = 0 or 2
(50: UL open-type)
(40:UL type1 or open type_size by size)
460V
460V
VFD007~150C43A/E
VFD185~550C43A/E
VFD750~3550C43A/E
110
110
100
100
Ratio(%)
Ratio(%)
VFD007~150C43A/E
VFD185~550C43A/E
VFD750~3550C43A/E
90
80
70
60
4
90
80
70
60
4
10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz)
Setting =1
10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz)
Setting = 0 or 2
Setting = 0 or 2
2-4

(50: UL open-type)
(40:UL type1 or open type_size by size)
(40: UL open-type)
230V
VFD007~110C23A
VFD150~370C23A;
VFD300~370C23E
VFD450~900C23A/E
VFD007~110C23A
VFD150~370C23A;
VFD300~370C23E
VFD450~900C23A/E
100
110
90
100
Ratio(%)
Ratio(%)
110
230V
80
70
60
4
90
80
70
10 11 12 13 14 15
60
4
Fc (kHz)
10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz)
Derating curve diagram: Heavy Duty

Setting =1
Setting = 0 or 2
(50: UL open-type)
460V
Setting = 0 or 2
(40: UL open-type)
460V
VFD007~150C43A/E
VFD185~550C43A/E
VFD750~3550C43A/E
110
110
100
100
Ratio(%)
Ratio(%)
VFD007~150C43A/E
VFD185~550C43A/E
VFD750~3550C43A/E
90
80
70
60
90
80
70
60
50
50
40
2
40
2
3 4
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
3 4
Fc (kHz)
230V
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz)
230V
VFD007~110C23A
VFD150~370C23A;
VFD300~370C23E
VFD450~900C23A/E
110
110
100
100
Ratio(%)
Ratio(%)
VFD007~110C23A
VFD150~370C23A;
VFD300~370C23E
VFD450~900C23A/E
90
80
70
60
50
40
2
90
80
70
60
50
3 4
40
2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz)
3 4
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz)
2-5
Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series
Chapter 3 Unpacking
The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to retain the
warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an
extended period of time.
The AC motor drive is packed in the crate. Follows the following step for unpack:
Frame D
Crate 1 (VFDXXXCXXA)
Crate 2 (VFDXXXCXXE)
Loosen the 12 cover screws to open the crate.
Loosen all of the screws on the 4 iron plates at the
four bottom corners of the crate. 4 screws on each
of the iron plate.
Remove the EPEs and manual.
Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubber and

manual.
Loosen the 8 screws that fastened on the pallet,

remove the wooden plate.
3-1
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now

ready for installation.
Loosen the 10 screws on the pallet, remove the

wooden plate.

Frame E
Loosen the 4 screws on the iron plates. There are Loosen the 4 screws on the iron plates. There are
4 iron plates and in total of 16 screws.
4 iron plates and in total of 16 screws.
3-2
Remove the crate cover, EPEs and manual.
Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubbers and

manual.
Loosen the 8 screws on the pallet as shown in the

following figure.
Loosen the 10 screws on the pallet and remove the

wooden plate.


3-3
Frame F
Remove the 6 clips on the side of the crate with a
flat-head screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.)
Remove the 6 clips on the side of the crate with a
flat-head screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.)
4
1
3

manual.
Loosen the 5 screws on the pallet

as shown in the following figure.
Loosen the 9 screws on the pallet and remove the

wooden plate.
4
3
wood plate2
wood plate1
3-4

ready for installation

.
Frame G
Remove the 6 clips on the side of the crate with a Remove the 6 clips on the side of the crate with a
flathead screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.)
4
1
2
2
3
Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubber and manual.
3-5
Loosen the 5 screws as shown in following figure:
Loosen the 9 screws and remove the wooden plate.
3
11 5 4
6
4
12
5
wood plate5
wood plate4
98
10
7
wood plate1
wood plate2
wood plate3


3-6
Frame H
Crate 2 (VFDXXXCXXE-1)
Remove the 8 clips on the side of the crate with a Remove the 8 clips on the side of the crate with a

manual.
Loosen the 6 screws on the top then remove 6

metal washers and 6 plastic washers as shown in
figure below.
Loosen the 6 screws on the top then remove 6

metal washers and 6 plastic washers as shown in
figure below.
3-7

Loosen 6 of the M6 screws on the side and remove

the 2 plates, as shown in below. The removed
screws and plates can be used to secure the AC
motor drive from the external.
Secure the drive from the external. (Skip to the

next step if it is not necessary in your case.)
Loosen 8 of M8 screws on the both sides and place
the 2 plates that were removed from the last step.
Fix the plates to AC motor drive by fasten 8 of the
M8 screws. (As shown in below)
Torque: 150~180kg-cm (130.20~156.24lb-in.)

3-8
Frame H
Use flathead screwdriver to remove the clips on the side of the crate, 8 clips in total.
Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubber and manual.
Loosen the 6 screws on the cover, remove 6 metal washers and 6 plastic washers as shown in below:
3-9
Loosen 6 of the M6 screws on the side and removes the 2 plates, as shown in following figure. The
removed screws and plates can be used to secure AC motor drive from the external.
Secure the drive from the internal.

Loosen 18 of the M6 screws and remove the top
cover as shown in figure 2. Mount the cover (figure
1) back to the drive by fasten the M6 screws to the
two sides of the drive, as shown in figure 2.
Torque: 35~45kg-cm (30.38~39.06lb-in.)
Secure the drive from the external.

Loosen 8 of the M8 screws on the both sides and
place the 2 plates that were removed from the last
step. Fix the plates to rive by fasten 8 of the M8
screws. (As shown in figure below).
Torque: 150~180kg-cm (130.20~156.24lb-in.)
Figure 1
Top cover (Use M12 screws)
Figure 2
3-10
Fasten 6 of the M6 screws that were removed from last step back to the AC motor drive. As shown in
figure below:
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation.
Frame H Secure the drive

(VFDXXXCXXA)
Screw: M12*6
Torque: 340-420kg-cm [295.1-364.6lb-in.]
3-11
(VFDXXXCXXE) & (VFDXXXCXXE-1)
Secure the drive from internal.

Screw: M12*8
Torque: 340-420kg-cm [295.1-364.6lb-in.]
Secure the drive from the external.

Screw: M12*8
Torque: 340-420kg-cm [295.1-364.6lb-in.]
3-12
The Lifting Hook

The arrows indicate the lifting holes, as in figure below: (Frame D~H).
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 4
Figure 5
3-13
Figure 3
Ensure the lifting hook properly goes through the

lifting hole, as shown in the following diagram.
(Applicable for Frame D~G)
Ensure the angle between the lifting holes and the

lifting device is within the specification, as shown
in the following diagram.
(Applicable to Frame H)
(Applicable to Frame H)
3-14
Weight
VFDXXXXCXXA
VFDXXXXCXXA
VFDXXXXCXXA
VFDXXXXCXXA
37.6 kg(82.9 Ibs.)
VFDXXXXCXXE
63.6 kg(140.2 Ibs.)
VFDXXXXCXXE
85kg(187.2 Ibs.)
VFDXXXXCXXE
VFDXXXXCXXE
130kg(286.5 Ibs.)
H1: VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A;
H2: VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1;
3-15
40 kg(88.2 Ibs.)
66 kg(145.5 Ibs.)
88kg(193.8 Ibs.)
138kg(303.9 lbs)
235kg (518.1lbs)
257kg (566.6lbs)
H3: VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E;
3-16
263kg (579.8lbs)
Chapter 4 WiringC2000 Series
Chapter 4 Wiring
Wiring Diagram for Frame A~C
* It p ro vide s 3 -p hase power
Fus e/NFB(No Fuse Bre aker)
DC cho ke
(optio nal)
Jumper
R(L1)
- +2
R(L1)
S(L2)
S(L2)
T(L3 )
T(L3 )
SA
MC
Recommen ded Ci rcuit

when power suppl y
is turned OFF by a
faul t outp ut.
ON
OFF
If th e fau lt occurs, the
co ntact wi ll b e ON to tu rn off th e
MC
power and protect the power system.
Fac tory s etting :

NPN (SINK) M ode
Pleas e refe r to
foll owing fi gure
for wirin g of NPN
mo de a nd PNP
mo de.
Factory
se tting
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Mu lti-step 1
Mu lti-step 2
Mu lti-step 3
Mu lti-step 4
N/A
N/A
* MI8 can input pulses 100kHz

* Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
power remov al s afety function
for EN954-1 and IEC/EN61508
Digital Signal Common
5K
3
2
1
+10V/20mA
0~1 0V/ 0~2 0mA
4~2 0mA/0 ~10V
-10 ~+1 0V
Analog Signal Common

-10 V/20 mA
Ma in circuit
(power) term inals
Control termin als
B1
B2
Modbus RS-485
CAN BUS
Pin 1~2, 7, 8: reserved
SG+
Pin 3, 6:GND
Pin 4:SGSG
Pin 5:SG+
Mo tor
U(T1)
IM
3~
V(T2)
W(T3 )
RB
RC
+24 V
N/A
N/A
Digita l Sign al Common
NOTE
+1
Brake resistor
(optio nal)
RA1
C OM
RB1
FWD
Mu lti-function output termin als

25 0Va c/5A (N.O. )
25 0Va c/3A (N.C .)
R EV
RC1
25 0Va c/2A (N.O. )

Estima te at C OS (0 .4)
MI1
RA2
25 0Va c/1.2 A (N .C.)

Estima te at C OS (0 .4)
MI3
RB2
MI4
RC2
30 Vdc/5 A (N .O.)
30 Vdc/3 A (N .C.)
MI2
MI5
MI6
DFM Multi-function output
MI7
MI8
DCM
D CM
frequency terminals
30V30mA 100kHz
Multi-function output
MO1 frequency terminals
48V/50mA
frequency terminals
48V/50mA
MCM Multi-function
Photocoulper Output
S1
MO2
SCM
+10V
AFM1
AVI
ACM
ACI
AUI
AFM2
ACM
-10V
Shiel ded leads & Cab le
4-1
Analog Multi-function
Output Terminal
0~10VDC/-10~+10V
Analog Signal common
Analog Multi-function
Output Terminal
0~10VDC/4~20mA
Option
Slot 1
IO
exte nsi on ca rd
Option
Slot 2
PG
exte nsi on ca rd
Option
Slot 3
IO &RELAY
exte nsi on ca rd

Wiring diagram for frame D and above
* It p ro vide s 3 -p hase power
Pleas e refe r to Fi gure 3
Fus e/NFB(No F use Bre aker)
+/DC+
R(L1)
R(L1)
S(L2)
S(L2)
T(L3 )
T(L3 )
SA
MC
Recom men ded Circuit

when power supply
is turned OFF by a
faul t outp ut.
ON
OFF
If th e fau lt oc curs, the
co ntact wi ll be ON to turn off the
MC
power a nd p ro tect the p owe r sy stem.
Factory setting: NPN (SINK) Mode
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
REV/STOP
RC
COM
RA1
FWD
RB1
RC1
MI1
JOG
MI2
Mu lti-step 1
MI3
Mu lti-step 2
MI4
Mu lti-step 3
Mu lti-step 4
MI5
MI6
RESET
Acc el/Decel prohi bit
MI7
RB2
30VAC/5A (N.O.)
30VAC/3A (N.C.)
RC2
DFM
MI8
DCM
DCM
+10V
MCM
3
1
4~20mA
-10~+10V
Analo g Sign al Com mon

Power s upply
-10V 2 0mA
M ain c ircui t
(power) term inals
M odbu s RS-4 85
CAN BUS
Pin 1~ 2,7 ,8:Res erve d
Pin 3,6 :GND
SG+
Pin 4:SG Pin 5: SG+
SG
Control circu it term inals
IO& REL AY
ex tensi on c ard
Mu lti-func tion fre quenc y

outp ut term inals
30V30 mA 1 00kHz
MO1
MO2
0 to 10V
250 VAC/2A (N.O.)

Estim ate at COS(0.4)
250 VAC/1.2A (N.C.)
Estim ate at COS(0.4)
* Mi 8 ca n in put p ulse s 10 0kHz

* Do no t app ly the m ains vo ltage directl y
to ab ove termina ls.
+10V 20mA
Mu ltiple -fu nctio n out put

termi nals
250 VAC/5A (N.O.)
250 VAC/3A (N.O.)
RA2
Digital Signa l Comm on
IM
3~
RB
REV
E.F.
5K
Mo tor
24V
Externa l Power In put

FWD/STOP
Pleas e refe r to
foll owi ng fi gure
for wirin g of NPN
mo de a nd PNP
mo de.
Fac tory
se tting
-/DC-
AVI

outp ut term inals
48V50 mA
outp ut term inals
48V50 mA
Mu lti-func tion
Photoc oulp er Output
AFM1
ACI
ACM
AUI
Analo g M ulti-function
Output Termina l
0~10VDC/ -1 0~+10V
Analo g Sign al common
ACM
AFM2
-10V
S1
8 1
8 1
SCM
Option
Slot 1
Option
Slot 3
Shiel ded leads & Cabl e
4-2
Option
Slot 2
Analo g Multi-func tion

Output Termina
0~10VDC/ 4~2 mA
power r emov al saf et y f unc ti on
f or EN954-1 and I EC/EN61508
D igi tal Si gn al C ommon
Comm unic ation

Exten sion card
PG
ex tensi on c ard
Figure 1
Input power terminals for frame G and H
It provides 12-pulse power
Provides 3-phase power
R/L11
Fuse or NFB (non-fuse breaker)
R/L11
R/L21
S/L12
S/L22
T/L13
T/L23
R
S
T
R
S
S/L12
T/L13
R/L21
S/L22
T/L23
Figure 2
SINKNPN/SOURCEPNPMode
Sourc e Mode
w ith internal power (+24VD C)
MI1
MI1
MI2
MI2
1 Sink Mode
with internal power (+24VDC )
MI8
MI8
+2 4V
DCM
COM
COM
DCM
internal c irc ui t
3 Sink Mode
with external power
+2 4V
4 Sourc e Mode
with external power
MI2
MI2
MI1
MI1
MI8
MI8
+2 4V
+2 4V
COM
COM
DCM
external power +24V
internal c irc ui t
internal c irc ui t
DCM
external pow er +24V
4-3
internal c irc ui t
Figure 3
Frame E~H, remove terminal r and terminal s before using DC-Link. (As circled in dotted line, uninstall the
gray section and properly store cable r and cable s. Cable r and cable s are not available in optional
accessories, do not dispose them.)
r s
4-4
Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Series
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals

Figure 1
For frame A~C

* Provid e 3-ph ase inpu t power
Fus e/NFB(No F use Bre aker)
Brake resis tor

(optio nal)
Jumper
+2
+1
R(L1)
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
B1
B2
U(T1)
S(L2)
V(T2)
T(L3)
W(T3)
Mo tor
IM
3~
Figure 2
For frame A~C

* Provi de 3-p hase inpu t power
Fus e/NFB(No Fuse Bre aker)
DC cho ke
(optio nal)
Jumper
+2
R(L1)
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
+1
Brake resis tor

(optio nal)
B1
B2
U(T1)
S(L2)
V(T2)
T(L3)
W(T3)
5-1
Mo tor
IM
3~
Figure 3
Input power terminals for frame G and H
Provides 3-phase power
It provides 12-pulse power
R/L11
Fuse or NFB (non-fuse breaker)
R/L11
R/L21
S/L12
S/L22
T/L13
T/L23
R
S
T
R
S
S/L12
T/L13
R/L21
S/L22
T/L23
Terminals
Descriptions
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
AC line input terminals 3-phase
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase induction motor

Applicable to frame A~C
+1, +2
Connections for DC reactor to improve the power factor. It needs to remove the
jumper for installation.
Connections for brake unit (VFDB series)
+1/DC+, -/DC-
(for 230V models: 22kW, built-in brake unit)

(for 460V models: 30kW, built-in brake unit)
Common DC Bus
B1, B2
Connections for brake resistor (optional)

Earth connection, please comply with local regulations.
Main power terminals
Do not connect 3-phase model to one-phase power. It is unnecessary to

consider phase-sequence for these terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3.
It is recommended to add a magnetic contactor (MC) in the power input

wiring to cut off power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating
the protection function of the AC motor drive. Both ends of the MC
should have an R-C surge absorber.
Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to
prevent sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration.
Please use voltage and current within the specification.
When using a general GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a

current sensor with sensitivity of 200mA or above and not less than
0.1-second operation time to avoid nuisance tripping.
Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the
two ends of the shield wire or tube.
Do NOT run/stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON/OFF.
5-2
Run/stop AC motor drives by RUN/STOP command via control terminals

or keypad. If you still need to run/stop AC motor drives by turning power
ON/OFF, it is recommended to do so only ONCE per hour.
Output terminals for main circuit
When it needs to install the filter at the output side of terminals U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3 on the AC motor drive. Please use inductance filter. Do not
use phase-compensation capacitors or L-C (Inductance-Capacitance) or
R-C (Resistance-Capacitance), unless approved by Delta.
DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at

the output terminals of AC motor drives.
Use well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation.
Terminals for connecting DC reactor, external brake resistor, external

brake resistor and DC circuit
This is the terminals used to connect the DC reactor to improve the

power factor. For the factory setting, it connects the short-circuit object.
Please remove this short-circuit object before connecting to the DC
reactor.
DC rea ct or (o ption al)
+1
+2
Connect a brake resistor or brake unit in applications with frequent

deceleration ramps, short deceleration time, too low brake torque or
requiring increased brake torque.
Brak e re sistor
(opt ional)
Brak e re sistor
(optional)
BR
Brak e un it
(o ption al)
VFDB
B2
B1
The external brake resistor should connect to the terminals (B1, B2) of
AC motor drives.
For those models without built-in brake resistor, please connect external
brake unit and brake resistor (both of them are optional) to increase
brake torque.
When the terminals +1, +2 and - are not used, please leave the terminals
open.
DO NOT connect [+1, -], [+2, -], [+1/DC+, -/DC-] or brake resistor directly
to prevent drive damage.
5-3
Main Circuit Terminals

Frame A
Main circuit terminals:

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
Models
Max. Wire
Gauge
, B1, B2, +1, +2, -
Min. Wire Gauge
Torque
(10%)
VFD007C23A
14 AWG (2.1mm2)
VFD015C23A
12 AWG (3.3mm2)
VFD022C23A
10 AWG (5.3mm2)
VFD037C23A
8 AWG (8.4mm2)
VFD007C43A
14 AWG (2.1mm2)
VFD007C43E
14 AWG (2.1mm2)
VFD015C43A
14 AWG (2.1mm2)
M4
20kg-cm
VFD015C43E
14 AWG (2.1mm2)
8 AWG
(8.4mm2)
(17.4 lb-in.)
VFD022C43A
14 AWG (2.1mm2)
(1.962Nm)
VFD022C43E
14 AWG (2.1mm2)
2
VFD037C43A
10 AWG (5.3mm )
VFD037C43E
10 AWG (5.3mm2)
VFD040C43A
10 AWG (5.3mm2)
VFD040C43E
10 AWG (5.3mm2)
VFD055C43A
10 AWG (5.3mm2)
VFD055C43E
10 AWG (5.3mm2)
UL installations must use 600V, 75 or 90 wire. Use copper wire
only.
Frame B

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
Models
Max. Wire
Gauge
, B1, B2, +1, +2, -
Min. Wire Gauge
Torque
(10%)
VFD055C23A
8 AWG (8.4mm2)
VFD075C23A
6 AWG (13.3mm2)
VFD110C23A
4 AWG (21.2mm2)
M5
35kg-cm
VFD075C43A
8 AWG (8.4mm2)
4 AWG
(30.4 lb-in.)
VFD075C43E
10 AWG (5.3mm2)
(21.2mm2)
(3.434Nm)
VFD110C43A
8 AWG (8.4mm2)
2
VFD110C43E
8 AWG (8.4mm )
VFD150C43A
6 AWG (13.3mm2)
8 AWG (8.4mm2)
VFD150C43E
only.
NOTE
Terminal D+ [+2 & +1]: Torque: 45 kg-cm [39.0lb-in.] (4.415Nm) (10%)

VFD110C23A must use 600V, 90 wire when surrounding temperature
exceeds 45.
5-4
Frame C

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
Models
Max. Wire
Gauge
, B1, B2, +1, +2, -
Min. Wire Gauge
Torque
(10%)
VFD150C23A
1 AWG (42.4mm2)
VFD185C23A
1/0 AWG (53.5mm2)
VFD220C23A
1/0 AWG (53.5mm2)
M8
VFD185C43A
4 AWG (21.2mm2)
80kg-cm
1/0 AWG
VFD185C43E
6 AWG (13.3mm2)
(53.5mm2)
(69.4 lb-in.)
VFD220C43A
4 AWG (21.2mm2)
(7.85Nm)
2
VFD220C43E
4 AWG (21.2mm )
VFD300C43A
2 AWG (33.6mm2)
3 AWG (26.7mm2)
VFD300C43E
only.
NOTE
Terminal D+ [+2 & +1]: Torque: 90 kg-cm [78.2lb-in.] (8.83Nm) (10%)

VFD220C23A must use 600V, 90 wire when surrounding temperature
exceeds 45.
Frame D

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
Models
Max. Wire
Gauge
, +1/DC+, -/DC-
Min. Wire Gauge
Torque
(10%)
VFD300C23A
4/0 AWG (107mm2)
VFD370C23A
250MCM (127mm2)
300MCM
VFD370C43A
1/0 AWG (53.5mm2)
2
(152mm )
VFD450C43A
2/0 AWG (67.4mm2)
VFD550C43A
3/0 AWG (85mm2)
M8
300MCM (152mm2)
200kg-cm
VFD750C43A
(173 lb-in.)
VFD300C23E
3/0 AWG (85mm2)
(19.62Nm)
VFD370C23E
4/0 AWG (107mm2)
2
4/0 AWG.
VFD370C43E
1/0 AWG (53.5mm )
(107mm2)
VFD450C43E
1/0 AWG (53.5mm2)
VFD550C43E
2/0 AWG (67.4mm2)
4/0 AWG (107mm2)
VFD750C43E
1. UL installations must use 600V, 75oC or 90 oC wires. Use copper
wire only.
2. Figure 1 shows the terminal specification.
3. Figure 2 shows the specification of insulated heat shrink tubing
that comply with UL (600C, YDPU2).
Figure 1
Figure 2
5-5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
Models
Torque
(10%)
Min. Wire Gauge

1/0AWG*2 (53.5mm2*2)
VFD550C23A
3/0AWG*2 (85mm2*2)
VFD900C43A
, +1/DC+, -/DC-
VFD450C23A
VFD750C23A
Incorrect installation may
result in damage to option
or inverter.Please refer to
operation manual for
installation instructions.
Max. Wire
Gauge
300MCM*2
4/0 AWG*2 (107mm2*2)
(152mm2*2)
1/0AWG*2 (53.5mm2*2)
VFD1100C43A
3/0AWG*2 (85mm2*2)
VFD450C23E
1/0AWG*2 (53.5mm2*2)
VFD550C23E
2/0AWG*2 (67.4mm2*2)
VFD750C23E
4/0 AWG*2
(107mm2*2)
M8
200kg-cm
(173 lb-in.)
(19.62Nm)
3/0AWG*2 (85mm2*2)
VFD900C43E
1/0AWG*2 (53.5mm2*2)
VFD1100C43E
2/0AWG*2 (67.4mm2*2)
UL installations must use 600V, 75oC or 90 oC wires. Use copper

wire only.
2. Specification of grounding wire : 300MCM [152 mm2]
Torque: M8 180kg-cm (156 lb-in.) (17.64Nm) (10%), as shown in
Figure 2.
3. Figure 1 shows the specification for ring lug.
E
Figure 1
Figure 2
70MAX.
17.0MAX.
16-4
+0
1.
31MAX.
8. 2M I
26.5MAX.
Figure 3
5-6
28.0MAX.
N.
65.0MAX.
Frame E
8.2MIN

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, -/DCModels
Max. Wire
Gauge
Min. Wire Gauge
Torque
(10%)
300MCM*2 (152mm2*2)
VFD900C23A
300MCM*2
4/0 AWG*2 (107mm2*2)
(152mm2*2)
VFD1600C43A
300MCM*2 (152mm2)
VFD1320C43A
M8
200kg-cm
VFD900C23E
4/0 AWG*2 (107mm2*2) (173 lb-in.)
(19.62Nm)
4/0 AWG*2
VFD1320C43E
3/0AWG*2 (85mm2*2)
2
(107mm *2)
VFD1600C43E
4/0 AWG*2 (107mm2*2)
1.
2.
VFD900C23A/E installations must use 90 wire.

For other model, UL installations must use 600V, 75 or 90
wire. Use copper wire only.
Specification of grounding wire

300MCM*2 [152 mm2*2]
Torque: M8 200kg-cm (173 lb-in.) (19.62Nm) (10%)
5. Figure 1 shows the specification for ring lug.
Figure 1
Figure 2
16-4
+0
3.
70MAX.
Frame F
31MAX.
8.2MI
N.
26.5MAX.
5-7

R/L11, R/L12, S/L21, S/L22, T/L31, T/L32
Models
Max. Wire
Gauge
Min. Wire Gauge
Torque
(10%)
2/0AWG*4 (67.4mm2*4)
VFD1850C43A
M8
VFD2200C43A 300MCM*4 3/0AWG*4 (85mm2*4) 200kg-cm
2
VFD1850C43E (152mm *4) 1/0AWG*4 (53.5mm2*4) (173 lb-in.)
(19.62Nm)
2/0AWG*4 (67.4mm2*4)
VFD2200C43E

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, -/DCMax. Wire
Min. Wire Gauge
Models
Gauge
VFD1850C43A
400MCM*2 (203mm2*2)
Torque
(10%)
M12
VFD2200C43A 500MCM*2 500MCM*2 (253mm2*2) 408kg-cm
2
VFD1850C43E (253mm *2) 300MCM*2 (152mm2*2) (354lb-in.)
( 40Nm)
VFD2200C43E
400MCM*2 (203mm2*2)
UL installations must use 600V, 75 or 90 wire. Use copper
wire only.
Use 600V, 90wire for VFD2200C43A when the surrounding
temperature is over 45.
Figure 1 and Figure 2 show the specification for using ring lug.
1.
2.
3.
Specification for grounding wire : 300MCM*4 [152 mm2*2]

Torque: M8 180kg-cm (156 lb-in.) (17.64Nm) (10%), as shown
in Figure 1
5. Figure 3 and Figure 4 shows the specification of insulated heat
shrink tubing that comply with UL (600C, YDPU2).
Figure 1
Figure2
R/L11, R/L12, S/L21, S/L22, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, -/DCT/L31, T/L32,
31MAX.
8.2MI
N.
42.0(MAX.)
12.2(MIN.)
42.0(MAX.)
70.0(MAX.)
26.5MAX.
21.0(MAX.)
16-4
+0
4.
54MAX.
Frame G
Figure 3
Figure 4
5-8
Frame H

R/11,R12,S/21,S/22,T/31,T/32, U/T1,V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+,
-/DCModels
Max. Wire
Gauge
Min. Wire Gauge
VFD2800C43A
4/0 AWG*4 (107mm2*4)
VFD3150C43A
300MCM*4 (152mm2*4)
VFD3550C43A
300MCM*4 (152mm2*4)
VFD2800C43E-1
3/0 AWG*4 (85mm2*4)
VFD2800C43E
3/0 AWG*4 (85mm2*4)
VFD3150C43E
4/0 AWG*4 (107mm2*4)
VFD3550C43E
250MCM*4 (127mm2*4)
Torque
(10%)
M8
300MCM*4
200kg-cm
VFD3150C43E-1
4/0 AWG*4 (107mm2*4)
(152mm2*4)
(173 lb-in.)
2
VFD3550C43E-1
250MCM*4 (127mm *4) (19.62Nm)
1.
2.
3.
4.
UL installations must use 600V, 75 or 90 wire. Use copper

wire only.
Figure 1 shows the specification for using the ring lug.
Specification of grounding wire : 300MCM*4 [152 mm2*4],
Torque: M8 180kg-cm (156 lb-in.) (17.64Nm) (10%), as
shown in figure 1.
Figure 2 shows the specification of heat shrink tubing that
comply with UL (600C, YDPU2).
Figure 1
Figure 2
5-9
Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 Series
Chapter 6 Control Terminals

For multi-function input and output terminal, remove the top cover before wiring
The appearances of following figures are for reference only.
The figures shown in the diagram below are for reference only.
Remove the cover for wiring. Frame A~H
Frame C&D
Frame A&B
Loosen the screws and press the tabs on both sides Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.]
to remove the cover.
Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.]
Frame E
Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.] Slightly lift the cover then pull outward for removal.
6-1
Frame F
Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.]
Slightly lift the cover then pull outward for removal.
Frame G
Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.] Slightly lift the cover then pull outward for removal.
Frame H
removal.
Screw torque: 14~16Kg-cm [12.15~13.89lb-in.] Slightly lift the cover then pull outward for
6-2
0-10V
AFM1
0-10V
AFM2
-10-10V
0-20mA
0-20mA
0-10V
AVI
AC I
0-20mA
0-10V
Open
R C2 R B2
R A2R C1 R B1 R A1
485
120
AFM1+10V AVI AC I MO1 MO2 MCM+24VC OM FW D
MI1MI3 MI5 MI7
AF M2-10V AUI AC M S1 SC M DF M DC M R EV MI2
MI4MI6 MI8 SG + SG -
Removable Terminal Block

Control Terminal Specifications
Wire Gauge: 26~16AWG0.1281-1.318mm2,
Torque: (A) 5kg-cm [4.31Ib-in.] (0.49Nm) (As shown in figure above)
(B) 8kg-cm [6.94Ib-in.] (0.78Nm) (As shown in figure above)
Wiring precautions:
Reserves 5mm and properly install the wire into the terminal; fasten the installation by a
slotted screwdriver. If the wire is stripped, sort the wire before install into the terminal.
Flathead screwdriver: blade width 3.5mm, tip thickness 0.6mm
In the figure above, the factory setting for S1-SCM is short circuit. The factory setting for
+24V-COM is short circuit and SINK mode (NPN); please refer to Chapter 4 Wiring for more
detail.
Terminals
Terminal Function
Factory Setting (NPN mode)
+24V
COM
Digital control signal common

(Source)
Digital control signal common
Common for multi-function input terminals
(Sink)
FWD
Forward-Stop command
REV
Reverse-Stop command
MI1
~
MI8
+24V5% 200mA
Multi-function input 1~8
FWD-DCM:
ON forward running
OFF deceleration to stop
REV-DCM:
ON reverse running
OFF deceleration to stop
Refer to parameters 02-01~02-08 to program the
multi-function inputs MI1~MI8.
ON: the activation current is 6.5mA11Vdc
OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10A11Vdc
Regard the pulse voltage as the output monitor

signal
DFM
Duty-cycle: 50%
Min. load impedance: 1k/100pf
DCM
Max. current: 30mA
Digital frequency signal common Max. voltage: 30Vdc
Digital frequency meter

DFM
DCM
6-3
Terminals Terminal Function
MO1
Multi-function Output 1
(photocoupler)
The AC motor drive releases various monitor

signals, such as drive in operation, frequency
attained and overload indication, via transistor (open
collector).
MO1
MO2
MO2
(photocoupler)
MCM
MCM
RA1
RB1
RC1
RA2
RB2
Multi-function Output Common
Max 48Vdc 50mA
Multi-function relay output 1

(N.O.) a
(N.C.) b
Resistive Load:
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 250VAC
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 30VDC
Multi-function relay common

(N.O.) a
(N.C.) b
Inductive Load (COS 0.4):

2.0A(N.O.)/1.2A(N.C.) 250VAC
2.0A(N.O.)/1.2A(N.C.) 30VDC
It is used to output each monitor signal, such as
drive is in operation, frequency attained or overload
indication.
RC2
Multi-function relay common
+10V
Potentiometer power supply
Analog frequency setting: +10Vdc 20mA
-10V
Potentiometer power supply
Analog frequency setting: -10Vdc 20mA
Analog voltage input

+10V AVI circuit
AVI
Impedance: 20k
Range: 4 ~ 20mA/0~10V =0~Max. Output
AVI
Frequency (Pr.01-00)
AVI switch, factory setting is 0~10V
ACM
internal circuit
Analog current input

ACI circuit
ACI
Impedance: 250
Range: 4 ~ 20mA/0~10V=0~Max. Output Frequency
ACI
(Pr.01-00)
ACI Switch, factory setting is 4~20mA
ACM internal circuit
Auxiliary analog voltage input

+10
~
- 10V
AUI
AU I cir cuit
Impedance: 20k
Range: -10~+10VDC=0~Max. Output
AUI
Frequency(Pr.01-00)
ACM
internal cir cuit
6-4
Terminals
Terminal Function

Impedance: 100k (voltage output)
Output current: 20mA max
Resolution: 0~10V corresponds to Max. operation
frequency
Range: 0~10V -10~+10V
AFM Switch, factory setting is 0~10V
Impedance: 100 (current output)
Output current: 20mA max
Resolution: 0~10V corresponds to Max. operation
frequency
Range: 0~10V 4~20mA
AFM Switch, factory setting is 0~10V
Common for analog terminals
AFM1
AFM2
ACM
S1
SCM
SG+
SG-
Analog Signal Common
Power removal safety function for EN954-1 and IEC/EN61508

Modbus RS-485
PIN 1,2,7,8 :Reserved
PIN 3, 6: GND
PIN 4: SG-
PIN 5: SG+
NOTE: Wire size of analog control signals: 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) with shielded wire
Analog input terminals (AVI, ACI, AUI, ACM)
Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and keep it as
short as possible (<20m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive, connecting the shield to
terminal ACM can bring improvement.
If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, please connect a
capacitor and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagram.
AVI/ACI/AUI
C
ACM
ferrite core
Wind each wires 3 times or more around the core

Digital inputs (FWD, REV, MI1~MI8, COM)
When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs, please use high quality
components to avoid contact bounce.
Transistor outputs (MO1, MO2, MCM)

Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity.
When connecting a relay to the digital outputs, connect a surge absorber across the coil and
check the polarity.
6-5
Remove the Terminal Block

1. Loosen the screws by screwdriver. (As shown in figure below).
2. Remove the control board by pulling it out for a distance 6~8 cm (as 1 in the figure) then lift the control
board upward(as 2 in the figure).
6-6
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories

The optional accessories listed in this chapter are available upon request. Installing additional
accessories to your drive would substantially improves the drives performance. Please select an
applicable accessory according to your need or contact the local distributor for suggestion.
All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives
Non-fuse Circuit Breaker
Fuse (Specification Chart)
AC Reactor
Zero Phase Reactor
DC Reactor
EMI Filter
Digital Keypad
Panel Mounting
Conduit Box Kit
Fan Kit
Flange Mounting Kit
USB/RS-485 Communication Interface
7-1
All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives

230V
Applicable
Motor
HP
kW
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
0.7
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
*1 125%Braking Torque 10%ED

Braking
Torque
(kg-m)
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.5
3.7
5.1
7.5
10.2
12.2
14.9
20.3
25.1
30.5
37.2
50.8
60.9
Brake
Unit
*4VFDB
2015*2
2022*2
2022*2
2022*3
2022*4
2022*4
*2 Max. Brake Torque
Resistor value
Total
Min.
Max. Total Peak
*3Braking Resistor series
spec. for each Braking Resistor Braking
Power
for each Brake Unit
AC motor Drive Current (A) Value () Current (A) (kW)
BR080W200*1
80W200
1.9
63.3
6
2.3
BR200W091*1
200W91
4.2
47.5
8
3.0
BR300W070*1
300W70
5.4
38.0
10
3.8
BR400W040*1
400W40
9.5
19.0
20
7.6
BR1K0W020*1
1000W20
19
14.6
26
9.9
BR1K0W020*1
1000W20
19
14.6
26
9.9
BR1K5W013*1
1500W13
29
13.6
28
10.6
BR1K0W4P3*2 2 series 2000W8.6
44
8.3
46
17.5
44
8.3
46
17.5
58
5.8
66
25.1
75
4.8
80
30.4
97
3.2
120
45.6
118
3.2
120
45.6
145
2.1
180
68.4
9600W2
190
1.6
240
91.2
BR1K2W3P9*2 2 series
230
1.6
240
91.2
BR1K5W3P3*2 2 series 12000W1.65
460V
Applicable
Motor
HP
1
2
3
5
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
175
Braking Brake
Resistor
Total
Min.
Max. Total Peak
3
Torque Unit * Braking Resistor series for value spec.
kW
Braking Resistor Braking
Power
each Brake Unit
(kg-m) 4
for each AC
Currnet (A) Value () Current (A) (kW)
* VFDB
motor Drive
0.7
0.5
BR080W750*1
80W750
1
190.0
4
3.0
1.5
1.0
BR200W360*1
200W360
2.1
126.7
6
4.6
2.2
1.5
BR300W250*1
300W250
3
108.6
7
5.3
3.7
2.5
BR400W150*1
400W150
5.1
84.4
9
6.8
4.0
2.7
BR1K0W075*1
1000W75
10.2
54.3
14
10.6
5.5
3.7
7.5
5.1
BR1K0W075*1
1000W75
10.2
47.5
16
12.2
11
7.5
BR1K5W043*1
1500W43
17.6
42.2
18
13.7
15
10.2
BR1K0W016*2 2 series 2000W32
24
26.2
29
22.0
18
12.2
BR1K0W016*2 2 series 2000W32
24
23.0
33
25.1
22
14.9
BR1K5W013*2 2 series 3000W26
29
23.0
33
25.1
2 parallel,
4000W16
47.5
14.1
54
41.0
30
20.3
BR1K0W016*4
2 series
2 parallel,
4800W15
50
12.7
60
45.6
40
25.1 4045*1 BR1K2W015*4
2 series
2 parallel,
6000W13
59
12.7
60
45.6
45
30.5 4045*1 BR1K5W013*4
2 series
55
37.2 4030*2 BR1K2W015*4 4 parallel 7200W10
76
9.5
80
60.8
2 parallel,
50.8 4045*2
9600W7.5
100
6.3
120
91.2
75
BR1K2W015*8
2 series
2 parallel,
12000W6.5
117
6.3
120
91.2
90
60.9 4045*2 BR1K5W013*8
2 series
5 parallel,
12000W6
126
6.0
126
95.8
110 74.5 4110*1 BR1K2W015*10
2 series
6 parallel,
132 89.4 4160*1 BR1K5W012*12
18000W4
190
4.0
190
144.4
2 series
460V
7-2
Applicable
Motor
HP
215
250
300
375
425
475
*
*2
*3
*4
Braking
Resistor
Total
Min.
Max. Total
Torque Brake *3Braking Resistor series for value spec.
kW
Braking Resistor Braking
(kg-m) Unit
each Brake Unit
for each AC
Currnet (A) Value () Current (A)
motor Drive
6 parallel,
18000W4
190
4.0
190
160 108.3 4160*1 BR1K5W012*12
2 series
7 parallel,
21000W3.4
225
3.4
225
185 125.3 4185*1 BR1K5W012*14
2 series
5 parallel,
24000W3
252
3.0
252
220 148.9 4110*2 BR1K2W015*10
2 series
6 parallel,
36000W2
380
2.0
380
280 189.6 4160*2 BR1K5W012*12
2 series
6 parallel,
36000W2
380
2.0
380
315 213.3 4160*2 BR1K5W012*12
2 series
7 parallel,
42000W1.7
450
1.7
450
355 240.3 4185*2 BR1K5W012*14
2 series
Peak
Power
(kW)
144.4
172.1
190.5
288.8
288.8
344.2
Calculation for 125% brake toque: (kw)*125%*0.8; where 0.8 is motor efficiency.
Because there is a resistor limit of power consumption, the longest operation time for 10%ED is 10sec (on: 10sec/ off:
90sec).
Please refer to the Brake Performance Curve for Operation Duration & ED vs. Braking Current.
For heat dissipation, a resistor of 400W or lower should be fixed to the frame and maintain the surface temperature below
50; a resistor of 1000W and above should maintain the surface temperature below 350.
Please refer to VFDB series Braking Module Instruction for more detail on braking resistor.
NOTE
1.
Definition for Brake Usage ED%

Explanation: The definition of the brake usage ED (%) is for assurance of enough time for the brake unit and brake resistor
to dissipate away heat generated by braking. When the brake resistor heats up, the resistance would increase with
temperature, and brake torque would decrease accordingly. Recommended cycle time is one minute.
For safety concern, install an overload relay (O.L) between the brake unit and the brake resistor in conjunction with the
magnetic contactor (MC) prior to the drive for abnormal protection. The purpose of installing the thermal overload relay is to
protect the brake resistor from damage due to frequent brake, or due to brake unit keeping operating resulted from unusual
high input voltage. Under such circumstance, just turn off the power to prevent damaging the brake resistor.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If damage to the drive or other equipment is due to the fact that the brake resistors and brake modules in use are not
provided by Delta, the warranty will be void.
Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors. If the minimum resistance value is
to be utilized, consult local dealers for the calculation of Watt figures.
When using more than 2 brake units, equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit cant be less than the value in the
column Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC Drive (the right-most column in the table). Please read the wiring
information in the user manual of brake unit thoroughly prior to operation
This chart is for normal usage; if the AC motor drive is applied for frequent braking, it is suggested to enlarge 2~3 times of
the Watts.
7-3
Thermal Relay:
Thermal relay selection is basing on its overload capability. A standard braking capacity for C2000 is 10%ED (Tripping
time=10s). The figure below is an example of 406V, 110kw AC motor drive. It requires the thermal relay to take 260%
overload capacity in 10s (Host starting) and the braking current is 126A. In this case, user should select a rated 50A
thermal relay. The property of each thermal relay may vary among different manufacturer, please carefully read
specification.
60
40
30
20
Tripping time
Second
6.
10
8
6
4
3
2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.3
0.8
1.5
6 7 8 9 10
Multiple of current setting
7-4
xln (A)
15
Non-fuse Circuit Breaker

Comply with UL standard: Per UL 508, paragraph 45.8.4, part a,
The rated current of the breaker shall be 2~4 times of the maximum rated input current of AC motor
drive.
3-phase 230V
Recommended
Model
non-fuse
breaker (A)
VFD007C23A
VFD015C23A
VFD022C23A
VFD037C23A
VFD055C23A
VFD075C23A
VFD110C23A
VFD150C23A
VFD185C23A
VFD220C23A
VFD300C23A/E
VFD370C23A/E
VFD450C23A/E
VFD550C23A/E
VFD750C23A/E
VFD900C23A/E
15
20
30
40
50
60
100
125
150
200
225
250
300
400
450
600
3-phase 460V
Recommended
Model
non-fuse
breaker(A)
VFD007C43A/E
VFD015C43A/E
VFD022C43A/E
VFD040C43A/E
VFD037C43A/E
VFD055C43A/E
VFD075C43A/E
VFD110C43A/E
VFD150C43A/E
VFD185C43A/E
VFD220C43A/E
VFD300C43A/E
VFD370C43A/E
VFD450C43A/E
VFD550C43A/E
VFD750C43A/E
VFD900C43A/E
VFD1100C43A/E
VFD1320C43A/E
VFD1600C43A/E
VFD1850C43A/E
VFD2200C43A/E
VFD2800C43A/E
VFD3150C43A/E
VFD3550C43A/E
5
10
15
20
20
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
175
250
300
300
400
500
600
600
800
1000
1200
1350
NOTE:
Model VFD007C43E; VFD015C43E; VFD022C43E; VFD037C43E; VFD040C43E; VFD055C43E; VFD075C43E; VFD110C43E;
VFD150C43E; VFD185C43E; VFD220C43E; VFD300C43E will be available for ordering soon. Please contact your local
7-5
Fuse Specification Chart

Fuses with specification smaller than the following table indicates are allowed.
230V Model
VFD007C23A
VFD015C23A
VFD022C23A
VFD037C23A
VFD055C23A
VFD075C23A
VFD110C23A
VFD150C23A
VFD185C23A
VFD220C23A
VFD300C23A/E
VFD370C23A/E
VFD450C23A/E
VFD550C23A/E
VFD750C23A/E
VFD900C23A/E
460VModel
VFD007C43A/E
VFD015C43A/E
VFD022C43A/E
VFD037C43A/E
VFD040C43A/E
VFD055C43A/E
VFD075C43A/E
VFD110C43A/E
VFD150C43A/E
VFD185C43A/E
VFD220C43A/E
VFD300C43A/E
VFD370C43A/E
VFD450C43A/E
VFD550C43A/E
VFD750C43A/E
VFD900C43A/E
VFD1100C43A/E
VFD1320C43A/E
VFD1600C43A/E
VFD1850C43A/E
VFD2200C43A/E
VFD2800C43A/E
VFD3150C43A/E
VFD3550C43A/E
Input Currnet I(A)

Heavy Duty
Normal Duty
6.1
11
15
18.5
26
34
50
68
78
95
118
136
162
196
233
315
6.4
12
16
20
28
36
52
72
83
99
124
143
171
206
245
331
15
20
30
40
50
60
100
125
150
200
225
250
300
400
450
600
Input Current I(A)

Heavy Duty
Normal Duty
4.1
5.6
8.3
13
14.5
16
19
25
33
38
45
60
70
96
108
149
159
197
228
285
361
380
469
527
594
Line Fuse
I (A)
Bussmann P/N
4.3
5.9
8.7
14
15.5
17
20
26
35
40
47
63
74
101
114
157
167
207
240
300
380
400
494
555
625
JJN-15
JJN-20
JJN-30
JJN-40
JJN-50
JJN-60
JJN-100
JJN-125
JJN-150
JJN-200
JJN-225
JJN-250
JJN-300
JJN-400
JJN-450
JJN-600
Line Fuse
I (A)
Bussmann P/N
10
10
15
20
20
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
175
250
300
300
400
500
600
600
800
1000
1200
1350
JJS-10
JJS-10
JJS-15
JJS-20
JJS-20
JJS-30
JJS-40
JJS-50
JJS-60
JJS-75
JJS-100
JJS-125
JJS-150
JJS-175
JJS-250
JJS-300
JJS-300
JJS-400
JJS-500
JJS-600
JJS-600
JJS-800
KTU-1000
KTU-1200
KTU-1350
NOTE:
7-6
AC Reactor
230V, 50/60Hz, 3-phase
kW
HP
Fundamental Amps
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
4
8
12
18
25
35
45
55
80
100
130
160
200
250
320
400
Max. continuous
Amps
6
12
18
27
37.5
52.5
67.5
82.5
120
150
195
240
300
375
480
600
Inductancemh
3% impedance 5% impedance
3
6.5
1.5
3
1.25
2.5
0.8
1.5
0.5
1.2
0.4
0.8
0.3
0.7
0.25
0.5
0.2
0.4
0.15
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.075
0.15
0.055
0.110
0.090
0.150
0.040
0.075
0.03
0.006
Max. continuous
Amps
6
6
12
18
18
27
27
37.5
52.5
67.5
67.5
120
120
150
195
240
300
375
480
600
600
750
900
1125
1125
Inductancemh
3% impedance 5% impedance
9
12
6.5
9
5
7.5
2.5
4.2
2.5
4.2
1.5
2.5
1.5
2.5
1.2
2
0.8
1.2
0.7
1.2
0.7
1.2
0.4
0.7
0.4
0.7
0.3
0.45
0.2
0.3
0.15
0.23
0.110
0.185
0.090
0.150
0.075
0.125
0.03
0.06
0.03
0.06
0.025
0.05
0.02
0.04
0.029
0.048
0.029
0.048
460V, 50/60Hz, 3-phase

kW
HP
Fundamental Amps
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
175
215
250
300
375
425
475
1
2
3
5
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
132
160
185
220
280
315
355
4
4
8
12
12
18
18
25
35
45
45
80
80
100
130
160
200
250
320
400
400
500
600
750
750
7-7
Zero Phase Reactors

RF220X00A
Cable
type
(Note)
Singlecore
Threecore
UNIT: mm (inch)
Recommended
Wire Size (mm2)
AWG mm2
Nominal
(mm2)
Qty.
10
5.3
5.5
33.6
38
12
3.3
3.5
42.4
50
Diagram A
Wiring Please wind each wire around the core for 4 times. The
Method reactor must be placed at the AC motor drive output
side as close as possible.
Diagram
A
Diagram
B
Diagram
A
Diagram
B
NOTE
600V insulated cable wire

1. The table above gives approximate wire size for
the zero phase reactors but the selection is
ultimately governed by the type and the
diameter of the cable, i.e. the cable diameter
must small enough to go through the center of
the zero phase reactor.
2. When wiring, do not goes through the earth
core. It only needs to pass through the motor
cable or the power cable.
3. When a long motor cable for output is used, a
zero phase reactor may be necessary to reduce
the radiated emission.
Diagram B
Please put wires through 4 cores in series without
winding.
7-8
DC Reactor
230V DC Choke
Input Voltage
kW
HP
DC Amps
Inductancemh
230Vac
50/60Hz
3-Phase
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
9.4
18
24
30
42
53
76
106
122
145
3.43
1.83
1.37
1.1
0.78
0.61
0.42
0.31
0.26
0.22
kW
HP
DC Amps
Inductancemh
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
6
9
13
23
25
30
38
52
60
70
93
9.77
7.12
4.83
2.7
2.47
2.1
1.62
1.2
1.05
0.89
0.67
460V DC Choke
Input Voltage
460Vac
50/60Hz
3-Phase
7-9
EMI Filter
Model
VFD007C23A;
VFD015C23A;
VFD022C23A;
VFD037C23A;
VFD055C23A;
VFD075C23A;
VFD110C23A;
VFD150C23A;
VFD185C23A;
VFD220C23A;
VFD300C23A;
VFD370C23A;
Applicable EMI
Filter
KMF325A
Reference Website
http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/products/emc_emi_industrial_filters/
KMF325A Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters - High Performance 25 Amps
KMF370A
KMF3100A
KMF3150A
MIF3150
MIF3150 Three Phase Industrial Multi Stage Drive Filters - Very High Performance
150 Amps
VFD450C23A;
VFD550C23A;
VFD750C23A;
VFD900C43A;
VFD1100C23A;
VFD007C43A;
VFD015C43A;
VFD022C43A;
VFD037C43A;
VFD040C43A;
VFD055C43A;
VFD075C43A;
VFD110C43A;
VFD150C43A;
VFD185C43A;
VFD220C43A;
VFD300C43A;
VFD370C43A;
VFD450C43A;
VFD550C43A;
VFD750C43A;
MIF3400
VFD450C23A;
VFD550C23A
VFD750C23A;
VFD900C43A;
VFD1100C43A;
VFD900C23A;
VFD1320C23A;
VFD1600C23A;
VFD1850C43A;
VFD2200C43A;
VFD2800C43A;
VFD3150C43A;
VFD3550C43A;
KMF3400B
MIF3400 Three Phase Industrial Drive Filters - Very High Performance 340 Amps
KMF318
KMF318 Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters - General Purpose 18 Amps
KMF350
KMF370
MIF3150
MIF3150 Three Phase Industrial Multi Stage Drive Filters - Very High Performance
150 Amps
MIF3400B Three Phase Industrial Multi Stage Drive Filters - Very High
Performance 400 Amps
7-10
EMI Filter Installation

All electrical equipment, including AC motor drives, will generate high-frequency/low-frequency noise and will
interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when in operation. By using an EMI filter with correct
installation, much interference can be eliminated. It is recommended to use DELTA EMI filter to have the best
interference elimination performance.
We assure that it can comply with following rules when AC motor drive and EMI filter are installed and wired
according to user manual:
EN61000-6-4
EN61800-3: 1996 + A11: 2000
EN55011 (1991) Class A Group 1 (1st Environment, restricted distribution)
General precaution
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EMI filter and AC motor drive should be installed on the same metal plate.
Please install AC motor drive on footprint EMI filter or install EMI filter as close as possible to the AC motor drive.
Please wire as short as possible.
Metal plate should be grounded.
The cover of EMI filter and AC motor drive or grounding should be fixed on the metal plate and the contact area
should be as large as possible.
Choose suitable motor cable and precautions

Improper installation and choice of motor cable will affect the performance of EMI filter. Be sure to observe the
following precautions when selecting motor cable.
1. Use the cable with shielding (double shielding is the best).
2. The shielding on both ends of the motor cable should be grounded with the minimum length and maximum
contact area.
3. Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding.
Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with
the plate and shielding.
saddle
the plate with grounding
Saddle on both ends
Saddle on one end
7-11
The length of motor cable

When motor is driven by an AC motor drive of PWM type, the motor terminals will experience surge voltages easily
due to components conversion of AC motor drive and cable capacitance. When the motor cable is very long
(especially for the 460V series), surge voltages may reduce insulation quality. To prevent this situation, please
follow the rules below:
Use a motor with enhanced insulation.
Connect an output reactor (optional) to the output terminals of the AC motor drive
The length of the cable between AC motor drive and motor should be as short as possible (10 to 20 m or less)
For models 7.5hp/5.5kW and above:
Insulation level of motor
1000V
1300V
1600V
460VAC input voltage
66 ft (20m)
328 ft (100m)
1312 ft (400m)
230VAC input voltage
1312 ft (400m)
1312 ft (400m)
1312 ft (400m)
For models 5hp/3.7kW and less:

Insulation level of
motor
1000V
1300V
1600V
460VAC input
voltage
66 ft (20m)
165 ft
(50m)
165 ft
(50m)
230VAC input
voltage
328 ft
(100m)
328 ft
(100m)
328 ft
(100m)
NOTE
When a thermal O/L relay protected by motor is used between AC motor drive and motor, it may malfunction
(especially for 460V series), even if the length of motor cable is only 165 ft (50m) or less. To prevent it, please use
AC reactor and/or lower the carrier frequency (Pr. 00-17 PWM carrier frequency).
NOTE
Never connect phase lead capacitors or surge absorbers to the output terminals of the AC motor drive.
If the length is too long, the stray capacitance between cables will increase and may cause leakage current. It
will activate the protection of over current, increase leakage current or not insure the correction of current
display. The worst case is that AC motor drive may damage.
If more than one motor is connected to the AC motor drive, the total wiring length is the sum of the wiring
length from AC motor drive to each motor.
7-12
Digital Keypad
KPC-CE01
A : LED Disp lay

D ispla y freq uen cy, cu rre nt, vo ltag e and erro r etc.
: Status Indi cator

F: Fre que ncy C omma nd
H: Outp ut Frequ ency
U: User De fine d Uni ts
ERR: CAN Erro r Ind icator
RU N: CAN Ru n Indi ca tor
C : Function
(Re fer to the chart foll ow s for deta il de scripti on )
Key
Description
ESC
ESC Key
When ESC key is pressed, it will return to the previous menu. It is also functioned as a return key in the
sub-menu.
Menu Key
It can return to the main menu after pressing MENU key.
Menu content:
1. Parameter Detail
3. Keypad locked
2. Copy Parameter
4. PLC Function
ENTER Key
Press ENTER and go to the next level. If it is the last level then press ENTER to execute the command.
HAND ON Key
1. This key is executed by the parameter settings of the source of Hand frequency and hand operation. The
factory settings of both source of Hand frequency and hand operation are the digital keypad.
2. If pressed at stop status, it will switch to Hand setting of frequency source and operation source. If HAND ON
key is pressed during operation, it will stop the AC motor drive first then switch to Hand setting.
3. Hand mode display: H/A LED is ON.
Auto Operation Key
1. This key is executed by the parameter settings of the source of AUTO frequency and AUTO operation. The
factory setting is the external terminal (source of operation is 4-20mA).
2. If auto is pressed in steady status, it will switch to the auto-setting. However if auto key is pressed during
operation, it will stop AC motor drive first then switch to auto-setting.
3. Switch is complete: H/A LED is OFF
Operation Direction Key
1. This key is only control the operation direction NOT for activate the drive. FWD: forward, REV: reverse.
2. Refer to the LED descriptions for more details.
Start Key
1. It is only valid when the source of operation command is from the keypad.
2. It can operate the AC motor drive by the function setting and the RUN LED will be ON.
3. It can be pressed again and again during stop. When enabling HAND mode, it is only valid when the source
of operation command is from the keypad.
Stop Key. (When Stop key is pressed, all operation will stop in all condition.) This key has the highest priority in all
condition.
1. When a STOP command is given, the AC motor drives operation will stop under any condition.
2. The RESET key can be used to reset the drive when faults occur. If the RESET key is not responding, check
MENU Fault Records search for the most recent fault.
MENU
ENTER
HAND
AUTO
FWD/REV
RUN
STOP
7-13
Dimension
7-14
Panel Mounting (MKC-KPPK)

For MKC-KPPK model, user can choose wall mounting or embedded mounting, protection level is IP56.
Applicable to the digital keypads (KPC-CC01 & KPC-CE01).
Wall Mounting
Embedded Mounting
accessories*1
accessories*2
Screw *4 ~M4*p 0.7 *L8mm

Torque: 10-12kg-cm (8.7-10.4lb-in.)
Panel cutout dimension
Unit: mm [inch]
Screw *4 ~M4*p 0.7 *L8mm

Torque: 10-12kg-cm (8.7-10.4lb-in.)
Panel cutout dimension
Unit: mm [inch]
Normal cutout dimension

Panel
1.2mm
1.6mm
2.0mm
thickness
A
66.4 [2.614]
B
110.2 [4.339] 111.3 [4.382] 112.5 [4.429]
*Deviation: 0.15mm /0.0059inch
Cutout dimension (Waterproof level: IP56)

Panel
1.2mm
1.6mm
2.0mm
thickness
A
66.4 [2.614]
B
110.8 [4.362]
*Deviation: 0.15mm /0.0059inch
7-15
7-16
Conduit Box Kit
Appearance
Frame D
Applicable models
Frame E
Applicable models
VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E;VFD370C43A/43E;
VFD450C43A/43E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E
VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E;

VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E
Model numberMKC-DN1CB
Model numberMKC-EN1CB
ITEM
Description
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L
2 Rubber28
3 Rubber44
4 Rubber88
5 Conduit box cover
6 Conduit box base
ITEM
Description
Qty.
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L
6
2 Bushing Rubber 28
2
3 Bushing Rubber 44
4
4 Bushing Rubber 100 2
5 Conduit box cover
1
6 Conduit box base
1
Qty.
4
2
2
2
1
1
Frame F
Applicable models
Frame G
Applicable models
VFD1850C23A/23E; VFD2200C43A/43E
Model numberMKC-FN1CB
Model numberMKC-GN1CB
ITEM
Description
Qty.
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L
8
2 Bushing Rubber28
2
3 Bushing Rubber 44
4
5 Conduit box cover
1
6 Conduit box base
1
ITEM
Description
Qty.
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L
12
2 Bushing Rubber 28
2
3 Bushing Rubber 44
2
5 Conduit box base
1
6 Conduit box cover
1
7-17
Installation
Frame D
1.
Loosen the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the
following figure. Screw torque: 10~12kg-cm (8.66~10.39Ib-in)
2.
Remove the 5 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
3.
Install the conduit box by fasten the 5 screws shown in the following figure.
Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
4.
Fasten the 4 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 10~12kg-cm (8.66~10.39Ib-in).
7-18
Frame E
1. Loosen the 4 cover screws and lift the cover; Screw torque: 12~ 15 kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in).
2. Fasten the 6 screws shown in the following figure and place the cover back to the original position. Screw
torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
3. Fasten the 4 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque:12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in)
7-19
Frame F
1.
Loosen the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the
following figure. Screw torque: 14~16kg-cm (12.2~13.9Ib-in).
1
2
2.
Install the conduit box by fastens the 4 screws, as shown in the following figure.
5
7
8
6
3.
Install the conduit box by fasten all the screws shown in the following figure
12
15
9
10
13
14
16
11
7-20
Frame G
1.
On the conduit box, loosen 7 of the cover screws and remove the cover. On the drive, loosen 4 of the cover
screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the following figure.
Screw torque: 12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in).
1
2
Remove the top cover and loosen the screws. Screw torque: 12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in).
2.
Install the conduit box by fastening all the screws shown in the following figure.
Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (20.8~30Ib-in); Screw torque: 12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in)
7-21
Fasten all the screws. Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (20.8~30Ib-in).
Place the cover back to the top and fasten the screws (as shown in the figure).
Screw torque: 12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in).
7-22
Fan Kit
Frames of the fan kit
Frame A
ModelMKC-AFKM
Applicable Model
VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD037C23A;VFD022C43A/43E;
VFD037C43A/43E;VFD040C43A/43E; VFD055C43A/43E
Frame B
ModelMKC-BFKM1
Applicable Model
VFD055C23A; VFD075C43A/43E
Frame B
Model MKC-BFKM2
Applicable Model
VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/43E;
VFD150C43A/43E
Frame B
Model MKC-BFKB
Applicable Model
VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A;VFD075C43A/43E;
VFD110C43A/43E;VFD150C43A/43E
Frame C
Model MKC-CFKB1
Applicable Model
VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD220C23A
7-23
Frame C
Model MKC-CFKB2
Applicable Model
VFD185C43A/43E; VFD220C43A/43E;VFD300C43A/43E
Frame D
Model MKC-DFKM
Model MKC-DFKB
Applicable Model
Frame E
Model MKC-EFKM1
Applicable Model
VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E
Frame E
ModelMKC-EFKM2
Applicable Model
Frame E
Model MKC-EFKB
Applicable Model
VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E
7-24
Frame F
Model MKC-FFKM
Applicable Model
;
Frame F
Model MKC-FFKB
Applicable Model
Frame G
Model MKC-GFKM
Applicable Model
VFD1850C43A/43E; VFD2200C43A/43E
Frame H
Model MKC-HFKM
Applicable Model
VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1
NOTE:
distributor or Delta representative for detailed launch information.
7-25
Fan Removal
Frame A
Applicable model
VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD022C43A/43E; VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/43E; VFD040C43A/43E; VFD055C43A/43E
1.
Press the tabs on both side of the fan to successfully

remove the fan. (The arrow)
2.
Disconnect the power terminal before removing the fan.

(As shown below.)
Frame B
Applicable model
VFD055C23A; VFD075C43A/43E;VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/43E; VFD150C43A/43E
1.
Press the tab on both side of the fan to successfully

remove the fan.
2.
Disconnect the power terminal before removing the fan.
Frame B&C
Applicable model
VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD075C43A/43E; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/43E;
VFD150C43A/43E; VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD220C23A; VFD185C43A/43E;
VFD220C43A/43E; VFD300C43A/43E
Disconnect the power terminal by slotted screwdriver to remove the fan cover.
7-26
Frame D
Applicable model
VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E; VFD370C43A/43E; VFD450C43A/43E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E
1.
(Figure 1) Loosen screw 1 and screw 2, press the on the

right and the left to remove the cover, follow the direction
the arrows indicate. Press on top of digital keypad
KPC-CE01 to properly remove the keypad. Screw torque:
10~12kg-cm (8.6~10.4in-lbf).
2.
(Figure 2) Loosen screw 3 and screw 4, press the tab on

the right and the left to remove the cover. Screw torque:
6~8kg-cm (5.2~6.9in-lbf).
1
2
Figure 2
3.
Figure 1
(Figure 3) Loosen screw 5 and disconnect the fan power.
Screw torque: 10~12kg-cm (8.6~10.4in-lbf).
4.
5.
(Figure 4) Loosen the screws. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm

(20.8~25.6in-lbf).
Disconnect fan power and pull out the fan. (As shown in the
larger picture)
1
2
3
Figure 3
Figure 4
Frame E
Applicable model:
VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E
Loosen screw 1~4 (as shown in the figure below), and
disconnect the fan power then remove the fan. Screw torque:
24~26kg-cm (20.8~25.6in-lbf).
Loosen screw 1~4(as shown in the figure below), and

disconnect the fan power then remove the fan. Screw torque:
24~26kg-cm (20.8~25.6in-lbf).
7-27
Loosen screw 1 and screw 2 (as shown in the figure below), and disconnect fan power before removing the fan. Screw torque:
24~26kg-cm (20.8~25.6in-lbf).
1
2
Frame F
Applicable model
Fan modelMKC-FFKM
Loosen the screws and removes the fan (as shown in figure below). Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in
1
4
3
2
Fan model MKC-FFKB

(1) Loosen the screw (as shown in figure below) and removes (2) Loosen the screw (as shown in figure below) and removes
the cover. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
7
5
8
4
6
1
3
7-28
(3) Loosen the screws and remove the fan. (As shown in the figure below)
11
10
9
10
11
Frame G
Applicable model
VFD1800C43A/43E; VFD2200C43A/43E;
Fan modelMKC-GFKM
(1) Loosen the screw (as shown in figure below) and remove
(2) Loosen the screw (as shown in figure below) and remove
4
4
1
2
(3) Loosen the screw (as shown in the figure below) and
remove the bottom cover.
(4) Screw torque: 35~40kg-cm (30.4~34.7Ib-in).
3
4
5
1
2
7-29
Frame H
Applicable model
(3) Disconnect the fan.
Fan model MKC-HFKM

(1) Loosen the screw and remove the top cover.
Screw torque: 14~16kg-cm (12.2~13.9Ib-in)
3
1
(2) Loosen the screw and remove the top cover.

(4) Loosen the screw and remove the fan. Make sure fan
power is properly disconnected before removal. Screw
torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
8
9
15
10
11
15
12
14
13
18
17
16
14
13
18
17
16
NOTE:
7-30
Flange Mounting Kit

Applicable Models, Frame A~F
Frame A
MKC-AFM1
Applicable model
VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD022C43A/43E
Screw 1 *4
M3*P 0.5; L=6mm
Screw 2*8
M6*P 1.0; L=16mm
Accessories 1*1
Accessories
Accessories 3*2
2*2
MKC-AFM
Applicable model
VFD007C23A; VFD007C43A/43E; VFD015C43A/43E; VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/43E; VFD040C43A/43E;
VFD055C43A/43E
Screw *8
M6*P 1.0; L=16mm
Accessories 2*2
Accessories t 3*2
Cutout dimension
Unit: mm [inch]
7-31
InstallationMKC-AFM1
1.
Install accessory 1 by fastening 4 of the screw 1(M3). Screw torque: 6~8kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
2.
Install accessory 2&3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2(M6). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
3.
Install accessory 2&3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2(M6). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
4.
Plate installation, place 4 of the screw 2 (M6) through accessory 2&3 and the plate then fasten the screws.
7-32
InstallationMKC-AFM
1.
Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 2 of the screw 1(M3). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
(As shown in following figure)
2.
(As shown in following figure)
3.
Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in). (As shown in following figure)
7-33
Frame B
MKC-BFM
Applicable model
VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A; VFD075C43A/43E; VFD110C43A/43E; VFD150C43A/43E
Screw 1 *4 ~ M8*P 1.25;

Screw 2*6 ~ M6*P 1.0;
Accessories 1*2
Accessories
2*2
Cutout dimension
Unit: mm [inch]
7-34
InstallationMKC-BFM
1.
(As shown in the following figure)
2.
Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in). (As shown in the following figure)
7-35
Frame C
MKC-CFM
Applicable model
VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD220C23A; VFD185C43A/43E; VFD220C43A/43E; VFD300C43A/43E
Screw 1*4 ~ M8*P 1.25;
Screw 2*8 ~ M6*P 1.0;
Accessories 1*2
Accessories 2*2
Cutout dimension
Unit: mm [inch]
NOTE:
7-36
InstallationMKC-CFM
1.
(As shown in the following figure)
2.
Plate installation, place 8 of the screw 2 (M6) through accessories 1&2 and the plate then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in). (As shown in the following figure)
7-37
Frame D
Applicable model
VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E; VFD370C43A/43E; VFD450C43A/43E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E
Cutout dimension
Unit: mm [inch]
M10*P1.5(4X)
OR 11.0[0.43](4X)
7-38
Frame D&E
1. Loosen 8 screws and remove Fixture 2 (as shown in 5. Fasten 4 screws (as shown in the following figure).
the following figure).
2. Loosen 10 screws and remove Fixture 1 (as shown

in the following figure).
6. Fasten 5 screws (as shown in the following figure).

3. Fasten 4 screws (as shown in the following figure). 7.

4. Fasten 5 screws (as shown in the following figure).

7-39
Place 4 screws (M10) through Fixture 1&2 and the

plate then fasten the screws. (as shown in the
following figure)
Frame E
Applicable model
VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E
Cutout dimension
Unit: mm [inch]
7-40
Frame F
Applicable model
Cutout dimension
Unit: mm [inch]
7-41
Frame F Installation
1. Loosen 12 screws and remove Fixture 2.
4.
Install Fixture 1 by fasten screw 13 ~26

13
19
18
17
1
6
5
20
4
3
2
12
7
26
16
14
15
25
8
FIXTURE 2
24
FIXTURE1
10
23
11
2. Loosen 12 screws and remove Fixture 2.

5.
6
5
4
3
2
12
7
8
FIXTURE2
9
10
11
3. Loosen screw 13 ~26 and remove Fixture 1.
13
19
18
17
20
16
26
14
15
25
24
FIXTURE1
23
21
22
7-42
22
Place 4 of the M12 screws through Fixture 1&2

and plate then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 300~400kg-cm (260~347Ib-in).
Screws M12*4
21
USB/RS-485 Communication Interface IFD6530

Warning
Please thoroughly read this instruction sheet before installation and putting it into use.
The content of this instruction sheet and the driver file may be revised without prior notice. Please
consult our distributors or download the most updated instruction/driver version at
http://www.delta.com.tw/product/em/control/cm/control_cm_main.asp
1. Introduction
IFD6530 is a convenient RS-485-to-USB converter, which does not require external power-supply and complex
setting process. It supports baud rate from 75 to 115.2kbps and auto switching direction of data transmission. In
addition, it adopts RJ-45 in RS-485 connector for users to wire conveniently. And its tiny dimension, handy use of
plug-and-play and hot-swap provide more conveniences for connecting all DELTA IABU products to your PC.
Applicable Models: All DELTA IABU products.
(Application & Dimension)

2. Specifications
Power supply
No external power is needed
Power consumption
1.5W
Isolated voltage
2,500VDC
Baud rate
75, 150, 300, 600, 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200, 38,400, 57,600, 115,200 bps
RS-485 connector
RJ-45
USB connector
A type (plug)
Compatibility
Full compliance with USB V2.0 specification
Max. cable length
RS-485 Communication Port: 100 m
Support RS-485 half-duplex transmission
7-43
RJ-45
PIN
Description
PIN
Description
Reserved
SG+
Reserved
GND
GND
Reserved
SG-
+9V
3. Preparations before Driver Installation

Please extract the driver file (IFD6530_Drivers.exe) by following steps. You could find driver file
(IFD6530_Drivers.exe) in the CD supplied with IFD6530.
Note: DO NOT connect IFD6530 to PC before extracting the driver file.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
You should have a folder marked SiLabs under drive C.
7-44
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series
4. Driver Installation
After connecting IFD6530 to PC, please install driver by following steps.
7-57
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series
5. LED Display
1. Steady Green LED ON: power is ON.
2. Blinking orange LED: data is transmitting.
7-58
Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series
Chapter 8 Option Cards

Please select applicable option cards for your drive or contact local distributor for suggestion.
To prevent drive damage during installation, please removes the digital keypad and the cover before
wiring. Refer to the following instruction.
Removed key cover
Frame A&B&C
Screw Torque: 8~10Kg-cm [6.9~8.7lb-in.]
Frame D
Frame E
Slightly lift the cover then pull to remove. Screw Torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.]
Frame F
8-1
Screw Torque: 12~ 15 Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.]
Frame G
Screw Torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.]
Frame H
8-2
RJ45 (Socket) for digital keypad

KPC-CC01; KPC-CE01
Please refer to CH10 Digital Keypad for more details on
KPC-CE01.
1
3
Slot 3
Slot 2 Slot 1
Please refer to CH10 Digital Keypad for more details on

optional accessory RJ45 extension cable.
2 Communication extension card (Slot 1)

CMC-MOD01;
CMC-PD01;
CMC-DN01;
CMC-EIP01;
EMC-COP01;
3 I/O & Relay extension card (Slot 3)
EMC-D42A;
EMC-D611A;
EMC-R6AA;
4 PG Card (Slot 2)
EMC-PG01L;
EMC-PG01O;
EMC-PG01U;
EMC-PG01R;
8-3
EMC-D42A
Terminals
COM
MI10~ MI13
I/O Extension
Card
MO10~MO11
MXM
Descriptions
Common for Multi-function input terminals
Select SINKNPN/SOURCEPNPin J1 jumper / external power
supply
Refer to parameters 02-26~02-29 to program the multi-function
inputs MI10~MI13.
Internal power is applied from terminal E24: +24Vdc5% 200mA,
5W
External power +24VDC: max. voltage 30VDC, min. voltage
19VDC, 30W
ON: the activation current is 6.5mA
OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10A
Multi-function output terminals (photocoupler)
Duty-cycle: 50%
Max. output frequency: 100Hz
Max. current: 50mA
Max. voltage: 48Vdc
Common for multi-function output terminals MO10,
MO11(photocoupler)
Max 48VDC 50mA
EMC-D611A
Terminals
AC
Descriptions
AC power Common for multi-function input terminal (Neutral)
Refer to Pr. 02.26~ Pr. 02.31 for multi-function input selection
Input voltage: 100~130VAC
I/O Extension
Card
Input frequency: 57~63Hz

MI10~ MI15
Input impedance: 27Kohm

Terminal response time:
ON: 10ms
OFF: 20ms
EMC-R6AA
Terminals
Descriptions
Refer to Pr. 02.36~ Pr. 02.41 for multi-function input selection
Resistive load:
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 250VAC
Relay Extension
Card
R10A~R15A
R10C~R15C
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 30VDC
Inductive load (COS 0.4)
2.0A(N.O.)/1.2A(N.C.) 250VAC
2.0A(N.O.)/1.2A(N.C.) 30VDC
It is used to output each monitor signal, such as drive is in
operation, frequency attained or overload indication.
8-4
EMC-PG01L
Terminal description
Set by Pr.10-00~10-02
Terminals
Descriptions
Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V5% (use FSW3 to
switch +5V/+12V)
Max. output current: 200mA
VP
PG1
DCM
Common for power and signal
Encoder input signal

A1, /A1, B1, /B1, Z1, /Z1 It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec
Pulse Input signal
A2, /A2,
PG2
It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
B2, /B2
Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec.
PG Card Output signals. It has division frequency function:
1~255 times
AO, /AO, BO, /BO, ZO, Max. output voltage for Line driver: 5VDC
PG OUT
/ZO
Wiring Diagram
Jum per
Braking Resistor (Option)

Non-Fus e Breaker
R
N FB
S
T
- + 1 + 2 / B 1 B2
R/L1
U/ T 1
S/L2
V/ T 2
T/L3
W / T3
VP
DC M
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1
H a n d w h e el M P G
A2
A2
B2
B2
10 -1 7
10 -1 8
Li ne dr iv er
EMC-PG01L
M
3~
PG
Li ne dr iv er
AO
AO
BO
BO
ZO
ZO
Figure 1
8-5
Motor
L i n e d r i v e r en c o d e r

Jum per
Braking resistor (Optional)
Non-Fus e Breaker
R
NFB
- +1 +2/B1 B2
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
VP
DCM
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1
Phase diff erence 90
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
Line driver
L i ne dr i v e r en c o de r
AO
AO
BO
BO
ZO
ZO
A2
A2
B2
B2
Figure 2
8-6
M
3~
PG
EH- PLC
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
Motor
EMC-PG01O
Terminal descriptions
Set by Pr.10-00~10-02
Terminals
Descriptions
Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V5% (use FSW3 to switch +5V/+12V)
VP
DCM
PG1
PG2
A1, /A1, B1,

/B1, Z1, /Z1
Encoder Input signal

A2, /A2,
B2, /B2
Pulse Input Signal

V+
Needs external power source for PG OUT circuit.

Input voltage of power:+12V ~ +24V
VPG OUT
A/O, B/O, Z/O
PG Card Output signals has division frequency function: 1~255 times.

On the open collectors output signal, add a high-pull resistor on the external
power V+ ~ V- (e.g. power of PLC) to prevent the interference of the receiving
signal. Max. Output current: 20mA.Max output frequency: 300KP/Sec
Wiring Diagram
Jum per
Braking resistor (option)
Non-Fuse Breaker
R
NFB
- +1 +2/B1 B2
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
VP
DCM
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1
Handwheel MPG
10 -1 7
10 -1 8
Line driver
A2
A2
B2
B2
V+
V+
A/O
B/O
Z/O
V-
Figure 1
8-7
Motor
M
3~
PG
Line driver
L i ne d r iv e r e n c od e r

Jum per
Non-Fus e Breaker
R
NFB

- +1 +2/B1 B2
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
VP
DCM
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1
V+
V+
A/O
B/O
Z/O
V-
EH- PLC
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
Phase diff erence 90
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
A2
A2
B2
B2
Figure 2
8-8
Motor
M
3~
PG
Line driver
Li ne d ri ve r en co de r
EMC-PG01U
FJMP1 S: Standard UVW Output Encoder; D: Delta Encoder
Set by Pr.10-00~10-02
Terminals
Descriptions
Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V5% (use FSW3 to
switch +5V/+12V)
VP
PG1
DCM
Encoder input signal

A1, /A1, B1, /B1, Z1, /Z1 It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
U1, /U1, V1, /V1, W1, /W1 Encoder input signal
PG2
A2, /A2,
B2, /B2
PG OUT
AO, /AO, BO, /BO, ZO,

/ZO
Pulse Input signal

PG Card Output signals.
It has division frequency function: 1~255 times
Max. output voltage for Line driver: 5Vdc
Wiring Diagram
Jum per
Non-Fuse Breaker
R
NFB
- +1 +2/B1 B2
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
VP
DCM
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1
W1
10 -1 7
10 -1 8
A2
A2
B2
B2
AO
AO
BO
BO
ZO
ZO
Line driver
Figure 1
8-9
M
3~
PG
U1
U1
V1
V1
W1
Handwheel MPG
Motor
E nco der

Jum per

R
Non-Fus e Breaker
NFB
- +1 +2/B1 B2
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
VP
DCM
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1
W1
EH-PLC
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
90
A2
A2
B2
B2
AO
AO
BO
BO
ZO
ZO
Figure 2
8-10
M
3~
PG
U1
U1
V1
V1
W1
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
Motor
En c o de r
EMC-PG01R
Terminal Descriptions
Set by Pr.10-00~10-02
Terminals
Resolver Output Power

7Vrms, 10kHz
Resolver Input Signal
S1,S2, S3, S4,
3.50.175Vrms, 10kHz
Pulse Input Signal
A2, /A2,
B2, /B2
PG Card Output signals.
It has division frequency function: 1~255 times
AO, /AO, BO, /BO, ZO, Max. output voltage for Line driver: 5Vdc
/ZO
R1- R2
PG1
PG2
PG OUT
Descriptions
Wiring Diagram
Jum per
Non-Fus e Breaker
R
NFB
S
T

- +1 +2/B1 B2
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
Motor
M
3~
R1
R2
S2
PG
S4
Res olver
S1
Encoder
S3
Handwheel MPG
10 -1 7
10 -1 8
A2
A2
B2
B2
AO
AO
BO
BO
ZO
ZO
Line driver
Figure 1
8-11

Jumper
Non-Fuse Breaker
R
NFB

- +1 +2/B1 B2
R/L1
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
S/L2
T/L3
Motor
M
3~
R1
R2
S2
PG
S4
Resolver
Encoder
S1
S3
EH-PLC
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
A2
A2
B2
B2
AO
AO
BO
BO
ZO
ZO
Phase diff ere nc e 90
Figure 2
Screws Speciation for option card terminals:
EMC-D42A
EMC-R6AA
2
Wire gauge 24~12AWG0.205~3.31mm
Torque
4Kg-cm [3.47Ib-in]
2
Torque
6Kg-cm [5.21Ib-in]
EMC-PG01L
EMC-PG01O
EMC-PG01R
2
Torque
2Kg-cm [1.74Ib-in]
EMC-PG01U
8-12
CMC-MOD01
Features
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Supports Modbus TCP protocol

MDI/MDI-X auto-detect
Baud rate: 10/100Mbps auto-detect
E-mail alarm
AC motor drive keypad/Ethernet configuration
Virtual serial port.
Product File
I/O CARD & Relay Card
PG Card
Comm. Card
RJ-45 connection port
Removable control circuit

terminal
Specifications
Network Interface
Interface
Number of ports
Transmission method
RJ-45 with Auto MDI/MDIX

1 Port
IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u
Transmission cable
Category 5e shielding 100M
Transmission speed
10/100 Mbps Auto-Detect
Network protocol
ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, MODBUS OVER TCP/IP,
Delta Configuration
Electrical Specification
Weight
25g
Insulation voltage
500VDC
Power consumption
0.8W
Power supply voltage
5VDC
8-13
Environment
Noise immunity
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2)

EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4)
Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-6)
Operation/storage
Operation: -10C ~ 50C (temperature), 90% (humidity)

Storage: -25C ~ 70C (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Vibration/shock immunity
International standard: IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6/IEC

61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-27
Install CMC-MOD01 to VFD-C2000

1.
2.
3.
4.
Switch off the power supply of VFD-C2000.

Open the front cover of VFD-C2000.
Place the insulation spacer into the positioning pin at Slot 1 (shown in Figure 3), and aim the
two holes on the PCB at the positioning pin. Press the pin to clip the holes with the PCB (see
Figure 4).
Screw up at torque 6 ~ 8 kg-cm (5.21 ~ 6.94 in-lbs) after the PCB is clipped with the holes (see
Figure 5).
Slot 3
Slot 2 Slot 1
[Figure 3]
[Figure 4]
[Figure 5]
Communication Parameters for VFD-C2000 Connected to Ethernet

When VFD-C2000 is link to Ethernet, please set up the communication parameters base on the table
below. Ethernet master will be able to read/write the frequency word and control word of VFD-C2000
after communication parameters setup.
Parameter
P00-20
P00-21
Function
Setting up source of
frequency command
operation command
Set value (Dec)

8
5
8-14
Explanation
The frequency command is controlled by
communication card.
The operation command is controlled by
communication card.

Decoding method for
communication
IP setting
IP address -1
IP address -2
IP address -3
IP address -4
Netmask -1
Netmask -2
Netmask -3
Netmask -4
Default gateway -1
Default gateway -2
Default gateway -3
Default gateway -4
P09-30
P09-75
P09-76
P09-77
P09-78
P09-79
P09-80
P09-81
P09-82
P09-83
P09-84
P09-85
P09-86
P09-87
0
0
192
168
1
5
255
255
255
0
192
168
1
1
The decoding method for Delta AC motor

drive
Static IP(0) / Dynamic distribution IP(1)
IP address 192.168.1.5
Netmask 255.255.255.0
Netmask 255.255.255.0
Netmask 255.255.255.0
Netmask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway 192.168.1.1
Disconnecting CMC- MOD01 from VFD-C2000

1.
2.
3.
4.
Switch off the power supply of VFD-C2000.

Remove the two screws (see Figure 6).
Twist opens the card clip and inserts the slot type screwdriver to the hollow to prize the PCB off
the card clip (see Figure 7).
Twist opens the other card clip to remove the PCB (see Figure 8).
[Figure 6]
[Figure 7]
[Figure 8]
Basic Registers
BR#
R/W
Content
#0
#1
#2
#11
R/W
Modbus Timeout Pre-defined setting: 500 (ms)
#13
R/W
Keep Alive Time Pre-defined setting: 30 (s)
Model name
Explanation
Set up by the system; read only. The model code of
CMC-MOD01=H0203
Firmware
version
Displaying the current firmware version in hex, e.g. H0100 indicates the
firmware version V1.00.
Displaying the data in decimal form. 10,000s digit and 1,000s digit are for
Release date of
month; 100s digit and 10s digit are for day.
the version
For 1 digit: 0 = morning; 1 = afternoon.
8-15
LED Indicator & Troubleshooting

LED Indicators
LED
POWER
LINK
Status
Green
Green
Indication
How to correct
On
Power supply in normal status
--
Off
No power supply
Check the power supply
On
Network connection in normal status
--
Network in operation
--
Network not connected
Check if the network cable is

connected
Flashes
Off
Troubleshooting
Abnormality
Cause
How to correct
CMC-MOD01 not connected

to AC motor drive
to network
Check if AC motor drive is powered, and if the

power supply is normal.
Make sure CMC-MOD01 is connected to AC motor
drive.
Make sure the network cable is correctly connected
to network.
Poor contact to RJ-45

connector
Make sure RJ-45 connector is connected to

Ethernet port.

to network
Make sure CMC-MOD01 is connected to network.
AC motor drive not powered

POWER LED off
LINK LED off
No module found
Fail to open
CMC-MOD01
setup page
Able to open
CMC-MOD01
setup page but fail
to utilize webpage
monitoring
Fail to send e-mail
PC and CMC-MOD01 in
different networks and
blocked by network firewall.
to network
Incorrect communication
setting in DCISoft
PC and CMC-MOD01 in
different networks and
blocked by network firewall.
Search by IP or set up relevant settings by AC

motor drive keypad.
Make sure CMC-MOD01 is connected to the
network.
Make sure the communication setting in DCISoft is
set to Ethernet.
Conduct the setup by AC motor drive keypad.
Incorrect network setting in

CMC-MOD01
Check if the network setting for CMC-MOD01 is

correct. For the Intranet setting in your company,
please consult your IT staff. For the Internet setting
in your home, please refer to the network setting
instruction provided by your ISP.
Check if the network setting for CMC-MOD01 is
correct.
Incorrect mail server setting
Please confirm the IP address for SMTP-Server.

CMC-MOD01
8-16
CMC-PD01
Features
1.
2.
3.
4.
Supports PZD control data exchange.

Supports PKW polling AC motor drive parameters.
Supports user diagnosis function.
Auto-detects baud rates; supports Max. 12Mbps.
Product Profile
1. NET indicator
2. POWER indicator
3. Positioning hole
4. AC motor drive connection
port
5. PROFIBUS DP connection
port
6. Screw fixing hole
7. Fool-proof groove
Specifications
PROFIBUS DP Connector
Interface
DB9 connector
Transmission method
High-speed RS-485
Transmission cable
Shielded twisted pair cable
Electrical isolation
500VDC
Communication
Message type
Cyclic data exchange
Module name
CMC-PD01
GSD document
DELA08DB.GSD
Company ID
08DB (HEX)
Serial transmission
speed supported
(auto-detection)
9.6kbps; 19.2kbps; 93.75kbps; 187.5kbps; 125kbps; 250kbps; 500kbps; 1.5Mbps;

3Mbps; 6Mbps; 12Mbps (bits per second)
Power supply
5VDC (supplied by AC motor drive)
Insulation voltage
500VDC
Power consumption
1W
Weight
28g
8-17
Environment
Noise immunity
ESD(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-2)

EFT(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-4)
Surge Teat(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-6)
Operation /storage
Operation: -10C ~ 50C (temperature), 90% (humidity), pollution degree 2

Storage: -25C ~ 70C (temperature), 95% (humidity, non-condensing)
Shock / vibration
resistance
International standards: IEC61131-2, IEC68-2-6 (TEST Fc)/IEC61131-2 & IEC

68-2-27 (TEST Ea)
Installation
PROFIBUS DP Connector
PIN
PIN name
Definition
Not defined
Not defined
Rxd/Txd-P
Sending/receiving data P(B)
Not defined
DGND
Data reference ground
VP
Power voltage positive
Not defined
Rxd/Txd-N
Sending/receiving data N(A)
Not defined

There are 2 LED indicators on CMC-PD01. POWER LED displays the status of the working power.
NET LED displays the connection status of the communication.
POWER LED
LED status
Indication
How to correct
Green light on
Power supply in normal status.
--
Off
No power
Check if the connection between CMC-PD01 and AC

motor drive is normal.
NET LED
LED status
Indication
How to correct
Green light on
Normal status
--
Red light on
CMC-PD01 is not connected to

PROFIBUS DP bus.
Connect CMC-PD01 to PROFIBUS DP bus.
Red light
flashes
Invalid PROFIBUS communication

address
Set the PROFIBUS address of CMC-PD01 between 1 ~

125 (decimal)
Orange light
flashes
CMC-PD01 fails to communication

with AC motor drive.
Switch off the power and check whether CMC-PD01 is

correctly and normally connected to AC motor drive.
8-18
CMC-DN01
Functions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Based on the high-speed communication interface of Delta HSSP protocol, able to conduct
immediate control to AC motor drive.
Supports Group 2 only connection and polling I/O data exchange.
For I/O mapping, supports Max. 32 words of input and 32 words of output.
Supports EDS file configuration in DeviceNet configuration software.
Supports all baud rates on DeviceNet bus: 125kbps, 250kbps, 500kbps and extendable serial
transmission speed mode.
Node address and serial transmission speed can be set up on AC motor drive.
Power supplied from AC motor drive.
Product Profile
1. NS indicator
2. MS indicator
3. POWER indicator
4. Positioning hole
5. DeviceNet connection port
port
Specifications
DeviceNet Connector
Interface
5-PIN open removable connector. Of 5.08mm PIN interval
Transmission
th d
Transmission cable
CAN
Transmission speed
Network protocol
Shielded twisted pair cable (with 2 power cables)

125kbps, 250kbps, 500kbps and extendable serial transmission speed
d
DeviceNet protocol
AC Motor Drive Connection Port

Interface
50 PIN communication terminal
Transmission method
SPI communication
Terminal function
1. Communicating with AC motor drive

2. Transmitting power supply from AC motor drive
Communication
t
l
Delta HSSP protocol
8-19
5VDC (supplied by AC motor drive)
Insulation voltage
500VDC
Communication wire
power consumption
0.85W
Power consumption
1W
Weight
23g
Environment
Noise immunity
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-2)

EFT (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-4)
Surge Teat(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-6)
Operation /storage
Operation: -10C ~ 50C (temperature), 90% (humidity), pollution degree 2

Storage: -25C ~ 70C (temperature), 95% (humidity, non-condensing)
Shock / vibration
resistance
International standards: IEC61131-2, IEC68-2-6 (TEST Fc)/IEC61131-2 &

IEC 68-2-27 (TEST Ea)
DeviceNet Connector
PIN
Signal
Color
Definition
V+
Red
DC24V
White
Signal+
Earth
Blue
Signal-
V-
Black
0V
1
2
3
4
5

There are 3 LED indicators on CMC-DN01. POWER LED displays the status of power supply. MS
LED and NS LED are dual-color LED, displaying the connection status of the communication and
error messages.
POWER LED
LED status
Indication
How to correct
On
Power supply in abnormal status.
Check the power supply of CMC-DN01.
Off
--
8-20
NS LED
LED status
Indication
How to correct
Off
No power supply or CMC-DN01 has

not completed MAC ID test yet.
1. Check the power of CMC-DN01 and see if the

connection is normal.
2. Make sure at least one or more nodes are on the
bus.
3. Check if the serial transmission speed of
CMC-DN01 is the same as that of other nodes.
Green light
flashes
CMC-DN01 is on-line but has not

established connection to the master.
1. Configure CMC-DN01 to the scan list of the

master.
2. Re-download the configured data to the master.
Green light on
CMC-DN01 is on-line and is normally

connected to the master
--
Red light
flashes
CMC-DN01 is on-line, but I/O

connection is timed-out.
1. Check if the network connection is normal.

2. Check if the master operates normally.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1. Make sure all the MAC IDs on the network are

not repeated.
2. Check if the network installation is normal.
3. Check if the baud rate of CMC-DN01 is
consistent with that of other nodes.
4. Check if the node address of CMC-DN01 is
illegal.
5. Check if the network power supply is normal.
Red light on
The communication is down.

MAC ID test failure.
No network power supply.
CMC-DN01 is off-line.
MS LED
LED status
Indication
How to correct
Off
No power supply or being off-line
Check the power supply of CMC-DN01 and see of

the connection is normal.
Green light
flashes
Waiting for I/O data
Switch the master PLC to RUN status
Green light on
I/O data are normal
--
Red light
flashes
Mapping error
1. Reconfigure CMC-DN01
2. Re-power AC motor drive
Red light on
Hardware error
1. See the error code displayed on AC motor drive.

2. Send back to the factory for repair if necessary.
Orange light
flashes
If the flashing lasts for a long time, check if

CMC-DN01 is establishing connection
CMC-DN01 and AC motor drive are correctly
with AC motor drive.
installed and normally connected to each other.
8-21
CMC-EIP01
Features
1.
Supports Modbus TCP and Ethernet/IP protocol
2.
MDI/MDI-X auto-detect
3.
Baud rate: 10/100Mbps auto-detect
4.
AC motor drive keypad/Ethernet configuration
5.
Virtual serial port
Product Profile
[Figure1]
2. Positioning hole
port
4. LINK indicator
5. RJ-45 connection port
6. POWER indicator
Specifications
Network Interface
Interface
RJ-45 with Auto MDI/MDIX
Number of ports
1 Port
Transmission method
IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u
Transmission cable
Category 5e shielding 100M
Transmission speed
10/100 Mbps Auto-Detect
Network protocol
ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, MODBUS OVER TCP/IP, EtherNet/IP, Delta
Configuration
Weight
25g
Insulation voltage
500VDC
Power consumption
0.8W
5VDC
8-22
Environment
Noise immunity
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-2)

EFT (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-4)
Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-6)
Operation/storage
Operation: -10C ~ 50C (temperature), 90% (humidity)

Storage: -25C ~ 70C (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Vibration/shock
immunity
International standard: IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6/IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-27
Installation
Connecting CMC-EIP01 to Network
1. Turn off the power of AC motor drive.
2. Open the cover of AC motor drive.
3. Connect CAT-5e network cable to RJ-45 port on
CMC-EIP01 (See Figure 2).
[Figure 2]
RJ-45 PIN Definition
PIN
Signal
Definition
PIN
Signal
Definition
Tx+
Positive pole for

data transmission
--
N/C
Tx-
Negative pole for

data transmission
Rx-
Negative pole for

data receiving
Rx+
Positive pole for

data receiving
--
N/C
--
N/C
--
N/C
Connecting CMC-EIP01 to VFD-C2000

1.
2.
3.
4.
Switch off the power of AC motor drive.

Open the front cover of AC motor drive.
Place the insulation spacer into the positioning pin at Slot 1 (shown in Figure 3), and aim the
two holes on the PCB at the positioning pin. Press the pin to clip the holes with the PCB (see
Figure 4).
Screw up at torque 6 ~ 8 kg-cm (5.21 ~ 6.94 in-lbs) after the PCB is clipped with the holes (see
Figure 5).
8-23
Slot 3
Slot 2 Slot 1
[Figure 3]
[Figure 4]
[Figure 5]
Communication Parameters for VFD-C2000 Connected to Ethernet

When VFD-C2000 is connected to Ethernet network, please set up the communication parameters
for it according to the table below. The Ethernet master is only able to read/write the frequency word
and control word of VFD-C2000 after the communication parameters are set.
Parameter
(Dec)
Function
Set value (Dec)
Explanation
P00-20
frequency command
The frequency command is controlled by

communication card.
P00-21
operation command
The operation command is controlled by

communication card.
P09-30
Decoding method for

communication
The decoding method for Delta AC motor

drive
P09-75
IP setting
Static IP(0) / Dynamic distribution IP(1)
P09-76
IP address -1
192
P09-77
IP address -2
168
P09-78
IP address -3
P09-79
IP address -4
P09-80
Netmask -1
255
Netmask 255.255.255.0
P09-81
Netmask -2
255
Netmask 255.255.255.0
P09-82
Netmask -3
255
Netmask 255.255.255.0
P09-83
Netmask -4
Netmask 255.255.255.0
P09-84
Default gateway -1
192
P09-85
Default gateway -2
168
P09-86
Default gateway -3
P09-87
Default gateway -4
8-24
Disconnecting CMC- EIP01 from VFD-C2000

1. Switch off the power supply of VFD-C2000.
2. Remove the two screws (see Figure 6).
3. Twist opens the card clip and inserts the slot type screwdriver to the hollow to prize the PCB off the
card clip (see Figure 7).
4. Twist opens the other card clip to remove the PCB (see Figure 8).
[Figure 6]
[Figure 7]
[Figure 8]

There are 2 LED indicators on CMC-EIP01. The POWER LED displays the status of power supply,
and the LINK LED displays the connection status of the communication.
LED Indicators
LED
POWER
LINK
Status
Green
Green
Indication
How to correct
On
--
Off
No power supply
Check the power supply.
On
Network connection in normal

status
--
Network in operation
--
Network not connected
Check if the network cable is

connected.
Flashes
Off
Troubleshooting
Abnormality
Cause
How to correct
CMC-EIP01 not connected to

AC motor drive
Check if AC motor drive is powered, and if the

power supply is normal.
Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to AC motor
drive.

network
Make sure the network cable is correctly connected

to network.
AC motor drive not powered

POWER LED off
LINK LED off
8-25
Abnormality
No communication
card found
Fail to open
CMC-EIP01 setup
page
Able to open
CMC-EIP01 setup
page but fail to
utilize webpage
monitoring
Fail to send e-mail
Cause
How to correct
Poor contact to RJ-45

connector
Make sure RJ-45 connector is connected to

Ethernet port.

network
Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to network.
PC and CMC-EIP01 in
different networks and blocked
by network firewall.
Search by IP or set up relevant settings by AC

motor drive keypad.

network
Incorrect communication
setting in DCISoft
Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to the

network.
Make sure the communication setting in DCISoft is
set to Ethernet.
PC and CMC-EIP01 in
different networks and blocked
by network firewall.
Conduct the setup by AC motor drive keypad.

CMC-EIP01
Check if the network setting for CMC-EIP01 is

correct. For the Intranet setting in your company,
please consult your IT staff. For the Internet setting
in your home, please refer to the network setting
instruction provided by your ISP.
Check if the network setting for CMC-EIP01 is
correct.
Incorrect mail server setting
Please confirm the IP address for SMTP-Server.

CMC-EIP01
8-26
EMC-COP01
RJ-45 Pin definition

Pin
1
Female
Ma le
2
3
7
Pin name
CAN_H
Definition
bus line (dominant
CAN_H
high)
CAN_L
CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
CAN_GND Ground/0V/VCAN_GND Ground/0V/V-
Specifications
Interface
RJ-45
Number of ports
1 Port
Transmission method
CAN
Transmission cable
CAN standard cable
Transmission speed
1M 500k 250k 125k 100k 50k
Communication protocol
CANopen
CANopen Communication Cable

Model: TAP-CB03, TAP-CB04
Title
Part No.
1
2
TAP-CB03
TAP-CB04
L
mm
500 10
1000 10
inch
19 0.4
39 0.4
CANopen Dimension
Model: TAP-CN03
NOTE
Please refer to CANopen user manual for more details on CANopen operation. CANopen user
manual can also be downloaded on Delta website: http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/.
8-27
Chapter 9 Specifications C2000 Series
Chapter 9 Specification
230V Series
Frame Size
HEAVY
DUTY
NORMAL
DUTY
Input Rating
Output Rating
Model VFD-_ _ _C_ _

Applicable Motor Output (kW)
Applicable Motor Output (hp)
Rated Output Capacity
(kVA)
Rated Output Current
(A)
Carrier Frequency
(kHz)
Rate Output Capacity
(kVA)
(A)
Carrier Frequency
(kHz)
Input Current (A) Heavy Duty
Input Current (A)
Normal Duty
Rated Voltage/Frequency
Operating Voltage Range
Frequency Tolerance
Cooling method
Braking Chopper
DC reactor
EMC Filter
HEAVY
DUTY
NORMAL
DUTY
Output Rating
Input Rating
007
0.75
1
015
1.5
2
022
2.2
3
037
3.7
5
055
5.5
7.5
075
7.5
10
110
11
15
150
15
20
185
18.5
25
220
22
30
1.9
2.8
4.0
6.4
9.6
12
19
25
28
34
4.8
7.1
10
16
24
31
47
62
71
86
2~6kHz
2.0
3.2
4.4
6.8
10
13
20
26
30
36
11
17
25
33
49
65
75
90
2~15kHz
2~10kHz
6.1
11
15
18.5
26
34
50
68
78
95
6.4
12
16
20
28
36
52
72
83
99
3-phase AC 200V~240V (-15% ~ +10%), 50/60Hz

170~265Vac
47~63Hz
Natural cooling
Fan cooling
Built-in
Option
Option
Frame Size
Model VFD-_ _ _C_ _
Rated Output Capacity
(kVA)
(A)
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
(kVA)
(A)
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
Input Current (A) Heavy Duty
Input Current (A)
Normal Duty
Frequency Tolerance
Cooling method
Braking Chopper
DC reactor
EMI Filter
300
30
40
370
37
50
450
45
60
550
55
75
750
75
100
900
90
125
45
55
68
81
96
131
114
139
171
204
242
329
2~6kHz
48
58
72
86
102
138
120
146
180
215
255
346
2~10kHz
118
136
162
2~9 kHz
196
233
315
124
171
206
331
143
245
3-phase AC 200V~240V (-15% ~ +10%), 50/60Hz

170~265Vac
47~63Hz
Fan Cooling
Option
Built-in
Option
9-1
460V Series
Frame Size
HEAVY
DUTY
015
1.5
2
022
2.2
3
037
3.7
5
040
4.0
5
055
5.5
7.5
075
7.5
10
110
11
15
150
15
20
185
18.5
25
220
22
30
300
30
40
3.0
4.5
6.5
7.6
9.6
14
18
24
29
34
45
3.8
5.7
8.1
9.5
11
17
23
30
36
43
57
NORMAL
DUTY
3.2
4.8
7.2
8.4
10
14
19
25
30
36
48
4.0
6.0
9.0
10.5
12
18
24
32
38
45
60
2~15kHz
8.3
13
14.5
16
19
25
33
38
45
60
5.9
8.7
14
15.5
17
20
26
35
40
47
63
3-Phase AC 380V~480V ( -15%~+10%), 50/60Hz

323~528Vac
47~63Hz
Natural cooling
Fan cooling
Built-in
Option
VFDXXXC43A: No EMI Filter;
VFDXXXC43E: Built-in EMI Filter
Frame Size
HEAVY
DUTY
Output Rating
NORMAL
DUTY
Input Rating
2~10kHz
5.6
EMI Filter
Model VFD-_ _ _C_ _

370
37
50
Rated Output
55
Capacity (kVA)
69
(A)
Carrier Frequency
(kHz)
58
(kVA)
73
(A)
Carrier Frequency
(kHz)
Input Current (A) Heavy
70
Duty
74
Input Current (A)
Normal Duty
Frequency Tolerance
Cooling method
Braking Chopper
DC reactor
2~6kHz
Input Rating
Output Rating
Model VFD-_ _ _C_ _

007
0.75
1
Rated Output
2.3
Capacity (kVA)
2.9
(A)
Carrier Frequency
(kHz)
2.4
(kVA)
3.0
(A)
Carrier Frequency
(kHz)
Input Current (A) Heavy
4.1
Duty
Input Current (A)
4.3
Normal Duty
Frequency Tolerance
Cooling method
Braking Chopper
DC reactor
*F
*G
*H
450
45
60
550
55
75
750
75
100
900
90
125
1100
110
150
1320
132
175
1600
160
215
1850
185
250
2200
220
300
2800
280
375
3150
315
425
3550
355
475
69
84
114
136
167
197
235
280
348
417
466
517
86
105
143
171
209
247
295
352
437
523
585
649
2~6kHz
73
88
120
143
175
207
247
295
367
438
491
544
91
110
150
180
220
260
310
370
460
550
616
683
2~10kHz
2~9kHz
96
108
149
159
197
228
285
361
380
469
527
594
101
114
157
167
207
240
300
380
400
494
555
625
EMI Filter
3-Phase AC 380V~480V ( -15%~+10%), 50/60Hz

323~528Vac
47~63Hz
Fan cooling
Option
Built-in
VFDXXXC43A: No EMI Filter;
VFDXXXC43E: Built-in EMI Filter
NOTE
*Frame F~H is under development.
For FRAME A, B and C, Model VFDXXXC43A is under IP20/NEMA1/UL TYPE1 protection level.
For FRAME D and above, if the last character of the model is A then it is under IP20 protection level but the wiring terminal
is under IP00 protection level; if the last character of the model is E, it is under IP20/NEMA1/UL TYPE1 protection level.
9-2
General Specifications
Control Method
Control Characteristics
Starting Torque
V/F Curve
Speed Response
Ability
Torque Limit
Torque Accuracy
Max. Output
Frequency (Hz)
Frequency Output
Accuracy
Output Frequency
Resolution
Overload Tolerance
Frequency Setting
Signal
Accel./decel. Time
Main control function
Protection Characteristics
Fan Control
Motor Protection
Over-current
Protection
Over-voltage
Protection
Over-temperature
Protection
Stall Prevention
Restart After
Instantaneous Power
Failure
Grounding Leakage
Current Protection
Certifications
1: V/F, 2: SVC, 3: VF+PG, 4: FOC+PG, 5: TQC+PG,

Reach up to 150% or above at 0.5Hz.
Under FOC+PG mode, starting torque can reach 150% at 0Hz.
4 point adjustable V/F curve and square curve
5Hz (vector control can reach up to 40Hz)
Max. 200% torque current
5%
Normal duty: 0.01~600.00Hz; Heavy duty: 0.00 ~ 300.00 Hz
Digital command:0.01%, -10~+40, Analog command: 0.1%, 2510
Digital command:0.01Hz, Analog command: 0.03 X max. output frequency/60 Hz
(11 bit)
Normal duty: rated output current is 120% for 60 seconds
Heavy duty: rated output current is 150% for 60 seconds
+10V~-10, 0~+10V, 4~20mA, 0~20mA, Pulse input
0.00~600.00/0.0~6000.0 seconds
Torque control, Droop control, Speed/torque control switching, Feed forward control,
Zero-servo control, Momentary power loss ride thru, Speed search, Over-torque
detection, Torque limit, 17-step speed (max), Accel/decel time switch, S-curve
accel/decel, 3-wire sequence, Auto-Tuning (rotational, stationary), Dwell, Cooling fan
on/off switch, Slip compensation, Torque compensation, JOG frequency, Frequency
upper/lower limit settings, DC injection braking at start/stop, High slip braking, PID
control (with sleep function),Energy saving control, MODOBUS communication
(RS-485 RJ45, max. 115.2 kbps), Fault restart, Parameter copy
230V model
VFD150C23A(include) and series above: PMW control; VFD150C23A and series
below: on/off switch control
460V model
VFD150C23A(include) and series above: PMW control; VFD150C23A and series
below: on/off switch control
Electronic thermal relay protection
Over-current protection for 220% rated current
current clampNormal duty: 170~175%;Heavy duty: 180~185%
230: drive will stop when DC-BUS voltage exceeds 410V
460: drive will stop when DC-BUS voltage exceeds 820V
Built-in temperature sensor
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration and running independently
Parameter setting up to 20 seconds
Leakage current is higher than 50% of rated current of the AC motor drive
,
, GB/T12668-2,
9-3
(certification in progress)
Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation

DO NOT expose the AC motor drive in the bad environment, such as dust, direct sunlight, corrosive/inflammable
gasses, humidity, liquid and vibration environment. The salt in the air must be less than 0.01mg/cm2 every year.
Installation
IEC60364-1/IEC60664-1 Pollution degree 2, Indoor use only
location
Storage
-25 oC ~ +70 oC
Surrounding
Transportation -25 oC ~ +70 oC
Temperature
Non-condensation, non-frozen
Operation
Max. 90%
Rated
Storage/
Max. 95%
Humidity
Transportation
No condense water
Air Pressure
Operation/ 86 to 106 kPa
Storage
Environment
Transportation 70 to 106 kPa
Pollution
IEC721-3-3
Level
Operation
Class 3C2; Class 3S2
Storage
Class 2C2; Class 2S2
Transportation Class 1C2; Class 1S2
No concentrate
If AC motor drive is installed at altitude 0~1000m, follow normal
operation restriction. If it is install at altitude 1000~3000m, decrease
2% of rated current or lower 0.5 of temeperature for every 100m
Altitude
Operation
increase in altitude. Maximum altitude for Corner Grounded is
2000m.
Package
Drop
Vibration
Impact
Operation
Position
Storage
ISTA procedure 1A(according to weight) IEC60068-2-31
Transportation
1.0mm, peak to peak value range from 2Hz to 13.2 Hz; 0.7G~1.0G range from 13.2Hz to 55Hz;
1.0G range from 55Hz to 512 Hz. Comply with IEC 60068-2-6
IEC/EN 60068-2-27
Max. allowed offset angle 10o (under normal
installation position)
9-4
10
10
Specification for Operation Temperature and Protection Level

Model
VFDxxxCxxA
Frame
Frame A~C
230V:
0.75~22kW
460V:
Top cover
Conduit Box
Remove top
Standard
cover
conduit plate
Standard with
Protection Level
Operation
Temperature
IP20/UL Open Type
-10~50
IP20/UL Type1/NEMA1
-10~40
IP00/IP20/UL Open Type
-10~50
top cover
0.75~30kW
Frame D~H
N/A
No conduit box
O n l y th e ci rcl e d a re a
i s IP0 0 , o th e r a re IP2 0
230V: >22kW
460V: >30kW
VFDxxxCxxE
Frame A~C
460V:
0.75~30kW
Remove top
Standard
cover
conduit plate
Standard with
IP20/UL Open Type
-10~50
IP20/UL Type1/NEMA1
-10~40
IP20/UL Type1/NEMA1
-10~40
top cover
Frame D~H
230V: >22kW
N/A
Standard
conduit box
460V: >30kW
9-5
Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad

KPC-CC01
KPC-CE01(Option)
Communication Interface
RJ-45 (socket)RS-485 interface;
Installation Method
Embedded type and can be put flat on the surface
of the control box. The front cover is water proof.
Descriptions of Keypad Functions

Descriptions
Key
Start Operation Key

1.
It is only valid when the source of operation command is from the keypad.
2.
It can operate the AC motor drive by the function setting and the RUN LED will be ON.
3.
It can be pressed again and again at stop process.
4.
When enabling HAND mode, it is only valid when the source of operation command is
from the keypad.
Stop Command Key. This key has the highest processing priority in any situation.
1.
When it receives STOP command, no matter the AC motor drive is in operation or stop
status, the AC motor drive needs to execute STOP command.
2.
The RESET key can be used to reset the drive after the fault occurs. For those faults that
cant be reset by the RESET key, see the fault records after pressing MENU key for
details.
Operation Direction Key
1.
This key is only control the operation direction NOT for activate the drive. FWD: forward,
REV: reverse.
2.
Refer to the LED descriptions for more details.
ENTER Key
Press ENTER and go to the next level. If it is the last level then press ENTER to execute the command.
ESC Key
ESC key function is to leave current menu and return to the last menu. It is also functioned as
a return key in the sub-menu.
Press menu to return to main menu.
Menu content:
KPC-CE01 does not support function 5 ~13.
1. Detail Parameter
7. Quick/Simple Setup 13. PC Link
2. Copy Parameter
8. Display Setup
3. Keypad Locked
9. Time Setup
4. PLC Function
10. Language Setup
5. Copy PLC
11. Startup Menu
6. Fault Record
12. Main Page
10-1
Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Series

Direction: Left/Right/Up/Down
1.
In the numeric value setting mode, it is used to move the cursor and change the numeric
value.
2.
In the menu/text selection mode, it is used for item selection.
Function Key
1.
It has the factory setting function and the function can be set by the user. The present
factory setting: F1 is JOG function.
2.
Other functions must be defined by TPEditor first. TPEditor software V1.03 is available for
download at:
http://www.delta.com.tw/product/em/download/download_main.asp?act=3&pid=3&cid=3
&tpid=3
3.
Installation Instruction for TPEditor is on page 10-16 of this chapter.
HAND ON Key
1.
This key is executed by the parameter settings of the source of Hand frequency and hand
operation. The factory settings of both source of Hand frequency and hand operation are
the digital keypad.
2.
Press HAND ON key at stop status, the setting will switch to hand frequency source and
hand operation source. Press HAND ON key at operation status, it stops the AC motor
drive first (display AHSP warning), and switch to hand frequency source and hand
operation source.
3.
Successful mode switching for KPC-CE01, H/A LED will be on; for KPC-CC01, it will
display HAND mode/ AUTO mode on the screen.
1.
This key is executed by the parameter settings of the source of AUTO frequency and
AUTO operation. The factory setting is the external terminal (source of operation is
4-20mA).
2.
Press Auto key at stop status, the setting will switch to hand frequency source and hand
operation source. Press Auto key at operation status, it stops the AC motor drive first
(display AHSP warning), and switch to hand frequency source and hand operation
source.
3.
Successful mode switching for KPC-CE01, H/A LED will be off; for KPC-CC01, it will
display HAND mode/ AUTO mode on the screen
Descriptions of LED Functions

LED
Descriptions
Steady ON: operation indicator of the AC motor drive, including DC brake, zero speed,
standby, restart after fault and speed search.
Blinking: drive is decelerating to stop or in the status of base block.
Steady OFF: drive doesnt execute the operation command
Steady ON: stop indicator of the AC motor drive.
Blinking: drive is in the standby status.
Steady OFF: drive doesnt execute STOP command.
Operation Direction LED (green: forward running, red: reverse running)
Steady ON: drive is in forward running status.
Blinking: drive is changing the operation direction.
Steady OFF: drive is in reverse running status.
(Only KPC-CE01 support this function)
Setting can be done during operation.
HAND LED: When HAND LED is on (HAND mode); when HAND LED is off (AUTO mode).
(Only KPC-CE01Support this function )
Setting can be done during operation.
AUTO LED: when AUTO LED is on (AUTO mode); when AUTO LED is off (HAND mode).
10-2

RUN LED:
LED
status
OFF
CANopen at initial
Condition/State
No LED
Blinking CANopen at pre-operation
CANopen ~RUN
Single
flash
ON
CANopen at stopped
CANopen at operation status

No LED
ERR LED:
LED
status
OFF
Single One message fail
flash
CANopen ~ERR
Double
flash
Triple
flash
Condition/ State
No Error
Guarding fail or heartbeat fail
SYNC fail
ON
Bus off
10-3
Digital Keypad: KPC-CC01 Function
POWER ON
1)The default Start-up page is Delta Logo.(Default 1and 2)
2) User can customize their start-up page through the edited function.
(Need to purchase the optional accessories)
Start-up
Skip to main page
afer 3sec.
The top line of LCD displays the status of drive.
AU TO
F
H
A
J OG
60.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00
After main menu is selected, the start-up page will display in

the format user defined. The page shown on the left is display
as Delta default setting.
The button lin e of LCD disp lays time and JOG.
14 35 :3 6
P res s
onc e
P res s
aga in
AU TO
F
H
A
JOG
P res s
aga in
AU TO
60.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00
F
H
A
14 35 :3 6
J OG
AU TO
60.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00
14 35 :3 6
H
A
A
J OG
0.00Hz
0.00
0.00 Amp
14 35 :3 6
Press MENU
MENU
1.Detail Paramete r
2.Copy Paramete r
3.Keypad Locked
1.
2.
MENU
1. Detail Paramete r
2.Copy Paramete r
3.Keypad Locked
4.PLC Function
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Item 1~4 are the
10.
common items for
11.
KPC-CC01 &KPC-C E01
12.
Copy PLC
Fault Record
Quick/Simple Setup
Display Setup
Time Setup
Language Setup
Start-up
Main page
NOTE
Startup page can only display pictures, no flash.
When Power ON, it will display startup page then the main page. The main page displays Deltas default setting F/H/A/U,
the display order can be set by Pr.00.03 (Startup display). When the selected item is U page, use left key and right key to
switch between the items, the display order of U page is set by Pr.00.04 (User display).
10-4
Display Icon
Start-up
1.Default 1
2.Default 2
3.User define
Pr setup
00:System Pr
01:Basic Pr
02:DI/DO Pr
: prese nt se tting
: roll down the page for more options
Press
for more options.
: show complete se ntence

Press
for complete information
Display item
MENU
1.Detail Parameter
2.Copy Parameter
3.Keypad Locked
MENU
1.Detail Parameter
2.Copy Parameter
3.Keypad Locked
4.PLC Function
Item 1~4 are the common items for

KPC-C C01 &KPC-CE01
1.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Copy PLC
Fault Record
Quick/Simple Setup
Displa y Setup
Time Setup
Language Setup
Start-up
Main page
PC Link
Detail Parameter
00 System Pr Content
00- System Pr
01 ID code
02 Rated curre
03 Pr reset
Pr setup
00:System Pr
01:Basic Pr
02:DI/DO Pr
Press
ENTER to select.
00-08 Password Set
00-08
0000
Password set
0000~9999
MY MODE
01-00 The maximum output freq.
01-00
Hz
600.00
Max. output freq.
0.00~600.00
10-5
MY MODE
2.
Copy Parameter
Copy pr
1.
2.
3.
Copy parameters (Pr)

1.
4 sets of parameters duplication.
2.
When the setting is complete, the date will be written to the copy
parameters (Pr) page.
Copy pr
1.2009/05/04
2.
3.
Press ENTER
File 1
1.SAVE
2.LOAD
Press
to save or load
After selecting save and pressing "ENTER", the parameter

setting will be saved in the keypad.
3.
Keypad locked
Keypad Locked
Keypad locked
Press "ENTER"
to lock
This function is used to lock the keypad. The main page would not display
keypad locked when the keypad is locked, however it will display the
messageplease press ESC and then ENTER to unlock the keypad when any
key is pressed.
HAND
Press ENTER to lock
Keypad locked
Press "ESC" for
3 seconds to unlock
JOG
1435:56
Press any key.
4.
PLC Function
PLC
1.Disable
2.PLC Run
3.PLC Stop
When activate and stop PLC function, the PLC status will be displayed on
main page of Delta default setting.
F 600.00Hz
H 600.00Hz
A 23.5A
PLC function
1. Disable
2. PLC run
3. PLC stop
The PLC function of KPC-CE01 can only displays:

1.
PLC0
2.
PLC1
3.
PLC2
10-6

5.
Copy PLC
Copy PLC
Copy PLC
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
Duplicate 4 sets of parameters.

When the setting is complete, the date will be written to the Copy
PLC page.
Copy PLC
1.2010/03/14
2.
3.
Press
File 1
1. Save to the drive
2. Save to the
digital display
ENTER
Press
Press
to s etting me nu.
to s ele ct where to save the file
ENTER
execute filesaving process.
If select save to the drive and press enter, the file will be saved to the drive.
NOTE
If password protection for WPLSoft editor was set, it is required to enter the
password before the file can successfully be saved onto the digital display.
File 1
P a s s w o r d 0000
Input Times
6.
Fault record
Fault Record
Fault record
1:GFF
2:ocA
3:oH
Press
ENTER to select.
KPC-CE01 does not support

this function.
It can accumulate 6 sets of recent fault records.

The first fault code displays in the record is the latest fault. Select the fault
code for details on time, date, frequency, current, voltage and DC BUS Volt..
Fault record
1:GFF
2:ocA
3:oH
Press
ENTER
to view the
current and voltage of the fa ult
2: ocA
Time: 19:47:00
Frequency: 0.00
Current:
0.00
NOTE
Fault actions of AC motor drive are record and save to KPC-CC01. When
KPC-CC01 is removed and apply to another AC motor drive, the previous
fault records will not be deleted. The new fault records of the present AC
motor drive will accumulate to KPC-CC01.
10-7
7.
Quick/Simple Setting
Quick Setting:
Quick setting
1: V/F mode
2: VFPG mode
3: SVC mode
Press
1.
V/F Mode
01: Password Input (Decode)
V/F mode
P00-07
01. Password Input

02. Password Setting
03. Control Mode
ENTER to select.
00-07
0
Password Input
0~65535
Items
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Quick Setting:
1. VF Mode
2. VFPG Mode
3. SVC Mode
4. FOCPG Mode
5. TQCPG Mode
6. My Mode
2.
Parameter Protection Password Input (P00-07)

Parameter Protection Password Setting (P00-08)
Control Mode (P00-10)
Control of Speed Mode (P00-11)
Load Selection (P00-16)
Carrier Frequency (P00-17)
Source of the Master Frequency Command (AUTO) (P00-20)
Source of the Operation Command (AUTO) (P00-21)
Stop Method (P00-22)
Digital Keypad STOP function (P00-32)
Max. Operation Frequency (P01-00)
Base Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-01)
Max. Output Voltage Setting of Motor 1 (P01-02)
Mid-point Frequency 1 of Motor 1 (P01-03)
Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 1 (P01-04)
Mid-point Frequency 2 of Motor 1 (P01-05)
Mid-point Voltage 2 of Motor 1 (P01-06)
Min. Output Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-07)
Min. Output Voltage of Motor 1 (P01-08)
Output Frequency Upper Limit (P01-10)
Output Frequency Lower Limit (P01-11)
Accel. Time 1 (P01-12)
Decel Time 1 (P01-13)
Over-voltage Stall Prevention (P06-01)
Derating Protection (P06-55)
Software Brake Level (P07-00)
Speed Search during Start-up (P07-12)
Emergency Stop (EF) & Force to Stop Selection (P07-20)
Filter Time of Torque Command (P07-24)
Filter Time of Slip Compensation (P07-25)
Torque Compensation Gain (P07-26)
Slip Compensation Gain (P07-27)
VFPG Mode
V/F mode
P00-07
01. Password Input

03. Control Mode
00-07
0
Password Input
0~65535
Items
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

10-8

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
3.

Encoder Type Selection (P10-00)
Encoder Pulse (P10-01)
Encoder Input Type Setting (P10-02)
ASR Control ( P) 1 (P11-06)
ASR Control (I) 1 (P11-07)
ASR Control ( P) 2 (P11-08)
ASR Control (I) 2 (P11-09)
P Gain of Zero Speed (P11-10)
I Gain of Zero Speed (P11-11)
SVCPG Mode
V/F mode
P00-07
01. Password Input

03. Control Mode
00-07
0
Password Input
0~65535
Items
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.

Carrier Frequency (P00-17)
Full-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (P05-01)
Rated Power of Induction Motor 1 (P05-02)
Rated Speed of Induction Motor 1 (P05-03)
Pole Number of Induction Motor 1 (P05-04)
No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (P05-05)
Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration (P06-03)
10-9

29.
30.
31.
32.
4.

FOCPG Mode
V/F mode
P00-07
01. Password Input

03. Control Mode
00-07
0
Password Input
0~65535
Items
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
5.

Source of the Master Frequency Command (AUTO)
(P00-20)
Full-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (P05-01)
Rated Power of Induction Motor 1 (P05-02)
Rated Speed of Induction Motor 1 (P05-03)
Pole Number of Induction Motor 1 (P05-04)
No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (P05-05)
Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration (P06-03)
Encoder Type Selection (P10-00)
Encoder Pulse (P10-01)
Encoder Input Type Setting (P10-02)
System Control (P11-00)
Per Unit of System Inertia (P11-01)
ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth (P11-03)
ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth (P11-04)
Zero-speed Bandwidth (P11-05)
TQCPG Mode
V/F mode
P00-07
01. Password Input

(Decode)
03. Control Mode
Items
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
00-07
0
Password Input
0~65535
Password Input (Decode) (P00-07)

Password Setting (P00-08)
Source of the Master Frequency Command (P00-20)
10-10

6. Source of the Operation Command (P00-21)
7. Max. Operation Frequency (P01-00)
8. Base Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-01)
9. Max. Output Voltage Setting of Motor 1 (P01-02)
10. Full-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (P05-01)
11. Rated Power of Induction Motor 1 (P05-02)
12. Rated Speed of Induction Motor 1 (P05-03)
13. Pole Number of Induction Motor 1 (P05-04)
14. No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (P05-05)
15. Over-voltage Stall Prevention (P06-01)
16. Software Brake Level (P07-00)
17. Encoder Type Selection (P10-00)
18. Encoder Pulse (P10-01)
19. Encoder Input Type Setting (P10-02)
20. System Control (P11-00)
21. Per Unit of System Inertia (P11-01)
22. ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth (P11-03)
23. ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth (P11-04)
24. Zero-speed Bandwidth (P11-05)
25. Max. Torque Command (P11-27)
26. Source of Torque Offset (P11-28)
27. Torque Offset Setting (P11-29)
28. Source of Torque Command (P11-33)
29. Torque Command (P11-34)
30. Speed Limit Selection (P11-36)
31. Forward Speed Limit (torque mode) (P11-37)
32. Reverse Speed Limit (torque mode) (P11-38)
6.My Mode
My mode
01:
02:
03:
My mode:
It can save 01~32 sets of
parameters (Pr).
1
05-02
Amps
05-02
motor current
Click F4 in parameter setting

page, the parameter will save
0.00~600.00
MY MODE
to My Mode. To delete or
correct the parameter, enter
Press F4 and save to my mode.
this parameter and click the
2
DEL on the bottom right
corner.
My mode
01: motor current
02:
03:
The parameter (Pr) will be displayed

in My mode if it is properly saved.
To correct or to delete this Pr. clicks
DEL.
05-02
Amps
05-02
motor current
0.00~600.00
DEL
Press F4 to delete this Pr. setting

in My Mode.
10-11
8.
Display setup
1. Contrast Adjustment
Disp setup
1.Contrast Ad
2.BKLT time
Contrast adjust
Adjust setting value
6
0
10
2. Back-lighted Time
Press
ENTER
BKLT Time
to
Min
9.
Adjust setting value
enter the setting menu.
10
Time setting
Time setup
Enter time setup page, "9" will continue to blink

move to left / right
2009/01/01
_ _ : _ _ :_ _
increase / decrease the value
Press
ENTER
to confirm.
NOTE
When the digital keypad is removed, the time setting will be in standby
status for 7 days. After this period, the time needs to be reset.
10. Language setup

Language selection.
Language
1:English
2:
3:
11. Startup Page Setting
Start-up
1.Default 1
2.Default 2
3.User define
1. Default picture 1
DELTA LOGO
2. Default picture 2
DELTA Text
3. User defined: optional accessory is require (TPEditor & USB/RS-485
Communication Interface-IFD6530)
Install an editing accessory would allow users to design their own start-up
page.If editor accessory is not installed, user defined option will dispay a
blank page.
USB/RS-485 Communication Interface-IFD6530
Please refer to Chapter 07 Optional Acessories for more detail.
TPEditor
TPEditor Installation Instruction is on page 10-16 and TPEditor V1.03 is
available for download at:
http://www.delta.com.tw/product/em/download/download_main.asp?act=3&pid=3&cid=3&tpid=3
10-12

12. Main page
1. Default page
Default picture and editable picture are available upon selection.
Main Page
1.Default
2.User define
Press
F
H
A
ENTER to select.
60.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00
F 600.00Hz >>> H >>> A >>> U (circulate)

2. User defined: optional accessory is require (TPEditor & USB/RS-485
Communication Interface-IFD6530)
Install an editing accessory would allow users to design their own start-up
page.If editor accessory is not installed, user defined option will dispay a
blank page.
USB/RS-485 Communication Interface-IFD6530
Please refer to Chapter 07 Optional Acessories for more detail.
TPEditor
TPEditor Installation Instruction is on page 10-16 and TPEditor V1.03 is
available for download at:
http://www.delta.com.tw/product/em/download/download_main.asp?act=3&pid=3&cid=3&tpid=3
13. PC Link
PC Link
Press "ENTER"
to link
The function of PC Link is to establish a connection with computer to

download the page for user defined editing. After enter to PC Link page,
check if the connection of KPC-CC01 and computer is successfully establish,
then press enter to go to next page and wait for communication response.
1.
If the connection failed, the screen will show Time Out.
PC Link
Time Out
Press "ESC"back
to MENU
Press ENTER
PC Link
Waiting
2.
If the connection succeeds, the screen page will show Downloading.

When the download is done, it returns to MENU page.
PC Link
Downloading
28 %
28 %
3.
In order to set the start-up page and main page in the format user
defined, user must check the user define option for start-up page and
main page. If the user define page for editing has not yet downloaded to
KPC-CC01, the start-up page and main page will display as blank.
Other display
When fault occur, the menu will display:
Fault
Warning
ocA
CE01
Oc at accel
Comm. Error 1
1. Press ENTER and start RESET. If still no response, please contact local distributor or return to the factory. To
view the fault DC BUS voltage, output current and output voltage, press MENUFault Record.
2. Press ENTER again, if the screen returns to main page, the fault is clear.
3. When fault or warning message appears, backlight LED will blinks until the fault or the warning is cleared.
10-13
Optional accessory for digital keypad: RJ45 Extension Lead

Part No.
Description
CBC-K3FT
RJ45 Extension Lead 3 feet
CBC-K5FT
CBC-K7FT
CBC-K10FT
CBC-K16FT
TPEditor Installation Instruction

1)
TPEditor: Setup & Basic Functions

1. Run TPEditor version 1.30
2. Go to File(F)Click on New. The Window below will pop up. At the device type, click on the drop down
menu and choose DELTA VFD-C Inverter. At the TP type, click on the drop down menu and choose VFD-C
KeyPad. As for File Name, enter TPE0. Now click on OK.
3. You are now at the designing page. Go to Edit (E)Click on Add a New Page (A) or go to the TP page on
the upper right side, right click once on TP page and choose Add to increase one more page for editing. The
current firmware of Keypad is version1.00 and can support up to 4 pages.
4. Download setting, Go to Tool Communication settings (C) to set up the PC Com Port and Baud Rate. The
supporting speeds of Baud rate are 9600bps, 19200bps and 38400bps. The default setting of TP address is
1, please do not modify.
10-14

2)
Edit Startup Page

1. Click once on the Boot Page on the right hand side of your computer screen or click on View (V) click on
Boot Page (B). Then a blank Boot Page window will pop up. Use the circled items to design your Startup page.
2.
. Open a blank page, click once on this button

Static Text
page. The following windows will pop up.
, and then double click on that blank
On the right hand side of the Static Text Setting, you can adjust the frame setting, the text direction, the
alignment and the font setting. Once you finish all the adjustments that you need.
You can continue to input your text in the blank space of Static Text Setting window. When you finish
inputting your text, click on OK to continue your next step or click cancel to abort the current step.
3.
Static Bitmap
Open a blank page, then click once on this button
blank page. The following window will pop up.
and then double click on that
Please note that Static Bitmap setting support only images in BMP format. Now choose a image that you
need and click open, then that image will appear in the Static Bitmap window.
10-15

4.
Geometric Bitmap
As shown in the picture on the left side, there
are 11 kinds of geometric bitmap to choose. Open a new blank page then click once on a geometric bitmap
icon that you need. Then drag that icon and enlarge it to the size that you need on that blank page. For
example, if you drag this icon
5.
to a blank page, you will see the following window.
Download---Take the image below as an example. The sentence Boot page is static text, the 11 images
below are geometric bitmaps. The image on the right hand side is a Static Bitmap. To upload a start up
page, double click to activate Boot page. Make sure that you have followed the instruction on page 3 to
choose the right com port. Then go to Communication (M) Click on Write Boot Page TP (B). When
you see the pop up message below
Go to the C2000 Keypad, press Menu then keep on pressing the Upward key until you see PC Link, then
press ENTER once, when you see Press Enter to PC Link on the keypad, press the ENTER again. Then
click the YES button to begin the upload.
10-16

3)
Edit Main Page

1.
Click on a page under the TP Page to edit or go to View click on Boot Page to begin to edit main page.
The objects available for you to use are in the red circles below.
From left to right: Static Text, ASCII Display, Static Bitmap, Scale, Bar Graph, Button, Clock Display, Units,
Numeric Input, 11 geometric bitmaps and different width of lines. The application of Static Text, Static
Bitmap, and geometric bitmap is the same as the editing startup page.
2.
Numeric/ASCII Display A): Go to Objects (O)Click once on the Numeric/ASCII Display(A)

Drag to enlarge to reach the size that you need to add objects in the
screen where you want to create an object Double click on the object to set up Related Devices, Frame
Setting , Fonts and Alignment.
Related Device: Choose the VFD Communication Port that you need, if you want to read output
frequency (H), set the VFD Communication Port to $2202. For other values, please refer to ACMD
ModBus Comm Address List.
3.
Scale Setting
: On the Tool Bar, click on this
for Scale Setting. You can also edit Scale Setting in
the Property Window on the right hand side of your computer screen.
a.
b.
c.
Scale Position: Click on the drop down list to choose which position that you need to place a scale.
Scale Side: Click on the drop down list to choose if you want to number your scale from smaller
number to bigger number or from big to small. Click OK to accept this setting or click Cancel to
abort.
Font Setting: Click on the drop down list to choose the Font setting that you need then click OK to
accept the setting or click Cancel to abort.
10-17

d.
e.
f.
g.
4.
Bar Graph setting
a.
b.
c.
5.
Value Length: Click on the drop down to choose 16bits or 32 bits. Then click OK to accept the
setting or click Cancel to abort.
Main Scale & Sub Scale: In order to divide the whole scale into equal parts, key in the numbers of
your choices for main scale and sub scale.
Maximum value & Minimum Value are the numbers on the two ends of a scale. They can be
negative numbers but the input numbers are limited by value.
Follow the Scale setting mentioned above; you will have a scale as shown below.
Related Device: Choose the VFD Communication Port that you need.
Direction Setting: Click on the drop down menu to choose one of the following directions: From
Bottom to Top, From Top to Bottom, From Left to Right or From Right to Left.
Maximum Value & Minimum Value: They define the range covered by the maximum value and
minimum value. If a value is smaller than or equal to the minimum value, then the bar graph will be
blank. If a value is bigger or equal to the maximum value, then the bar graph will be full. If a value is
between minimum and maximum value, then the bar graph will be filled proportionally.
: Currently this function only allows the Keypad to switch pages, other functions are not yet
Button
available. Text input function and Image inserted functions are not yet supported.
Double click on
a.
b.
c.
to open set up window.
<Button Type> allows you set up buttons functions. But Page Jump is the only supported function
currently.
Page Jump setting: After you choose the Page Jump function in the drop down list, you will see this
Page Jump Setting Menu
<Function Key> allows you to assign functions to the following keys on the KPC-CC01 keypad: F1,
F2, F3, F4, Up, Down, Left and Right. Please note that the Up and Down keys are locked by
TPEditor. These two keys cannot be programmed. If you want to program Up and Down keys, go to
ToolFunction Key Settings (F)Re-Define Up/Down Key(R).
10-18
d. There are no supported functions other than the setting mentioned above.
6.
Clock Display Setting

: Click once on this button
.
Open a new file and click once in that window, you will see the following
In the clock display setting, you can choose to display Time, Day or Date on the Keypad. To adjust time,
go to #9 on the Keypads menu. You can also adjust Frame Setting, Font Setting and Alignment.
7.
Unit Measurement
: Click once on this Button:
Open a new file and double click on that window, you will see the following
Choose from the drop down list the Metrology and the Unity Name that you need.
As for Metrology, you have the following choices Length, Square Measure, Volume/Solid Measure,
Weight, Speed, Time and Temperature. The unit name changes automatically when you change
metrology type.
8.
Numeric Input Setting
This menu allows you to provide parameters or communication ports and to input numbers.
Click once on this button
.
Open a new file and double click on that window, you will see the following:
10-19
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
9.
Related Device: There are two blank spaces to fill in, one is <Write> and another one is <Read>.
Input the numbers that you want to display and the corresponding numbers of a parameter and that
of a communication port. For example, input 012C to Read and Write Parameter P01-44.
OutLine Setting: The Frame setting, Font setting, Vertical Alignment and Horizontal Alignment are
the same as mentioned before. Click on the drop down menu and choose the setting that you need.
Function key: The setting here allows you to program keys on the keypad. Press the key on the
menu then the corresponding key on the keypad will start to blink, then press Enter to confirm the
setting.
Value Type & Value Length: These two factors influence the range of the Minimum and Maximum
Value of the Limit Setting. Please note that the corresponding supporting values for C2000 have to
be 16bits. The 32bits values are not supported.
Value Setting: This part is set automatically by the keypad itself.
Limit Setting: Input the range the security setting here.
For example, if you set Function Key as F1, Minimum Value as 0 and Maximum Value ias 4, then
press F1 on Keypad Then you can press Up and Down key on the keypad to increase or decrease
the value. Press Enter Key on the keypad to confirm your setting. You can also go to parameter
table 01-44 to verify if your input correctly the value.
Download TP Page
: Press Up or Down key on the keypad until you reach #13 PC
Link.
Then press Enter on the keypad and you will see the word Waiting on keypads screen. Now choose a
page that you have created then go to Communication (M)Write to TP(W) to start downloading the
page to the keypad
.
When you see the word Completed on the keypads screen, that means the download is done.
Then you can press ESC on the keypad to go back to the menu of the keypad.
10-20
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings

This chapter provides summary of parameter settings for user to gather the parameter setting ranges,
factory settings and set parameters. The parameters can be set, changed and reset by the digital keypad.
NOTE
1 : the parameter can be set during operation

2 For more detail on parameters, please refer to Ch12 Description of Parameter Settings.
00 Drive Parameters
NOTE
Parameter
IM: Induction Motor; PM: Permanent Magnet Motor

Settings
Explanation
00-00
Identity Code of the AC Motor

Drive
4: 230V, 1HP
5: 460 V, 1HP
6: 230V,2HP
7: 460 V, 2HP
8: 230V, 3HP
9: 460 V, 3HP
10: 230V, 5HP
11: 460 V, 5HP
12: 230V, 7.5HP
13: 460 V, 7.5HP
14: 230V, 10HP
15: 460V, 10HP
16: 230V, 15HP
17: 460V, 15HP
18: 230V, 20HP
19: 460V, 20HP
20: 230V, 25HP
21: 460V, 25HP
22: 230V, 30HP
23: 460V, 30HP
24: 230V, 40HP
25: 460V, 40HP
26: 230V, 50HP
27: 460V, 50HP
28: 230V, 60HP
29: 460V, 60HP
30: 230V, 75HP
31: 460V, 75HP
32: 230V, 100HP
33: 460V, 100HP
34: 230V, 125HP
35: 460V, 125HP
37: 460V, 150HP
39: 460V, 175HP
41: 460V, 215HP
43: 460V, 250HP
45: 460V, 300HP
47: 460V, 375HP
49: 460V, 425HP
51: 460V, 475HP
93: 460V, 5HP4kW
00-01
Display AC Motor Drive

Rated Current
Display by models
11-1
Factory
Setting
Read
only
Read
only
Parameter
00-02
Parameter Reset
00-03
Start-up Display Selection
00-04
Content of Multi-function
Display
00-05
Coefficient Gain in Actual

Output Frequency
00-06
Software Version
00-07
Parameter Protection
Password Input
Settings
Explanation
0: No function
1: Read only
6: Reset PLC (including CANopen Master Index)
7: Reset CANopen Index (Slave)
8: keypad lock
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings(base
frequency is 50Hz)
10: All parameters are reset to factory settings
(base frequency is 60Hz)
0: F (frequency command)
1: H (output frequency)
2: U (multi-function display, see Pr.00-04)
3: A (output current)
0: Display output current (A)
1: Display counter value (c)
2: Display actual output frequency (H.)
3: Display DC-BUS voltage (v)
4: Display output voltage (E)
5: Display output power angle (n)
6: Display output power in kW (P)
7: Display actual motor speed rpm (r)
8: Display estimate output torque % (t)
9: Display PG feedback (G) (refer to
Pr.10-00,10-01)
10: Display PID feedback in % (b)
11: Display AVI in % (1.)
12: Display ACI in % (2.)
13: Display AUI in % (3.)
14: Display the temperature of IGBT in oC (i.)
15: Display the temperature of capacitance in oC
(c.)
16: The status of digital input (ON/OFF) (i)
17: The status of digital output (ON/OFF) (o)
18: Multi-step speed (S)
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital
input (d.)
20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital
output (0.)
21: Actual motor position (PG1 of PG card) (P.)
22: Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) (S.)
23: Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card) (q.)
24: Position command tracing error (E.)
25: Overload counting (0.00~100.00%) (h.)
26: Ground Fault GFF (Unit :%)(G.)
27: DC Bus voltage ripple (Unit: Vdc) (r.)
28: Display PLC data D1043 (C)
29: Display PM motor pole section (EMC-PG01U
application) (4.)
30: Display output of user defined (U)
31: H page x Pr.00-05 Display user Gain(K)
32: Number of actual motor revolution during
operation (PG card plug in and Z phase signal
input) (Z.)
0~160.00
Read-only
065535
0~3: the times of password attempts
11-2
Factory
Setting
0
#.#
0
Parameter
Settings
Explanation
00-08
Parameter Protection
Password Setting
00-09
Reserved
00-10
Control Mode
00-11
Control of Speed Mode
0 ~ 65535
0: No password protection / password is entered
correctly (Pr00-07)
1: Parameter is locked
0: Speed mode
1: Point-to-Point position control
2: Torque mode
3: Home mode
0: VF (IM V/f control)
1: VFPG (IM V/f control+ Encoder)
2: SVC(IM Sensorless vector control)
3: FOCPG (IM FOC vector control+ encoder)
Factory
Setting
0
4: FOCPGPM FOC vector control + Encoder

5: FOC Sensorless (IM field oriented sensorless
00-12
Point-to-Point Position mode
00-13
Torque Mode Control
00-14
Reserved
00-15
Reserved
00-16
Load Selection
00-17
Carrier Frequency
vector control)
0: Relative position
1: Absolute position
0: TQCPGIM Torque control + Encoder

1: TQCPG (PM Torque control + Encoder)
2: TQC Sensorless (IM Sensorless torque control)
0: Normal load
1: Heavy load
Normal load 230V (460V)
1-15HP [1-20HP]
2~15KHz
20-50HP [25-100HP]
2~10KHz
60-100HP [125-475HP] 2~09KHz
Heavy load
1-475HP
2~6KHz
00-18
8
6
4
Reserved
00-19
PLC Command Mask
00-20
Source of Master Frequency

CommandAUTO
00-21
Source of the Operation

Command AUTO
Bit 0: Control command controls by PLC

Bit 1: Frequency command controls by PLC
Bit 2: Reserved
Bit 3: Torque command controls by PLC
0: Digital keypad
1: RS-485 serial communication
2: External analog input (Pr.03-00)
3: External UP/DOWN terminal
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-16
without direction)
5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr.10-16)
6: CANopen communication card
7: Reserved
8: Communication card (no CANopen card)
0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.
2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP
disabled.
4: Reserved
11-3
Read
only
Parameter
Settings
Explanation
00-22
Stop Method
00-23
Control of Motor Direction
00-24
Memory of Frequency
Command
00-25
User Defined Characteristics
00-26
Max. User Defined Value
00-27
User Defined Value
00-28
~
00-29
Reserved
0: Ramp to stop
1: Coast to stop
0: Enable forward/reverse
1: Reverse disable
2: Forward disable
Read only
Bit 0~3: user define on decimal place
0000b: no decimal place
0001b: one decimal place
0010b: two decimal place
0011b: three decimal place
Bit 4~15: user define on unit
000xh: Hz
001xh: rpm
002xh: %
003xh: kg
0: Disable
0000B: 0~65535 (No decimal place in Pr.00-25
setting)
0001B: 0.0~6553.5 (One decimal place in Pr.00-25
setting)
0010B: 0.0~655.35(Two decimal place in Pr.00-25
setting)
0011B: 0.0~65.536 (Three decimal place in
Pr.00-25 setting)
Read only
0: Digital keypad
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-16
without direction)
7: Reserved
0: Digital keypad
2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP
disabled.
4: Reserved
5: Communication card (not include CANopen card)
0: STOP key disable
1: STOP key enable
Factory
Setting
0
0
Read
only
Read
Only
00-30
Source of the Master

Frequency Command
HAND
00-31
Source of the Operation

Command HAND
00-32
Digital Keypad STOP

Function
00-33
~
00-47
Reserved
00-48
Display Filter Time (Current)
0.001~65.535 sec
0.100
00-49
Display Filter Time (Keypad)
0.001~65.535 sec
0.100
00-50
Software Version (date)
Read only
#####
11-4
01 Basic Parameters
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
01-00
Max. Operation Frequency
50.00~600.00Hz
01-01
Base Frequency of Motor 1
0.00~600.00Hz
60.00/
50.00
60.00/
50.00
01-02
Max. Output Voltage Setting of

Motor 1
230V: 0.0V~255.0V
460V: 0.0V~510.0V
200.0
400.0
01-03
Mid-point Frequency 1 of
Motor 1
0.00~600.00Hz
3.00
01-04
Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 1
230V: 0.0V~240.0V
460V: 0.0V~480.0V
11.0
22.0
01-05
Motor 1
0.00~600.00Hz
0.50
01-06
230V: 0.0V~240.0V
460V: 0.0V~480.0V
2.0
4.0
01-07
Min. Output Frequency of

Motor 1
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
01-08
Min. Output Voltage of Motor 1
230V: 0.0V~240.0V
460V: 0.0V~480.0V
0.0
0.0
01-09
Start-Up Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0.50
01-10
Output Frequency Upper Limit
0.00~600.00Hz
600.00
01-11
Output Frequency Lower Limit
0.00~600.00Hz
01-12
Accel. Time 1
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second

Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
10.00
10.0
01-13
Decel Time 1
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second

Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
10.00
10.0
01-14
Accel Time 2
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second

Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
10.00
10.0
01-15
Decel Time 2
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second

Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
10.00
10.0
01-16
Accel Time 3
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second

Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
10.00
10.0
01-17
Decel Time 3
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second

Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
10.00
10.0
01-18
Accel Time 4
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second

Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
10.00
10.0
01-19
Decel Time 4
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second

Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
10.00
10.0
01-20
JOG Acceleration Time
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second

Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
10.00
10.0
01-21
JOG Deceleration Time
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second

Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
10.00
10.0
01-22
JOG Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
6.00
01-23
1st/4th Accel/decel Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
01-24
S-curve for Acceleration

Departure Time 1
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second

Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second
0.20
0.2
11-5
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
01-25
S-curve for Acceleration

Arrival Time 2
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second

Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second
0.20
0.2
01-26
S-curve for Deceleration

Departure Time 1
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second

Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second
0.20
0.2
01-27
S-curve for Deceleration

Arrival Time 2
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second

Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second
0.20
0.2
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
01-28
01-29
01-30
01-31
01-32
01-33
Upper limit of Frequency 1

setting not allowed
Lower limit of Frequency 1
setting not allowed
setting not allowed
setting not allowed
setting not allowed
setting not allowed
01-34
Zero-speed Mode
0: Output waiting
1: Zero-speed operation
2: Fmin (the 4th output frequency)
01-35
Max. Output Frequency of

Motor 2
0.00~600.00Hz
60.00/
50.00
01-36
Max. Output Voltage of Motor

2
230V: 0.0V~255.0V
460V: 0.0V~510.0V
200.0
400.0
01-37
Motor 2
0.00~600.00Hz
3.00
01-38
230V: 0.0V~240.0V
460V: 0.0V~480.0V
11.0
22.0
01-39
Motor 2
0.00~600.00Hz
0.50
01-40
230V: 0.0V~240.0V
460V: 0.0V~480.0V
2.0
4.0
01-41
Min. Output Frequency of

Motor 2
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
01-42
230V: 0.0V~240.0V
460V: 0.0V~480.0V
0.0
0.0
01-43
V/f Curve Selection
01-44
Optimal
Acceleration/Deceleration
Setting
01-45
Time Unit for Accel. /Decel.

and S Curve
01-46
CANopen Quick Stop Time
0: V/f curve determined by Pr.01-00~Pr.01-08

1: Curve to the power of 1.5
2: Curve to the power of 2
0: Linear accel. /decel.
1: Auto accel.; linear decel.
2: Linear accel.; auto decel.
3: Auto accel./decel.
4: Linear, stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limit
by Pr.01-21 to 01-22)
0: Unit: 0.01 sec
1: Unit: 0.1sec
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 sec
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.0~6000.0 sec
11-6
0
1.00
02 Digital Input/Output Parameters

Parameter
02-00
02-01
02-02
02-03
02-04
02-05
02-06
02-07
02-08
02-26
02-27
02-28
02-29
02-30
02-31
Explanation
2-wire/3-wire Operation
Control
Multi-function Input
Command 1 (MI1)
Command 2 (MI2)
Command 3 (MI3)
Command 4 (MI4)
Command 5 (MI5)
Command 6 (MI6)
Command 7 (MI7)
Command 8 (MI8)
Input terminal of I/O
extension card (MI10)
Settings
Factory
Setting
0: 2-wire mode, power on for operation control

1: 2-wire mode 2, power on for operation control
2: 3-wire, power on for operation control
0: No function
1: Multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position

command 1
command 2
command 3
command 4
2
3
4
0
5: Reset
6: JOG commandBy KPC-CC01 or external control
7: Acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit
8: The 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection
9: The 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection
10: EF Input (Pr.07-20)
11: B.B input from external (Base Block)
12: Output stop
13: Cancel the setting of optimal accel. /decel. time
14: Switch between motor 1 and motor 2

15: Operation speed command from AVI
16: Operation speed command from ACI
17: Operation speed command from AUI
18: Emergency stop (Pr.07-20)
19: Digital up command
20: Digital down command
21: PID function disabled
22: Clear counter
23: Input the counter value (MI6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
26: TQCPG/FOCPG model selection
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for -connection
31: High torque bias (Pr.11-30)
32: Middle torque bias (Pr.11-31)
33: Low torque bias (Pr.11-32)
34: Switch between multi-step position and
multi-speed control
35: Enable single point position control
36: Enable multi-step position learning function (valid
at stop)
37: Full position control pulse command input enable
38: Disable EEPROM write function
11-7
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
39: Torque command direction

40: Force coast to stop
41: HAND switch
42: AUTO switch
43: Enable resolution selection (Pr.02-48)
44: Reversed direction homing
45: Forward direction homing
46: Homing (ORG)
47: Homing function enable
48: Mechanical gear ratio switch
49: Drive enable
50: Reserved
51: Selection for PLC mode bit0
53: Trigger CANopen quick stop
54~70: Reserved
02-09
02-10
02-11
02-12
02-13
02-14
02-16
02-17
02-36
02-37
02-38
02-39
02-40
02-41
02-42
02-43
02-44
02-45
02-46
UP/DOWN key mode

Constant speed. The
Accel. /Decel. Speed of the
UP/DOWN Key
Response Time
Multi-function Input Mode
Selection
RY1
RY2
(MO1)
(MO2)
Output terminal of the I/O
extension card (MO10)
0: up/down by the accel. /decel. time

1: up/down constant speed (Pr.02-10)
0.01~1.00Hz/ms
0.000~30.000 second
0.005
0000h~FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.
0: No function
11
1: Operation Indication
2: Operation speed attained
3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-22)
5: Zero speed (Frequency command)
6: Zero speed, include STOP(Frequency command)
7: Over torque 1(Pr.06-06~06-08)
8: Over torque 2(Pr.06-09~06-11)
9: Drive is ready
10: Low voltage warningLV(Pr.06-00)
11: Malfunction indication
12: Mechanical brake release(Pr.02-32)
13: Overheat warning (Pr.06-15)
14: Software brake signal indication(Pr.07-00)
15: PID feedback error

16: Slip error (oSL)
17: Terminal count value attained, does not return to 0
(Pr.02-20)
11-8
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
18: Preliminary count value attained, returns to 0

(Pr.02-19)
19: Base Block
20: Warning output
21: Over voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current >= Pr.02-33 (>= 02-33)
28: Output when current <=Pr.02-33 (<= 02-33)
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-34 (>= 02-34)
30: Output when frequency <= Pr.02-34 (<= 02-34)
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: -connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed include stop(actual output frequency)
35: Error output selection 1(Pr.06-23)
39: Position attained (Pr.10-19)
40: Speed attained (including Stop)
41: Multi-position attained
42: Crane function
43: Actual motor speed output <=Pr.02-47
44: Low current output (use with Pr.06-71~06-73)
45: UVW Output Electromagnetic valve Switch
46Reserved
47: Closed brake output
48~49: reserved
50: Output for CANopen control
51: Output for communication card
52: Output for RS485
53~62: Reserved
02-18
02-19
02-20
02-21
02-22
02-23
02-24
02-25
02-32
02-33
02-34
02-35
direction
Terminal counting value
attained (returns to 0)
Preliminary counting value
attained (not return to 0)
Digital Output Gain (DFM)
Desired Frequency
Attained 1
The Width of the Desired
Frequency Attained 1
Desired Frequency
Attained 2
The Width of the Desired
Frequency Attained 2
Brake Delay Time
Output Current Level
Setting for Multi-function
External Terminals
Output frequency setting
for multi-function output
terminal
External Operation Control
Selection after Reset and
0000h~FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.
0~65535
0~65535
1166
0.00600.00Hz
60.00/
50.00
0.00600.00Hz
2.00
0.00600.00Hz
60.00/
50.00
0.00600.00Hz
2.00
0.000~65.000 sec.
0.000
0~100%
0.00~+-60.00HzMotor speed when using PG Card

0: Disable
11-9
0.00
0
Parameter
02-47
02-48
02-49
02-50
02-51
02-52
02-53
02-54
Explanation
Settings
Activate
1: Drive runs if run command exists after reset
Zero-speed Level of Motor
0~65535 rpm
Max. Frequency of
Resolution Switch
Switch the delay time of
Max. output frequency
Status of Multi-function
Input Terminal
Output Terminal
Display External Output
terminal occupied by PLC
Display Analog Input
Terminal occupied by PLC
Display the Saved Memory
of the Frequency
Command Executed by
External Terminal
Factory
Setting
0
0.01~600.00Hz
60.00
0.000~65.000 sec.
0.000
Monitor the status of multi-function input terminals

Monitor the status of multi-function output terminals
Monitor the status of PLC input terminals
Monitor the status of PLC output terminals
Read only
11-10
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
03 Analog Input/Output Parameters

Parameter
03-00
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
Analog Input 1 (AVI)
0: No function
1
0
0
03-01
Analog Input 2(ACI)
1: Frequency command (torque limit under torque

control mode)
03-02
Analog Input 3 (AUI)
2: Torque command (torque limit under speed mode)

3: Torque compensation command
4: PID target value
5: PID feedback signal
6: PTC thermistor input value
7: Positive torque limit
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive/negative torque limit
11: PT100 thermistor input value
12~17: Reserved
03-03
AVI Analog Input Bias
-100.0~100.0%
03-04
ACI Analog Input Bias
-100.0~100.0%
03-05
-100.0~100.0%
03-06
-100.0~100.0%
03-07
03-08
03-09
0: No bias
1: Lower than bias=bias
2: Greater than bias=bias
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving
as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
AUI Analog Positive

Voltage Input Bias
AUI Analog Negative
Voltage Input Bias
Positive/negative Bias
Mode (AVI)
Mode (ACI)
Mode (AUI)
03-10
Reserved
03-11
Analog Input Gain 1 (AVI)
-500.0~500.0%
100.0
03-12
Analog Input Gain 2 (ACI)
-500.0~500.0%
100.0
03-13
-500.0~500.0%
100.0
03-14
-500.0~500.0%
100.0
03-15
0.00~2.00 sec.
0.01
03-16
0.00~2.00 sec.
0.01
03-17
0.00~2.00 sec.
0.01
03-18
Analog Positive Input

Gain 3 (AUI)
Analog Negative Input
Gain 4 (AUI)
Analog Input Filter Time
(AVI)
(ACI)
(AUI)
Addition Function of the
Analog Input
0: Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI)

1: Enable
03-19
Loss of the ACI Signal
0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency
2: Decelerate to 0Hz
3: Stop immediately and display ACE
03-20
(AFM1)
0: Output frequency (Hz)
11-11
Parameter
03-23
Explanation
(AFM2)
Settings
1: Frequency command (Hz)
Factory
Setting
0
2: Motor speed (Hz)

3: Output current (rms)
4: Output voltage
5: DC Bus voltage
6: Power factor
7: Power
8: Output torque
9: AVI
10: ACI
11: AUI
12: Iq current
13: Iq feedback value
14: Id current
15: Id feedback value
16: Vq-axis voltage
17: Vd-axis voltage
18: Torque command
19: PG2 frequency command
20: CANopen analog output
21: RS485 analog output
22: Communication card analog output
23: Constant voltage output
03-21
Gain for Analog Output 1

(AFM1)
0~500.0%
03-22
Analog Output 1 Value in

REV Direction (AFM1)
0: Absolute output voltage

1: Reverse output 0V; Positive output 0-10V
2: Reverse output 5-0V; Positive output 5-10V
03-24
Gain for Analog Output 2

(AFM2)
0~500.0%
0: Absolute output voltage
1: Output 0V in REV direction; output 0-10V in FWD
direction
2: Output 5-0V in REV direction; output 5-10V in FWD
direction
100.0
0
100.0
03-25
Analog Output 2 Value in

REV Direction (AFM2)
03-26
Reserved
03-27
Reserved
03-28
AVI Selection
0: 0-10V
1: 0-20mA
2: 4-20mA
03-29
ACI Selection
0: 4-20mA
1: 0-10V
2: 0-20mA
03-30
03-31
03-32
03-33
Status of PLC Output

Terminal
AFM2 0-20mA Output
Selection
AFM1 DC output setting
level
AFM2 DC Output Setting
Level
Monitor the status of PLC output terminals

0: 0-20mA Output
1: 4-20mA Output
Read
only
0
0.00~100.00%
0.00
0.00~100.00%
0.00
11-12
04 Multi-step Speed Parameters
Settings
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
04-00
1st Step Speed Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
2nd Step Speed

Frequency
3rd Step Speed
Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz
04-01
04-02
04-03
4th Step Speed Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
04-04
0.00~600.00Hz
04-05
0.00~600.00Hz
04-06
0.00~600.00Hz
04-07
0.00~600.00Hz
04-08
0.00~600.00Hz
04-09
0.00~600.00Hz
04-10
0.00~600.00Hz
04-11
0.00~600.00Hz
04-12
0.00~600.00Hz
04-13
0.00~600.00Hz
04-14
10th Step Speed

Frequency
11th Step Speed
Frequency
12th Step Speed
Frequency
13th Step Speed
Frequency
14th Step Speed
Frequency
15th Step Speed
Frequency
Position command 1
(revolution)
Position command 1
(pulse)
Position command 2
(revolution)
Position command 2
(pulse)
Position command 3
(revolution)
Position command 3
(pulse)
Position command 4
(revolution)
Position command 4
(pulse)
Position command 5
(revolution)
Position command 5
(pulse)
Position command 6
(revolution)
Position command 6
(pulse)
Position command 7
(revolution)
Position command 7
(pulse)
Position command 8
(revolution)
Position command 8
(pulse)
0.00~600.00Hz
04-15
04-16
04-17
04-18
04-19
04-20
04-21
04-22
04-23
04-24
04-25
04-26
04-27
04-28
04-29
04-30
-30000~30000
-32767~32767
-30000~30000
-32767~32767
-30000~30000
-32767~32767
-30000~30000
-32767~32767
-30000~30000
-32767~32767
-30000~30000
-32767~32767
-30000~30000
-32767~32767
-30000~30000
-32767~32767
11-13
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Parameter
04-31
04-32
04-33
04-34
04-35
04-36
04-37
04-38
04-39
04-40
04-41
04-42
04-43
04-44
Explanation
Position command 9
(revolution)
Position command 9
(pulse)
Position command 10
(revolution)
Position command 10
(pulse)
Position command 11
(revolution)
Position command 11
(pulse)
Position command 12
(revolution)
Position command 12
(pulse)
Position command 13
(revolution)
Position command 13
(pulse)
Position command 14
(revolution)
Position command 14
(pulse)
Position command 15
(revolution)
Position command 15
(pulse)
Settings
-30000~30000
-32767~32767
-30000~30000
-32767~32767
-30000~30000
-32767~32767
-30000~30000
-32767~32767
-30000~30000
-32767~32767
-30000~30000
-32767~32767
-30000~30000
-32767~32767
11-14
Factory
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
05 Motor Parameters
Parameter
05-00
05-01
05-02
05-03
05-04
05-05
05-06
05-07
05-08
05-09
05-10 ~
05-12
Full-load Current of
Induction Motor 1(A)
Rated Power of Induction
Motor 1(kW)
0: No function
1: Measure induction motor in dynamic status (motor
spinning)
(Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current)
2: Measure induction motor in static status (motor not
spinning)
3: No function
4: Measure PM motor magnetic pole and PG origin in
static status (motor not spinning)
5: Measure PM motor parameter in dynamic status
(motor spinning)
6: Measure IM motor flux curve in dynamic status
12: FOC Sensorless inertia estimation
10~120% of drives rated current
Factory
Setting
#.##
0~655.35kW
#.##
Rated Speed of Induction

Motor 1 (rpm)
0~65535
1710(60Hz 4poles) ; 1410(50Hz 4 poles)
1710
Pole Number of Induction

Motor 1
No-load Current of
Induction Motor 1 (A)
Stator Resistance (Rs) of
Induction Motor 1
Rotor Resistance (Rr) of
Induction Motor 1
Magnetizing Inductance
(Lm) of Induction Motor 1
Stator Inductance (Lx) of
Induction Motor 1
2~20
0~ Pr.05-01 factory setting
#.##
0~65535m
0~65535m
0~65535mH
0~65535mH
Reserved
10~120%
#.##
0~655.35kW
#.##
Rated Speed of Induction

Motor 2 (rpm)
0~65535
1710(60Hz 4 poles) ; 1410(50Hz 4 poles)
1710
Pole Number of Induction

Motor 2
No-load Current of
Stator Resistance (Rs) of
Induction Motor 2
Rotor Resistance (Rr) of
Induction Motor 2
Magnetizing Inductance
(Lm) of Induction Motor 2
Stator Inductance (Lx) of
Induction Motor 2
2~20
05-22
05-23
05-14
05-15
05-16
05-17
05-18
05-19
05-20
05-21
Motor Auto Tuning
Settings
Full-load Current of
Rated Power of Induction
Motor 2 (kW)
05-13
Explanation
0~ Pr.05-01 factory setting
#.##
0~65535m
0~65535m
0~65535mH
0~65535mH
Induction Motor 1/ 2
Selection
1: motor 1
2: motor 2
Frequency for
Y-connection/-connectio
n Switch of Induction
Motor
0.00~600.00Hz
60.00
11-15
Parameter
05-24
05-25
05-26
~
05-30
05-31
05-32
05-33
05-34
05-35
05-36
05-37
05-38
05-39
05-40
05-41
05-42
05-43
Explanation
Motor
Delay Time for
Motor
Settings
0: Disable
1: Enable
Factory
Setting
0
0.000~60.000 sec.
0.200
Reserved
Accumulative Motor
Operation Time (Min)
Accumulative Motor
Operation Time (day)
Induction Motor and
Permanent Magnet Motor
Selection
Full-load current of
Rated Power of
Rated speed of
Pole number of
Inertia of Permanent
Magnet Motor
Stator Resistance of PM
Motor
Ld
Lq
Offset angle of PM Motor
pole
Ke parameter of PM Motor
00~1439
00~65535
0: Induction Motor
1: Permanent Magnet Motor
0.00~655.35Amps
0.00~655.35kW
0.00
0.00
0~65535rpm
2000
0~65535
10
2
0.0~6553.5 kg.cm
0.000~65.535
0.00~655.35mH
0.00~655.35mH
0.0~360.0
0~65535 (Unit: V/1000rpm)
11-16
0.0
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.0
0
06 Protection Parameters
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
06-00
Low Voltage Level
230V: 150.0~220.0Vdc
For Frame E and the frames above E: 190.0~220.0V
460V: 300.0~440.0Vdc
For frame E and the frames above E: 380.0~440.0V
06-01
Over-voltage Stall
Prevention
0: No function
230V: 0.0~450.0Vdc
460V: 0.0~900.0Vdc
06-02
Reserved
06-03
06-04
06-05
06-06
06-07
06-08
06-09
06-10
06-11
Over-current Stall
Prevention during
Acceleration
Over-current Stall
Prevention during
Operation
Factory
Setting
200.0
400.0
380.0
760.0
Normal Load: 0~160%(100%: drives rated current)

Heavy Load: 0~180%(100%: drives rated current)
120
150
Normal Load: 0~160%(100%: drives rated current)

Heavy Load: 0~180%(100%: drives rated current)
120
150
Accel. /Decel. Time

Selection of Stall
Prevention at Constant
Speed
0: by current accel/decel time

1: by the 1st accel/decel time
2: by the 2nd accel/decel time
3: by the 3rd accel/decel time
4: by the 4th accel/decel time
5: by auto accel/decel
Over-torque Detection
Selection (OT1)
0: No function
1: Over-torque detection during constant speed
operation, continue to operate after detection
operation, stop operation after detection
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to
operate after detection
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop
operation after detection
Level (OT1)
Time (OT1)
Selection (OT2)
10~250% (100%: drives rated current)
120
0.0~60.0 sec.
0.1
0: No function
operation, continue to operate after detection
operation, stop operation after detection
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop
Level (OT2)
Time (OT2)
120
0.0~60.0 sec.
0.1
06-12
Current Limit
0~250% (100%: drives rated current
170
06-13
Electronic Thermal Relay

Selection (Motor 1)
0: Inverter motor
1: Standard motor
2: Disable
06-14
Electronic Thermal
Characteristic for Motor 1
30.0~600.0 sec.
60.0
06-15
Heat Sink Over-heat (OH)

Warning
0.0~110.0
85.0
06-16
Stall Prevention Limit
0100% (Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04)
11-17
50
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
Level
06-17
06-18
06-19
06-20
06-21
06-22
Present Fault Record

Second Most Recent Fault
Record
Third Most Recent Fault
Record
Fourth Most Recent Fault
Record
Fifth Most Recent Fault
Record
Sixth Most Recent Fault
Record
0: No fault record
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed(ocn)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
6: Over-current at stop (ocS)

7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Stop mid-low voltage (LvS)

15: Phase loss protection (OrP)
16: IGBT over-heat (oH1)
17: Capacitance over-heat (oH2)
18: tH1o (TH1 open: IGBT over-heat

protection error)
19: tH2o (TH2 open: capacitance over-heat
protection error)
20: Reserved
21: Drive over-load (oL)
22: Electronics thermal relay 1 (EoL1)
24: Motor overheat (oH3) (PTC)
25: Reserved
26: Over-torque 1 (ot1)
28: Low current (uC)

29: Home limit error (LMIT)
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Reserved
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: Ground current detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AUE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
46: PG ref loss (PGr1)
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
51: External Base Block (bb)
11-18
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
52: Password error (PcodE)

53: Reserved
54: Communication error (CE1)
58: Communication Time-out (CE10)
59: PU Time-out (CP10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection/-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)
64: Electromagnet switch error (ryF)
65 : PG Card Error (PGF5)

66-72: Reserved
73: External safety gate S1
74~78: Reserved
79: U phase over current (Uocc)
80: V phase over current (Vocc)
81: W phase over current (Wocc)
82: U phase output phase loss (OPHL)
83: V phase output phase loss (OPHL)
84: W phase output phase loss (OPHL)
85~100: Reserved
101: CANopen software disconnect1 (CGdE)
102: CAN open software disconnect2 (CHbE)
103: CANopen synchronous error (CSYE)
104: CANopen hardware disconnect (CbFE)
105: CANopen index setting error (CIdE)
106: CANopen slave station number setting error
(CAdE)
107: CANopen index setting exceed limit (CFrE)
111: Reserved
06-23
Fault Output Option 1
0~65535(refer to bit table for fault code)
06-24
06-25
06-26
06-27
Electronic Thermal Relay

Selection 2 (Motor 2)
0: Inverter motor
1: Standard motor
2: Disable
06-28
Electronic Thermal
Characteristic for Motor 2
30.0~600.0 sec
06-29
PTC Detection Selection
0: Warn and keep operation

1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
06-30
PTC Level
0.0100.0%
06-31
06-32
06-33
Frequency Command for

Malfunction
Output Frequency at
Malfunction
Output Voltage at
Malfunction
0.00~655.35 Hz
0.00~655.35 Hz
0.0~6553.5 V
06-34
DC Voltage at Malfunction
0.0~6553.5 V
06-35
Output Current at
0.00~655.35 Amp
11-19
60.0
50.0
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
Parameter
06-36
06-37
06-38
06-39
06-40
06-41
06-42
Explanation
Malfunction
IGBT Temperature at
Malfunction
Capacitance Temperature
at Malfunction
Motor Speed in rpm at
Malfunction
Torque Command at
Malfunction
Input Terminal at
Malfunction
Output Terminal at
Malfunction
Drive Status at
Malfunction
Settings
Factory
Setting
0000h~FFFFh
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
0000h~FFFFh
Read
only
0.0~6553.5
0.0~6553.5
0~65535
0~65535
0000h~FFFFh
Read
only
06-43
Reserved
06-44
Reserved
06-45
Treatment for Output

Phase Loss Detection
(OPHL)

3: No warning
06-46
Deceleration Time of
Output Phase Loss
0.000~65.535 sec
0.500
06-47
Current Bandwidth
0.00~655.35%
1.00
06-48
DC Brake Time of Output

Phase Loss
0.000~65.535sec
0.000
06-49
Reserved
06-50
Time for Input Phase Loss

Detection
0.00~600.00 sec.
0.20
06-51
Reserved
06-52
Ripple of Input Phase

Loss
230V model: 0.0~160.0 Vdc

460V model: 0.0~320.0 Vdc
30.0
/60.0
06-53
Treatment for the detected

Input Phase Loss (OrP)
06-54
Reserved
0: warn and ramp to stop

1: warn and coast to stop
06-55
Derating Protection
0: constant rated current and limit carrier wave by

load current and temperature
1: constant carrier frequency and limit load current
by setting carrier wave
2: constant rated current(same as setting 0), but
close current limit
06-56
PT100 Detection Level 1
0.000~10.000V
5.000
06-57
0.000~10.000V
7.000
06-58
PT100 Level 1 Frequency

Protect
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
06-59
Reserved
0.0~6553.5 %
60.0
0.0~6553.5 %
0.10
06-60
06-61
06-62
Software Detection GFF

Current Level
Software Detection GFF
Filter Time
Disable Level of dEb
230V series: 0.0~220.0 Vdc

460V series: 0.0~440.0 Vdc
11-20
180.0
/360.0
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
06-63
Fault Record 1 (Min)
0~64799 min
06-64
0~64799 min
06-65
0~64799 min
06-66
0~64799 min
06-67
0~64799 min
06-68
0~64799 min
06-69
Days of operation
Read only
06-70
Minutes of operation
Read only
06-71
Low Current Setting Level
0.0 ~ 6553.5 %
0.0
06-72
Low Current Detection

Time
0.00 ~ 655.35sec
0.00
Treatment for low current
0 : No function
1 : Warn and coast to stop
2 : Warn and ramp to stop by 2nd deceleration time
3 : Warn and operation continue
06-73
11-21
07 Special Parameters
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
380.0
760.0
07-00
Software Brake Level
230V: 350.0~450.0Vdc
460V: 700.0~900.0Vdc
07-01
DC Brake Current Level
0~100%
07-02
DC Brake Time at Start-up
0.0~60.0 sec.
0.0
07-03
DC Brake Time at Stop
0.0~60.0 sec.
0.0
07-04
Startup Frequency for DC

Brake
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
07-05
Reserved
07-06
Restart after Momentary

Power Loss
0: Stop operation
1: Speed search for last frequency command
2: Speed search for minimum output frequency
07-07
Maximum Power Loss

Duration
0.1~20.0 sec.
2.0
07-08
Base Block Time
0.1~5.0 sec.
0.5
07-09
Current Limit for Speed

Search
20~200%
50
07-10
Treatment to Reboots After

Fault
0: Stop operation
1: Speed search starts with current speed
2: Speed search starts with minimum output frequency
07-11
# of Automatic Reboots
After Fault
0~10
07-12
Speed Search during

Start-up
0: Disable
1: Speed search for maximum output frequency
2: Speed search for start-up motor frequency
3: Speed search for minimum output frequency
07-13
Decel. Time to Momentary

Power Loss
0: Disable
1: 1st decel. time
2: 2nd decel. time
3: 3rd decel. time
4: 4th decel. time
5: current decel. time
6: Auto decel. time
07-14
DEB Return Time
0.0~25.0sec
0.0
07-15
Dwell Time at Accel.
0.00 ~ 600.00sec
0.00
07-16
Dwell Frequency at Accel.
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
0.00
07-17
Dwell Time at Decel.
0.00 ~ 600.00sec
0.00
07-18
Dwell Frequency at Decel.
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
0.00
07-19
Fan Cooling Control
0: Fan always ON
1: 1 minute after the AC motor drive stops, fan will be
OFF
2: When the AC motor drive runs, the fan is ON. When
the AC motor drive stops, the fan is OFF
3: Fan turns ON when preliminary heat sink
temperature (around 60oC) is attained.
4: Fan always OFF
11-22
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
07-20
Emergency Stop (EF) &

Force to Stop Selection
0: Coast stop
1: By deceleration Time 1
5: System Deceleration
6: Automatic Deceleration
07-21
Auto Energy-saving
Operation
0: Disable
1: Enable
07-22
Energy-saving Gain
101000%
07-23
Auto Voltage
Regulation(AVR) Function
0: Enable AVR
1: Disable AVR
2: Disable AVR during deceleration
07-24
07-25
07-26
07-27
07-28
Reserved
07-29
07-30
Filter Time of Torque

Command (V/F and SVC
control mode)
Filter Time of Slip
Compensation (V/F and
SVC control mode)
Torque Compensation
Gain (V/F and SVC control
mode)
Slip Compensation Gain
(V/F and SVC control
mode)
Factory
Setting
0
100
0
0.001~10.000 sec
0.020
0.001~10.000 sec
0.100
0~10
0.00~10.00
0.00
Slip Deviation Level
0.0~100.0%
Detection Time of Slip

Deviation
0.0~10.0 sec
1.0
07-31
Over Slip Treatment

3: No warning
07-32
Motor Hunting Gain
0~10000
1000
07-33
Recovery Time to
Pr.07-11 (# of automatic
reboots after fault)
0.0~6000.0 sec
60.0
11-23
08 High-function PID Parameters

Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
08-00
Input Terminal for PID

Feedback
0: No function
1: Negative PID feedback: input from external terminal
AVI (Pr.03-00)
2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip
direction)
3: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
4: Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI
(Pr.03-00)
5: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip
direction)
6: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
08-01
Proportional Gain (P)
0.0~500.0%
80.0
08-02
Integral Time (I)
0.00~100.00sec
1.00
08-03
Derivative Control (D)
0.00~1.00sec
0.00
0.0~100.0%
100.0
0.0~110.0%
100.0
08-04
08-05
Upper Limit of Integral

Control
PID Output Frequency
Limit
08-06
Reserved
08-07
PID Delay Time
0.0~ 35sec
0.0
08-08
Feedback Signal
Detection Time
0.0~3600.0sec
0.0
08-09
Feedback Fault Treatment

3: Warn and operate at last frequency
08-10
Sleep Frequency
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
0.00
08-11
Wake-up Frequency
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
0.00
08-12
Sleep Time
0.0 ~ 6000.0sec
0.0
08-13
PID Deviation Level
1.0 ~ 50.0%
10.0
08-14
PID Deviation Time
0.1~300.0sec
5.0
08-15
Filter Time for PID

Feedback
0.1~300.0sec
5.0
08-16
PID Compensation
Selection
0: Parameter setting
1: Analog input
08-17
PID Compensation
-100.0~+100.0%
08-18
Reserved
08-19
Reserved
08-20
PID Mode Selection
0: Serial connection
1: Parallel connection
08-21
Enable PID to Change

Operation Direction
0: Operation direction can be changed

1: Operation direction can not be changed
11-24
09 Communication Parameters
Parameter
09-00
09-01
Explanation
COM1 Communication
Address
COM1 Transmission
Speed
Settings
1~254
4.8115.2Kbps
Factory
Setting
1
9.6
09-02
COM1 Transmission Fault

Treatment
0: Warn and continue operation

3: No warning and continue operation
09-03
COM1 Time-out Detection
0.0100.0 sec.
0.0
0: 7N1 (ASCII)
1: 7N2 (ASCII)
2: 7E1 (ASCII)
3: 7O1 (ASCII)
4: 7E2 (ASCII)
5: 7O2 (ASCII)
6: 8N1 (ASCII)
7: 8N2 (ASCII)
8: 8E1 (ASCII)
9: 8O1 (ASCII)
10: 8E2 (ASCII)
11: 8O2 (ASCII)
12: 8N1 (RTU)
13: 8N2 (RTU)
14: 8E1 (RTU)
15: 8O1 (RTU)
16: 8E2 (RTU)
17: 8O2 (RTU)
09-04
COM1 Communication
Protocol
09-05
~
09-08
Reserved
09-09
Response Delay Time
0.0~200.0ms
09-10
Main Frequency of the

Communication
0.00~600.00Hz
09-11
Block Transfer 1
0~65535
09-12
Block Transfer 2
0~65535
09-13
Block Transfer 3
0~65535
09-14
Block Transfer 4
0~65535
09-15
Block Transfer 5
0~65535
09-16
Block Transfer 6
0~65535
09-17
Block Transfer 7
0~65535
09-18
Block Transfer 8
0~65535
09-19
Block Transfer 9
0~65535
09-20
Block Transfer 10
0~65535
09-21
Block Transfer 11
0~65535
09-22
Block Transfer 12
0~65535
09-23
Block Transfer 13
0~65535
09-24
Block Transfer 14
0~65535
09-25
Block Transfer 15
0~65535
11-25
2.0
60.00
Parameter
Explanation
09-26
Block Transfer 16
09-27
~
09-29
Reserved
09-30
Communication Decoding
Method
09-31
~
09-34
Reserved
09-35
09-36
Settings
Factory
Setting
0~65535
0: by 20XX
1: by 60XX
PLC Address
1~254
CANopen Slave Address
0: Disable
1~127
09-37
CANopen Speed
0: 1M
1: 500k
2: 250k
3: 125k
4: 100k (Delta only)
5: 50k
09-38
CANopen Frequency Gain
1.00 ~ 2.00
09-39
CANopen Warning Record
09-40
CANopen Decoding
Method
bit 0: CANopen Guarding Time out

bit 1: CANopen Heartbeat Time out
bit 2: CANopen SYNC Time out
bit 3: CANopen SDO Time out
bit 4: CANopen SDO buffer overflow
bit 5: Can Bus Off
bit 6: Error protocol of CANopen
0: Communication definition of C2000 series
1: CANopen DS402 Standard
0: Node Reset State
1: Com Reset State
2: Boot up State
3: Pre Operation State
4: Operation State
5: Stop State
0: Not ready for use state
1: Inhibit start state
2: Ready to switch on state
3: Switched on state
4: Enable operation state
7: Quick Stop Active state
13: Err Reaction Activation state
14: Error state
bit0: reset address 20XX to 0.
bit1: reset address 264X to 0
bit2: reset address 26AX to 0
bit3: reset address 60XX to 0
1.00
09-41
CANopen Communication
Status
09-42
CANopen Control Status
09-43
Reset CANopen Index
09-44
Reserved
09-45
CANopen Master Function
0: Disable
1: Enable
09-46
CANopen Master Address
1~127
100
09-47
~
09-59
Reserved
09-60
Identifications for
Communication Card
0: No communication card
1: DeviceNet Slave
2: Profibus-DP Slave
##
11-26
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
3: CANopen Slave/Master
4: Modbus-TCP Slave
5: Ethernet/IP Slave
6~8: Reserved
09-61
Firmware Version of
Communication Card
Read only
##
09-62
Product Code
Read only
##
09-63
Error Code
Read only
##
09-64
~
09-69
Reserved
09-70
Address of
Communication Card
DeviceNet: 0-63
Profibus-DP: 1-125
Standard DeviceNet:
0: 100Kbps
1: 125Kbps
2: 250Kbps
3: 1Mbps (Delta Only)
09-71
Setting of DeviceNet
Speed
09-72
Other Setting of
DeviceNet Speed
09-73
Reserved
09-74
Reserved
09-75
09-76
09-77
09-78
09-79
09-80
09-81
09-82
09-83
09-84
09-85
IP Configuration of the
Communication Card
IP Address 1 of the
Communication Card
IP Address 2 of the
Communication Card
IP Address 3 of the
Communication Card
IP Address 4 of the
Communication Card
Address Mask 1 of the
Communication Card
Communication Card
Communication Card
Communication Card
Getway Address 1 of the
Communication Card
Communication Card
Non standard DeviceNet: (Delta Only)

0: 10Kbps
1: 20Kbps
2: 50Kbps
3: 100Kbps
4: 125Kbps
5: 250Kbps
6: 500Kbps
7: 800Kbps
8: 1Mbps
0: Disable
In this mode, baud rate can only be 0,1,2,3 in
standard DeviceNet speed
1: Enable
In this mode, the baud rate of DeviceNet can be
same as CANopen (0-8).
0: Static IP
1: Dynamic IP (DHCP)
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
11-27
Parameter
09-86
09-87
09-88
Explanation
Communication Card
Communication Card
Password for
Communication Card
(Low word)
09-89
Password for
Communication Card
(High word)
09-90
Reset Communication
Card
09-91
Additional Setting for

Communication Card
09-92
Status of Communication
Card
Settings
Factory
Setting
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0: No function
1: Reset, return to factory setting
Bit0: Enable IP filter
Bit1: Enable to write internet parameters (1bit).
Bit 1: Enable to write internet parameters (1bit). This bit
will change to disable when it finishes saving the
internet parameter updates.
Bit 2: Enable login password (1bit). This bit will be
changed to disable when it finishes saving the
internet parameter updates.
Bit 0: password enable
When the communication card is set with
password, this bit is enabled. When the password
is clear, this bit is disabled.
11-28
10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters

NOTE
Parameter

Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
10-00
Encoder Type Selection
0: Disable
1: ABZ
2: ABZ (Delta Encoder for PM motor)
3: Resolver (Standard encoder for PM motor)
4: ABZ/UVW (Standard encoder for PM motor)
10-01
Encoder Pulse
1~20000
600
Encoder Input Type

Setting
0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase
B leads in a reverse run command
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase
A leads in a reverse run command
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
input. (low input=reverse direction, high input=forward
direction)
input. (low input=forward direction, high input=reverse
direction)
5: Single-phase input
1~255
1~65535
100
1~65535
100
1~65535
100
1~65535
100
10-02
10-03
10-04
10-05
10-06
10-07
Output Setting for

Frequency Division
(denominator)
Electrical Gear at Load
Side A1
Electrical Gear at Motor
Side B1
Electrical Gear at Load
Side A2
Electrical Gear at Motor
Side B2

0.0~10.0sec
0: No function
0~120%
0: No function
10-08
Treatment for Encoder

Feedback Fault
10-09
Detection Time of Encoder

Feedback Fault
10-10
Encoder Stall Level
10-11

Stall
0.0 ~ 2.0sec
0.1
10-12

Stall

10-13
Encoder Slip Range
0~50% (0: disable)
50
10-14

Slip
0.0~10.0sec
0.5
10-15

Stall and Slip Error
10-16
Pulse Input Type Setting

0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase
B leads in a reverse run command
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase
A leads in a reverse run command
input. (L=reverse direction, H=forward direction).
input. (L=forward direction, H=reverse direction).
5: Single-phase input
11-29
2
1.0
115
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
10-17
Electrical Gear A
1~5000
100
10-18
Electrical Gear B
1~5000
100
10-19
Positioning for Encoder

Position
Range for Encoder
Position Attained
0~65535pulse
0~65535pulse
10
Filter Time (PG2)
0~65.535 sec
0.100
10-22
Speed Mode (PG2)
0: Electronic Frequency
1: Mechanical Frequency (base on pole pair)
10-23
Reserved
0~65535
1.0~100.0Hz
40.0
0.0~2.0%fN
10.0
1~1000ms
50
33~100%Tr
100
10-20
10-21
10-24
10-25
10-26
10-27
10-28
FOC&TQC Function
Control
FOC Bandwidth of
Speed Observer
FOC Minimum Stator
Frequency
FOC Low-pass Filter Time
Constant
FOC Excitation Current
Rise Time
11-30
11 Advanced Parameters
NOTE
Parameter

Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
11-00
System Control
bit 0: Auto tuning for ASR and APR

bit 1: Inertia estimate (only for FOCPG mode)
bit 2: Zero servo
bit 3: Dead Time compensation closed
11-01
Per Unit of System Inertia
1~65535256=1PU
400
11-02
11-03
11-04
ASR1/ASR2 Switch
Frequency
ASR1 Low-speed
Bandwidth
ASR2 High-speed
Bandwidth
0.00~600.00Hz (0: Disable)
7.00
1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
10
1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
10
11-05
Zero-speed Bandwidth
1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
10
11-06
ASR Control ( P) 1
0~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
10
11-07
ASR Control (I) 1
0.000~10.000 sec
11-08
ASR Control ( P) 2
0~40Hz (IM)/ 0~100Hz (PM)
11-09
ASR Control (I) 2
0.000~10.000 sec
11-10
P Gain of Zero Speed
0~40Hz (IM)/ 0~100Hz (PM)
11-11
I Gain of Zero Speed
0.000~10.000 sec
11-12
Gain for ASR Speed Feed

Forward
0~100%
11-13
PDFF Gain
0~200
30
11-14
Low-pass Filter Time of

ASR Output
0.000~0.350 sec
11-15
Notch Filter Depth
0~20db
11-16
Notch Filter Frequency
0.00~200.00Hz
0.0
0~500%
200
0~500%
200
0~500%
200
0~500%
200
0~200%
90
0~200%
90
0~150%
65
Forward Motor Torque

Limit
Forward Regenerative
Torque Limit
Reverse Motor Torque
Limit
Reverse Regenerative
Torque Limit
Gain Value of Flux
Weakening Curve for
Motor 1
Gain Value of Flux
Weakening Curve for
Motor 2
Speed Response of Flux
Weakening Area
0.100
10
0.100
10
0.100
0.008
0
11-17
11-18
11-19
11-20
11-21
11-22
11-23
11-24
APR Gain
0.00~40.00Hz (IM)/ 0~100.00Hz (PM)
11-25
Gain Value of APR Feed

Forward
0~100
11-26
APR Curve Time
0.00~655.35 sec
3.00
11-27
Max. Torque Command
0~500%
100
11-28
Source of Torque Offset
0: No function
1: Analog signal input (Pr.03-00)
10.00
30
11-31
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
2: RS485 communication (Pr.11-29)

3: Control by external terminal (Pr.11-30~11-32)
11-29
Torque Offset Setting
0~100%
0.0
11-30
High Torque Offset
0~100%
30.0
11-31
Middle Torque Offset
0~100%
20.0
11-32
Low Torque Offset
0~100%
10.0
11-33
Source of Torque
Command
0: Digital keypad
1: RS-485 communication (Pr.11-34)
2: Analog input (Pr.03-00)
3: CANopen
4: Reserved
5: Communication extension card
11-34
Torque Command
-100.0~+100.0% (Pr.11-27*11-34)
11-35
Filter Time of Torque

Command
0.000~1.000sec
11-36
Speed Limit Selection
11-37
11-38
11-39
Forward Speed Limit

(torque mode)
Reverse Speed Limit
(torque mode)
Command Source of
Point-to-Point Position
Control
11-41
Reserved
11-42
Reserved
11-44
11-45
0: Pr.11-37~11-38
1: By frequency command (Pr.00-20)
0~120%
10
0~120%
10
0: External terminal
1: Reserved
2: Reserved
3: CAN
4: PLC
5: Communication card
Reserved
11-40
11-43
0.000
Max. Frequency of Pointto-Point Position Control

Accel. Time of Point-to
Point Position Control
Decel. Time of Point-to
Point Position Control
0.00~327.67Hz
0.00
0.00~655.35 sec
1.00
0.00~655.35 sec
3.00
11-32
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings

00 Drive Parameters
The parameter can be set during operation.
Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive

Factory Setting: #.#
Settings
Read Only
Display AC Motor Drive Rated Current

Settings
Read Only
Pr. 00-00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive. Using the following table to check if
Pr.00-01 setting is the rated current of the AC motor drive. Pr.00-01 corresponds to the identity
code Pr.00-01.
The factory setting is the rated current for normal duty. Please set Pr.00-16 to 1 to display the rated
current for the heavy duty.
230V Series
Frame
kW
HP
Pr.00-00
Rated Current for
Heavy Duty (A)
Rated Current for
Normal Duty (A)
Frame
kW
HP
Pr.00-00
Rated Current for
Heavy Duty (A)
Rated Current for
Normal Duty (A)
0.75
1.0
4
1.5
2.0
6
2.2
3.0
8
3.7
5.0
10
5.5
7.5
12
7.5
10
14
11
15
16
15
20
18
18.5
25
20
22
30
22
4.8
7.1
10
16
24
31
47
62
71
86
11
17
25
33
49
65
75
90
30
40
24
37
50
26
45
60
28
E
50
75
30
75
100
32
F
90
125
34
114
139
171
204
242
329
120
146
180
215
255
346
460V Series
Frame
kW
0.75
HP
1
Pr.00-00
5
Rated Current for
2.9
Heavy Duty (A)
Rated Current for
3.0
Normal Duty (A)
Frame
kW
HP
Pr.00-00
Rated Current for
Heavy Duty (A)
Rated Current for
Normal Duty (A)
1.5
2
7
2.2
3
9
3.7
5
11
4.0
5
93
5.5
7.5
13
7. 5
10
15
11
15
17
15
20
19
18.5
25
21
22
30
23
30
40
25
3.8
5.7
8.1
9.5
11
17
23
30
36
43
57
4.0
6.0
9.0
10.5
12
18
24
32
38
45
60
37
50
27
45
60
29
55
75
31
75
100
33
90
125
35
110
150
37
132
175
39
160
215
41
185
250
43
220
300
45
280
375
47
315
425
49
355
475
51
69
86
105
143
171
209
247
295
352
437
523
585
649
73
91
110
150
180
220
260
310
370
460
550
616
683
12-1
Parameter Reset
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: No Function
1: Write protection for parameters
6: Reset PLC (including CANopen Master Index)
7: Reset CANopen Index (Slave)
8: keypad lock
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings(base frequency is 50Hz)
10: All parameters are reset to factory settings (base frequency is 60Hz)
When it is set to 1, all parameters are read only except Pr.00-02~00-08 and it can be used with
password setting for password protection. It needs to set Pr.00-02 to 0 before changing other
parameter settings.
When it is set to 9 or 10: all parameters are reset to factory settings. If the password is set in
Pr.00-08, it needs to input the password set in Pr.00-07 to reset to factory settings.
When it is set to 6: clear internal PLC program (includes the related settings of PLC internal
CANopen master)
When it is set to 7: reset the related settings of CANopen slave.
Start-up Display Selection

Factory setting:
Settings
0: Display the frequency command (F)

1: Display the actual output frequency (H)
2: Display User define (U)
3: Output current ( A)
This parameter determines the start-up display page after power is applied to the drive. User
defined choice display according to the setting in Pr.00-04.
Content of Multi-function Display

Factory setting: 3
Settings
0: Display output current (A)

1: Display counter value (c)
2: Display actual output frequency (H.)
3: Display DC-BUS voltage (v)
4: Display output voltage (E)
5: Display output power angle (n)
6: Display output power in kW (P)
7: Display actual motor speed rpm (r = 00: positive speed; -00 negative
speed)
8: Display estimate output torque % (t = 00: positive torque; -00 negative
torque) (t)
9: Display PG feedback (G) (refer to Note 1)
10: Display PID feedback in % (b)
12-2
11: Display AVI in % (1.), 0~10V/4-20mA/0-20mA corresponds to 0~100%

(Refer to Note 2)
12: Display ACI in % (2.),
4~20mA/0~10V/0-20mA corresponds to
0~100%Refer to Note 2
13: Display AUI in % (3.),
-10V~10V corresponds to -100~100%(Refer to
Note 2)
14: Display the temperature of IGBT in oC (i.)
15: Display the temperature of capacitance in oC (c.)
16: The status of digital input (ON/OFF) refer to Pr.02-20 (i) (Refer to
Note3)
17: Display digital output status ON/OFF (Pr.02-15) (o) (refer to NOTE 4)
18: Display the multi-step speed that is executing (S)
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (d) (refer to NOTE 3)
20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (0.) (refer to NOTE
4)
21: Actual motor position (PG1 of PG card). When the motor direction
changes or the drive stops, the counter will start from 0 (display value
restarts counting from 0) (Max. 65535) (P.)
22: Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) (S.)
23: Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card) (max. 65535) (q.)
24: Position command tracing error (E.)
25: Overload counting (0.00~100.00%) (h.)
26: GFF Ground Fault (Unit :%)(G.)
27:DC Bus voltage ripple (Unit: Vdc)(r.)
28: Display PLC register D1043 data (C) display in hexadecimal
29: Display PM motor pole section (EMC-PG01U application) (4.)
30 : Display output of user defined (U)
31 : H page x 00-05 Display user Gain(K)
32: Number of actual motor revolution during operation (PG card plug in
and Z phase signal input) (Z.)
NOTE
1. When Pr.10-01 is set to 1000 and Pr.10-02 is set to 1/2, the display range for PG feedback will be from
0 to 4000.
When Pr.10-01 is set to 1000 and Pr.10-02 is set to 3/4/5, the display range for PG feedback will be
from 0 to 1000.
Home position: If it has Z phase, Z phase will be regarded as home position. Otherwise, home position
will be the encoder start up position.
2. It can display negative values when setting analog input bias (Pr.03-03~03-10).
Example: assume that AVI input voltage is 0V, Pr.03-03 is 10.0% and Pr.03-07 is 4 (Serve bias as the
center).
3. Example: If REV, MI1 and MI6 are ON, the following table shows the status of the terminals.
0: OFF, 1: ON
12-3
Terminal MI15 MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD
1
0
Status
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
MI10~MI15 are the terminals for extension cards (Pr.02-26~02-31).
If REV, MI1 and MI6 are ON, the value is 0000 0000 1000 0110 in binary and 0086h in HEX. When
Pr.00-04 is set to 16 or 19, it will display 0086h with LED U is ON on the keypad KPC-CE01. The
setting 16 is the status of digital input by Pr.02-12 setting and the setting 19 is the corresponding CPU
pin status of digital input. User can set to 16 to monitor digital input status and then set to 19 to check if
the wire is normal.
4. Assume that RY1: Pr.02-13 is set to 9 (Drive ready). After applying the power to the AC motor drive, if
there is no other abnormal status, the contact will be ON. The display status will be shown as follows.
N.O. switch status:
Terminal
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
MO2 MO1 Reserved RY2 RY1
Status 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
At the meanwhile, if Pr.00-04 is set to 17 or 20, it will display in hexadecimal 0001h with LED U is ON
on the keypad. The setting 17 is the status of digital output by Pr.02-18 setting and the setting 20 is the
corresponding CPU pin status of digital output. User can set 17 to monitor the digital output status and
then set to 20 to check if the wire is normal.
5. Setting 8: 100% means the motor rated torque. Motor rated torque = (motor rated power x60/2)/motor
rated speed
Coefficient Gain in Actual Output Frequency
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~160.00
This parameter is to set coefficient gain in actual output frequency. Set Pr.00-04= 31 to display the
calculation result on the screen (calculation = output frequency * Pr.00-05).
Software Version
Settings
Read only
Parameter Protection Password Input

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
1~9998, 10000~65535
Display
0~3 (the times of password attempts)
This parameter allows user to enter their password (which is set in Pr.00-08) to unlock the
parameter protection and to make changes to the parameter.
Pr.00-07 and Pr.00-08 are used to prevent the personal misoperation.
When the user have forgotten the password, clear the setting by input 9999 and press ENTER key,
then input 9999 again and press Enter within 10 seconds. After decoding, all the settings will
return to factory setting.
Parameter Protection Password Setting

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
1~9998, 10000~65535
0: No password protection / password is entered correctly (Pr00-07)
1: Password has been set

To set a password to protect your parameter settings.
If the display shows 0, no password is set nor password has been correctly entered in
Pr.00-07.
All parameters can then be changed, including Pr.00-08.
12-4
The first time you can set a password directly. After successful setting of password the
display will show 1.
Be sure to write down the password for later use.
To cancel the parameter lock, set the parameter to 0 after inputting correct password into
Pr. 00-07.
How to retrieve parameter protection after decoding by Pr.00-07:
Method 1: Re-enter the password to Pr.00-08 (input the password once).
Method 2: After reboots, password function will be recovered.
Method 3: Input any value into Pr.00-07 (Do not enter the password).
.
Password Decode Flow Chart
Pass word Forgotten
Pass word Setting
00-07
00-08
Displays 01 after
correct password is
entered to Pr.00-08.
Pass word Incorrect
00-07
Enter 9999 and press ENTER,

then ente r 9999 aga in withi n 10
se cond s an d pre ss ENTER.
Then all pa ra meters will re set
to factory se ttings .
3 chan ces of p assword inpu t:

Incorre ct p ass word 1: d ispl ays "01"
Incorre ct p ass word 2: disp lays "02 "
Incorre ct p ass word 3: "Pcode "(blin king)
Keyp ad will be loc ked after 3 wrong attemp ted
pas swords. To re-activate t he k eypa d, pl ease
reboo t the drive an d in put t he c orrect
pas sword.
Decode Flow Char t
00-08
Password Set
00-07
Password Input
Pr.00-08=0
Yes
Shut down th drive

and re-app ly power
No
Re-apply power.
(The password is still valid)
Reserved
Control Mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Speed mode
1: Point-to-Point position control
2: Torque mode
3: Home mode
This parameter determines the control mode of C2000 series AC motor drive.
12-5
Control of Speed Mode

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: VF (IM V/f control)

1: VFPG (IM V/f control+ Encoder)
2: SVC(IM Sensorless vector control)
3: FOCPG (IM FOC vector control+ encoder)
4: FOCPGPM FOC vector control + Encoder
5: FOC Sensorless (IM field oriented sensorless vector control)
This parameter determines the control method of the AC motor drive:

0: (IM V/f control): user can design proportion of V/f as required and can control multiple motors
simultaneously.
1: (IM V/f control + Encoder): user can use optional PG card with encoder for the closed-loop
speed control.
2: (IM Sensorless vector control): get the optimal control by the auto-tuning of motor
parameters.
3: (IM FOC vector control+ encoder): besides torque increases, the speed control will be more
accurate (1:1000).
4: (PM FOC vector control + Encoder): besides torque increases, the speed control will be
more accurate (1:1000).
5: FOC Sensorless: IM field oriented sensorless vector control
When setting Pr.00-11 to 0, the V/F control diagram is shown as follows.
Fcmd
Pr00-20
accel/decel time
DC BUS
Voltage
Detect
DC BUS Voltage
Protection
Current Detection
2/3
e->s
V/F
table
01-00,01-01
01-02,01-03
01-04,01-05
01-06,01-07
01-08
AVR
07-23
IGBT
PWM
Top Limit F:01-10

Lower Limit F:01-11
Vcmd
Filter
Time
Torque
Compe nsate
07-24
07-26
12-6
3/2
s->e
M
01-00
01-01
01-02
05-01
05-02
05-03
05-04
When setting Pr.00-11 to 1, the V/F control + encoder diagram is shown as follows.
Fe
Fr* +
+
Fe*
Weak flux
control
F/V
Waveform
Generator
Vs*
IM
Waveform
Dead time
compensation
Torque
Low Pass Filter Vcmp
compensation
07-24
07-26
Power
factor
PG
Irms
Vcmp=(power factor angle error)*(07-26)
Low pass
Filter
07-25
Fs
PG to speed
measurement
PG
PI control
When setting Pr.00-11 to 2, the sensorless vector control diagram is shown as follows.
DC BUS
DC BUS Vo ltage
Volta ge
De tectio n
Pro tectio n
Current
Detection
Fcmd
Pr00-20
V/F
table
Accel/decel
time
2/3
e->s
AVR
07-23
IGBT
PWM
01-00, 01-01 Top limit F:01-10

01-02, 01-03 Lower limit F:01-11
01-04, 01-05
01-06, 01-07
01-08
Fcmd
Filter
Slip
Time Compensate
07-25
12-7
07-27
3/2
s->e
M
01-00
01-01
01-02
05-01
05-02
05-03
05-04
When setting Pr.00-11 to 3, the FOCPG control diagram is shown as follows.
When setting Pr.00-11 to 5, FOC sensorless control diagram is shown as follows.
12-8
Point to Point Position control

Factory Settings: 0
Settings: 0: Incremental Type
1: Absolute Type
Pr. 00-12 = 0 is incremental type P2P; Pr.00-12 = 1 is absolute type P2P
Control of Torque Mode

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: 0: TQCPGIM Torque control + Encoder

1: TQCPG (PM Torque control + Encoder)
2: TQC Sensorless (IM Sensorless torque control)
TQCPG control diagram is shown in the following:

no offset
by P r.03- 00
by P r.11- 29
by multi -function input
Tor que command
11- 34
11- 36 or 00- 20
Speed li mit or command
+
-
06-12
11-35
s peed/torque
mode switc h
ASR
11-00 B it 0=0
11-06~11- 11
11-00 B it 0=1
11-03~11- 05
T orque l imit
11- 17~ 11- 20
flux weakening curve

11-21/11-22
11-14
lq
command
ld command
Cu rr en t
con tro l
Cur re nt
me asu re
actual fr equency
IGBT
&
PWM
0 1- 0 2 0 1- 3 6
0 5- 0 1 0 5- 1 3
~
~
0 5- 0 9 0 5- 2 1
Current feedback
C ont rol Di ag ra m for t he To r que + Encod er
12-9
En cod er
10-00
Moto r 1 Moto r1
~
0 1- 0 1 0 1- 3 5
10-02
TQC Sensorless control diagram is shown in the following:
Reserved
Reserved
Load Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Normal load
1: Heavy load
Normal duty: over load, rated output current 160% in 3 second. Please refer to Pr.00-17 for the
setting of carrier wave. Refer to chapter specifications or Pr.00-01 for the rated current.
Heavy duty: over load, rated output current 180% in 3 second. Please refer to Pr.00-17 for the
setting of carrier wave. Refer to chapter specifications or Pr.00-01 for the rated current.
Carrier Frequency
Factory setting: Table below
Settings
215kHz
This parameter determinates the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive.
230V Series
Models
1-15HP [0.75-11kW]
20-50HP [15-37kW]
60-125HP [45-90kW]
Setting Range
02~15kHz
02~10kHz
02~09kHz
Normal Duty Factory
8kHz
6kHz
4kHz
Setting
Heavy Duty Factory
2kHz
Setting
12-10
460V Series
Models
1-20HP [0.75-15kW]
25-75HP [18.5-55kW] 100-475HP [75-355kW]
Setting Range
02~15kHz
02~10kHz
02~09kHz
Normal Duty Factory
8kHz
6kHz
4kHz
Setting
Heavy Duty Factory
2kHz
Setting
Heat
Dissipation
Significant
Electromagnetic
Noise or Leakage
Current
Minimal
Minimal
Significant
Significant
Carrier
Frequency
Acoustic
Noise
1kH z
Current
Wave
Minimal
8kH z
15kHz
From the table, we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the
electromagnetic noise, AC motor drive heat dissipation, and motor acoustic noise. Therefore, if the
surrounding noise is greater than the motor noise, lower the carrier frequency is good to reduce the
temperature rise. Although it is quiet operation in the higher carrier frequency, the entire wiring and
interference resistance should be considerate.
When the carrier frequency is higher than the factory setting, it needs to protect by decreasing the
carrier frequency. See Pr.06-55 for the related setting and details.
Reserved
PLC Command Mask
Factory Setting: Read Only
Settings
Bit 0: Control command controls by PLC

Bit 1: Frequency command controls by PLC
Bit 2: Reserved
Bit 3: Torque command controls by PLC
This parameter determines if frequency command or control command is occupied by PLC
Source of the Master Frequency CommandAUTO

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Digital keypad
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-16 without direction)
12-11
7: Reserved
It is used to set the source of the master frequency in AUTO mode.
Pr.00-20 and 00-21 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in AUTO mode.
Pr.00-30 and 00-31 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in HAND mode.
The AUTO/HAND mode can be switched by the keypad KPC-CC01 or multi-function input terminal
(MI).
The factory setting of frequency source or operation source is for AUTO mode. It will return to
AUTO mode whenever power on again after power off. If there is multi-function input terminal used
to switch AUTO/HAND mode. The highest priority is the mutli-function input terminal. When the
external terminal is OFF, the drive wont receive any operation signal and cant execute JOG.
Source of the Operation Command AUTO

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Digital keypad
2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP disabled.
3: CANopen card
4: Reserved
5: Communication card (not includes CANopen card)
It is used to set the source of the operation frequency in AUTO mode.

When the operation command is controlled by the keypad KPC-CC01, keys RUN, STOP and JOG
(F1) are valid.
Stop Method
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Ramp to stop
1:Coast to stop
The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives a valid stop
command.
Freq uen cy
Output
Frequenc y
Moto r
Ro tatio n
Spe ed
Oper atio n
Co mmand
RUN
Freq uen cy
Output
Frequenc y
Moto r
Ro tatio n
Spe ed
Stops acc ording t o

deceler ation time
STOP
Fr ee r unning
to stop
Time
Oper atio n
Co mmand
RUN
Time
STOP
Ra mp to Stop and Co ast to Sto p
Ramp to stop: the AC motor drive decelerates from the setting of deceleration time to 0 or
minimum output frequency (Pr. 01-09) and then stop (by Pr.01-07).
12-12
Coast to stop: the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon a STOP command and the
motor free runs until it comes to a complete standstill.
(1) It is recommended to use ramp to stop for safety of personnel or to prevent material from
being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the drive is stopped. The
deceleration time has to be set accordingly.
(2) If the motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large, it is recommended to select
coast to stop. For example, blowers, punching machines and pumps
The stop method of the torque control is also set by Pr.00-22.
Control of Motor Direction

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Enable forward/ reverse

1: Disable reverse
2: Disable forward
This parameter enables the AC motor drives to run in the forward/reverse Direction. It may be
used to prevent a motor from running in a direction that would consequently injure the user or
damage the equipment.
Memory of Frequency Command
Factory Setting:
Settings
Read Only
Read only
If keypad is the source of frequency command, when Lv or Fault occurs the present frequency
command will be saved in this parameter.
User Defined Characteristics
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
Bit 0~3: user define on decimal place

0000b: no decimal place
0001b: one decimal place
0010b: two decimal place
0011b: three decimal place
Bit 4~15: user define on unit
000xh: Hz
001xh: rpm
002xh: %
003xh: kg
Bit 0~3: F & H page unit and Pr.00-26 decimal display is supported up to 3 decimal places.
Bit 4~15: F & H page unit and Pr.00-26 unit display is supported up to 4 types of unit display.
Max. User Defined Value
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
0~65535 (No decimal place in Pr.00-25 setting)
0.0~6553.5 (One decimal place in Pr.00-25 setting)
0.0~655.35(Two decimal place in Pr.00-25 setting)
0.0~65.536 (Three decimal place in Pr.00-25 setting)
12-13
User define is enabled when Pr.00-26 is not 0. The setting of Pr.00-26 corresponds to Pr.01.00
(Max. output frequency of the drive).
Example:
User define: 100.0%, Pr.01.00 = 60.00Hz
Pr.00.25 setting is 0021h; Pr.0026 setting is 100.0%

NOTE
In order to display as the setting in Pr.0025, please set up Pr.00.25 first and ensure Pr.00.26 is not
set to 0.
User Defined Value
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
Read only
Pr.00-27 will show user defined value when Pr.00-26 is not set to 0.
User defined function is valid when Pr.00-20 is set to digital keypad control or RS-285
communication input control.
Reserved
Reserved
Source of the Master Frequency CommandHAND
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Digital keypad
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-16 without direction)
7: Reserved
It is used to set the source of the master frequency in HAND mode.

Source of the Operation Command (HAND)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Digital keypad
2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP disabled.
4: Reserved
5: Communication card (not include CANopen card
It is used to set the source of the operation frequency in HAND mode.

Pr.00-20 and 00-21 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in AUTO mode.
Pr.00-30 and 00-31 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in HAND mode.
The AUTO/HAND mode can be switched by the keypad KPC-CC01 or multi-function input terminal
(MI).
12-14
The factory setting of frequency source or operation source is for AUTO mode. It will return to
AUTO mode whenever power on again after power off. If there is multi-function input terminal used
to switch AUTO/HAND mode. The highest priority is the multi-function input terminal. When the
external terminal is OFF, the drive wont receive any operation signal and cant execute JOG.
Digital Keypad STOP Function
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: STOP key disable

1: STOP key enable
Reserved
Display Filter Time (Current)

Factory Settings: 0.100
Settings: 0.001~65.535 sec
Set this parameter to minimize the current fluctuation displayed by digital keypad.
Display Filter Time (Keypad)

Factory Settings: 0.100
Settings: 0.001~65.535 sec
Set this parameter to minimize the display value fluctuation displayed by digital keypad.
Software Version (date)

Factory Settings: ####
Settings: Read only
This parameter displays the drives software version by date.
12-15
Group 1 Basic Parameters
Maximum Output Frequency

Factory Setting: 60.00/50.00
Settings
50.00~600.00Hz
This parameter determines the AC motor drives Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC motor
drive frequency command sources (analog inputs 0 to +10V, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 20mAand 10V) are
scaled to correspond to the output frequency range.
1st Output Frequency Setting 1base frequency and motor rated frequency
1st Output Frequency Setting 2base frequency and motor rated frequency
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. If the motor is 60Hz, the setting should be 60Hz. If the motor is 50Hz, it should be set
to 50Hz.
Pr.01-35 is used for the application occasion that uses double base motor.
1st Output Voltage Setting 1base frequency and motor rated frequency
1st Output Voltage Setting 2base frequency and motor rated frequency
Settings
230V series: 0.0~255.0V

460V series: 0.0~510.0V
This value should be set according to the rated voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. If the motor is 220V, the setting should be 220.0. If the motor is 200V, it should be set to
200.0.
There are many motor types in the market and the power system for each country is also difference.
The economic and convenience method to solve this problem is to install the AC motor drive. There
is no problem to use with the different voltage and frequency and also can amplify the original
characteristic and life of the motor.
Mid-point Frequency 1 of Motor 1
Factory Setting: 3.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz

Settings
230V series: 0.0~240.0V

460V series: 0.0~480.0V

Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
12-16

Settings
230V series: 0.0~240.0V

460V series: 0.0~480.0V

Settings
0.00~600.00Hz

Settings
230V series: 0.0~240.0V

460V series: 0.0~480.0V

Settings
0.00~600.00Hz

Settings
230V series: 0.0~240.0V

460V series: 0.0~480.0V
Min. Output Frequency of Motor 1

Settings
0.00~600.00Hz

Settings
230V series: 0.0~240.0V

460V series: 0.0~480.0V
Min. Output Frequency of Motor 2

Settings
0.00~600.00Hz

Settings
230V series: 0.0~240.0V

460V series: 0.0~480.0V
V/f curve setting is usually set by the motors allowable loading characteristics. Pay special
attention to the motors heat dissipation, dynamic balance, and bearing lubricity, if the loading
characteristics exceed the loading limit of the motor.
12-17
There is no limit for the voltage setting, but a high voltage at low frequency may cause motor
damage, overheat, and stall prevention or over-current protection. Therefore, please use the low
voltage at the low frequency to prevent motor damage.
Pr.01-35 to Pr.01-42 is the V/f curve for the motor 2. When multi-function input terminals
Pr.02-01~02-08 and Pr.02-26 ~Pr.02-31 are set to 14 and enabled, the AC motor drive will act as
the 2nd V/f curve.
The V/f curve for the motor 1 is shown as follows. The V/f curve for the motor 2 can be deduced
from it.
Vol tage
1s t Output
Voltage Setting 01-11 Output F requency Low er Limit
01-02
F requenc y output
2nd Output
ranges limitation
Voltage Setting
01-04
3r d Output
Voltage Setting
01-06
Output F requency
01-10U pper Limi t
R egul ar V /f Cur ve
Special V/f C urve
4th Output
Voltage Setting
01-08 01-07 01-09
01-05 01-03
01-01
2nd F req.1st F req.
4th F req. Start F req.
3rd Fr eq.
Common settings of V/f curve:

(1) General purpose
V/f Curve
Motor s pec. 6 0Hz
Motor s pec. 5 0Hz
V
220
10
1.5
60.0
F requenc y
01-00
Maximum Output
F requenc y
Pr.
01-00
01-01
01-02
01-03
01-05
01-04
01-06
01-07
01-08
Settin g
60.0
60.0
220 .0
V
220
Pr.
01-00
01-01
01-02
01-03
01-05
01-04
01-06
01-07
01-08
1.50
10
10.0
1.50
10.0
50.0
1.3
Settin g
50.0
50.0
220 .0
1.30
12.0
1.30
12.0
(2) Fan and hydraulic machinery

Motor s pec. 6 0Hz
Motor s pec. 5 0Hz
V
220
50
10
1.5
30
60.0
Pr.
01-00
01-01
01-02
01-03
01-05
01-04
01-06
01-07
01-08
V
220
Settin g
60.0
60.0
220 .0
30.0
50
50.0
10
1.50
10.0
1.3
12-18
25
50.0
Pr.
01-00
01-01
01-02
01-03
01-05
01-04
01-06
01-07
01-08
Settin g
50.0
50.0
220 .0
25.0
50.0
1.30
10.0
(3) High starting torque

Motor s pec. 6 0Hz
Motor s pec. 5 0Hz
V
220
23
18
1.5 3
60.0
Pr.
01-00
01-01
01-02
01-03
01-05
01-04
01-06
01-07
01-08
Settin g
60.0
60.0
220 .0
V
220
3.00
23
23.0
14
1.50
18.0
50.0
1.3 2.2
Pr.
01-00
01-01
01-02
01-03
01-05
01-04
01-06
01-07
01-08
Settin g
50.0
50.0
220 .0
2.20
23.0
1.30
14.0
Start-Up Frequency
Settings
0.0~600.00Hz
When start frequency is higher than the min. output frequency, drives output will be from start
frequency to the setting frequency. Please refer to the following diagram for details.
Fcmd=frequency command,
Fstart=start frequency (Pr.01-09),
fstart=actual start frequency of drive,
Fmin=4th output frequency setting (Pr.01-07/Pr.01-41),
Flow=output frequency lower limit (Pr.01-11)
F cmd>Fmi n
NO
by Pr.01- 34
Y ES
F star t>Fmin
NO
fstart=F min
F low= 0
Y ES
H=Fc md
Hz
F cmd
Y ES
F min
fstart=F star t
F star t
Time
F low= 0
operation after
start-up
NO
NO
F cmd>Fl ow
NO
Y ES
by
Pr.01- 34
NO
F cmd<Fmi n
Y ES
by
Pr.01- 34
F cmd>Fmi n
NO
Y ES
Y ES
H=Fc md
Hz
H=Fc md
F star t
F min
Hz
Hz
60Hz
F cmd
H=Fl ow
F cmd1
F min
F cmd2
Time F low
60Hz
H=Fc md1
F cmd1>Flow &
F cmd1>Fmin
Time
by Pr.01- 34
F cmd2>Flow &
F cmd2<Fmin
12-19
F low
F cmd1
F min
F cmd2
H=Fl ow
F low> Fcmd1
>F min
Time
by Pr.01- 34
F min>Fc md2
Output Frequency Upper Limit

Settings
0.0~600.00Hz
Output Frequency Lower Limit

Settings
0.0~600.00Hz
The upper/lower output frequency setting is used to limit the actual output frequency. If the
frequency setting is higher than the upper limit, it will run with the upper limit frequency. If output
frequency lower than output frequency lower limit and frequency setting is higher than min.
frequency, it will run with lower limit frequency. The upper limit frequency should be set to be higher
than the lower limit frequency.
Pr.01-10 setting must be Pr.01-11 setting. Pr.01-00 setting is regarded as 100.0%.
Output frequency upper limit = (Pr.01-00 Pr.01-10) /100
This setting will limit the max. Output frequency of drive. If frequency setting is higher than Pr.01-10,
the output frequency will be limited by Pr.01-10 setting.
When the drive starts the function of slip compensation (Pr.07-27) or PID feedback control, drive
output frequency may exceed frequency command but still be limited by this setting.
Related parameters: Pr.01-00 Max. Operation Frequency and Pr.01-11 Output Frequency Lower
Limit
Voltage
0 1.0 2
Motor r ated voltage

(V bas e)
0 1.0 4
Mid-point voltage
(V mid)
0 1.0 6
Min. output voltage 0 1.0 5

setting (V min)
Min. output
frequency
(F min)
0 1.0 3
Mid-point
frequency
(F mid)
0 1.0 1
Motor r ated
frequency
(F base)
F requenc y
0 1.0 0
Max. oper ation

frequency
V/f curve
This setting will limit the min. output frequency of drive. When drive frequency command or
feedback control frequency is lower than this setting, drive output frequency will limit by the lower
limit of frequency.
When the drive starts, it will operate from min. output frequency (Pr.01-05) and accelerate to the
setting frequency. It wont limit by this parameter setting.
The setting of output frequency upper/lower limit is used to prevent personal misoperation,
overheat due to too low operation frequency or damage due to too high speed.
If the output frequency upper limit setting is 50Hz and frequency setting is 60Hz, max. output
frequency will be 50Hz.
If the output frequency lower limit setting is 10Hz and min. operation frequency setting (Pr.01-05) is
1.5Hz, it will operate by 10Hz when the frequency command is greater than Pr.01-05 and less than
12-20
10Hz. If the frequency command is less than Pr.01-05, the drive will be in ready status and no
output.
If the frequency output upper limit is 60Hz and frequency setting is also 60Hz, it wont exceed 60Hz
even after slip compensation. If the output frequency needs to exceed 60Hz, it can increase output
frequency upper limit or max. operation frequency.
Accel. Time 1
Decel. Time 1
Accel. Time 2
Decel. Time 2
Accel. Time 3
Decel. Time 3
Accel. Time 4
Decel. Time 4
JOG Acceleration Time
JOG Deceleration Time

Settings
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 seconds

Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.00 seconds
The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp from
0Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00).
The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time require for the AC motor drive to decelerate
from the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) down to 0Hz.
The Acceleration/Deceleration Time is invalid when using Pr.01-44 Optimal
Acceleration/Deceleration Setting.
The Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4 are selected according to the Multi-function Input
Terminals settings. The factory settings are Accel./Decel. time 1.
When enabling torque limits and stalls prevention function, actual accel./decel. time will be longer
than the above action time.
Please note that it may trigger the protection function (Pr.06-03 Over-current Stall Prevention
during Acceleration or Pr.06-01 Over-voltage Stall Prevention) when the setting of accel./decel.
time is too short.
Please note that it may cause motor damage or drive protection enabled due to over current during
acceleration when the setting of acceleration time is too short.
Please note that it may cause motor damage or drive protection enabled due to over current during
deceleration or over-voltage when the setting of deceleration time is too short.
It can use suitable brake resistor (see Chapter 06 Accessories) to decelerate in a short time and
prevent over-voltage.
When enabling Pr.01-24~Pr.01-27, the actual accel./decel. time will be longer than the setting.
12-21

Frequency
01-00
Max. O utput
Frequency
Frequency
Setting
Time
accel. time
decel. time
01-12,14,16,18,20
01-13,15,17,19,21
Accel./Decel. Time
JOG Frequency
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Both external terminal JOG and key F1 on the keypad KPC-CC01 can be used. When the jog
command is ON, the AC motor drive will accelerate from 0Hz to jog frequency (Pr.01-22). When the
jog command is OFF, the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog Frequency to zero. The Jog
Accel./Decel. time (Pr.01-20, Pr.01-21) is the time that accelerates from 0.0Hz to Pr.01-22 JOG
Frequency.
The JOG command cant be executed when the AC motor drive is running. In the same way, when
the JOG command is executing, other operation commands are invalid except forward/reverse
commands and STOP key on the digital keypad.
It does not support JOG function in the optional keypad KPC-CE01.
1st/4th Accel./decel. Frequency

Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
The transition from acceleration/deceleration time 1 to acceleration/deceleration time 4, may also

be enabled by the external terminals. The external terminal has priority over Pr. 01-23.
Fr equency
4th Acceleration
Time
4th Deceleration
Time
01-23
1st/4th
Acceleration
/Deceleration
Freq.
1st Acceleration
Time
1st Deceleration
Time
1st/4th Acceleration/Deceleration Switching
12-22
Time
S-curve for Acceleration Departure Time 1
S-curve for Acceleration Arrival Time 2
S-curve for Deceleration Departure Time 1
S-curve for Deceleration Arrival Time 2

Settings
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 seconds

Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~250.0 seconds
It is used to give the smoothest transition between speed changes. The accel./decel. curve can
adjust the S-curve of the accel./decel. When it is enabled, the drive will have different accel./decel.
curve by the accel./decel. time.
The S-curve function is disabled when accel./decel. time is set to 0.
When Pr.01-12, 01-14, 01-16, 01-18 Pr.01-24 and Pr.01-25,
The Actual Accel. Time = Pr.01-12, 01-14, 01-16, 01-18 + (Pr.01-24 + Pr.01-25)/2
When Pr.01-13, 01-15, 01-17, 01-19 Pr.01-26 and Pr.01-27,
The Actual Decel. Time = Pr.01-13, 01-15, 01-17, 01-19 + (Pr.01-26 + Pr.01-27)/2
Frequency
01-26
01-25
01-24
01-27
Time
Skip Frequency 1 (upper limit)

Skip Frequency 1 (lower limit)
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
These parameters are used to set the skip frequency of the AC drive. But the frequency output is
continuous. There is no limit for the setting of these six parameters and can be used as required.
The skip frequencies are useful when a motor has vibration at a specific frequency bandwidth. By
skipping this frequency, the vibration will be avoided. It offers 3 zones for use.
These parameters are used to set the skip frequency of the AC drive. But the frequency output is
continuous. The limit of these six parameters is 01-2801-2901-3001-3101-3201-33. This
function will be invalid when setting to 0.0.
The setting of frequency command (F) can be set within the range of skip frequencies. In this
moment, the output frequency (H) will be limited by these settings.
12-23
When accelerating/decelerating, the output frequency will still pass the range of skip frequencies.
01- 28
01- 29
fa ll in g fr eq ue ncy
Inter nal
01- 30
frequency
01- 31
command
01- 32
r isi ng fre qu en cy
01- 33
F requenc y s etting command
Zero-speed Mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Output waiting
1: Zero-speed operation
2: Fmin (4th output frequency setting)
When the frequency is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07 or Pr.01-41), it will operate by this parameter.
When it is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be in waiting mode without voltage output from terminals
U/V/W.
When setting 1, it will execute DC brake by Vmin(Pr.01-08 and Pr.01-42) in V/f,
modes. It executes zero-speed operation in VFPG and FOCPG mode.
VFPG and SVC
When it is set to 2, the AC motor drive will run by Fmin (Pr.01-07, Pr.01-41) and Vmin (Pr.01-08,
Pr.01-42) in V/f, VFPG, SVC and FOCPG modes.
In V/f,
VFPG and SVC modes

fout
01-34=1
01-34=0
stop output
fmin
01-07
0Hz
0Hz
stop waiting for output
01-34=2
0Hz oper ation

(D C br ake)
In FOCPG mode, when Pr.01-34 is set to 2, it will act according Pr.01-34 setting.
fout
01-34=1
01-34=0
fmin
01-07
frequency command
12-24
frequency command
01-34=2
V/f Curve Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: V/f curve determined by group 01

1: 1.5 power curve
2: Square curve
When setting to 0, refer to Pr.01-01~01-08 for motor 1 V/f curve. For motor 2, please refer to
Pr.01-35~01-42.
When setting to 1 or 2, 2nd and 3rd voltage frequency setting are invalid.
If motor load is variable torque load (torque is in direct proportion to speed, such as the load of fan
or pump), it can decrease input voltage to reduce flux loss and iron loss of the motor at low speed
with low load torque to raise the entire efficiency.
When setting higher power V/f curve, it is lower torque at low frequency and is not suitable for rapid
acceleration/deceleration. It is recommended Not to use this parameter for the rapid
acceleration/deceleration.
01-02
Voltage %
100
90
80
70
1.5 power c urve
60
50
40
30
20
10
Square curve
20
40
60
80
01-01
F requenc y%
100
Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration Setting

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Linear accel./decel.
1: Auto accel., linear decel.
2: Linear accel., auto decel.
3: Auto accel./decel. (auto calculate the accel./decel. time by actual load)
4: Stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limited by 01-12 to 01-21)
t can decrease the drives vibration during load starts and stops by setting this parameter. Also it
will speed up to the setting frequency with the fastest and smoothest start-up current when it
detects small torque. At deceleration, it will auto stop the drive with the fastest and the smoothest
deceleration time when the regenerated voltage of the load is detected.
Setting 0 Linear accel./decel.: it will accelerate/decelerate according to the setting of
Pr.01-12~01-19.
Setting to Auto accel./decel.: it can reduce the mechanical vibration and prevent the complicated
auto-tuning processes. It wont stall during acceleration and no need to use brake resistor. In
addition, it can improve the operation efficiency and save energy.
Setting 3 Auto accel./decel. (auto calculate the accel./decel. time by actual load): it can auto detect
the load torque and accelerate from the fastest acceleration time and smoothest start current to the
12-25
setting frequency. In the deceleration, it can auto detect the load re-generation and stop the motor
smoothly with the fastest decel. time.
Setting 4 Stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limited by 01-12 to 01-21): if the
acceleration/deceleration is in the reasonable range, it will accelerate/decelerate by
Pr.01-12~01-19. If the accel./decel. time is too short, the actual accel./decel. time is greater than
the setting of accel./decel. time.
F requenc y
01-00
Max.
Fr equency
01- 07
Min.
Fr equency
accel. time
decel. time
01-12 01-14
01-16 01-18
01-13 01-15
01-17 01-19
T ime
Acc el./Decel. Time
1 When P r.01-44 is set to 0.

2 When P r.01-44 is set to 3.
Time Unit for Acceleration/Deceleration and S Curve

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Unit 0.01 sec

1: Unit 0.1 sec
Time for CANopen Quick Stop

Settings
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 sec

Pr. 01-45=1: 0.0~6000.0 sec
It is used to set the time that decelerates from the max. operation frequency (Pr.01-00) to 0.00Hz in
CANopen control
12-26
02 Digital Input/Output Parameter
2-wire/3-wire Operation Control

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: 2 wire mode 1
1: 2 wire mode 2
2: 3 wire mode
It is used to set the operation control method:

Pr.02-00
0
2-wire mode 1
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
1
2-wire mode 2
RUN/STOP
REV/FWD
Control Circuits of the External Terminal

FWD: ("OPEN":STOP)
("CL OSE":FWD)
REV:("OPEN": ST OP)
("C LOSE": REV)
DCM
VFD -C
FWD/ STOP
REV/STOP
FWD: ("OPEN ": STOP)

("CLOSE":RUN )
REV:("OPEN": F WD)
("C LOSE": REV)
DCM
VFD -C
RUN /STOP
FWD/ REV
3
3-wire operation control
STOP
RUN
REV/FWD
F WD "CLOSE": RUN
MI1 "OPEN":STOP
REV/F WD "OPEN": F WD
"CLOSE": REV
DC M
VF D- C
Multi-function Input Command 1 (MI1)

Factory Setting: 1
Factory Setting: 2
Factory Setting: 3
Factory Setting: 4
Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI10)
12-27

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: no function
1: multi-step speed command 1/multi-step
position command 1
position command 2
position command 3
position command 4
5: Reset
6: JOG commandBy KPC-CC01 or external
control
7: acceleration/deceleration speed not allow
8: the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time
selection
9: the 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time
selection
10: EF Input (Pr.07-20)
11: B.B input from external (Base Block)
12: Output stop
13: cancel the setting of the optimal
acceleration/deceleration time
14: switch between motor 1 and motor 2
15: operation speed command from AVI
16: operation speed command from ACI
17: operation speed command from AUI
18: Emergency stop (Pr.07-20)
19: Digital up command
20: Digital down command
21: PID function disabled
22: Clear counter
23: Input the counter value (MI6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
26: FOCPG/TQCPG model selection
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for -connection
31: High torque bias (Pr.11-30)
32: Middle torque bias (Pr.11-31)
33: Low torque bias (Pr.11-32)
34: Switch between multi-step position and
multi-speed control
35: Enable position control
36: Enable multi-step position learning function
(valid at stop)
37: Enable pulse position input command
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Force coast to stop
41: HAND switch
42: AUTO switch
12-28
43: Enable resolution selection (Pr.02-48)

44: Reverse direction homing
45: Forward direction homing
46: Homing ORG
47: Homing function enable
48: Mechanical gear ratio switch
49: Drive enable
50: Reserved
53: Trigger CANopen quick stop
54~70: Reserved
This parameter selects the functions for each multi-function terminal.
The terminals of Pr.02-26~Pr.02-29 are virtual and set as MI10~MI13 when using with optional card
EMC-D42A. Pr.02-30~02-31 are virtual terminals.
When being used as a virtual terminal, it needs to change the status (0/1: ON/OFF) of bit 8-15 of
Pr.02-12 by digital keypad KPC-CC01 or communication.
If Pr.02-00 is set to 3-wire operation control. Terminal MI1 is for STOP contact. Therefore, MI1 is
not allowed for any other operation.
Summary of function settings (Take the normally open contact for example, ON: contact is closed,
OFF: contact is open)
Settings
Functions
0
No Function
Multi-step speed
1
command 1/multi-step
position command 1
Multi-step speed
command 2/ multi-step
2
position command 2
Multi-step speed
3
position command 3
Multi-step speed
4
position command 4
5
Reset
JOG Command
Descriptions
15 step speeds could be conducted through the digital status of

the 4 terminals, and 16 in total if the master speed is included.
(Refer to Parameter set 4)
After the error of the drive is eliminated, use this terminal to

reset the drive.
Before executing this function, it needs to wait for the drive
stop completely. During running, it can change the operation
direction and STOP key on the keypad is valid. Once the
external terminal receives OFF command, the motor will stop
by the JOG deceleration time. Refer to Pr.01-20~01-22 for
details.
0 1- 22
JO G fr eq ue ncy
0 1- 07
Mi n. o utp ut fr eq ue ncy
o f moto r 1
MIx-G ND
12-29
JO G d ece l. ti me
01 -2 1
JO G a ccel . time
0 1- 20
ON
O FF
When this function is enabled, acceleration and deceleration is

stopped. After this function is disabled, the AC motor drive
starts to accel./decel. from the inhibit point.
Fr eq ue ncy
S etti ng
fr eq ue ncy
Acceleration/deceleration
Speed Inhibit
A ccel . in hi bi t
a re a
De cel . in hi bi t
a re a
A ctua l o pe ra tio n
fr eq ue ncy
De cel . in hi bi t
a re a
A ccel . in hi bi t
a re a
A ctua l o pe ra tio n fr eq ue ncy
Ti me
MIx- GND
8
9
10
11
The 1st, 2nd acceleration

or deceleration time
selection
The 3rd, 4th acceleration
or deceleration time
selection
EF Input (EF: External
fault)
ON
O pe ra tio n
co mman d
ON
ON
ON
O FF
ON
The acceleration/deceleration time of the drive could be

selected from this function or the digital status of the terminals;
there are 4 acceleration/deceleration speeds in total for
selection.
External fault input terminal. It will decelerate by Pr.07-20

setting (it will have fault record when external fault occurs)
When this contact is ON, output of the drive will be cut off
External B.B. Input (Base
immediately, and the motor will be free run and display B.B.
Block)
signal. Refer to Pr.07-08 for details.
If this contact is ON, output of the drive will be cut off
immediately, and the motor will then be free run. And once it is
turned to OFF, the drive will accelerate to the setting frequency.
V ol tag e
Fr eq ue ncy
S etti ng
fr eq ue ncy
12
Output Stop
Ti me
MI x - GND
O pe ra tio n
co mman d
13
14
15
16
17
18
O FF
ON
ON
ON
Before using this function, Pr.01-44 should be set to

Cancel the setting of the
01/02/03/04 first. When this function is enabled, OFF is for auto
optimal accel./decel. time
mode and ON is for linear accel./decel.
Switch between drive
When the contact is ON: use motor 2 parameters. OFF: use
settings 1 and 2
motor 1 parameters.
When the contact is ON, the source of the frequency will force
Operation speed
to be AVI. (If the operation speed commands are set to AVI, ACI
command form AVI
and AUI at the same time. The priority is AVIACIAUI)
When the contact is ON, the source of the frequency will force
Operation speed
to be ACI. (If the operation speed commands are set to AVI, ACI
command form ACI
and AUI at the same time. The priority is AVIACIAUI)
When this function is enabled, the source of the frequency will
force to be AUI. (If the operation speed commands are set to
Operation speed
AVI, ACI and AUI at the same time. The priority is AVIACI
command form AUI
AUI)
When the contact is ON, the drive will ramp to stop by Pr.07-20
Emergency Stop (07-20)
setting.
12-30
19
Digital Up command
20
Digital Down command
21
PID function disabled
22
Clear counter
23
Input the counter value

(multi-function input
command 6)
24
FWD JOG command
25
REV JOG command
When the contact is ON, the frequency will be increased and

decreased. If this function is constantly ON, the frequency will
be increased/decreased by Pr.02-09/Pr.02-10.
When the contact is ON, the PID function is disabled.
When the contact is ON, it will clear current counter value and
display 0. Only when this function is disabled, it will keep
counting upward.
The counter value will increase 1 once the contact is ON. It
needs to be used with Pr.02-19.
When the contact is ON, the drive will execute forward Jog
command.
When execute JOG command under torque mode, the drive will
automatically switch to speed mode; after JOG command is
done, the drive will return to torque mode.
When the contact is ON the drive will execute reverse Jog
command.
When execute JOG command under torque mode, the drive will
automatically switch to speed mode; after JOG command is
done, the drive will return to torque mode.
When the contact is ON: TQCPG mode.
When the contact is OFF: FOCPG mode.
RU N/STOP
co mmand
Mul ti- func ti on i np ut
ter min al is set to 26
(to rqu e/spe ed
mode sw itch )
26
FOCPG/TQCPG mode
selection
RU N
OFF
sp eed speed limit

03 -0 0~02=1
(AVI/AUI/ACI i s
command
fr eq uen cy co mman d)
torque
03 -0 0~02=2
limit
(AVI/AUI/ACI i s
tor que co mman d)
co ntro l
mode
27
ASR1/ASR2 selection
ON
sp eed
co ntrol
torque
command
STOP
OFF
ON
sp eed
command
torque
limit
speed limit
torque
command
sp eed
co ntrol
sp eed
torque
co ntrol
control (decel. t o stop )
Sw itch timing for t orq ue/speed control
(00-10=0/4 , mu lt i-fu nct ion inpu t t erminal is set to 2 6)
torque
control
When the contact is ON: speed will be adjusted by ASR 2

setting. OFF: speed will be adjusted by ASR 1 setting. Refer to
Pr.11-02 for details.
When the contact is ON, the drive will execute emergency stop
and display EF1 on the keypad. The motor wont run and be in
the free run until the fault is cleared after pressing RESET (EF:
External Fault)
V ol tag e
Fr eq ue ncy
S etti ng
fr eq ue ncy
28
Emergency stop (EF1)

Ti me
MI x - GND
Re set
O pe ra tio n
co mman d
12-31
O FF
ON
ON
ON
O FF
ON
29
30
31
32
33
Signal confirmation for

Y-connection
Signal confirmation for
connection
High torque bias

Middle torque bias
Low torque bias
When is the contact is ON, the drive will operate by 1st V/f.
When the contact is ON, the drive will operate by 2nd V/f.
Refer to Pr.11-30~11-32 for details.
When the contact is ON, the corresponding 15-step speed for
the multi-function inputs 1-4 will be 15 positions. (Refer to
Pr.04-16 to Pr.04-44)
position mod e
sp eed mode
sp eed m ode
Run
MI=d35
MI=d34
1
MI=d3
MI=d4
MI=d1
MI=d2
outp ut
freque ncy
34
10-19
pos ition
(Home)
Switch between multi-step

position and multi-speed
control
04-40
mu ltiposition
13
04-38
mu ltiposition
12
04-11
12th step
sp eed
freque ncy
position mod e
sp eed m ode
Run
MI=d34
MI=d35
MI=d1
MI=d3
MI=4
MI=d2
Ma ster
freque ncy
Output
freque ncy
12-32
04-12
13th step
sp eed
freque ncy
04-40
mu ltiposition
13
04-38
mu ltiposition
12
When the contact is ON, the AC motor drive will execute

internal single-point position control according to the setting in
Pr.10-19. This function is valid in FOCPG mode only.
Output
frequency
PG
feedbac k
10-01
10-02
10-19
RUN
MI=d35
35
MO= d39
Enable single-point
position control
Time
O utp ut
fr eq ue ncy
PG
fe ed ba ck
10-19
10-01
10-02
RUN
RUN
RUN
MI=d35
MO= d39
Ti me
When the contact is ON/OFF, the drive will base the

multi-function inputs 1-4 ON/OFF status to find the
corresponding multi-step positions and write current motor
position into such corresponding multi-step position.
Run/Stop
1011 2=11
co rres pond s
to Pr.0 4-36
36
Enable multi-step
position learning function
(valid at stop)
101 0 2=10
co rres pond s to
Pr.04-34
MI=d1
MI=d2
MI=d3
MI=d4
MI=d36
Writing the m otor p ositio n
in to the Pr.04-36
37
Full position control

pulse command input
enable
Writing the motor p ositio n

in to the Pr.04-34
When Pr.00-20 is set to 4 or 5 and this contact is ON, the input

pulse of PG card is position command. When using this
function, it is recommended to set Pr.11-25 to 0.
Example: please refer to the following diagram when using this
12-33
faction with MI=d35 return to home position,.

RUN
MI=d35
MO= d39
MI=d37
pulse
command
internal
positioning
output
frequency
38
39
Disable EEPROM write

function
Torque command
direction
40
Force coast to stop
41
HAND switch
42
AUTO switch
43
Enable resolution
selection
44
45
46
47
48
49
Time
When this contact is ON, write to EEPROM is disabled.

For torque control (Pr.00-10=2), when torque command is AVI
or ACI, the contact is ON and it is negative torque.
When this contact is ON during the operation, the drive will free
run to stop.
1. When multi-function input terminal switched OFF, it
executes a STOP command. , When switching to off during
the operation, the drive will stop.
2. When switching during operation by the keypad KPC-CC01,
the drive will be switched to the status after stop.
3. It will display HAND/OFF/AUTO on the keypad KPC-CC01.
OFF
AUTO
HAND
OFF
Bit 1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
Refer to Pr.02-48 for details.
Reverse direction limit switch signal input. When this terminal is

ON, the drive will refer to the setting in Pr.00-40, 00-41, 00-42
accordingly to execute homing in a counter clockwise (reverse)
direction (counter clockwise).
Forward direction limit switch signal input. When this terminal is
ON, the drive will refer to the setting in Pr.00-40, 00-41, 00-42
Forward direction homing
accordingly to execute homing in a clockwise (forward)
direction.
ORG point input. When this terminal is ON, the drive will refer to
Homing ORG
the setting in Pr.00-40, 00-41, 00-42 accordingly to execute
homing.
Pr00-10 = 3 (homing mode), if the external terminal MIx=47 is
Homing function enable OFF, the drive will ignore the home command and execute
Point to Point position control.
Mechanical gear ratio
When this contact is ON, the mechanical gear ratio switch will
switch
be the second group A2/B2 (refer to Pr.10-08 and Pr.10-09).
When drive=enable, RUN command is valid.
Drive enable
When drive= disable, RUN command is invalid.
When drive is in operation, motor coast to stop.
Reverse direction
homing
12-34
50
Reserved
51
Selection for PLC mode

bit0
52
Selection for PLC mode

bit1
Enable CANopen quick

stop
54~70 Reserved
53
PLC status
Bit 1 Bit 0
Disable PLC function 0
0
(PLC 0)
Trigger
PLC
to 0
1
operation (PLC 1)
Trigger PLC to stop 1
0
(PLC 2)
No function
1
1
When this function is enabled under CANopen control, it will
change to quick stop. Refer to Chapter 15 for more details.
UP/DOWN Key Mode

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Up/down by the accel/decel time

1: Up/down constant speed (Pr.02-10)
The Acceleration/Deceleration Speed of the UP/DOWN Key with Constant Speed

Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0.01~1.00Hz/ms
These settings are used when multi-function input terminals are set to 19/20. Refer to Pr.02-09 and
02-10 for the frequency up/down command.
Pr.02-09 set to 0: it will increase/decrease frequency command (F) by the external terminal
UP/DOWN key as shown in the following diagram. In this mode, it also can be controlled by
UP/DOWN key on the digital keypad.
F requenc y
F requenc y c ommand
T ime
External ter minal
UP k ey
Ml1~15
UP
Ml1~15
DOWN
OFF
ON
DCM
Pr.02-09 set to 1: it will increase/decrease frequency command (F) by the setting of

acceleration/deceleration (Pr.01-12~01-19) and only be valid during operation.
Fr eq ue ncy
Fr eq ue ncy
co mman d
In cre ase d b y acce le ra tio n ti me
Ti me
Mu lti -fu ncti on

i np ut te rmi na l
1 0 Fr eq ue ncy
i ncr ea sed comma nd
ON
12-35
OFF
VFD-C
Digital Input Response Time

Settings
0.000~30.000 sec
This parameter is used to set the response time of digital input terminals FWD, REV and MI1~MI8.
It is used for digital input terminal signal delay and confirmation. The delay time is confirmation
time to prevent some uncertain interference that would cause error in the input of the digital
terminals. Under this condition, confirmation for this parameter would improve effectively, but the
response time will be somewhat delayed.
Digital Input Operation Direction

Factory Setting: 0000h
Settings 0000h~FFFFh0:N.O. ; 1:N.C.
The setting of this parameter is In hexadecimal.
This parameter is used to set the input signal level and it wont be affected by the SINK/SOURCE
status.
Bit0 is for FWD terminal, bit1 is for REV terminal and bit2 to bit15 is for MI1 to MI14.
User can change terminal status by communicating.
For example, MI1 is set to 1 (multi-step speed command 1), MI2 is set to 2 (multi-step speed
command 2). Then the forward + 2nd step speed command=1001(binary)=9 (Decimal). Only need
to set Pr.02-12=9 by communication and it can forward with 2nd step speed. It doesnt need to wire
any multi-function terminal.
Bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI9 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD
Multi-function Output 1 (Relay1)

Factory Setting: 11
Multi-function Output 2 (Relay2)

Factory Setting: 1
Multi-function Output 3 (MO1)
Multi-function Output 4 (MO2)
Output terminal of the I/O extension card (MO10)

Factory Setting: 0
12-36
Settings
0: No function
1: Operation Indication
2: Operation speed attained
5: Zero speed (Frequency command)
6: Zero speed, include STOP(Frequency
command)
7: Over torque 1(Pr.06-06~06-08)
8: Over torque 2(Pr.06-09~06-11)
9: Drive is ready
10: Low voltage warningLV(Pr.06-00)
11: Malfunction indication
12: Mechanical brake release(Pr.02-32)
13: Overheat warning (Pr.06-15)
14: Software brake signal indication(Pr.07-00)
15: PID feedback error
17: Terminal count value attained
(Pr.02-20; not
return to 0)
18: Preliminary count value attained (Pr.02-19;
returns to 0)
19: Base Block
20: Warning output
21: Over voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current >= Pr.02-33 (>= 02-33)
28: Output when current <=Pr.02-33 (<= 02-33)
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-34 (>=
02-34)
30: Output when frequency <= Pr.02-34 (<=
02-34)
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: -connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
12-37
34: Zero speed include stop(actual output

frequency)
39: Position attained (Pr.10-19)
40: Speed attained (including Stop)
41: Multi-position attained
42: Crane function
43: Motor
actual speed output <=Pr.02-47
44: Low current output (Pr.06-71 to Pr.06-73)

45: UVW Output Electromagnetic valve On/Off
Switch
46: Reserved
47: Closed brake output
48~49: reserved
50: Output for CANopen control
51: Output for communication card
52: Output for RS485
53~62: Reserved
This parameter selects the functions for each multi-function terminal.
The terminals of Pr.02-36~Pr.02-41 will only be displayed after using with optional card EMC-D42A
and EMC-R6AA.
The optional card EMC-D42A offers 2 output terminals and can be used with Pr.02-36~02-37.
The optional card EMC-R6AA offers 6 output terminals and can be used with Pr.02-36~02-41.
Summary of function settings (Take the normally open contact for example, ON: contact is closed,
OFF: contact is open)
Settings
Functions
0
No Function
1
Operation Indication
Master Frequency
2
Attained
Desired Frequency
3
Attained 1 (Pr.02-22)
Desired Frequency
4
Attained 2 (Pr.02-24)
Zero Speed
5
(frequency
command)
Zero Speed with Stop
6
(frequency
command)
7
Over Torque 1
Descriptions
Active when the drive is not at STOP.
Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output frequency setting.
Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-22) is attained.
Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-24) is attained.
Active when frequency command =0. (the drive should be at RUN
mode)
Active when frequency command =0 or stop.
Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-07 (over-torque
detection level-OT1) and Pr.06-08 (over-torque detection time-OT1).
Refer to Pr.06-06~06-08.
12-38
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-10 (over-torque

detection level-OT2) and Pr.06-11 (over-torque detection time-OT2).
Refer to Pr.06-09~06-11.
Drive Ready
Active when the drive is ON and no abnormality detected.
Low voltage warn
Active when the DC Bus voltage is too low. (refer to Pr.06-00 low
(Lv)
voltage level)
Malfunction Indication Active when fault occurs (except Lv stop).
Mechanical Brake
When drive runs after Pr.02-32, it will be ON. This function should be
Release (Pr.02-32)
used with DC brake and it is recommended to use contact b(N.C).
Active when IGBT or heat sink overheats to prevent OH turn off the
Overheat
drive. (refer to Pr.06-15)
Software Brake
Active when the soft brake function is ON. (refer to Pr.07-00)
Signal Indication
PID Feedback Error Active when the feedback signal is abnormal.
Slip Error (oSL)
Active when the slip error is detected.
Terminal Count Value
Active when the counter reaches Terminal Counter Value (Pr.02-19).
Attained (Pr.02-20;
This contact wont active when Pr.02-20>Pr.02-19.
not return to 0)
Preliminary Counter
Value Attained
Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Counter Value
(Pr.02-19; returns to (Pr.02-19).
0)
External Base Block Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off during base
block.
input (B.B.)
Warning Output
Active when the warning is detected.
Over-voltage Warning Active when the over-voltage is detected.
Over-current Stall
Active when the over-current stall prevention is detected.
Prevention Warning
Over-voltage Stall
Active when the over-voltage stall prevention is detected.
prevention Warning
Active when the operation command is controlled by external
Operation Mode
terminal. (Pr.00-200)
Indication
Forward Command Active when the operation direction is forward.
Reverse Command Active when the operation direction is reverse.
Output when Current
Active when current is >= Pr.02-33.
>= Pr.02-33
Output when Current
Active when current is <= Pr.02-33.
<= Pr.02-33
Output when
frequency >=
Active when frequency is >= Pr.02-34.
Pr.02-34
Output when
Frequency <=
Active when frequency is <= Pr.02-34.
Pr.02-34
Y-connection for the Active when PR.05-24 is less than Pr.05-23 and time is more than
Motor Coil
Pr.05-25.
-connection
for the Active when PR.05-24 is higher than Pr.05-23 and time is more than
Motor Coil
Pr.05-25.
Zero Speed (actual Active when the actual output frequency is 0. (the drive should be at
RUN mode)
output frequency)
Zero Speed with Stop
(actual output
Active when the actual output frequency is 0 or Stop.
frequency)
Error Output
Active when Pr.06-23 is ON.
Selection 1 (Pr.06-23)
Error Output
Error Output
Error Output
Over Torque 2
12-39
39
40
Position Attained
(Pr.10-19)
Speed Attained
(including zero
speed)
41
Multi-position
Attained
42
Crane Function
43
44
Motor Zero-speed
Output (Pr.02-47)
Low Current Output
45
UVW Output
Electromagnetic valve
Switch
46
Reserved
47
Brake Release at
Stop
48-49 Reserved
Output for CANopen
50
control
Output for
51
communication card
52
Output for RS-485
53~62 Reserved
Active when the PG position control point reaches Pr.10-19.

Active when the output frequency reaches frequency setting or stop.
User can set any three multi-function input terminals to 41. The
current position action status of these three terminals will be
outputted. Example: if setting Pr.02-36~02-38 to 41 and only the
multi-position of the second point has been done. Therefore, current
status is RA (ON), RA (OFF) and MO1 (OFF). In this way, their status
is 010. Bit0 is RA and so on.
MO2
MO1
RY2
RY1
Pr.02-17=41 Pr.02-16=41 Pr.02-14=41 Pr.02-13=41
Pr.04-16
0
0
0
1
Pr.04-18
0
0
1
0
Pr.04-20
0
0
1
1
Pr.04-22
0
1
0
0
Pr.04-24
0
1
0
1
Pr.04-26
0
1
1
0
Pr.04-28
0
1
1
1
Pr.04-30
1
0
0
0
Pr.04-32
1
0
0
1
Pr.04-34
1
0
1
0
Pr.04-36
1
0
1
1
Pr.04-38
1
1
0
0
Pr.04-40
1
1
0
1
Pr.04-42
1
1
1
0
Pr.04-44
1
1
1
1
This function should be used with Pr.02-32, Pr.02-33 and Pr.02-34.
Active when setting Pr.07-16=Pr.02-34 and Fcmd > Pr.02-34 and
output current > Pr.02-33 and Time > Pr.02-32.
The example of the crane application is in the following for your
reference.
F requenc y
Active
when motor actual speed is less than Pr.02-47.
command
F requenc y
This function needs to be used with Pr.06-71 ~ Pr.06-73

command < 02- 34
RUN
RUN
When drive stops, the corresponding multi-function terminal will be

ON if the frequency is less than Pr.02-34. After it is ON, it will be OFF
Multi-function
when
brake delay time exceeds Pr.02-32.
output MO=47
02-32
For CANopen communication output

For communication output of communication cards (CMC-MOD01,
CMC-EIP01, CMC-PN01 and CMC-DN01)
For RS-485 output
12-40
Example of crane function

Output
Frequ ency
Freq. command <02 -3 4
or o utput current <02 -33
Freq. Co mma nd>02-34

& ou tput c urrent >02 -3 3
mu lti-func tion output

MO=42 (Acti ve whe n
Fco m>=02 -3 4, ou tput
cu rren t>0 2-33 a nd ti me
>02-32)
02-32
02-32
It is recommended to be used with Dwell function as shown in the following:
Set 07-18=02-34 and

output current <02-33
Set 07-16=02-34and
output current >02-33
07-18 Dwe ll Freq.

at Decel.
07-16 Dwe ll
Freq.
at Acce l.
Output Freq.
MO= 4 2
( Activate when
Fcmd >= 02-34
output current > 02-33
Time > 02-32)
07-15
07-17
Dwell Time atDecel.
02-32
Brake Delay Time
02-32
Brake Delay Time
Multi-output Direction
Factory Setting: 0000h
Settings
0000h~FFFFh0:N.O. ; 1:N.C.
The setting of this parameter is in hexadecimal.

This parameter is set via bit setting. If a bit is 1, the corresponding output acts in the opposite way.
Example:
If Pr02-13=1 and Pr02-18=0, Relay 1 is ON when the drive runs and is open when the drive is
stopped.
If Pr02-13=1 and Pr02-18=1, Relay 1 is open when the drive runs and is closed when the drive is
stopped.
Bit setting
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10
bit9
bit8
bit7
bit6
bit5
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1 bit0
MO20 MO19 MO18 MO17 MO16 MO15 MO14 MO13 MO12 MO11 MO10 MO2 MO1 Reserved RY2 RY1
Terminal count value attained (returns to 0)
12-41
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~65535
The counter trigger can be set by the multi-function terminal MI6 (set Pr.02-06 to 23). Upon
completion of counting, the specified output terminal will be activated (Pr.02-13~02-14, Pr.02-36,
02-37 is set to 18). Pr.02-19 cant be set to 0.
When the display shows c5555, the drive has counted 5,555 times. If display shows c5555, it
means that real counter value is between 55,550 to 55,559.
Preliminary count value attained (not return to 0)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~65535
When the counter value counts from 1 and reaches this value, the corresponding multi-function
output terminal will be activated, provided one of Pr. 02-13, 02-14, 02-36, 02-37 set to 17
(Preliminary Count Value Setting). This parameter can be used for the end of the counting to make
the drive runs from the low speed to stop.
1.0msec
Di spl ay va lu e
[00 -04 =0 1]
TRG [02-06=23]
Counter Trigger
1.0msec
Th e wi dth of tr ig ge r si gn al
( ou tpu t sig na l)
P re li min ar y Cou nte r V al ue
02 -20=3
RY 1 P r.0 2- 13 =17
02 -13, 02- 14, 0 2-3 6, 02 -37
Te rmi na l Co un ter Va lu e
RY 2 P r.0 2- 14 =18
02 -19=5
02 -14=1 7
Digital Output GainDFM

Factory Setting: 1
Settings
1~166
It is used to set the signal for the digital output terminals (DFM-DCM) and digital frequency output
(pulse X work period=50%). Output pulse per second = output frequency X Pr.02-21.
Desired Frequency Attained 1

Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 1

Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Desired Frequency Attained 2

Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 2

Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
12-42
Once output frequency reaches desired frequency and the corresponding multi-function output
terminal is set to 3 or 4 (Pr.02-13, 02-14, 02-36, and 02-37), this multi-function output terminal will
be ON.
H
Fcmd=60Hz
02-23=40Hz
02-24=2Hz
42Hz
40Hz
38Hz
02-21=10Hz
02-22=2Hz
12Hz
10Hz
8Hz
T
02-13,
02-14,
02-36, =3
02-37,
02-13,
02-14, =4
02-36,
02-37,
Brake Delay Time

Settings
0.000~65.000 sec
When the AC motor drive runs after Pr.02-32 delay time, the corresponding multi-function output
terminal (12: mechanical brake release) will be ON. It is recommended to use this function with DC
brake.
A
frequ ency
comma nd
07 -0 2
DC b ra ke
time du ri ng
start-u p
Outp ut
freq uen cy
07 -0 3
DC b ra ke
time du ri ng
stopp ing
B=A
DC b ra ke
DC b ra ke
RUN
RUN/STOP
STOP
02 -3 2 brake de lay time

Multi -fu nctio n outp ut
(me ch an ical brake rele ase)
Pr.0 2-11 to 0 2-14=d1 2
Mechan ical b ra ke
b oun ce time of me ch ani cal brake

rele ase
braked
12-43
braked
Time
If this parameter is used without DC brake, it will be invalid. Refer to the following operation timing.
frequ ency
co mma nd
ze ro
sp eed
ze ro
sp eed
B=A
outp ut
frequ ency
RUN/STOP
RUN
STOP
relea se
brak e
Tim e
Mu lti-func tion output

(mec hani cal brake
relea se)
Pr.02-11 to 0 2-14=d12
me chan ical brak e
brake
Output Current Level Setting for Multi-function Output Terminals
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~100%
When output current is higher or equal to Pr.02-33, it will activate multi-function output terminal
(Pr.02-13, 02-14, 02-16, and 02-17 is set to 27).
When output current is lower than Pr.02-33, it will activate multi-function output terminal (Pr.02-13,
02-14, 02-16, 02-17 is set to 28).
Output Boundary for Multi-function Output Terminals

Settings
0.00~60.00Hz
When output frequency is higher than Pr.02-34, it will activate the multi-function terminal (Pr.02-13,
02-14, 02-16, 02-17 is set to 29).
When output frequency is lower than Pr.02-34, it will activate the multi-function terminal (Pr.02-13,
02-14, 02-16, 02-17 is set to 30).
External Operation Control Selection after Reset and Activate
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Drive runs if the run command still exists after reset or re-boots.
Setting 1:
Status 1: After the drive is powered on and the external terminal for RUN keeps ON, the drive will
run.
Status 2: After clearing fault once a fault is detected and the external terminal for RUN keeps ON,
the drive can run after pressing RESET key.
12-44
Zero-speed Level of Motor
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~65535 rpm
This parameter should be used with the multi-function output terminals (set to 43). It needs to be
used with PG cared and motor with encoder feedback.
This parameter is used to set the level of motor zero-speed. When the actual speed is lower than
this setting, the corresponding multi-function output terminal 43 will be ON as shown as follows.
a ctua l mo tor
sp ee d
0 2- 47
MO =d 43
Ti me
Max. Frequency of Resolution Switch

Settings
0.01~600.00Hz
Switch the delay time of Max. output frequency

Settings
0.000~65.000 sec
It is used to improve the unstable speed or unstable position due to the insufficient of analog
resolution. It needs to be used with external terminal (set to 43). After setting this parameter, it
needs to adjust the analog output resolution of controller simultaneously by this setting.
AUI +10V
Acc el./Decel. time

01-12~01-19
AUI 0V

01-00

01-00
AUI - 10V
F requenc y
command
Output
frequency
0Hz
Resolution
switch
MI=43
Delay time for max .

frequency switch
10-24
Resolution switch
frequency
10-25
ON
F or war d r unni ng
Resolution switch
frequency
Delay time for max .
10-25
frequency switch
10-24
Revers e running
Display the Status of Multi-function Input Terminal

12-45

Weights
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
2
7
2 2
6 5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
F WD
R EV
0=O n
1=O ff
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
MI10
MI11
MI12
F or
option
car d
MI13
MI14
MI15
For Example:
If Pr.02-50 displays 0034h (Hex), i.e. the value is 52, and 110100 (binary). It means MI1, MI3 and
MI4 are active.
Weights
Bit
2
1
2
1
2
0
2
1
2
0
2
0
MI1
0=O N
1=O FF
MI2
MI3
Settings
5
4
2
= bit5x 2 +bit4x2 +bit2x2
MI4
MI5
= 1x2 +1x2 + 1x2

=32+16+4 =52
NO TE
5
2 =322 =16
1
MI6
2 =2
2 =8
2 =4
2 =1
Status of Multi-function Output Terminal

For Example:
If Pr.02-51 displays 000Bh (Hex), i.e. the value is 11, and 1011 (binary). It means RY1, RY2 and
MO1 are ON.
12-46

0=ON
1=OFF
Weights 2 2
2 2
2 2
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
15
14
13
12
11
10
Relay 1
Relay 2
Reserved
MO1
MO2
MO1 0
MO11
MO1 2
MO1 3
MO1 4
MO1 5
MO1 6
For
opt ion
card
MO1 7
MO1 8
MO1 9
MO2 0
NO TE
7
2 =128
2 =64
2 =32
2 =16
2 =8
2 =4
2 =2
2 =1
5
2
4
1
Display External Output terminal occupied by PLC

P.02-52 shows the external multi-function input terminal that used by PLC.
Weights
Bit
2 2 2 2 2 2
15 14 13 12 11 10
15
14
13
12
11
10
2 2
9 8
9
2
7
2 2
6 5
6
2
4
2 2
3 2
3
2
1
2
0
FWD
REV
MI1
0=ON
1=OFF
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
MI10
MI11
MI12
MI13
For option
card
MI14
MI15
For Example:
When Pr.02-52 displays 0034h(hex) and switching to 110100 (binary), it means MI1, MI3 and MI4
are used by PLC.
12-47

Weights
Bit
2 2 2 2
0 0 0 0
11
10
2
0
2 2 2
0 1 1
6
2 2
0 1
3
2
0
2
0
0: not used by P LC
1: used by PLC
MI1
Displays
5
4
2
= bit5x 2 +bit4x2 +bit2x2
5
4
2
= 1x2 +1x2 + 1x 2
=32+16+4 =52
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
NO TE
MI8
MI10
2 =20 48
14
13
2 =16 38 4 2 =81 92
11
8
2 =2 56
MI11
10
2 =10 24
2 =1 2 8
2 =3 22 =16
MI12
MI13
2 =2
2 =8
12
2 =40 9 6
9
2 =51 2
6
2 =64
2
2 =4
2 =1
Display Analog Input Terminal occupied by PLC

P.02-53 shows the external multi-function output terminal that used by PLC.
Display the saved memory of the frequency command executed by external terminal
Settings
Read only
When the source of frequency command comes from the external terminal, if Lv or Fault
occurs at this time, the frequency command of the external terminal will be saved in this
parameter.
Weights
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0=O N
1=O FF
R el ay 1
R el ay 2
R ese rve d
MO1
MO2
MO1 0
MO1 1
MO1 2
MO1 3
MO1 4
MO1 5
MO1 6
MO1 7
MO1 8
MO1 9
MO2 0
NO TE
7
2 =1 28
5
2 =3 2
2
2 =4
2 =6 4
2 =1 6
1
2 =2
2 =8
0
2 =1
12-48
Fo r o p tio n
card
For Example:
If the value of Pr.02-53 displays 0003h (Hex), it means RY1and RY2 are used by PLC.
Weights
Bit
2 7 2 6 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 21 2 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0=N OT used by P LC
1=U sed by PLC
R el ay 1
R el ay 2
R ese rve d
MO1
MO2
MO3
MO4
MO5
12-49
D isp la y va lu e
3 =2+1
=1x2 1 +1x2 0
=bi t 1x2 1 +b i t 0 x20
03 Analog Input/Output Parameter
Analog Input 1 (AVI)

Factory Setting: 1
Analog Input 2(ACI)

Factory Setting: 0
Analog Input 3 (AUI)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Frequency command (torque limit under torque
control mode)
2: Torque command (torque limit under speed
mode)
3: Torque compensation command
4: PID target value
5: PID feedback signal
6: PTC thermistor input value
7: Positive torque limit
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive/negative torque limit
11: PT100 thermistor input value
12~17: Reserved
When it is frequency command or TQC speed limit, the corresponding value for 0~10V/4~20mA is
0 max. output frequency(Pr.01-00)
When it is torque command or torque limit, the corresponding value for 0~10V/4~20mA is 0 max.
output torque (Pr.11-27).
When it is torque compensation, the corresponding value for 0~10V/4~20mA is 0 rated torque.
Positive torque
03-00~02=7
Positive torque limit
03-00~02=9
Regenerative
torque limit
03-00~02=10
Positive/negative torque limit
Reverse
Forward
03-00~02=10
Positive/negative torque limit
03-00~02=8
Negative torque limit
03-00~02=9
Regenerative
torque limit
Negative Torque
12-50
Analog Input Bias 1 (AVI)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
-100.0~100.0%
It is used to set the corresponding AVI voltage of the external analog input 0.
Analog Input Bias 1 (ACI)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
-100.0~100.0%
It is used to set the corresponding ACI voltage of the external analog input 0.
AUI Analog Positive Input Bias

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
-100.0~100.0%
It is used to set the corresponding AUI voltage of the external analog input 0.
The relation between external input voltage/current and setting frequency: 0~10V (4-20mA)
corresponds to 0-60Hz.
AUI Analog Negative Input Bias

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
-100.0~100.0%
Positive/negative Bias Mode (AVI)
Positive/negative Bias Mode (ACI)
Positive/negative Bias Mode (AUI)
Reserved
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Zero bias
1: Lower than bias=bias
2: Greater than bias=bias
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
In a noisy environment, it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin. It is

recommended NOT to use less than 1V to set the operation frequency.
12-51

03-00
to
03-02
03-11~03- 14 gain is positive
0 Z er o bias
4
1 Lower than bias =bias
2 Gr eater than bias= bi as

T he absolute value of the bias voltage
-1 0 V -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1
2 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0V
Negativ e bias
3 while s erving as the c enter

4 Serv e bias as the center
bias
2
4
bias
Positiv e bias
Analog Input Gain 1 (AVI)
Analog Input Gain 2 (ACI)
Analog Positive Input Gain 3 (AUI)
Analog Negative Input Gain 4 (AUI)

Settings
-500.0~500.0%
Parameters 03-03 to 03-14 are used when the source of frequency command is the analog
voltage/current signal.
Analog Input Filter Time (AVI)
Analog Input Filter Time (ACI)
Analog Input Filter Time (AUI)

Settings
0.00~2.00 sec
These input delays can be used to filter noisy analog signal.

When the setting of the time constant is too large, the control will be stable but the control response
will be slow. When the setting of time constant is too small, the control response will be faster but
the control may be unstable. To find the optimal setting, please adjust the setting according to the
control stable or response status.
Addition Function of the Analog Input

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI)

1: Enable
When Pr.03-18 is set to 0 and the analog input setting is the same, the priority for AVI, ACI and AUI
are AVI>ACI>AUI.
12-52
Freque ncy
Voltage
F co mmand= [(ay bias)*gain]* Fma x(01-00)
10V or 16mA
Fcomman d: t he corresp onding
frequen cy f or 10V or 20mA
ay : 10 or 16mA
bias : Pr.03-03,Pr. 0 3-04 , Pr.03-05
gain : Pr.03-11, Pr.03-12, Pr.0 3-13 , Pr.03-14
Loss of the ACI Signal
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency
2: Decelerate to stop
3: top immediately and display ACE
This parameter determines the behavior when ACI is lost.

When Pr.03-29 is set to 1, it means ACI terminal is for 0-10V voltage input. At this moment,
Pr.03-19 will be invalid.
When setting is 1 or 2, it will display warning code AnL on the keypad. It will be blinking until the
loss of the ACI signal is recovered or drive is stop.
Multi-function Output 1 (AFM1)
Factory Setting: 0
Multi-function Output 2 (AFM2)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~23
Function Chart
Settings Functions
Descriptions
Output frequency (Hz)
Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%.
Frequency command (Hz)
Motor speed (Hz)
600Hz is regarded as 100%
Output current (rms)
(2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
Output voltage
(2 X rated voltage) is regarded as 100%
DC Bus Voltage
450V (900V)=100%
Power factor
-1.000~1.000=100%
Power
Rated power is regarded as 100%
Output torque
Full-load torque is regarded as 100%
AVI
0~10V=0~100%
12-53
10
ACI
0~20mA=0~100%
11
AUI
-10~10V=0~100%
12
q-axis current (Iq)
13
q-axis
14
d-axis current (Id)
15
d-axis
16
q-axis voltage (Vq)
250V (500V) =100%
17
d-axis voltage(Vd)
250V (500V) =100%
18
Torque command
Rated torque is regarded as 100%
19
PG2 frequency command
20
Output for CANopen control
21
RS485 analog output
For CANopen analog output

For communication output (CMC-MOD01, CMC-EIP01,
CMC-PN01, CMC-DN01)
22
Analog output for
feedback value (Iq)

feedback value (Id)
For communication output (CMC-MOD01, CMC-EIP01,

CMC-PN01, CMC-DN01)
communication card
Voltage output level can be controls by Pr.03-32 and
23
Constant voltage output
Pr03-33.
0~100% of Pr.03-32 corresponds to 0~10V of AFM1.
Gain for Analog Output 1 (AFM1)

Gain for Analog Output 2 (AFM2)

Settings
0~500.0%
It is used to adjust the analog voltage level (Pr.03-20) that terminal AFM outputs.
This parameter is set the corresponding voltage of the analog output 0.
Analog Output 1 Value in REV Direction (AFM1)

Factory Setting: 0
Analog Output 2 Value in REV Direction (AFM2)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Absolute value in REV direction

1: Output 0V in REV direction; output 0-10V in FWD direction
2: Output 5-0V in REV direction; output 5-10V in FWD direction
10V( 20mA)
0V
( 0mA)
03-22=0
03-25=0
10V( 20mA)
03-18
03-21
03-24
F requenc y
0V
( 0mA)
03-22=1
03-25=1
Selections for the analog output dir ec ti on
12-54
10V( 20mA)
F requenc y
5V
( 12mA)
03-22=2
03-25=2
Reserved
Reserved
AVI Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: 0-10V
1: 0-20mA
2: 4-20mA
ACI Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: 4-20mA
1: 0-10V
2: 0-20mA
When changing the input mode, please check if the switch of external terminal (SW3, SW4)
corresponds to the setting of Pr.03-28~03-29.
Status of PLC Output Terminal

Factory Setting: ##
Settings
0~65535
Monitor the status of PLC analog output terminals
P.03-30 shows the external multi-function output terminal that used by PLC.
Weights
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
15 14 13 12 11 10
2
7
2
6
2
3
2
2
2
1
0=O N
1=O FF
AFM 1
AFM 2
NO TE
7
2 =1 28
2 =3 2
2 =6 4
4
2 =1 6
2 =8
2 =4
2 =2
2 =1
5
2
For Example:
If the value of Pr.02-30 displays 0002h(Hex), it means AFM1and AFM2 are used by PLC.
0=N ot u sed b y PLC
1=U sed by PLC
Weig ht s
B it
2 7 2 6 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 21 2 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
D is p la y v a lu e
1
0
2 =1x 2 + 0 x 2
1
= bi t 1x 2 + bi t 0 x 2 0
A FM 1
A FM 2
AFM2 0-20mA Output Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: 0-20mA output
1: 4-20mA output
12-55
AFM1 DC output setting level

AFM2 DC Output Setting Level
Settings
0.00~100.00%
12-56
04 Multi-Step Speed Parameters
1st Step Speed Frequency
2nd Step Speed Frequency
3rd Step Speed Frequency

Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
The Multi-function Input Terminals (refer to setting 1~4 of Pr.02-01~02-08 and 02-26~02-31) are
used to select one of the AC motor drive Multi-step speeds(max. 15 speeds). The speeds
(frequencies) are determined by Pr.04-00 to 04-14 as shown in the following.
The run/stop command can be controlled by the external terminal/digital keypad/communication via
Pr.00-21.
Each one of multi-step speeds can be set within 0.0~600.0Hz during operation.
Explanation for the timing diagram for multi-step speeds and external terminals
The Related parameter settings are:
1. Pr.04-00~04-14: setting multi-step speeds (to set the frequency of each step speed)
2. Pr.02-01~02-08, 02-26~02-31: setting multi-function input terminals (multi-step speed 1~4)
Related parameters: 01-22 JOG Frequency, 02-01 Multi-function Input Command 1 (MI1), 02-02
Multi-function Input Command 2 (MI2), 02-03 Multi-function Input Command
3 (MI3), 02-04 Multi-function Input Command 4 (MI4)
12-57

04-07
F requenc y
04-06
04-08
04-05
04-09
04-04
04-10
04-03
04-11
04-02
04-12
04-01
JOG Freq.
04-13
04-00
01-22
04-14
Master Spee d
Mul ti -functi on
terminals
MI1~MI4
02-0 1~02-08
Run/ Sto p
PU/ ext ernal t erminals
/c ommu nicat ion
10 11 12 13 14 15
ON
1st spee d
OFF ON
2nd sp eed
OFF
3rd spe ed
OFF
4t h speed
OFF
J og Freq.
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Mu lt i- speed via Ext ernal Termin als
Position command 1 (pulse)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
-32767~32767
Please refer to Pr.02-01~02-08 (Multi-function Input Command) for description on setting 34

(Switch between multi-step position and multi-speed control) and setting 36 (Enable multi-step
position learning function).
Multi-step position corresponding MI4
MI3
MI2
MI1
Multi-step speed corresponding
10-19
Positioning for Encoder Position
04-16 Position command 1 (pulse)
04-00 1st step speed frequency
04-01 2nd step speed frequency
04-02 3rd step speed frequency
04-03 4th step speed frequency
12-58
Position command 1 (revolution)

To switch the target position of the external terminal, set external terminal parameters to
Pr.02-01=1, Pr.02-02=2, Pr.02-03=3, Pr.02-04= 4 by selecting the P2P target position via
multi-step speed.
Setting: Target Position = 04-15 (10-01*4) + 04-16
Multi-step speed
P2P Target Position
0000
0001
Multi-position 1
04-15
04-16
0010
Multi-position 2
04-17
04-18
0011
Multi-position 3
04-19
04-20
0100
Multi-position 4
04-21
04-22
0101
Multi-position 5
04-23
04-24
0110
Multi-position 6
04-25
04-26
0111
Multi-position 7
04-27
04-28
12-59
1000
Multi-position 8
04-29
04-30
1001
Multi-position 9
04-31
04-32
1010
Multi-position 10
04-33
04-34
1011
Multi-position 11
04-35
04-36
1100
Multi-position 12
04-37
04-38
1101
Multi-position 13
04-39
04-40
1110
Multi-position 14
04-41
04-42
1111
Multi-position 15
04-43
04-44
12-60
05 Motor Parameters
Motor Auto Tuning

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Measure induction motor in dynamic status (motor spinning)
(Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current)
2: Measure induction motor in static status (motor not spinning)
3: No function
4: Measure PM motor magnetic pole and PG origin in static status (motor not
spinning)
5: Measure PM motor parameter in dynamic status (motor spinning)
6: Measure IM motor flux curve in dynamic status
12: FOC Sensorless inertia estimation
Induction Motor
Start auto tuning by press theRunkey and the measured value will be written into motor 1
(Pr.05-05 ~05-09, Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current) and motor 2 (Pr.05-17 to Pr.05-21)
automatically.
AUTO-Tuning Process (dynamic motor):
1.
2.
Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is correct.
Make sure the motor has no-load before executing auto-tuning and the shaft is not connected
to any belt or gear motor. It is recommended to set to 2 if the motor cant separate from the
load.
3.
Motor Rated
Frequency
Motor Rated
Voltage
Motor Full-load
Current
Motor Rated
Power
Motor Rated
Speed
Motor Pole
Numbers
4.
5.
6.
Motor 1
Motor 2
01-01
01-35
01-02
01-36
05-01
05-13
05-02
05-14
05-03
05-15
05-04
05-16
Set Pr.05-00=1 and press the theRunkey, the drive will begin auto-tuning. Please be aware
motor starts spinning when theRun key is pressed.
When auto-tuning is complete, please check if the measured values are written into motor 1
(Pr.05-05 ~05-09) and motor 2 (Pr.05-17 ~05-21) automatically.
Mechanical equivalent circuit
12-61
Rs
P r.0 5- 06
P r.0 5- 18
VS
Lx
P r.0 5- 09
P r.0 5- 21
Lm
P r.0 5- 08
P r.0 5- 20
Rr
P r.0 5- 07
P r.0 5- 19
If Pr.05-00 is set to 2, it needs to input Pr.05-05 for motor 1/Pr.05-17 for motor 2.
NOTE
In torque/vector control mode, it is not recommended to have motors run in parallel.
It is not recommended to use torque/vector control mode if motor rated power exceeds
the rated power of the AC motor drive.
When auto-tuning 2 motors, it needs to set multi-function input terminals (setting 14) or
change Pr.05-22 for motor 1/motor 2 selection.
The no-load current is usually 20~50% X rated current.
The rated speed cant be larger or equal to 120f/p (f: rated frequency 01-01/01-35; P:
number of motor poles 05-04/05-16).
Permanent Magnetic Motor

Set Pr.05-00 =5 to start auto tuning for PM motor, press theRun key and the measured values
will be written into Pr.05-39Rs, Pr.05-40 & 41Ld & Lq and Pr.05-43PM motors Ke
parameter.
AUTO-Tuning Process (dynamic motor):
1.
Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is correct.
2.
For PM motor, set Pr.05-33=1 and complete rest of the setting in Pr.05-34 rated current,
Pr.05-35 rated power, Pr.05-36 rated speed and 05-37 pole number. The acceleration time
and deceleration time should be set according to your motor capacity.
3.
Set Pr.05-00=5 and press theRunkey, the drive will begin auto-tuning for PM motor. Please
be aware of the dynamic motor, it starts spinning as the Runkey is pressed.
4.
When auto-tuning is completed, please check if the measured values are written into
Pr.05-39~05-41 and Pr.05-43 automatically.
Set Pr.05-00=4 to begin auto-tuning for PM motor magnetic pole and PG origin, pressRunkey
and the measured value will be written into Pr.05-42 automatically.
Note 1: When execute auto-tuning for PM motor PG origin, please make sure the
encoder setting are correct (Pr.10-00, 10-01, 10-02), otherwise the PG origin measure
error and motor stall may occur.
Note 2: If PM motor runs in an opposite direction of the drives command, switch any
two of the UVW cable and re-connect, then execute PG origin search again. It is crucial
to execute auto-tuning after the switch otherwise PG origin measure error and motor
12-62
stall may occur.
Automatically measure the angle between magnetic pole and PG origin (dynamic motor)
1.
Set Pr.05-00=5 and press RUN key, or manually input the values into Pr. 01-01, 05-34~-541
and Pr.05-43.
2.
It is strongly suggested to remove the motor and unload before auto-tuning begin.
3.
Set Pr.05-00=4 and press and press theRunkey to begin auto-tuning. Please be aware of
the dynamic motor, it starts spinning as the Runkey is pressed.
4.
When auto-tuning is completed, please check if the angle between magnetic pole and the
PG origin is written into Pr.05-42 automatically.
Set Pr.05-00=6, to begin IM motor flux curve measure in dynamic status. This measure is only available for
FOC/TQC Sensorless. Enter motor information into the parameters then the drive can now begin
auto-tuning.
Complete the setting in 01-0101-0205-01~05-04 according to the motor plate
information
Set 05-00=6 and press the Runkey to start auto-tuning. Please make sure the
motor is removed before auto-tuning begin.
Set Pr.05-00=12, to begin IM motor inertia auto-tuning measure. This measure is only available for
FOC/TQC Sensorless mode. Enter motor information into the parameters then the drive can now begin
auto-tuning.
Note: Before Pr.05-00=12 begin auto-tuning, motor parameters(no load current, Rs, Rr, Lm
and Lx) must be inputted first.
00-10=2, torque mode

00-13=2, Sensorless torque mode
05-00=12, press Runkey to begin inertia estimation.
When inertia estimation is completed, check if the outcome in Pr.11-01(unit PU Q8)

is a reasonable value.
Sensorless FOC mode
00-10 = 0, speed mode
00-11 = 5, Sensorless FOC mode
11-00 bit0=1, use ASR gain to automatically adjust ASR bandwidth
(Pr.11-03,11-04,11-05)
Full-load Current of Induction Motor 1A

Unit: Amper
Factory Setting: #.##
Settings
10 to 120% of drives rated current
nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current.
12-63
Example: The rated current for 7.5HP (5.5kW) is 25 and factory setting is 22.5A. The range for
setting will be 10~30A.(25*40%=10A and 25*120%=30A)
Rated Power of Induction Motor 1(kW)

Settings
0~655.35 kW
It is used to set rated power of the motor 1. The factory setting is the power of the drive.
Rated Speed of Induction Motor 1 (rpm)
Factory Setting:
171060Hz 4 poles
141050Hz 4 poles
Settings
0~65535
It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and need to set according to the value indicated on
the motor nameplate.
Pole Number of Induction Motor 1
Factory Setting: 4
Settings
2~20
It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number).

No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (A)
Unit: Amper
Settings
0 to the factory setting in Pr.05-01
The factory setting is 40% X rated current.

Stator Resistance(Rs) of Induction Motor 1
Rotor Resistance(Rr) of Induction Motor 1
Factory Setting: #.###
Settings
0~65.535
Magnetizing Inductance(Lm) of Induction Motor 1

Stator inductance(Lx) of Induction Motor 1
Settings
0~6553.5mH
Reserved
12-64
Full-load Current of Induction Motor 2A

Unit: Amper
Factory Setting:#.##
Settings
10~120%
nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current.
Example: The rated current for 7.5HP (5.5kW) is 25A and factory setting is 22.5A. The range for
setting will be 10~30A.(25*40%=10A and 25*120%=30A)
Rated Power of Induction Motor 2 (kW)

Settings 0~655.35 kW
It is used to set rated power of the motor 2. The factory setting is the power of the drive.
Rated Speed of Induction Motor 2 (rpm)

Factory Setting: 1710
Settings
0~65535
It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and need to set according to the value indicated on
the motor nameplate.
Pole Number of Induction Motor 2
Factory Setting: 4
Settings
2~20
It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number).

No-load Current of Induction Motor 2 (A)
Unit: Amper
Settings
0 to the factory setting in Pr.05-01
The factory setting is 40% X rated current.

Stator Resistance (Rs) of Induction Motor 2
Rotor Resistance (Rr) of Induction Motor 2
Factory Setting: #.###
Settings
0~65.535
Magnetizing Inductance (Lm) of Induction Motor 2

Stator Inductance (Lx) of Induction Motor 2
Settings
0~6553.5 mH
12-65
Induction Motor 1/ 2 Selection

Factory Setting: 1
Settings
1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
It is used to set the motor that driven by the AC motor drive.
Frequency for Y-connection/-connection Switch of Induction Motor

Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Y-connection/-connection Switch of Induction Motor IM

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Enable
Delay Time for Y-connection/-connection Switch of Induction Motor

Settings
0.000~60.000 sec
P.05-23 and Pr.05-25 are applied in the wide range motors and the motor coil will execute the
switch of Y-connection/-connection as required. (The wide range motors has relation with the
motor design. In general, it has higher torque at low speed and Y-connection and it has higher
speed at high speed and connection.
Pr.05-24 is used to enable/disable Y-connection/-connection Switch.
When Pr.05-24 is set to 1, the drive will select by Pr.05-23 setting and current motor frequency to
switch motor to Y-connection or -connection. At the same time, it will also affect motor
parameters.
Pr.05-25 is used to set the switch delay time of Y-connection/-connection.
When output frequency reaches Y-connection/-connection switch frequency, drive will delay by
Pr.05-25 before multi-function output terminals are active.
-c onnection is finis hed
Pr .02-01~08=30
U
MI1
V
W
Y- connec tion is fi ni shed

Pr .02-01~08=29
MI2
RA
MRA
-c onnection contr ol
Pr .02-13~14=32
W V
IM
Y- connec tion control

Pr .02-11~14=31
X
Yconnection switch: can be used for wide range motor

Y -connection for low speed: higher torque can be used for rigid tapping
-c onnection for high s peed: hi gher torque c an be used for high-s peed drilling
12-66

If switch poi nt is 60Hz,
the accel . switch point i s 62Hz
Pr.05-23
Y- switch
frequency
Decel. switch point is 58Hz

Bandwidth is 2Hz
In this area, motor i s i n free

run status . AC motor driv e
stops outputti ng.
Motor s peed/
frequency
Motor s peed will

decrease
by load inertia.
Pr. 05-25 Delay Time for Y-c onnection

/D -c onnec tion( Min. is 0.2 seconds)
Y-connection output
ON
Pr.02-13~14=31
ON
Y-conenction
confirmation input
ON
Pr.02-13~14=29
ON
-connection output
Pr.02-13~14=32
ON
-connection
confirmation input
Pr.02-13~14=30
ON
: mechanical
bounc e time
f ree run st atus
output
frequency
Y-c onnection out put
Pr.02-13~14=31
Y-c onnect ion
confir mat ion input
Pr.02-01~08=29
-connec ti on output
Pr.02-13~14=32
-connection
confir mation input
Pr.02-01~08=30
Y- s witch err or
frequency
ON
ON
ON
ON
delay ti me
Pr.05-25
2 seconds
Reserved
Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
00~1439
Accumulative Motor Operation Time (day)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
00~65535
Pr. 05-31 and Pr.05-32 are used to record the motor operation time. They can be cleared by
setting to 00 and time wont be recorded when it is less than 60 seconds.
12-67
Induction Motor and Permanent Magnet Motor Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Induction Motor
1: Permanent Magnet Motor
Full-load current of Permanent Magnet Motor

Settings
0.00~655.35 Amps
Rated Power of Permanent Magnet Motor

Settings
0.00~655.35 kW
Rated speed of Permanent Magnet Motor

Settings
0~65535 rpm
Pole number of Permanent Magnet Motor

Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0~65535
Inertia of Permanent Magnet Motor

Settings
0.0~6553.5 kg.cm
This parameter setting is defined in kg-cm2 . If this measure is not familiar, please refer to the chart
below for a reference. (Deltas motor inertia chart is for reference purpose only.)
Delta Motor (Low inertia model)
Rated Power(kW)
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.4
0.75
Rotor inertia (kg.m^2) 3.70E-06 1.77E-05 2.77E-05 6.80E-05 1.13E-04 2.65E-04 4.45E-04
Delta Motor (Mid to High Inertia model)
Rated Power(kW)
0.5
1.5
0.3
0.6
0.9
Rotor inertia (kg.m^2) 8.17E-04 8.41E-04 1.12E-03 1.46E-03 3.47E-03 8.17E-04 8.41E-04 1.12E-03
Stator Resistance of PM Motor
Settings
0.000~65.535
12-68
Permanent Magnet Motor Ld

Settings
0.00~655.35 mH
Permanent Magnet Motor Lq

Settings
0.00~655.35 mH
Offset angle of PM Motor pole

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0.0~360.0
Pr.05-42 can be detected by setting Pr.05-00=4

Ke parameter of PM Motor
Unit: V/1000rpm
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~65535
12-69
06 Protection Parameters
Low Voltage Level

Settings
230V Series: 150.0~220.0V

Frame E~H: 190.0~220.0V
460V Series: 300.0~440.0V
Frame E~H: 380.0~440.0V
It is used to set the Lv level. When the drive is in the low voltage, it will stop output and free to
stop.
input voltage
30V(60V)
Pr. 06-00
LV
Over-voltage Stall Prevention

Settings
230V Series: 0.0~450.0V

460V Series:0.0~900.0V
0: No function
During deceleration, the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to motor
regeneration. When this function is enabled, the AC motor drive will not decelerate further and keep
the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value again.
This function is used for the occasion that the load inertia is unsure. When it stops in the normal
load, the over-voltage wont occur during deceleration and fulfill the setting of deceleration time.
Sometimes, it may not stop due to over-voltage during decelerating to stop when increasing the
load regenerative inertia. At this moment, the AC drive will auto add the deceleration time until drive
stop.
When the over-voltage stall prevention is enabled, drive deceleration time will be larger than the
setting.
When there is any problem as using deceleration time, refer to the following items to solve it.
1. Add the suitable deceleration time.
2. Add brake resistor (refer to appendix B-1 for details) to consume the electrical energy that
regenerated from the motor with heat type.
Related parameters: Pr.01-13, 01-15, 01-17, 01-19 (settings of decel. time 1~4), Pr.02-13~02-14
(Multi-function Output 1 RY1, RY2), Pr. 02-16~02-17 Multi-function Output (MO1, 2)
12-70

High-voltage
at DC si de
Ov er-v ol tage
detec ti on
level
Time
Output
frequency
F requenc y Held
D eceleration c har acteristic

w hen Ov er-Voltage Stall
Pr ev ention enabled
Time
previous deceleration time
requir ed time for decelerating to 0H z when over- voltage
stall prevention is enabled.
Reserved
Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration

Settings
Normal duty: 0~160% (100%: drives rated current)
Heavy duty: 0~180% (100%: drives rated current)
If the motor load is too large or drive acceleration time is too short, the AC drive output current may
increase abruptly during acceleration and it may cause motor damage or trigger protection
functions (OL or OC). This parameter is used to prevent this situation.
During acceleration, the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value
specified by Pr.06-03 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor. When this function
is enabled, the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant until the
current drops below the maximum value.
When the over-current stall prevention is enabled, drive deceleration time will be larger than the
setting.
When the Over-Current Stall Prevention occurs due to too small motor capacity or in the factory
setting, please decrease Pr.06-03 setting.
When there is any problem by using acceleration time, refer to the following items to solve it.
Related parameters: Pr.01-12, 01-14, 01-16, 01-18 (settings of accel. time 1~4), Pr.01-44
1. dd the suitable acceleration time.
2. Setting Pr.01-44 Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration Setting to 1, 3 or 4 (auto accel.)
Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration Setting, Pr.02-13~02-14 (Multi-function Output 1 RY1, RY2), Pr.
02-16~02-17 Multi-function Output (MO1, 2)
12-71

Output current
06-03
Setting frequency
Over-Current
Detection
Level
Output frequency
Over-Current Stall p revention during
Acceleration,frequ ency held
Time
Original setting of acceleration time
actual acceleratio n time when over-current stall
prevention is ena bled
Over-current Stall Prevention during Operation

Settings
Normal duty: 0~160% (100%: drives rated current)
Factory Setting: 120%
Heavy duty: 0~180% (100%: drives rated current)
Factory Setting: 150%
It is a protection for drive to auto decrease output frequency when the motor is over-load abruptly
during motor constant operation.
If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr.06-04 when the drive is operating, the drive
will decrease its output frequency (according to Pr.06-05) to prevent the motor stall. If the output
current is lower than the setting specified in Pr.06-04, the drive will accelerate (according to
Pr.06-05) again to catch up with the set frequency command value.
Ov er-Curr ent
Detec tion Level
06-04
Current
Pr . 06-04 s etting
Ov er-Curr ent Stall P revention

during Operation, output
frequency dec reases
Output
F requenc y
Decreases by
deceleration time
over- curr ent stall pr eventi on during oper ation
Pr . 06-04 s ettingrated dr ive c urrent X 5%
T ime
Accel./Decel. Time Selection of Stall Prevention at Constant Speed

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: by current accel/decel time

1: by the 1st accel/decel time
2: by the 2nd accel/decel time
3: by the 3rd accel/decel time
4: by the 4th accel/decel time
5: by auto accel/decel
It is used to set the accel./decel. time selection when stall prevention occurs at constant speed.
12-72
Over-torque Detection Selection (OT1)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to
2: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop operation
after detection
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operate after detection
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after detection
Over-torque Detection Selection (OT2)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to
2: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop operation
after detection
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operation after
detection
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after detection
When Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 are set to 1 or 3, it will display a warning message and wont have an
abnormal record.
When Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 are set to 2 or 4, it will display a warning message and will have an
abnormal record.
Over-torque Detection Level (OT1)

Settings
10 to 250% (100%: drives rated current)

Settings
0.0~60.0 sec

Settings
10 to 250% (100%: drives rated current)
Over-torque Detection Time (OT2)

Settings
0.0~60.0 sec
Over torque detection is determine by the following method: if the output current exceeds the
over-torque detection level (Pr.06-07, factory setting: 150%) and also exceeds Pr.06-08
Over-Torque Detection Time, the fault code ot1/ot2 will appear. If a Multi-Functional Output
Terminal is to over-torque detection (setting 7 or 8), the output is on. Please refer to
Pr.02-13~02-14 for details.
12-73
current
5%
Pr.06-07,
Pr.06-10
Pr.06-08, 06-11
Current Limit
Settings
This parameter sets the max. current output of the drive.
Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 1)
Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 2)

Factory Setting: 2
Settings
0: Inverter motor
1: Standard motor
2: Disable
It is used to prevent self-cooled motor overheats under low speed. User can use electronic thermal
relay to limit drivers output power.
Electronic Thermal Characteristic for Motor 1
Electronic Thermal Characteristic for Motor 2

Settings
30.0~600.0 sec
The parameter is set by the 150% of motor rated current and the setting of Pr.06-14 and Pr.06-28 to
prevent the motor damaged from overheating. When it reaches the setting, it will display
EoL1/EoL2 and the motor will be in free running.
Operation
time(min)
5
60Hz or more
4
50Hz
10Hz
5Hz
2
1
Load
0 20 40 60 80100120140160180200 factor (%)
12-74
Heat Sink Over-heat (OH) Warning

Settings
0.0~110.0
Stall Prevention Limit Level

Factory Setting: 50
Settings
0~100% (Refer to Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04)
When operation frequency is larger than Pr.01-01; e.g. Pr06-03=150%, Pr. 06-04=100% and Pr.
06-16=80%:
Stall Prevention Level during acceleration = 06-03x06-16=150x80%=120%.
Stall Prevention Level at constant speed= 06-04x06-16=100x80%=80%.
Present Fault Record
Second Most Recent Fault Record
Third Most Recent Fault Record
Fourth Most Recent Fault Record
Fifth Most Recent Fault Record
Sixth Most Recent Fault Record
Settings
0: No fault record
14: Stop mid-low voltage (LvS)
17: Capacitance over-heat (oH2) (for 40hp above)
18: tH1o (TH1 open: IGBT over-heat
protection error)
19: tH2o (TH2 open: capacitance over-heat
protection error)
20: Reserved
21: Drive over-load (oL)
12-75

24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3) (PTC)
25: Reserved
32: Reserved
39: occ IGBT short circuit detection error (Hd3)
53: Reserved
61: Y-connection/-connection switch error (ydc)
12-76

66-72: Reserved
74~78: Reserved
79: Uocc U phase over current (Detection begins as RUN
is pressed, software protection)
80: Vocc V phase over current (Detection begins as RUN
is pressed, software protection)
81: Wocc W phase over current (Detection begins as
RUN is pressed, software protection)
82: OPHL U phase output phase loss
83: OPHL Vphase output phase loss
84: OPHL Wphase output phase loss
85~100: Reserved
101: CGdE CANopen software disconnect1
102: CHbE CANopen software disconnect2
103: CSYE CANopen synchronous error
104: CbFE CANopen hardware disconnect
105: CIdE CANopen index setting error
106: CAdE CANopen slave station number setting error
107: CFrE CANopen index setting exceed limit
111: Reserved
When the fault occurs and force stopping, it will record in this parameter.
At stop with low voltage Lv (LvS warn, no record). During operation with mid-low voltage Lv (LvA,
Lvd, Lvn error, will record).
Setting 62: when dEb function is enabled, the drive will execute dEb and record to the Pr.06-17 to
Pr.06-22 simultaneously.

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0 to 65535 sec (refer to bit table for fault code)
These parameters can be used with multi-function output (set to 35-38) for the specific requirement.
When the fault occurs, the corresponding terminals will be activated (It needs to convert binary
value to decimal value to fill in Pr.06-23 to Pr.06-26).
Fault Code
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
current
Volt.
OL
SYS
FBK
EXI
CE
0: No fault
12-77
14: Stop mid-low voltage (LvS )
17: Capacitance over-heat (oH2)
18: tH1o (TH1 open)
19: tH2o (TH2 open)
20: Reserved
21:
Drive over-load (oL)
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3) (PTC)
25: Reserved
32: Reserved
39: occ IGBT short circuit detection error (Hd3)
12-78
53: Reserved
61: Y-connection/-connection switch error
(ydc)
66-72: Reserved
74~78: Reserved
79: U phase over current (Uocc)
80: V phase over current (Vocc)
81: W phase over current (Wocc)
82: OPHL U phase output phase loss
83: OPHL Vphase output phase loss
84: OPHL Wphase output phase loss
85~100: Reserved
101: CGdE CANopen software disconnect1
102: CHbE CANopen software disconnect2
103: CSYE CANopen synchronous error
104: CbFE CANopen hardware disconnect
105: CIdE CANopen index setting error
106: CAdE CANopen slave station number
setting error
107: CFrE CANopen index setting exceed limit
12-79
111: Reserved
PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) Detection Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Warn and keep operating

3: No warning
PTC Level
Settings
0.0~100.0%
It needs to set AVI/ACI/AUI analog input function Pr.03-00~03-02 to 6 (P.T.C. thermistor input
value).
It is used to set the PTC level, and the corresponding value for 100% is max. analog input value.
Frequency Command for Malfunction

Settings
0.00~655.35Hz
When malfunction occurs, use can check the frequency command. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.
Output Frequency at Malfunction
Settings 0.00~655.35Hz
When malfunction occurs, use can check the current frequency command. If it happens again, it
will overwrite the previous record.
Output Voltage at Malfunction
Settings
0.0~6553.5V
When malfunction occurs, user can check current output voltage. If it happens again, it will
DC Voltage at Malfunction
Settings
0.0~6553.5V
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current DC voltage. If it happens again, it will
Output Current at Malfunction
Settings
0.00~655.35Amp
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current output current. If it happens again, it will
12-80
IGBT Temperature at Malfunction

Settings
0.0~6553.5
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current IGBT temperature. If it happens again, it will
Capacitance Temperature at Malfunction
Settings
0.0~6553.5
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current capacitance temperature. If it happens again,
it will overwrite the previous record.
Motor Speed in rpm at Malfunction
Settings
0.0~6553.5
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current motor speed in rpm. If it happens again, it will
Torque Command at Malfunction
Settings
0~65535
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current torque command. If it happens again, it will
Status of Multi-function Input Terminal at Malfunction
Settings
0000h~FFFFh
Status of Multi-function Output Terminal at Malfunction

Settings
0000h~FFFFh
When malfunction occurs, user can check the status of multi-function input/output terminals. If it
happens again, it will overwrite the previous record.
Drive Status at Malfunction
Settings
0000H~FFFFh
When malfunction occurs, please check the drive status (communication address 2119H). If
malfunction happens again, the previous record will be overwritten by this parameter.
Reserved
Reserved
12-81
Treatment for Output Phase Loss Detection (OPHL)

Factory Setting: 3
Settings

3: No warning
Output phase loss

Deceleration Time of Output Phase Loss
Factory Setting:0.500
Settings
0.000~65.535 sec
Current Bandwidth
Settings
0.00~655.35%
DC Brake Time of Output Phase Loss

Settings
0.000~65.535 sec
Reserved
Time for Input Phase Loss Detection
Settings
0.00~600.00 sec
Reserved
Ripple of Input Phase Loss
Factory Setting:30.0 / 60.0
Settings
230V Series: 0.0~160.0 Vdc

460V Series: 0.0~320.0 Vdc
Treatment for the detected Input Phase Loss OrP

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: warn, ramp to stop

1: warn, coast to stop
Over ripple protection

Reserved
12-82
Derating Protection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: constant rated current and limit carrier wave by load current and
temperature
1: constant carrier frequency and limit load current by setting carrier wave
2: constant rated current(same as setting 0), but close current limit
Setting 0: When the rated current is constant, carrier frequency (Fc) outputted by PWM will auto
decrease according to surrounding temperature, overload output current and time. If overload
situation is not frequent and only cares the carrier frequency operated with the rated current for a
long time and carrier wave changes during short overload, it is recommended to set to 0.
Refer to the following diagram for the level of carrier frequency. Take VFD007C43A in normal duty
as example, surrounding temperature 50oC with independent installation and UL open-type. When
the carrier frequency is set to 15kHz, it corresponds to 72% rated output current. When it outputs
higher than the value, it will auto decrease the carrier frequency. If the output is 83% rated current
and the carrier frequency will decrease to 12kHz. In addition, it will also decrease the carrier
frequency when overload. When the carrier frequency is 15kHz and the current is 120%*72%=86%
for a minute, the carrier frequency will decrease to the factory setting.
Setting 1: It is used for the fixed carrier frequency and prevents the carrier wave changes and
motor noise caused by the surrounding temperature and frequent overload.
Refer to the following for the derating level of rated current. Take VFD007C43A in normal duty as
example, when the carrier frequency keeps in 15kHz and the rated current is decreased to 72%, it
will have OL protection when the current is 120%*72%=86% for a minute. Therefore, it needs to
operate by the curve to keep the carrier frequency.
Setting 2: It sets the protection method and action to 0 and disables the current limit for the
Ratio*160% of output current in the normal duty and Ratio*180% of output current in the heavy duty.
The advantage is that it can provide higher output current when the setting is higher than the
factory setting of carrier frequency. The disadvantage is that it decreases carrier wave easily when
overload.
12-83
Derating curve diagram in the normal duty

Setting=1
Setting=0 or 2
(50: UL open-type)
(40:UL type1 or open type_size by
size)
460V
Setting=0 or 2
(40: UL open-type)
(30: UL type1 or open type_size by
size)
460V
VFD007~150C43A/E
VFD185~550C43A/E
VFD750~3550C43A/E
VFD007~150C43A/E
VFD185~550C43A/E
VFD750~3550C43A/E
110
100
100
Ratio(%)
Ratio(%)
110
90
80
70
60
4
60
4
10 11 12 13 14 15
VFD007~110C23A
VFD150~370C23A;
VFD300~370C23E
VFD450~900C23A/E
110
10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz)
Setting=1
Setting=0 or 2
(50: UL open-type)
(40:UL type1 or open type_size by
size)
230V
Setting=0 or 2
(40: UL open-type)
size)
230V
100
VFD007~110C23A
VFD150~370C23A;
VFD300~370C23E
VFD450~900C23A/E
110
90
100
80
Ratio(%)
Ratio(%)
80
70
Fc (kHz)
70
60
4
90
90
80
70
10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz)
60
4
10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz)
12-84
Derating curve diagram in the heavy duty

Setting=1
Setting=0 or 2
(50: UL open-type)
size)
460V
Setting=0 or 2
(40: UL open-type)
size)
460V
VFD007~150C43A/E
VFD185~550C43A/E
VFD750~3550C43A/E
VFD007~150C43A/E
VFD185~550C43A/E
VFD750~3550C43A/E
110
110
100
90
Ratio(%)
Ratio(%)
100
80
70
60
50
40
2
90
80
70
60
50
3 4
40
2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz)
3 4
230V
230V
VFD007~110C23A
VFD150~370C23A;
VFD300~370C23E
VFD450~900C23A/E
110
110
100
100
Ratio(%)
Ratio(%)
VFD007~110C23A
VFD150~370C23A;
VFD300~370C23E
VFD450~900C23A/E
90
80
70
60
90
80
70
60
50
50
40
2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz)
3 4
40
2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
3 4
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz)
Fc (kHz)
12-85
It should be used with Pr. 00-16 and Pr.00-17 for setting.

NOTE
(As shown in the left figure), The mounting clearances are not for
installing the drive in a confined space (such as cabinet or
electric box). When installing in a confined space, except the
same minimum mounting clearances, it needs to have the
ventilation equipment or air conditioner to keep the surrounding
temperature lower than the operation temperature.
The following table shows heat dissipation and the required air
volume when installing a single drive in a confined space. When
installing multiple drives, the required air volume shall be
multiplied by the number the drives.
Please refer to the chart Air Flow Rate for Cooling for
ventilation equipment design and selection.
Please refer to the chart Power Dissipation for air conditioner
design and selection.
For more detail, please refer to Chapter 2 Installation.
Minimum
Frame
A~C
D~F
G
H
mounting clearance:
A (mm)
B (mm)
60
30
100
50
200
100
350
0
C (mm)
10
0

Flow Rate (cfm)
Flow Rate (m3/hr)
Model No.
External Internal
Total External Internal Total
VFD007C23A
VFD015C23A
VFD022C23A
VFD037C23A
VFD055C23A
VFD075C23A
VFD110C23A
VFD150C23A
VFD185C23A
VFD220C23A
VFD300C23A/E
VFD370C23A/E
VFD450C23A/E
VFD550C23A/E
VFD750C23A/E
VFD900C23A/E
14
14
10
40
66
58
166
166
146
179
179
228
228
246
224
14
14
14
12
12
12
30
30
73
73
73
112
14
14
10
54
80
73
178
178
158
209
209
301
301
319
336
24
24
17
68
112
99
282
282
248
304
304
387
387
418
381
24
24
24
20
20
20
51
51
124
124
124
190
24
24
17
92
136
124
302
302
268
355
355
511
511
542
571
VFD007C43A/E
VFD015C43A/E
VFD022C43A/E
VFD037C43A/E
VFD040C43A/E
VFD055C43A/E
VFD075C43A/E
14
10
10
10
40
14
14
10
10
10
54
24
17
17
17
68
24
24
17
17
17
92
12-86
D (mm)
0
0
0
200 (100, Ta=40)
Drives power dissipation

Power Dissipation
Loss
External
Internal Total
(Heat sink)
33
27
61
56
31
88
79
36
115
113
46
159
197
67
264
249
86
335
409
121
529
455
161
616
549
184
733
649
216
865
913
186
1099
1091
220
1311
1251
267
1518
1401
308
1709
1770
369
2139
2304
484
2788
33
45
71
103
116
134
216
25
29
33
38
42
46
76
59
74
104
141
158
180
292
VFD110C43A/E
66
14
80
112
24
136
VFD150C43A/E
58
14
73
99
24
124
VFD185C43A/E
99
21
120
168
36
204
VFD220C43A/E
99
21
120
168
36
204
VFD300C43A/E
126
21
147
214
36
250
VFD370C43A/E
179
30
209
304
51
355
VFD450C43A/E
179
30
209
304
51
355
VFD550C43A/E
179
30
209
304
51
355
VFD750C43A/E
186
30
216
316
51
367
VFD900C43A/E
257
73
330
437
124
561
VFD1100C43A/E 223
73
296
379
124
503
VFD1320C43A/E 224
112
336
381
190
571
VFD1600C43A/E 289
112
401
491
190
681
VFD1850C43A/E
454
771
VFD2200C43A/E
454
771
VFD2800C43A/E
769
1307
VFD3150C43A/E
769
1307
VFD3550C43A/E
769
1307
The required airflow shown in chart is for installing single drive in
a confined space.
When installing the multiple drives, the required air volume

should be the required air volume for single drive X the number of
the drives.
287
396
369
476
655
809
929
1156
1408
1693
2107
2502
3096
Model series VFD007C23E; VFD015C23E; VFD022C23E; VFD037C23E;

VFD055C23E; VFD75C23E; VFD110C23E; VFD150C23E; VFD185C23E;
VFD220C23E will be available for ordering soon. Please contact your local
93
122
138
158
211
184
218
257
334
399
491
579
687
380
518
507
635
866
993
1147
1413
1742
2092
2599
3081
3783
4589
5772
6381
7156
8007
The heat dissipation
shown in the chart is for
installing single drive in a
confined space.
When installing multiple
drives, volume of heat
dissipation should be the
heat dissipated for single
drive X the number of the
drives.
Heat dissipation for each
model is calculated by
rated voltage, current and
default carrier.

Settings
0.000~10.000V

Settings
0.000~10.000V
PT100 Level 1 Frequency Protection

Settings
0.00~600.00 Hz
Reserved
Software Detection GFF Current Level
12-87
Settings
0.0~6553.5 %
Software Detection GFF Filter Time

Settings
0.0~6553.5 %
Disable Level of dab

Factory Setting:
180.0/360.0
Settings
230V series: 0.0~220.0 Vic

460V series: 0.0~440.0 Vic
Fault Record 1 (min)

Settings
0~64799 min
Pr.06-63 to Pr.06-68 are used to record the operation time for 6 malfunctions and it can also check
if there is any wrong with the drive according to the internal time.
When the malfunction occurs during operation, it records fault in Pr.06-17~06-22 and operation
time is recorded in Pr.06-63~06-68.
For example: When the first fault ovA occurs after operation 3000 min., second fault ovd occurs at
3482 min., third fault ovA occurs at 4051 min., fourth fault ocA at 5003 min., fifth fault ocA at 5824
min., sixth fault ocd occurs at 6402 min. and seven fault ocS at 6951 min..
Itll be recorded as the following table:
It will be recorded as the following table:
First fault
Pr.06-17
ovA
Pr.06-63
3000 ovA occurs at the 3000 min

after operating.
Second fault
Pr.06-17
ovd
Pr.06-63
3482
Pr.06-18
ovA
Pr.06-64
3000
Pr.06-17
ovA
Pr.06-63
4051
Pr.06-18
Pr.06-19
ovd
ovA
Pr.06-64
Pr.06-65
3482
3000
Third fault
12-88
3482-3000=482 min
ovd occurs at 482 min after
last fault (ovA)
4051-3482=569 min
ovA occurs at 569 min after
last fault (ovd)
Seven fault
Pr.06-17
ocS
Pr.06-63
12
Pr.06-18
Pr.06-19
Pr.06-20
Pr.06-21
Pr.06-22
ocA
ocA
ovA
ovd
ovA
Pr.06-64
Pr.06-65
Pr.06-66
Pr.06-67
Pr.06-68
5824
5003
4051
3482
3000
(12-5824)+64800=58988 min
ocS occurs at 58988 min after
last fault (ocA)
Days of operation
Settings
Read only
Minutes of operation
Settings
Read only
Low Current Setting Level

Settings
0.0 ~ 6553.5 %
Low Current Detection Time

Settings
0.00 ~ 655.35 sec
Treatment for low current

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0 : No function
1 : warn and coast to stop
2 : warn and ramp to stop by 2nd deceleration time
3 : warn and operation continue
12-89
07 Special Parameters
Software Brake Level

Settings
230V series: 350.0~450.0Vdc

460V series: 700.0~900.0Vdc
This parameter sets the DC-bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated. Users can choose
the suitable brake resistor to have the best deceleration. Refer to Chapter 7 Accessories for the
information of the brake resistor.
It is only valid for the models below 30kW of 460 series and 22kW of 230 series.
DC Brake Current Level
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~100%
This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start-up and stopping.
When setting DC Brake Current, the Rated Current is regarded as 100%. It is recommended to
start with a low DC Brake Current Level and then increase until proper holding torque has been
attained.
When it is in FOCPG/TQCPG mode, DC brake is zero-speed operation. It can enable DC brake
function by setting to any value.
DC Brake Time at Start-up

Settings
0.00~60.0 sec
The motor may be in the rotation status due to external force or itself inertia. If the drive is used
with the motor at this moment, it may cause motor damage or drive protection due to over current.
This parameter can be used to output DC current before motor operation to stop the motor and
get a stable start. This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN
command. When it is set to 0.0, it is invalid.
DC Brake Time at Stop
Settings
0.00~60.00 sec
The motor may be in the rotation status after drive stop outputting due to external force or itself
inertia and cant stop accurately. This parameter can output DC current to force the motor drive
stop after drive stops to make sure that the motor is stop.
This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping. To DC brake at
stop, this function will be valid when Pr.00-22 is set to 0 or 2. When setting to 0.0, it is invalid.
Related parameters: Pr.00-22 Stop Method, Pr.07-04 Start-point for DC Brake
Start-Point for DC Brake

Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration. When this
setting is less than start frequency (Pr.01-09), the start-point for DC brake will start from the min.
frequency.
12-90

Output frequen cy
01-09
Minimum
out put
frequen cy
Run /Stop
DC Brak Time
07-04
Start-point for during St opping
DC brake
time during
stopping
OFF
ON
Time
DC Brake Time
DC Brake at Start-up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts, such as fans and
pumps. Under such circumstances, DC Brake can be used to hold the load in position before
setting it in motion.
DC Brake at stop is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load in position,
such as crane or cutting machine.
Reserved
Restart after Momentary Power Loss

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Stop operation
1: Speed search for last frequency command
2: Speed search for the minimum output frequency
This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from a
momentary power loss.
The power connected to the drive may power off momentarily due to many reasons. This function
allows the drive to keep outputting after power is on again after power off and wont cause drive
stops.
Setting 1: Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the Master
Frequency reference value after drive output frequency and motor rotator speed is synchronous.
The motor has the characteristics of big inertia and small obstruction. For example, in the
equipment with big inertia wheel, it doesnt need to wait to execute operation command until wheel
is complete stop after re-start to save time.
Setting 2: Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the master
frequency after drive output frequency and motor rotator speed is synchronous. The motor has the
characteristics of small inertia and bigger obstruction.
In PG control mode, the AC motor drive will execute the speed search function automatically by the
PG speed when this setting isnt set to0.
Maximum Power Loss Duration

Settings
0.1~20.0 sec
If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting, the AC motor drive will resume
operation. If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time, the AC motor drive output is
then turned off (coast stop).
The selected operation after power loss in Pr.07-06 is only executed when the maximum
allowable power loss time is 5 seconds and the AC motor drive displays LU.
But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload, even if the maximum allowable power
12-91
loss time is 5 seconds, the operation mode as set in Pr.07-06 is not executed. In that case it
starts up normally.
Base block Time

Settings
0.1~5.0 sec
When momentary power loss is detected, the AC drive will block its output and then wait for a
specified period of time (determined by Pr.07-08, called Base-Block Time) before resuming
operation. This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual regeneration
voltage from the motor on the output has disappeared before the drive is activated again.
7
Input B.B. signal

Stop output voltage
Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time Pr.07-08
Speed search
Synchronization speed detection
7 Frequency command before B.B.
Output frequency(H)
Output voltage(V)
Output current A
07-09
Current Limit for
Speed Search
Time
FWD Run
B.B.
B.B. Search with last output frequency downward timing chart
Output frequency
(H)
Input B.B. signal

Stop output voltage
Disable B.B. signal
Output voltage
(V)
Waiting time 08.07
output current A
07-09 Current Limit
for Speed Search Speed
Speed Search
Time
FWD Run
B.B.
B.B. Search with minimum output frequency upward timing chart
12-92
Input B.B. signal

Stop voltage output
Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time Pr.07-08
Speed search
Output frequency(H)
Output voltage(V)
Output current A
06-03
Over-Current Stall
Prevention
during Accel.
FWD Run
Time
B.B.
B.B. Search with minimum output frequency upward timing chart
Current Limit for Speed Search

Factory Setting: 50
Settings
20~200%
Following a momentary power loss, the AC motor drive will start its speed search operation only if
the output current is greater than the value set by Pr.07-09.
When executing speed search, the V/f curve is operated by group 1 setting. The maximum current
for the optimum accel./decel. and start speed search is set by Pr.07-09.
The speed search level will affect the synchronous time. It will get the synchronization faster when
this parameter is set to larger value. But too large value may active overload protection.
Treatment to Reboots After Fault

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Stop operation
1: Speed search starts with current speed
2: Speed search starts with minimum output frequency
PG speed when this setting isnt set to 0.
Fault includes: bb,oc,ov,occ etc. To restart after oc, ov, occ, Pr.07-11 can not be set to 0.
# of Automatic Reboots After Fault

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~10
The maximum automatic rest and reboots times for the AC motor drive when faults (oc, ov, occ)
occur is up to 10 times. When this parameter is set to 0, there will be no reset or reboots. When
auto reset and reboots are enabled, the AC motor drive perform a speed search before activate the
drive.
When the number of fault occur exceed Pr.07-11 and is within the duration less than Pr.07-33, the
drive will refuse to re-start. Please press RESET key to continue the operation.
12-93
Speed Search during Start-up

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Speed search from maximum output frequency
2: Speed search from start-up motor frequency
3: Speed search from minimum output frequency
This parameter is used for starting and stopping a motor with a high inertia. A motor with high
inertia will take 2-5 minutes or longer to stop completely. By setting this parameter, the user does
not need to wait for the motor to come to a complete stop before restarting the AC motor drive. If a
PG card and encoder is used on the drive and motor, then the speed search will start from the
speed that is detected by the encoder and accelerate quickly to the commanded frequency. The
output current is set by the Pr.07-09.
PG speed when this setting isnt set to 0.
Decel. Time at Momentary Power Loss (dEb function)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: 1st decel. time
2: 2nd decel. time
3: 3rd decel. time
4: 4th decel. time
5: Current decel. time
6: Auto decel. time
This parameter is used for the decel. time selection for momentary power loss.
dEb Return Time

Settings
0.0~25.0 sec
function is the AC motor drive decelerates to stop after momentary power loss. When the
momentary power loss occurs, this function can be used for the motor to decelerate to 0 speed with
deceleration stop method. When the power is on again, motor will run again after DEB return time.
(has applied on high-speed spindle)
Status 1: Insufficient power supply due to momentary power-loss/unstable power (due to low
voltage)/sudden heavy-load
12-94

DC BUS voltage
it doesn't need
multi-function terminals
The level for DEB return time

(Lv=+30V+58V)
The level for soft start relay to be ON
(Lv+30)
Lv level
Soft start relay at
power side
DEB function is activated
Output frequency
Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection for
momentary power loss
07-14
DEB return time
NOTE
When Pr.07-14 is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be stopped and won't re-start
at the power-on again.
Status 2: unexpected power off, such as momentary power loss

DC BUS voltage
The level for DEB return time
(Lv=+30V+58V)
The level for soft start relay to be ON
(Lv+30)
Lv level
Soft start relay at
power side
DEB function is activated
Output frequency
Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection for
momentary power loss
07-14
DEB return time

NOTE
For example, in textile machinery, you will hope that all the machines can be decelerated to stop to prevent broken stitching
when power loss. In this case, the host controller will send a message to the AC motor drive to use dEb function with
deceleration time via EF.

Settings
0.00~600.00 sec
Dwell Frequency at Accel.

Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Dwell Time at Decel.

Settings
0.00~600.00 sec
12-95
Dwell Frequency at Decel.

Settings
0.00~600.00 Hz
In the heavy load situation, Dwell can make stable output frequency temporarily, such as crane or
elevator.
Pr.07-15 to Pr.07-18 is for heavy load to prevent OV or OC occurs.
Frequency
07-16
Dwell
Frequency
07-15
at Accel.
Dwell Time
at Accel.
07-17
Dwell Time
at Decel.
07-18
Dwell
Frequency
at Decel.
Time
Dwell at accel./decel.
Fan Cooling Control

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Fan always ON
1: 1 minute after the AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF
2: When the AC motor drive runs, the fan is ON. When the AC motor drive
stops, the fan is OFF
3: Fan turns ON when preliminary heat sink temperature (around 60oC) is
attained.
4: Fan always OFF
This parameter is used for the fan control.

Setting 0: Fan will be ON as the drives power is turned ON.
Setting 1: 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF
Setting 2: AC motor drive runs and fan will be ON. AC motor drive stops and fan will be OFF.
Setting 3: Fan run according to IGBT and capacitance temperature. Fan will be ON when
preliminary capacitance temperature is higher than 60oC. Fan will be OFF, when capacitance
temperature is lower than 40oC.
Setting 4: Fan is always OFF
Emergency Stop (EF) & Force Stop
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Coast to stop
1: Stop by 1st deceleration time
2: Stop by 2nd deceleration time
3: Stop by 3rd deceleration time
4: Stop by 4th deceleration time
5: System Deceleration
6: Automatic Deceleration
12-96
Pr.07-20 determines AC motor drive stop method. When the multi-function input terminal is set to
10 or 18 and is activated, the drive will stop according to the setting in Pr.07-20.
Auto Energy-saving Operation

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Enable
When Pr.07-21 is set to 1, the acceleration and deceleration will operate with full voltage. During
constant speed operation, it will auto calculate the best voltage value by the load power for the load.
This function is not suitable for the ever-changing load or near full-load during operation.
When the output frequency is constant, i.e. constant operation, the output voltage will auto
decrease by the load reduction. Therefore, the drive will operate with min. power, multiplication of
voltage and current.
Output
voltage
100 %
75%
save up to 25%
output voltage
Auto energy- saving
Fr equenc y
Energy-saving Gain
Settings
10~1000%
When Pr.00-19 is set to 1, this parameter can be used to adjust the gain of energy-saving. The
factory setting is 100%. If the result is not good, it can adjust by decreasing the setting. If the
motor oscillates, it should increase the setting.
Auto Voltage Regulation(AVR) Function

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Enable AVR
1: Disable AVR
2: Disable AVR during deceleration
The rated voltage of the motor is usually 220V/200VAC 60Hz/50Hz and the input voltage of the AC
motor drive may vary between 180V to 264 VAC 50Hz/60Hz. Therefore, when the AC motor drive
is used without AVR function, the output voltage will be the same as the input voltage. When the
motor runs at voltages exceeding the rated voltage with 12% - 20%, its lifetime will be shorter and it
can be damaged due to higher temperature, failing insulation and unstable torque output.
AVR function automatically regulates the AC motor drive output voltage to the motor rated voltage.
For instance, if V/f curve is set at 200 VAC/50Hz and the input voltage is at 200V to 264VAC, then
the motor Output Voltage will automatically be reduced to a maximum of 200VAC/50Hz. If the input
voltage is at 180V to 200VAC, output voltage to motor and input power will be in direct proportion.
Setting 0: when AVR function is enabled, the drive will calculate the output voltage by actual
DC-bus voltage. The output voltage wont be changed by DC bus voltage.
12-97
Setting 1: when AVR function is disabled, the drive will calculate the output voltage by DC-bus
voltage. The output voltage will be changed by DC bus voltage. It may cause insufficient/over
current.
Setting 2: the drive will disable the AVR during deceleration, such as operated from high speed to
low speed.
When the motor ramps to stop, the deceleration time is longer. When setting this parameter to 2
with auto acceleration/deceleration, the deceleration will be quicker.
When it is in FOCPG or TQCPG, it is recommended to set to 0 (enable AVR).
Filter Time of Torque Command (V/F and SVC control mode)

Settings
0.001~10.000 sec
When the setting is too long, the control will be stable but the control response will be delay. When
the setting is too short, the response will be quickly but the control may be unstable. User can
adjust the setting by the control and response situation.
Filter Time of Slip Compensation (V/F and SVC control mode)

Settings
0.001~10.000 sec
It can set Pr.05-22 and 05-23 to change the response time of compensation.
If Pr.05-22 and 05-23 are set to 10seconds, the response time of compensation is the slowest. But
the system may be unstable when the setting is too short.
Torque Compensation Gain (V/F and SVC control mode)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~10
When the motor load is large, a part of drive output voltage is absorbed by the resistor of stator
winding and causes insufficient voltage at motor induction and result in over output current and
insufficient output torque. It can auto adjust output voltage by the load and keep the air gap
magnetic fields stable to get the optimal operation.
In the V/F control, the voltage will be decreased in direct proportion when the frequency is
decreased. Itll cause decrease torque at low speed due to small AC resistor and the same DC
resistor. Therefore, Auto torque compensation function will increase the output voltage in the low
frequency to get higher start torque.
When Pr.07-26 is set to large, it may cause motor overflux and result in too large output current,
motor overheat or triggers protection function.
Slip Compensation Gain (V/F and SVC control mode)

Settings
0.00~10.00
The induction motor needs the constant slip to produce magnetic torque. It can be ignore in the
higher motor speed, such as rated speed or 2-3% slip.
In the operation with variable frequency, the slip and the synchronous frequency will be in reverse
proportion to produce the same magnetic torque. That is the slip will be larger with the reduction of
synchronous frequency. The motor may stop when the synchronous frequency is decreased to a
specific value. Therefore, the slip serious affects the accuracy of motor speed at low speed.
12-98
In another situation, when the drive uses with induction motor, the slip will be increased by the
increasing load. It also affects the accuracy of motor speed.
This parameter can be used to set compensation frequency and reduce the slip to close the
synchronous speed when the motor runs in the rated current to raise the drive accuracy. When the
drive output current is larger than Pr.05-05 No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (A), the drive will
compensation the frequency by this parameter.
When the control method (Pr.00-11) is changed from V/f mode to vector mode, this parameter will
auto be set to 1.00. Otherwise, it will be set to 0.00. Please do the compensation of slip after
overload and acceleration. The compensation value should be increased from small to large
gradually. That is to add the output frequency with motor rated slip X Pr.07-27 Slip Compensation
Gain when the motor is rated load. If the actual speed ratio is slow than expectation, please
increase the setting. Otherwise, decrease the setting.
Reserved
Slip Deviation Level

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~100.0%
0: No detection
Detection Time of Slip Deviation

Factory Setting:1.0
Settings
0.0~10.0 sec
Over Slip Treatment

Factory Setting:0
Settings

3: No warning
Pr.07-29 to Pr.07-31 are used to set allowable slip level/time and over slip treatment when the drive
is running.
Motor Hunting Gain

Factory Setting:1000
Settings
0~10000
0: Disable
The motor will have current wave motion in some specific area. It can improve this situation by
setting this parameter. (When it is high frequency or run with PG, it can be set to 0. when the
current wave motion happens in the low frequency, please increase Pr.05-29.)
Recovery Time to Pr.07-11 (# of automatic reboots after fault)

Settings
00~6000.0 sec
This parameter sets the time period for counting the # of faults (ov, oc, occ) occurred. If # of faults
occurred within this time period does not exceed the setting in Pr.07-11, the counting will be
cleared and start from 0 when the next reboots after fault happens. However, if the # of faults
12-99
occurred within this time period have exceed the setting in Pr.07-11, user needs to press the
RESET key manually.
12-100
08 High-function PID Parameters
Input Terminal for PID Feedback

Factory Setting:0
Settings
0: No function
1: Negative PID feedback: input from external terminal AVI (Pr.03-00)
2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip direction)
3: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
4: Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI (Pr.03-00)
5: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip direction)
6: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
Negative feedback means: +target value feedback. It is used for the detection value will be
increased by increasing the output frequency.
Positive feedback means: -target value + feedback. It is used for the detection value will be
decreased by increasing the output frequency.
Common applications for PID control
1. Flow control: A flow sensor is used to feedback the flow data and performs accurate flow control.
2. Pressure control: A pressure sensor is used to feedback the pressure data and performs precise
pressure control.
3. Air volume control: An air volume sensor is used to feedback the air volume data to have
excellent air volume regulation.
4. Temperature control: A thermocouple or thermistor is used to feedback temperature data for
comfortable temperature control.
5. Speed control: A speed sensor or encoder is used to feedback motor shaft speed or input
another machines speed as a target value for closed loop speed control of master-slave operation.
Pr.10.00 sets the PID set point source (target value). PID control operates with the feedback signal
as set by Pr.10.01 either 0~+10V voltage or 4-20mA current.
PID control loop:
drive ex ecute PID contr ol output value

Setpoint +
K p (1
feedback s ignal
K p : Proportional gain( P)
1
Td S)
Ti S
IM
sensor
Ti : Integral time(I) Td: D erivative control(D )
: Operator
Concept of PID control

1. Proportional gain(P): the output is proportional to input. With only proportional gain control,
there will always be a steady-state error.
2. Integral time(I): the controller output is proportional to the integral of the controller input. To
eliminate the steady-state error, an integral part needs to be added to the controller. The integral
time decides the relation between integral part and error. The integral part will be increased by time
even if the error is small. It gradually increases the controller output to eliminate the error until it is 0.
In this way a system can be stable without steady-state error by proportional gain control and
integral time control.
12-101
3. Differential control(D): the controller output is proportional to the differential of the controller
input. During elimination of the error, oscillation or instability may occur. The differential control can
be used to suppress these effects by acting before the error. That is, when the error is near 0, the
differential control should be 0. Proportional gain(P) + differential control(D) can be used to improve
the system state during PID adjustment.
When PID control is used in a constant pressure pump feedback application:
Set the applications constant pressure value (bar) to be the set point of PID control. The pressure
sensor will send the actual value as PID feedback value. After comparing the PID set point and PID
feedback, there will be an error. Thus, the PID controller needs to calculate the output by using
proportional gain(P), integral time(I) and differential time(D) to control the pump. It controls the drive
to have different pump speed and achieves constant pressure control by using a 4-20mA signal
corresponding to 0-10 bar as feedback to the drive.
no fuse breaker
(NFB)
water pump
R(L1)
R(L1)
U(T 1)
S(L2)
S(L2)
V(T2)
T(L3)
T(L3)
W(T 3)
IM
3~
throttle
F eedback 4-20mA
cor responds
0-10bar
ACI/A VI
(4- 20mA /0- 10V )
ACM
analog si gnal common
pressure
sensor
DC
- +
1. Pr.00-04 is set to 10 (Display PID analog feedback signal value (b) (%))
2. Pr.01-12 Acceleration Time will be set as required
3. Pr.01-13 Deceleration Time will be set as required
4. Pr.00-21=0 to operate from the digital keypad
5. Pr.00-20=0, the set point is controlled by the digital keypad
6. Pr.08-00=1 (Negative PID feedback from analog input)
7. ACI analog input Pr. 03-01 set to 5, PID feedback signal.
8. Pr.08-01-08-03 will be set as required
8.1 If there is no vibration in the system, increase Pr.08-01(Proportional Gain (P))
8.2 If there is no vibration in the system, reduce Pr.08-02(Integral Time (I))
8.3 If there is no vibration in the system, increase Pr.08-03(Differential Time(D))
Refer to Pr.08-00 to 08-21 for PID parameters settings.
Proportional Gain (P)

Settings
0.0~500.0%
It is used to eliminate the system error. It is usually used to decrease the error and get the faster
response speed. But if setting too large value in Pr.08-01, it may cause the system oscillation and
instability.
If the other two gains (I and D) are set to zero, proportional control is the only one effective.
12-102
Integral Time (I)

Settings
0.00~100.00 sec
0.00: Disable
The integral controller is used to eliminate the error during stable system. The integral control
doesnt stop working until error is 0. The integral is acted by the integral time. The smaller integral
time is set, the stronger integral action will be. It is helpful to reduce overshoot and oscillation to
make a stable system. At this moment, the decreasing error will be slow. The integral control is
often used with other two controls to become PI controller or PID controller.
This parameter is used to set the integral time of I controller. When the integral time is long, it will
have small gain of I controller, the slower response and bad external control. When the integral
time is short, it will have large gain of I controller, the faster response and rapid external control.
When the integral time is too small, it may cause system oscillation.
If the integral time is set as 0.00, Pr.08-02 will be disabled.
Derivative Control (D)

Settings
0.00~1.00 sec
The differential controller is used to show the change of system error and it is helpful to preview the
change of error. So the differential controller can be used to eliminate the error to improve system
state. With the suitable differential time, it can reduce overshoot and shorten adjustment time.
However, the differential operation will increase the noise interference. Please note that too large
differential will cause big noise interference. Besides, the differential shows the change and the
output of the differential will be 0 when there is no change. Therefore, the differential control cant
be used independently. It needs to be used with other two controllers to make a PD controller or
PID controller.
This parameter can be used to set the gain of D controller to decide the response of error change.
The suitable differential time can reduce the overshoot of P and I controller to decrease the
oscillation and have a stable system. But too long differential time may cause system oscillation.
The differential controller acts for the change of error and cant reduce the interference. It is not
recommended to use this function in the serious interference.
Upper limit of Integral Control

Settings
0.0~100.0%
This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the
Master Frequency. The formula is: Integral upper bound = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00)
x (Pr.08-04 %).
Too large integral value will make the slow response due to sudden load change. In this way, it may
cause motor stall or machine damage.
PID Output Frequency Limit

Settings
0.0~110.0%
This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control. The formula
is Output Frequency Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) X Pr.08-05 %.
12-103
Reserved
PID Delay Time

Factory Setting:0.0
Settings
0.0~35.0 sec
It is used to set the time that required for the low-pass filter of PID output. Increasing the setting, it
may affect the drives response speed.
The frequency output of PID controller will filter after primary delay filter time. It can smooth the
change of the frequency output. The longer primary delay filter time is set, the slower response time
it will be.
The unsuitable primary delay filter time may cause system oscillation.
Inp ut Selection of the
PID Targe ted Value
00-20:KPV-C E0 1/
RS485
03-00~0 2:UP/D own
ke y PG
PID Cancelled
08-00=0
or 02-01~ 06=21(pid off)
F requ ency
command
+
PID offset
08-06
+
Display of th e PID fee dback
00-04=1 0 display o f t he
PID feed back
Inp ut Selection
of the PID Fee dback
08-00:AVI/ACI
AUI /PG
Pro po rtio n
ga in
Di ffere nti al
Time
08-01
08-03
PID
Delay
Time
08-07
I
08-02
Int egral Time
08-04
uppe r limit
for
Int egral
08-05
PID Freq.
out put
command
limit
08-09
Treatme nt o f t he
F eedback Signal Fau lt
If Hz>08 -05
time exce eds 08-08
PI Control: controlled by the P action only, and thus, the deviation cannot be eliminated entirely. To
eliminate residual deviations, the P + I control will generally be utilized. And when the PI control is
utilized, it could eliminate the deviation incurred by the targeted value changes and the constant
external interferences. However, if the I action is excessively powerful, it will delay the responding
toward the swift variation. The P action could be used solely on the loading system that possesses
the integral components.
PD Control: when deviation occurred, the system will immediately generate some operation load
that is greater than the load generated single handedly by the D action to restrain the increment of
the deviation. If the deviation is small, the effectiveness of the P action will be decreasing as well.
The control objects include occasions with integral component loads, which are controlled by the P
action only, and sometimes, if the integral component is functioning, the whole system will be
vibrating. On such occasions, in order to make the P actions vibration subsiding and the system
stabilizing, the PD control could be utilized. In other words, this control is good for use with loadings
of no brake functions over the processes.
PID Control: Utilize the I action to eliminate the deviation and the D action to restrain the vibration,
thereafter, combine with the P action to construct the PID control. Use of the PID method could
obtain a control process with no deviations, high accuracies and a stable system.
12-104
Feedback Signal Detection Time

Settings
0.0~3600.0 sec
This parameter is only valid when the feedback signal is ACI.

This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a warning
is given. It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time.
If this parameter is set to 0.0, the system would not detect any abnormality signal.
Feedback Fault Treatment
Factory Setting: 0
Settings

3: Warn and operate at last frequency
This parameter is only valid when the feedback signal is ACI.

AC motor drive acts when the feedback signals (analog PID feedback or PG (encoder) feedback)
are abnormal.
Sleep Frequency
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Wake-up Frequency
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Sleep Time
Settings
0.00~6000.0 sec
If the command frequency falls below the sleep frequency, for the specified time in Pr. 08-12, then
the drive will shut off the output and wait until the command frequency rises above Pr.08-11.
08-11
Frequency command
Wake-up frequency
actual output frequency
08-10
Sleep frequency
sleep time
0Hz
08-12
Sleep Function
PID Deviation Level

Settings
1.0~50.0%
PID Deviation Time

Settings
0.1~300.0 sec
12-105
Filter Time for PID Feedback

Settings
0.1~300.0 sec
When the PID control function is normal, it should calculate within a period of time and close to the
setpoint value.
Refer to the PID control diagram for details. When executing PID feedback control, if |PID reference
target value detection value| > Pr.08-13 PID Deviation Level and exceeds Pr.08-14 setting, the
PID control fault occurs. The treatment will be done as Pr.08-09 setting.
PID Compensation Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Parameter setting
1: Analog input
PID Compensation
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
-100.0~+100.0%
Reserved
Reserved
PID Mode Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Serial connection
1: Parallel connection
PI Control: controlled by the P action only, and thus, the deviation cannot be eliminated entirely. To
eliminate residual deviations, the P + I control will generally be utilized. And when the PI control is
utilized, it could eliminate the deviation incurred by the targeted value changes and the constant
external interferences. However, if the I action is excessively powerful, it will delay the responding
toward the swift variation. The P action could be used solely on the loading system that possesses
the integral components.
PD Control: when deviation occurred, the system will immediately generate some operation load
that is greater than the load generated single handedly by the D action to restrain the increment of
the deviation. If the deviation is small, the effectiveness of the P action will be decreasing as well.
The control objects include occasions with integral component loads, which are controlled by the P
action only, and sometimes, if the integral component is functioning, the whole system will be
vibrating. On such occasions, in order to make the P actions vibration subsiding and the system
stabilizing, the PD control could be utilized. In other words, this control is good for use with loadings
of no brake functions over the processes.
PID Control: Utilize the I action to eliminate the deviation and the D action to restrain the vibration,
thereafter, combine with the P action to construct the PID control. Use of the PID method could
obtain a control process with no deviations, high accuracies and a stable system.
12-106
Serial connection
Inp ut Selection of the
PID Targe ted Value
00-20:KPC-CC 01/
RS485
03-00~0 2:UP/D own
ke y PG
PID Cancelled
08-00=0
or 02-01~ 06=21(pid off)
Frequ ency
command
+
PID offset
08-06
+
Display of th e PID fee dback
00-04=1 0 display o f t he
PID feed back
Pro po rtio n
ga in
Di ffere nti al
Time
08-01
08-03
PID
Delay
Time
08-07
Inp ut Selection
of the PID Fee dback
08-00:AVI/ACI
AUI /PG
08-02
Int egral Time
08-04
uppe r limit
for
Int egral
08-05
PID Freq.
out put
command
limit
08-09
Treatme nt o f t he
F eedback Signal Fau lt
If Hz>08 -05
time exce eds 08-08
Parallel connection
In pu t Se le ctio n o f the
P ID Ta rg ete d Va lu e
0 0- 20 :KP C-CC0 1/RS 48 5
0 3- 00 ~0 2: UP /Do wn ke y PG
P ID Can cel le d
0 8- 00 =0
o r 02 -0 1~06 =21 (p id off)
Fr eq ue ncy
co mman d
1
2
P ID offset
P ro po rti on ga in
08-06
08-01
08-03
Di ffe re nti al
Time
Di spl ay o f the PID fe ed ba ck
0 0- 04 =1 0 d isp la y o f the
P ID fee db ack
08-05
P ID Del ay
Time
08-02
In pu t Se le ctio n
o f the PID Fe ed ba ck
0 8- 00 :AV I/A CI
A UI/PG
Integral Time
08-07
08-04
u pp er li mit
fo r
In teg ra l
P ID Fre q.
o utp ut
co mman d l imi t
0 8- 09
Tre atme nt o f the Fee db a ck Si gn al Fau lt
If Hz>08 -0 5, ti me exce ed s 08 -0 8
Enable PID to Change the Operation Direction

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable change of direction

1: Enable change of direction
12-107
09 Communication Parameters
When co ntrolling by com mun catio n,
it needs to conn ect th e driv e an d PC by
IFD6530 or IFD650 0 co nverter.
The parameter can be set during the operation.
RS-485
Serial
co mmun icati on
1:+EV
2:GND
3:SG4:SG+
5:NC
6:NC
COM1 Communication Address

Factory Setting: 1
Settings
1~254
If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS-485 serial communication, the communication address for
this drive must be set via this parameter. And the communication address for each AC motor drive
must be different and unique.
COM1 Transmission Speed

Settings
4.8~115.2 Kbps
This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master (PLC, PC, etc.)
and AC motor drive.
COM1 Transmission Fault Treatment

Factory Setting: 3
Settings

3: No warning and continue operation
This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur.
COM1 Time-out Detection

Settings
0.0~100.0 sec
0.0: Disable
It is used to set the transmission time between communication and keypad.
COM1 Communication Protocol

Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0: 7, N, 1 for ASCII
2: 7, E, 1 for ASCII
3: 7, O, 1 for ASCII
12-108
12: 8, N, 1 for RTU
13: 8, N, 2 for RTU
14: 8, E, 1 for RTU
15: 8, O, 1 for RTU
16:
8, E, 2 for RTU
17: 8, O, 2 for RTU

Control by PC or PLC (Computer Link)
A VFD-C2000 can be set up to communicate on Modbus networks using one of the following
modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or RTU (Remote Terminal
Unit).Users can select the desired mode along with the RS-485 serial port communication protocol
in Pr.09-00.
MODBUS ASCIIAmerican Standard Code for Information Interchange: Each byte data is the
combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data: 64 Hex, shown as 64 in ASCII,
consists of 6 (36Hex) and 4 (34Hex).
1. Code Description
Communication protocol is in hexadecimal, ASCII: 0, 9, A, F, every 16 hexadecimal
represent ASCII code. For example:
Character
ASCII code
30H
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
36H
37H
Character
ASCII code
38H
39H
41H
42H
43H
44H
45H
46H
Data Format
10-bit character frame (For ASCII):
7, N , 2
Start
bit
7-data bits
10-bits character frame
7 , E , 1
12-109
Stop
bit
Stop
bit
Start
bit
Even
parity
Stop
bit
Odd
parity
Stop
bit
Stop
bit
Stop
bit
Even
parity
Stop
bit
Odd
parity
Stop
bit
7-data bits
7 , O , 1
Start
bit
7-data bits
11-bit character frame (For RTU):

8 , N , 2
Start
bit
8-data bits
8 , E , 1
Start
bit
8-data bits
8 , O , 1
Start
bit
8-data bits
2. Communication Protocol
Communication Data Frame:
ASCII mode:
STX
Address Hi
Address Lo
Function Hi
Function Lo
DATA (n-1)
.
Start character = : (3AH)

Communication address:
8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Command code:
8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes
Contents of data:
Nx8-bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes
12-110
DATA 0
LRC CHK Hi
LRC CHK Lo
END Hi
END Lo
n<=16, maximum of 32 ASCII codes

LRC check sum:
8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes
End characters:
END1= CR (0DH), END0= LF(0AH)
RTU mode:
START
A silent interval of more than 10 ms
Address
Communication address: 8-bit address
Function
Command code: 8-bit command

Contents of data:
n8-bit data, n<=16
DATA (n-1)
.
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
END
CRC check sum:

16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters
A silent interval of more than 10 ms
Address (Communication Address)

Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254. A communication address equal to 0,
means broadcast to all AC drives (AMD). In this case, the AMD will not reply any message to the
master device.
00H: broadcast to all AC drives
01H: AC drive of address 01
0FH: AC drive of address 15
10H: AC drive of address 16
:
FEH: AC drive of address 254
Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters)

The format of data characters depends on the function code.
03H: read data from register
06H: write single register
Example: reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command Message:
Response Message
STX
:
STX
:
0
0
Address
Address
1
1
0
0
Function
Function
3
3
2
0
Number of data
(count by byte)
1
4
Starting address
0
1
2
7
Content of starting
address 2102H
0
7
Number of data
0
0
(count by word)
0
0
Content of address 2103H
2
0
12-111
LRC Check
END
D
7
CR
LF
LRC Check
END
RTU mode:
Command Message:
Address
01H
Function
03H
21H
Starting data address
02H
Number of data
00H
(count by world)
02H
CRC CHK Low
6FH
CRC CHK High
F7H
0
0
7
1
CR
LF
Response Message
Address
Function
Number of data
(count by byte)
Content of data
address 2102H
Content of data
address 2103H
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
17H
70H
00H
00H
FEH
5CH
06H: single write, write single data to register.

Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command Message:
Response Message
STX
:
STX
0
Address
Address
1
0
Function
Function
6
0
1
Data address
Data address
0
0
1
7
Data content
Data content
7
0
7
LRC Check
LRC Check
1
CR
END
END
LF
:
0
1
0
6
0
1
0
0
1
7
7
0
7
1
CR
LF
RTU mode:
Command Message:
Response Message
Address
01H
Address
Function
06H
Function
01H
Data address
Data address
00H
17H
Data content
Data content
70H
CRC CHK Low
86H
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
CRC CHK High
22H
10H: write multiple registers (write multiple data to registers)
Example: Set the multi-step speed,
Pr.04-00=50.00 (1388H), Pr.04-01=40.00 (0FA0H). AC drive address is 01H.
ASCII Mode
12-112
01H
03H
04H
01H
06H
01H
00H
17H
70H
86H
22H
Command Message:
STX
ADR 1
ADR 0
CMD 1
CMD 0
Number of data
(count by word)
Number of data
(count by byte)
The first data content
The second data content

LRC Check
END
Response Message
STX
ADR 1
ADR 0
CMD 1
CMD 0
:
0
1
1
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
4
1
3
8
8
0
F
A
0
9
A
CR
LF
Number of data
(count by word)
LRC Check
END
RTU mode:
Command Message:
ADR
01H
CMD
10H
05H
00H
Number of data
00H
(count by word)
02H
Number of data
04
(count by byte)
13H
The first data content
88H
The second data content
0FH
A0H
CRC Check Low
9
CRC Check High
A
:
0
1
1
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
2
E
8
CR
LF
Response Message
ADR
01H
CMD 1
10H
05H
00H
00H
Number of data
(count by word)
02H
41H
CRC Check Low
CRC Check High
04H
Check sum
ASCII mode:
LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256, and the values
of the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the
2s-complement negation of the sum.
For example,
01H+03H+21H+02H+00H+02H=29H, the 2s-complement negation of 29H is D7H.
RTU mode:
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH.
12-113
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the
16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3: Examine the LSB of CRC register.
Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero
filling, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to the right
with MSB zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H, then repeat
step 3.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a complete
8-bit byte will have been processed.
Step 6: Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue doing this
until all bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC value.
When transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of the CRC value
must be swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first.
The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two
arguments:
Unsigned char* data a pointer to the message buffer
Unsigned char length the quantity of bytes in the message buffer
The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length)
{
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0Xffff;
while(length--){
reg_crc ^= *data++;
for(j=0;j<8;j++){
if(reg_crc & 0x01){
/* LSB(b0)=1 */
reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0Xa001;
}else{
reg_crc=reg_crc >>1;
}
}
}
return reg_crc;
3. Address list
Content
// return register CRC
Address
AC drive Parameters GGnnH
Command
Write only
2000H
Function
GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number, for
example, the address of Pr 4-01 is 0401H.
0: No function
1: Stop
Bit 0-3
2: Run
3: Jog + Run
00B: No function
01B: FWD
Bit 4-5
10B: REV
11B: Change direction
00B: 1st accel/decel
01B: 2nd accel/decel
Bit 6-7
10B: 3rd accel/decel
11B: 4th accel/decel
12-114
Content
Address
Function
000B: master speed
0001B: 1st accel/decel.
0010B: 2nd accel/decel
0011B: 3rd accel/decel
Bit 12
1: enable bit06-11 function
Bit 13~14 00B: No function
01B: operated by digital keypad
10B: operated by Pr.00-21 setting
11B: change operation source
Bit 15
Reserved
Frequency command
Bit 0
1: EF (external fault) on
Bit 1
1: Reset
Bit 2
1: B.B. ON
Bit 3-15 Reserved
Error code: refer to Pr.06-17 to Pr.06-22
Bit 0
1: FWD command
Bit 1
1: Operation status
Bit 2
1: Jog command
Bit 3
1: REV command
Bit 4
1: REV command
1: Master frequency Controlled by communication
Bit 8
interface
Bit 9
1: Master frequency controlled by analog signal
1: Operation command controlled by
Bit 10
communication interface
Bit 11
1: Parameters have been locked
Bit 12
1: enable to copy parameter from keypad
Bit 13-15 Reserved
Frequency command (F)
Output frequency (H)
Output current (AXXX.X)
DC-BUS Voltage (UXXX.X)
Output voltage (EXXX.X)
Current step number of Multi-Step Speed Operation
Counter value
Multi-function display (Pr.00-04)
Max. setting frequency
Display output current (A)
Display counter value of TRG terminal (c)
Display actual output frequency (H)
Display DC-BUS voltage (u)
Display output voltage of U, V, W (E)
Display output power angle of U, V, W (n)
Bit 8-11
2001H
2002H
2100H
Status monitor
Read only
Status monitor
Read only
2119H
2102H
2103H
2104H
2105H
2106H
2107H
2109H
2116H
211BH
2200H
2201H
2202H
2203H
2204H
2205H
12-115
Content
Address
Function
2206H Display actual motor speed kW of U, V, W (P)
2207H Display motor speed in rpm estimated by the drive or encoder
feedback (r00: positive speed, -00: negative speed)
2208H Display positive/negative output torque N-m estimated by the
drive (t0.0: positive torque, -0.0: negative torque)
2209H Display PG feedback (as NOTE 1)
220AH Display PID feedback value after enabling PID function in % (b)
220BH Display signal of AVI analog input terminal, 0-10V corresponds
to 0-100% (1.) (as NOTE 2)
220CH Display signal of ACI analog input terminal, 4-V20mA/0-10V
corresponds to 0-100% (2.) (as NOTE 2)
220DH Display signal of AUI analog input terminal, -10V~10V
corresponds to -100~100% (3.) (as NOTE 2)
220EH Display the IGBT temperature of drive power module in oC (c.)
220FH Display the temperature of capacitance in oC (i.)
221OH The status of digital input (ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-10 (as
NOTE 3)
2211H The status of digital output (ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-15 (as
NOTE 4)
2212H Display the multi-step speed that is executing (S)
2213H The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (d.) (as NOTE
3)
2214H The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (O.) (as
NOTE 4)
2215H Number of actual motor revolution (PG1 of PG card) (P.) it will
start from 9 when the actual operation direction is changed or
keypad display at stop is 0. Max. is 65535 (P.)
2216H Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card)(S.)
2217H Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card)(4.)
2218H Position command tracing error (P.)
2219H Display times of counter overload (0.)
221AH Display GFF in % (G.)
221BH Reserved
221CH Display PLC register D1043 data (C)
221DH Pole of Permanent Magnet Motor
221EH User page displays the value in physical measure
221FH Output Value of Pr.00-05
4. Exception response:
The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command messages
from the master device. The following depicts the conditions when no normal response is replied to
the master device.
The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error; thus, the AC
motor drive has no response. The master device will eventually process a timeout condition.
The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error, but cannot handle them.
An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message CExx will be
displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive. The xx of CExx is a decimal code equal to the
exception code that is described below.
In the exception response, the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1, and an
exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned.
Example:
12-116
ASCII mode:
STX
Address
Function
Exception code
LRC CHK
END
RTU mode:
Address
Function
Exception code
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
:
0
1
8
6
0
2
7
7
CR
LF
01H
86H
02H
C3H
A1H
The explanation of exception codes:

Exception code
Explanation
Illegal data value:

The data value received in the command message is not available for the
AC drive.
Illegal data address:
The data address received in the command message is not available for
the AC motor drive.
Parameters are locked: parameters cant be changed
Parameters cant be changed during operation
10
Communication time-out.
Reserved
Response Delay Time

Settings
0.0~200.0ms
This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command as
shown in the following.
RS-485 BUS
Handling time
of the AC drive
Response Message
of the AC Drive
PC or PLC command
Response Delay Time
Pr.09-09
Main Frequency of the Communication

Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
When Pr.00-20 is set to 1 (RS485 communication). The AC motor drive will save the last frequency
command into Pr.09-10 when abnormal turn-off or momentary power loss. After reboots the power,
it will regards the frequency set in Pr.09-10 if no new frequency command is inputted.
Block Transfer 1
Block Transfer 2
12-117
Block Transfer 3
Block Transfer 4
Block Transfer 5
Block Transfer 6
Block Transfer 7
Block Transfer 8
Block Transfer 9
Block Transfer 10
Block Transfer 11
Block Transfer 12
Block Transfer 13
Block Transfer 14
Block Transfer 15
Block Transfer 16
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~65535
There is a group of block transfer parameter available in the AC motor drive (Pr.09-11 to Pr.09-20).
User can use them (Pr.09-11 to Pr.09-20) to save those parameters that you want to read.
Reserved
Communication Decoding Method

Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0: by 20XX
1: by 60XX
Reserved
PLC Address
Factory Setting: 2
Settings
1~254
CANopen Slave Address

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1~127
12-118
CANopen Speed
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: 1M
1: 500k
2: 250k
3: 125k
4: 100k (Delta only)
5: 50k
CANopen Frequency Gain

Settings
1.00~2.00
CANopen Warning Record

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
bit 0: CANopen Guarding Time out

bit 1: CANopen Heartbeat Time out
bit 2: CANopen SYNC Time out
bit 3: CANopen SDO Time out
bit 4: CANopen SDO buffer overflow
bit 5: Can Bus Off
bit 6: Error protocol of CANOPEN
CANopen Decoding Method

Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0: Communication definition of C2000 series

1: CANopen Standard DS402 protocol
CANopen Status
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Node Reset State

1: Com Reset State
2: Boot up State
3: Pre Operation State
4: Operation State
5: Stop State
CANopen Control Status

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Not ready for use state

1: Inhibit start state
2: Ready to switch on state
12-119
3: Switched on state
4: Enable operation state
7: Quick stop active state
13: Err reaction activation state
14: Error state
Reset CANopen Index
Factory Setting: 0
Settings: bit0: reset address 20XX to 0.
bit1: reset address 264X to 0
bit2: reset address 26AX to 0
bit3: reset address 60XX to 0
Reserved
CANopen Master Function
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Enable
CANopen Master Address

Settings
1~127
Reserved
Identifications for Communication Card

Factory Setting: ##
Settings
0: No communication card
1: DeviceNet Slave
3: CANopen Slave/Master
4: Modbus-TCP Slave
5: EtherNet/IP Slave
6~8: Reserved
Firmware Version of Communication Card

Factory Setting: ##
Settings
Read only
12-120
Product Code
Factory Setting: ##
Settings
Read only
Error Code
Factory Setting: ##
Settings
Read only
Reserved
Address of Communication Card

Factory Setting: 1
Settings
DeviceNet: 0-63
Profibus-DP: 1-125
Setting of DeviceNet Speed (according to Pr.09-72)

Factory Setting: 2
Settings
Standard DeviceNet:
0: 100Kbps
1: 125Kbps
2: 250Kbps
3: 1Mbps (Delta only)
Non standard DeviceNet:
(Delta only)
0: 10Kbps
1: 20Kbps
2: 50Kbps
3: 100Kbps
4: 125Kbps
5: 250Kbps
6: 500Kbps
7: 800Kbps
8: 1Mbps
Other Setting of DeviceNet Speed
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Enable
It needs to use with Pr.09-71.
12-121
Setting 0: the baud rate can only be set to 0, 1, 2 or 3.

Setting 1: setting of DeviceNet baud rate can be the same as CANopen (setting 0-8).
Reserved
Reserved
IP Configuration of the Communication Card
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Static IP
1: DynamicIP (DHCP)
Setting 0: it needs to set IP address manually.

Setting 1: IP address will be auto set by host controller.
IP Address 1 of the Communication Card
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~255
Address Mask 1 of the Communication Card

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~255
Getway Address 1 of the Communication Card

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~255
Password for Communication Card (Low word)

Password for Communication Card (High word)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~255
12-122
Reset Communication Card

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Reset, return to factory setting
Additional Setting for Communication Card

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
Bit 0: Enable IP Filter

Bit 1: Internet parameters enable(1bit)
Enable to write internet parameters (1bit). This bit will change to disable
when it finishes saving the update of internet parameters.
Bit 2: Login password enable(1bit)
Enable login password (1bit). This bit will be changed to disable when it
finishes saving the update of internet parameters.
Status of Communication Card

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
Bit 0: password enable

When the communication card is set with password, this bit is enabled.
When the password is clear, this bit is disabled.
12-123
10 PID Control
In this parameter group, ASR is the abbreviation for Adjust Speed Regulator and PG is the
abbreviation for Pulse Generator.
Encoder Type Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: ABZ
2: ABZ (Delta encoder for PM motor)
3: Resolver (Standard encoder for PM motor)
4: ABZ/UVW (Standard encoder for PM motor)
For PG extension card EMC-PG01L and EMC-PG01O, set Pr.10-00=1. These extension cards are
for IM motor only.
For EMC-PG01U, when setting Pr.10-00=2 (Delta encoder) make sure SW1 is switched to D (Delta
type). If the setting for Pr.10-00, 10-01 and 10-02 has changed, please turn off the drives power
and reboots to prevent PM motor stall. This mode is suggested for PM motor.
For EMC-PG01R, when setting Pr.10-00=3 please also input 1024 ppr.
For EMC-PG01U, when setting Pr.10-00=4 (Standard ABZ/UVW Encoder) make sure SW1 is
switched to S (Standard Type). This mode is applicable for both IM and PM motor.
Encoder Pulse
Settings
1~20000
A Pulse Generator (PG) or encoder is used as a sensor that provides a feedback signal of the
motor speed. This parameter defines the number of pulses for each cycle of the PG control, i.e. the
number of pulses for a cycle of A phase/B phase.
This setting is also the encoder resolution. With the higher resolution, the speed control will be
more accurate.
An errotic input to Pr.10-00 may result drive over current, motor stall, PM motor magnetic pole
origin detection error. If Pr.10-00 setting has changed, please trace the magnetic pole again, set
Pr.05-00=4 (static test for PM motor magnetic pole and PG origin again).
Encoder Input Type Setting
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads in a reverse
run command
FWD
REV
A
B
12-124
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a reverse

run command
FWD
REV
A
B
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (L =reverse

direction, H=forward direction)
FWD
REV
A
B
4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (L=forward

direction, H=reverse direction)
REV
FWD
A
B
5:
Single-phase input
Output Setting for Frequency Division (denominator)

Factory Setting: 1
Settings
1~255
This parameter is used to set the denominator for frequency division (for PG card EMC-PG01L or
EMC-PG01O). For example, when it is set to 2 with feedback 1024ppr, PG output will be
1024/2=512ppr.
Electrical Gear at Load Side A1
Electrical Gear at Motor Side B1
Electrical Gear at Load Side A2
Electrical Gear at Motor Side B2

Settings
1~65535
Parameters 10-04 to 10-07 can be used with the multi-function input terminal (set to 48) to switch to
Pr.10-04~10-05 or Pr.10-06~10-07 as shown as follows
PG
car d
load
encoder is us ed
at load side
Gear
A1 or A2
Gear
B1 or B2
gear ratio
MI=48 ON = A2: B2
OFF=A 1:B 1
12-125
Driv er
Motor
Treatment for Encoder Feedback Fault

Factory Setting: 2
Settings

1: Warn and RAMP to stop
2: Warn and COAST to stop
Detection Time of Encoder Feedback Fault

Settings
0.0~10.0 sec
0: No function
When encoder loss, encoder signal error, pulse signal setting error or signal error, if time exceeds
the detection time for encoder feedback fault (Pr.10-09), the encoder signal error will occur. Refer
to the Pr.10-08 for encoder feedback fault treatment.
Encoder Stall Level

Settings
0~120%
0: No function
This parameter determines the maximum encoder feedback signal allowed before a fault occurs.
(Max. output frequency Pr.01-00 =100%)
Detection Time of Encoder Stall

Settings
0.0~2.0 sec
Treatment for Encoder Stall

Factory Setting: 2
Settings

When the motor frequency exceeds Pr.10-10 setting and detection time exceeds Pr.10-11, it will
operate as Pr.10-12 setting.
Encoder Slip Range

Factory Setting: 50
Settings
0~50%
0: Disable
Detection Time of Encoder Slip

Settings
0.0~10.0 sec
Treatment for Encoder Stall and Slip Error

Factory Setting: 2
Settings

12-126

When the value of (rotation speed motor frequency) exceeds Pr.10-13 setting, detection time
exceeds Pr.10-14; it will start to accumulate time. If detection time exceeds Pr.10-14, the encoder
feedback signal error will occur. Refer to Pr.10-15 encoder stall and slip error treatment.
Pulse Input Type Setting (PG card: PG2)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads in a reverse
run command
FWD
REV
A
B
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a reverse

run command
FWD
REV
A
B
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (L=reverse
direction, H=forward direction)
FWD
REV
A
B
4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (L=forward
direction, H=reverse direction)
REV
FWD
A
B
When this setting is different from Pr.10-01 setting and the source of the frequency command is
pulse input (Pr.00-20 is set to 4 or 5), it may have 4 times frequency problem.
Example: Assume that Pr.10-01=1024, Pr.10-02=1, Pr.10-16=3, Pr.00-20=5, MI=37 and ON, it
needs 4096 pulses to rotate the motor a revolution.
Assume that Pr.10-01=1024, Pr.10-02=1, Pr.10-16=1, Pr.00-20=5, MI=37 and ON, it needs 1024
pulses to rotate the motor a revolution.
Position control diagram
12-127
d
dt
Position
command
kd
A
B
Electr ical
gear
10- 17
10- 18
Electrical Gear A
Electrical Gear B
10- 21
+
kp
11-25
+
Speed
command
11-00 bi t 0=0
11-24
11-00 bi t 0=1
11-05
Position
feedbac k

Settings
1~65535
Rotation speed = pulse frequency/encoder pulse (Pr.10-00) * PG Electrical Gear A / PG Electrical

Gear B.
Positioning for Encoder Position

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~65535 pulse
This parameter determines the internal position in the position mode.

It needs to be used with multi-function input terminal setting =35 (enable position control).
When it is set to 0, it is the Z-phase position of encoder.
Range for Encoder Position Attained

Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0~65535 pulse
This parameter determines the range for internal positioning position attained.
For example:
When the position is set by Pr.10-19 Positioning for Encoder Position and Pr.10-20 is set to 1000, it
reaches the position if the position is within 990-1010 after finishing the positioning.
Filter Time (PG2)

Settings
0.000~65.535 sec
When Pr.00-20 is set to 5 and multi-function input terminal is set to 37 (OFF), the pulse command
will be regarded as frequency command. This parameter can be used to suppress the jump of
speed command.
Speed Mode (PG2)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Electronic Frequency
1: Mechanical Frequency (base on pole pair)
Reserved
12-128

FOC&TQC Function Control
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
Bit#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0~65535
Description
ASR control at sensorless torque
0:use PI as ASR; 1:use P as ASR
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Activate DC braking when executing zero torque command
0:ON , 1:OFF
FOC Sensorless mode, speed cross zero point (forward to reverse or reverse
to forward). 0: determine by stator frequency , 1: determine by speed
command
NA
NA
Direction control at open loop status
0: Switch ON direction control 1: Switch OFF direction control
FOC Bandwidth of Speed Observer
Settings
1.0~100.0Hz
Setting speed observer to higher bandwidth could shorten the speed response time but will create
greater noise interference during the speed observation.
FOC Minimum Stator Frequency

Settings
0.0~2.0%fN
This parameter is used to set the minimum level of stator frequency at operation status. This
setting ensures the stability and accuracy of observer and avoid interferences from voltage,
current and motor parameter.
FOC Low-pass Filter Time Constant
Factory Setting:50
Settings
1~1000ms
This parameter sets the low-pass filter time constant of a flux observer at start up. If the motor can
not be activated during the high-speed operation, please lower the setting in this parameter.
12-129
FOC Gain of Excitation Current Rise Time

Factory Setting:100
Settings 33~100% Tr (Tr: rotor time constant)
This parameter sets the drives excitation current rise time when activates at senslorless torque
mode. When the drives activation time is too long at torque mode, please adjust this parameter
to a shorter time constant.
12-130
11 Advanced Parameters
In this parameter group, ASR is the abbreviation for Adjust Speed Regulator
System Control
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Auto tuning for ASR and APR

1: Inertia estimate (only in FOCPG mode)
2: Zero servo
3: Dead Time compensation closed
Bit 0=0: Pr.11-06 to 11-11 will be valid and Pr.11-03~11-05 are invalid.
Bit 0=1: system will generate an ASR setting. At this moment, Pr.11-06~11-11 will be invalid and
Pr.11-03~11-05 are valid.
Bit 1=0: no function.
Bit 1=1: Inertia estimate function is enabled. (Bit 1 setting would not activate the estimation
process, please set Pr.05-00=12 to begin FOC/TQC Sensorless inertia estimating)
Bit 2=0: no function.
Bit 2=1: when frequency command is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07), it will use zero servo function.
Estimate i ner tia value
NO
YES
Setting auto gain adjustment

Pr.11-00=1
Adjust gai n value by manual

Pr.11-00=0 ( factor y setting)
Adjust Pr.11- 03, 11-04 and 11-05

separately by speed response
Adjust by r equi rement
Pr.11-13 ( PDFF function)
Adjust Pr.11- 06, 11-07, 11- 08,

11-09, 11- 10 and 11- 11
separately by speed response
Pr.11-14 ( for general,
no need to adj us t)

Pr.11-02
(A SR1/ASR2 switch frequency)
Pr.11-17~20 ( tor que limit)
12-131

PI
PI
11-06
11-07
Pr.11-05
use to adjus t the
stren gth o f ze ro se rvo lo ck
11-08
11-09
11-04
11-10
11-11
5Hz
0Hz
11-05
5Hz
11-02
Hz
PI ad justm ent-ma nual gain
0Hz
1. Pr. 11-01 valu e

2. set Pr.11 -0 0 to bit 0=1
5Hz
5Hz
11-02
PI ad justm ent-auto gai n
Hz
Per Unit of System Inertia

Settings
1~65535256=1PU
To get the system inertia from Pr.11-01, user needs to set Pr.11-00 to bit1=1 and execute
continuous forward/reverse running.
ASR1/ASR2 Switch Frequency

Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
0: Disable
ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth

Factory Setting: 10
Settings
1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth

Factory Setting: 10
Settings
1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
Zero-speed Bandwidth
Factory Setting: 10
Settings
1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
After estimating inertia and set Pr.11-00 to bit 0=1 (auto tuning), user can adjust parameters
Pr.11-03, 11-04 and 11-05 separately by speed response. The larger number you set, the faster
response you will get. Pr.11-02 is the switch frequency for low-speed/high-speed bandwidth.
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (P) 1

Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0~40 Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I) 1

Settings
0.000~10.000 sec
12-132
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (PI) 2
Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0~40 Hz (IM)/ 0~100Hz (PM)
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I) 2

Settings
0.000~10.000 sec
ASR(Auto Speed Regulation) Control (P) of Zero Speed
Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0~40 Hz (IM)/ 0~100Hz (PM)
ASR(Auto Speed Regulation) Control (I) of Zero Speed

Settings
0.000~10.000 sec
Gain for ASR Speed Feed Forward
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~100%
This parameter is used to improve speed response.
1 1-1 2
Ga in for ASR
spe e d fe ed forw ard
0 0-2 0
+
-
ASR
Sp ee d fe ed b ack
+
+
To rqu e
comma n d
To rqu e l imi t
1 1-1 7~1 1-2 0
1 1-1 4
T q Bias
PDFF Gain Value

Factory Setting: 30
Settings
0~200%
After finishing estimating and set Pr.11-00 to bit 0=1 (auto tuning), using Pr.11-13 to reduce
overshoot. Please adjust PDFF gain value by actual situation.
This parameter will be invalid when Pr.05-24 is set to 1.
12-133

frequency
PI
PDFF
T ime
Low-pass Filter Time of ASR Output

Settings
0.000~0.350 sec
It is used to set the filter time of ASR command.

Notch Filter Depth
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~20db
Notch Filter Frequency

Settings
0.00~200.00Hz
This parameter is used to set resonance frequency of mechanical system. It can be used to
suppress the resonance of mechanical system.
The larger number you set Pr.11-15, the better suppression resonance function you will get.
The notch filter frequency is the resonance of mechanical frequency.
Forward Motor Torque Limit
Forward Regenerative Torque Limit
Reverse Motor Torque Limit
Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit

Settings
0~500%
The motor rated torque is 100%. The settings for Pr.11-17 to Pr.11-20 will compare with Pr.03-00=7,
8, 9, 10. The minimum of the comparison result will be torque limit.
Formula of motor rated torque:
T ( N .M )
P(W )
(rad / s )
, P (W) is according to Pr.05-02 setting, (rad/s) is according to Pr.05-03.
12-134
RPM
rad / s
60 2

Po sitiv e
to rque
Rev ers e mot or mode

06-1 2 c urrent limit
Ex te rnal ana lo g t ermin als

Pr. 03-00~ 02
7: pos itiv e to rque limit
10: pos itiv e/n egat iv e torque limit
9: regen erativ e t orque limit
Pr. 11-19
Rev ers e rege nerat ive
to rque limit
s peed
E xt ernal an alog t erminals

P r. 03-00 ~02
7: po sitiv e t orque limit
10: pos itive/ne gativ e t orque limit
The level o f t orque limit will b e

th e min. va lu e of fo llowing thre e v alues
Pr. 11-17
Fo rwa rd moto r
t orque limit
s peed
Q ua dr an t II Q ua dr an t I
Q ua dr an t III Q ua dr an t IV
Pr. 11-20
Rev ers e mot or
to rque limit
Ex te rnal ana lo g t ermin als

Pr. 03-00~ 03-0 2
8: nega tiv e to rque limit
10: pos itiv e/n egat iv e torque limit
Rev ers e mot or mode
Forward mo tor mo de
Pr. 11-18
Forward re genera tive
t orque limit
E xt ernal an alog t erminals

Pr. 03-00~ 03-02
8 : ne gativ e t orque limit
10: pos itiv e/ne gativ e t orque limit
Forward mo tor mo de
Nega tive
to rque
Gain Value of Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 1

Factory Setting: 90
Settings
0~200%
Gain Value of Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 2

Factory Setting: 90
Settings
0~200%
Pr.11-21 and 11-22 are used to adjust the output voltage of flux weakening curve.
For the spindle application, the adjustment method is
1. It is used to adjust the output voltage when exceeding rated frequency.
2. Monitor the output voltage
3. Adjust Pr.11-21 (motor 1) or Pr.11-22 (motor 2) setting to make the output voltage reach motor
rated voltage.
4. The larger number it is set, the larger output voltage you will get.
output tor que
Fl ux w eakening cur ve
11-21
or
11-22
100%
90%
01-01
or
01-35
frequency
12-135
Speed Response of Flux Weakening Area

Factory Setting: 65
Settings
0: Disable
0~150%
It is used to control the speed in the flux weakening area. The larger value is set in Pr.11-23, the
faster acceleration/deceleration will generate. In general, it is not necessary to adjust this
parameter.
APR Gain
Settings
0.00~40.00 (IM)/ 0~100.00Hz (PM)
Kip gain of internal position is determined by Pr.11-05.
Gain Value of APR Feed Forward

Factory Setting: 30
Settings
0~100
For the position control, if it set a larger value in Pr.11-25, it can shorten the pulse differential and
speed up the position response. But it may overshoot.
When the multi-function input terminal is set to 37(ON), this parameter can be set as required. If
this parameter is set to a non zero value and adjust Pr.10-21 (PG2 Filter Time) to reduce the
position overshoot and pulse differential. If it is set to 0, it wont have overshoot problem in position
control but the pulse differential is decided by Pr.11-05 (KP gain).
APR Curve Time

Settings
0.00~655.35 sec
It is valid when the multi-function input terminal is set to 35(ON). The larger it is set, the longer the
position time will be.
12-136
Max. Torque Command

Settings
0~500%
The upper limit of torque command is 100%.

T ( N .M )
P(W )
is according to Pr.05-02 setting, (rad/s) is according to Pr.05-03
(rad / s)
RPM
rad / s
60 2
Source of Torque Offset
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Analog input
(Pr.03-00)
2: Torque offset setting (Pr.11-29)

Control by external terminal (by Pr.11-30 to Pr.11-32)
This parameter is the source of torque offset.
When it is set to 3, source of torque offset would determine Pr.11-30 to Pr.11-32 by
When it is set to 3, the source of torque offset will regard Pr.11-30~11-32 by the multi-function input
terminals (MI) setting (31, 32 or 33).
N.O. switch status:
ON= contact closed, OFF= contact open
Pr. 11-32
MI=33(High)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
Pr. 11-31
Pr. 11-30
MI=32(Mid)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MI=31(Low)
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Torque Offset
None
11-30
11-31
11-30+11-31
11-32
11-30+11-32
11-31+11-32
11-30+11-31+11-32
Torque Offset Setting

Settings
0.0~100.0%
This parameter is torque offset. The motor rated torque is 100%.

Formula of motor rated torque: T ( N .M )
according to Pr.05-03.
P(W )
is according to Pr.05-02 setting, (rad/s) is
(rad / s)
RPM
rad / s
60 2
12-137
High Torque Offset

Settings
0.0~100.0%
Middle Torque Offset

Settings
0.0~100.0%
Low Torque Offset

Settings
0.0~100.0%
When it is set to 3, the source of torque offset will regard Pr.11-30, Pr.11-31 and Pr.11-32 by the
multi-function input terminals setting (31, 32 or 33). The motor rated torque is 100%.
T ( N .M )
P(W )
, P(W) is according to Pr.05-02 setting, (rad/s) is according to Pr.05-03.
(rad / s)
RPM
rad / s
60 2
Source of Torque Command

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Digital Keypad (Pr.11-34)

1: RS485 serial communication
2: Analog signal (Pr.03-00)
3: CANopen
4: Reserved
When Pr.11-33 is set to 0, torque command can be set in Pr.11-34.

When Pr.11-33 is set to 1 or 2, Pr.11-34 would only display the torque command
Torque Command
Settings
-100.0~100.0%(Pr.11-27=100%)
This parameter is for the torque command. When Pr.11-27 is set to 250% and Pr.11-34 is set to
100%, actual torque command=250X100%=250% motor rated torque.
The drive will save the setting to the record before power turns off.
Low-pass Filter Time of Torque Command

Settings
0.000~1.000 sec
When the setting is too long, the control will be stable but the control response will be delay. When
the setting is too short, the response will be quickly but the control maybe unstable. User can adjust
the setting by the control and response situation.
12-138
Speed Limit Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: By Pr.11-37 and Pr.11-38

1: Source of Frequency command (Pr.00-20)
Speed limit function: in TQCPG, when the motor speed is accelerated to speed limit value
(Pr.11-36, 11-37 and 11-38), it will switch to speed control mode to stop acceleration.
When the torque is positive direction, speed limit is positive direction. When the torque is negative
direction, speed limit is negative direction.
Pr. 11-36= 1
Whe n it is f orward runn in g,
runn in g direction is limited
by Pr. 00-20
reverse runn in g direction
is limit ed by P r.11-38 .
to rque
Pr. 11-36= 0
Forward/re verse ru nning
direc tion are
limit ed b y Pr.11 -37
and Pr.1 1-38.
to rque
11-37
mot or
s peed
11-38
00-20
Pr. 11-36= 1
Whe n it is reverse runn in g,
runn in g direction is limited
by Pr. 11-37
revers e runn in g direc tion
is limit ed by P r.00-20 .
to rque
mot or
speed
11-38
mot or
speed
11-37
00-20
Forward Speed Limit (torque mode)

Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0~120%
Reverse Speed Limit (torque mode)

Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0~120%
These parameters are used in the torque mode to limit the running direction and opposite direction.
(Pr.01-00 max. output frequency=100%)
Reserved
Command Source of Point-to-Point Position Control
Factory Settings:0
Settings
0: External terminal
1: Reserved
2: Reserved
3: CAN
4: PLC
Reserved
Reserved
Max. Frequency of Point- to-Point Position Control
Factory Settings:10.00
Settings
0.00~327.67Hz
12-139
Accel. Time of Point-to Point Position Control

Settings
0.00~655.35sec
Decel. Time of Point-to Point Position Control

Settings
0.00~655.35sec
12-140
Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 Series
Chapter 13Warning Codes

Warning
CE01
Comm. Error 1
Di s p la y e rr o r si g n al
A b b r ev i a te e rr o r c o d e
T h e co d e is d is p l a y e d as s h ow n on K P C- C E 01 .
D i s p la y er r o r d e s c r i p ti o n
Display on LCM Keypad
Descriptions
Warning
CE01
Modbus function code error
Comm. Error 1
Warning
CE02
Address of Modbus data is error
Comm. Error 2
Warning
CE03
Modbus data error
Comm. Error 3
Warning
CE04
Modbus communication error
Comm. Error 4
Warning
CE10
Modbus transmission time-out
Comm. Error 10
Warning
CP10
Keypad transmission time-out
Keypad time out
Warning
SE1
Keypad COPY error 1
Save Error 1
Warning
SE2
Keypad COPY error 2
Save Error 2
Warning
SE3
Keypad COPY error 3
Copy Model E rr 3
13-1
Warning
oH1
IGBT over-heating warning
Over heat 1 warn

Warning
oH2
Capacity over-heating warning
Over heat 2 warn

Warning
PID
PID feedback error
PID FBK Error

Warning
ANL
ACI signal error

When Pr03-19 is set to 1 and 2.
Analog loss
Warning
uC
Low current
Under Current
Warning
AUE
Auto tuning error
Auto-tune error
Warning
PGFB
PG feedback error
PG FBK Warn
Warning
PGL
PG feedback loss
PG Loss Warn
Warning
oSPD
Over-speed warning
Over Speed Warn

Warning
DAvE
Over speed deviation warning
Deviation Warn
Warning
PHL
Phase loss
Phase Loss
Warning
ot1
Over torque 1
Over Torque 1
13-2
Warning
ot2
Over torque 2
Over Torque 2
Warning
oH3
Motor over-heating
Motor Over Heat

Warning
oSL
Over slip
Over Slip Warn

Warning
tUn
Auto tuning processing
Auto tuning
Warning
CGdn
CAN guarding time-out 1
Guarding T-out
Warning
CHbn
CAN heartbeat time-out 2
Heartbeat T-out
Warning
CSYn
CAN synchrony time-out
SYNC T-out
Warning
CbFn
CAN bus off
Can Bus Off

Warning
CSdn
CAN SDO transmission time-out
SDO T-out
Warning
CSbn
CAN SDO received register overflow
Buf Overflow
Warning
Cbtn
CAN boot up error
Boot up fault
Warning
CPtn
CAN format error
Error Protocol
Warning
CIdn
CAN index error
CAN/S Idx exceed
13-3
Warning
CAdn
CAN station address error
CAN/S Addres set

Warning
CFrn
CAN memory error
CAN/S FRAM fail

Warning
PLod
PLC download error
Opposite Defect
Warning
PLSv
Save error of PLC download
Save mem defect

Warning
PLdA
Data error during PLC operation
Data defect
Warning
PLFn
Function code of PLC download error
Function defect
Warning
PLor
PLC register overflow
Buf overflow
Warning
PLFF
Function code of PLC operation error
Function defect
Warning
PLSn
PLC checksum error
Check sum error

Warning
PLEd
PLC end command is missing
No end command
Warning
PLCr
PLC MCR command error
PLC MCR error
Warning
PLdF
PLC download fail
Download fail
13-4
Warning
PLSF
PLC scan time exceed
Scane time fail
Warning
PCGd
CAN Master guarding error
CAN/M Guard err
Warning
PCbF
CAN Master bus off
CAN/M bus off
Warning
PCnL
CAN Master node error
CAN/M Node Lack
Warning
PCCt
CAN/M cycle time-out
Warning
PCSF
CAN/M SDOover
CAN/M SDO over
Warning
PCSd
CAN/M SDO time-out
CAN/M Sdo Tout
Warning
PCAd
CAN/M station address error
CAN/M Addres set
Warning
ECid
Duplicate MAC ID error

Node address setting error
ExCom ID failed
Warning
ECLv
Low voltage of communication card
ExCom pwr loss

Warning
ECtt
Communication card in test mode
ExCom Test Mode
13-5
Warning
ECbF
DeviceNet bus-off
ExCom Bus off

Warning
ECnP
DeviceNet no power
ExCom No power
Warning
ECFF
Factory default setting error
ExCom Facty def

Warning
ECiF
Serious internal error
ExCom Inner err

Warning
ECio
IO connection break off
ExCom IONet brk

Warning
ECPP
Profibus parameter data error
ExCom Pr data
Warning
ECPi
Profibus configuration data error
ExCom Conf data

Warning
ECEF
Ethernet Link fail
ExCom Link fail

Warning
ECto
Communication time-out for communication card and drive
ExCom Inr T-out

Warning
ECCS
Check sum error for Communication card and drive
ExCom Inr CRC

Warning
ECrF
Communication card returns to default setting
ExCom Rtn def

Warning
ECo0
Modbus TCP exceed maximum communication value
ExCom MTC P over
13-6
Warning
ECo1
EtherNet/IP exceed maximum communication value
ExCom EIP over
Warning
ECiP
IP fail
ExCom IP fail
Warning
EC3F
Mail fail
ExCom Mail fail
Warning
Ecby
Communication card busy
ExCom Busy
13-7
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions C2000 Series
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions

Warning
CE01
Comm. Error 1
Fault Name
Fault
ocA
Oc at accel
Fault
ocd
Oc at decel
Fault
ocn
Oc at normal SPD
Fault
ocS
Di s p la y e rr o r si g n al
A b b r ev i a te e rr o r c o d e
T h e co d e is d is p l a y e d as s h ow n on K P C- C E 01 .
D i s p la y er r o r d e s c r i p ti o n
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible

poor insulation at the output.
Over-current during
2. Acceleration Time too short: Increase the
acceleration
Acceleration Time.
(Output current exceeds
triple rated current during 3. AC motor drive output power is too small:
Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher
acceleration.)
power model.
Over-current during
2. Deceleration Time too short: Increase the
deceleration
Deceleration Time.
deceleration.)
power model.
Over-current during
steady state operation
2. Sudden increase in motor loading: Check for
possible motor stall.
constant speed.)
power model.
Hardware failure in
current detection
Return to the factory
Ground fault
When (one of) the output terminal(s) is grounded,

short circuit current is more than 50% of AC motor
drive rated current, the AC motor drive power
module may be damaged.
NOTE: The short circuit protection is provided for
AC motor drive protection, not for protecting the
user.
1. Check the wiring connections between the AC
motor drive and motor for possible short circuits,
also to ground.
2. Check whether the IGBT power module is
damaged.
3. Check for possible poor insulation at the output.
Oc at stop
Fault
GFF
Ground fault
14-1
Fault Name
Fault
occ
Short Circuit
Fault
ovA
Ov at accel
Fault
ovd
Ov at decel
Fault
ovn
Ov at normal SPD
Fault
ovS
Fault Descriptions
Short-circuit is detected
between upper bridge
and lower bridge of the
IGBT module
DC BUS over-voltage
during acceleration
(230V: DC 450V; 460V:
DC 900V)
1. Check if the input voltage falls within the rated

AC motor drive input voltage range.
2. Check for possible voltage transients.
3. If DC BUS over-voltage due to regenerative
voltage, please increase the Deceleration Time
or add an optional brake resistor.
DC BUS over-voltage
during deceleration
(230V: DC 450V; 460V:
DC 900V)


DC BUS over-voltage at
constant speed (230V: DC
450V; 460V: DC 900V)
Hardware failure in
voltage detection

DC BUS voltage is less

than Pr.06-00 during
acceleration
1.
2.
Check if the input voltage is normal

Check for possible sudden load

than Pr.06-00 during
deceleration
1.
2.


1.
than Pr.06-00 in constant
2.
speed


than Pr.06-00 at stop

Ov at stop
Fault
LvA
Lv at accel
Fault
Lvd
Lv at decel
Fault
Lvn
Lv at normal SPD
Fault
LvS
Corrective Actions
1.
2.
Lv at stop
14-2
Fault Name
Fault
OrP
Fault Descriptions
Phase Loss
Phase lacked
Corrective Actions
Check Power Source Input if all 3 input phases are
connected without loose contacts.
For models 40hp and above, please check if the fuse
for the AC input circuit is blown.
1.
Fault
oH1
IGBT over heat
IGBT overheating
IGBT temperature
exceeds protection level
1 to15HP: 90 oC
20 to 100HP: 100 oC
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
Fault
oH2
Heat Sink oH
Fault
oH3
Motor over heat
Fault
tH1o
Heatsink overheating
Capacitance temperature
exceeds 90oC cause
heatsink overheating.
2.
3.
Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within

the specified temperature range.
Make sure that the ventilation holes are not
obstructed.
Remove any foreign objects from the heatsinks
and check for possible dirty heat sink fins.
Check the fan and clean it.
Provide enough spacing for adequate
ventilation.
Make sure heat sink is not obstructed. Check if
the fan is operating
Check if there is enough ventilation clearance
for AC motor drive.
Motor overheating
The AC motor drive
detects that the internal
temperature exceeds
Pr.06-30 (PTC level)
1.
2.
IGBT Hardware Error
3.
Make sure that the motor is not obstructed.

Take the next higher power AC motor drive
model.
Thermo 1 open
Fault
tH2o
Capacitor Hardware Error Return to the factory
Thermo 2 open
Fault
PWR
Power off
Power RST OFF
Overload
Fault
oL
Over load
1.
The AC motor drive detects

2.
excessive drive output
current.
14-3
Check if the motor is overloaded.

Take the next higher power AC motor drive
model.
Fault Name
Fault
EoL1
Fault Descriptions
Electronics thermal relay 1
protection
1. Check the setting of electronics thermal relay

(Pr.06-14)
Take the next higher power AC motor drive model
Electronics thermal relay

2 protection
1. Check the setting of electronics thermal relay

(Pr.06-28)
2. Take the next higher power AC motor drive
model
Thermal relay 1
Fault
EoL2
Thermal relay 2
Fault
ot1
Over torque 1
Fault
ot2
Over torque 2
Fault
uC
Corrective Actions
These two fault codes

will be displayed when
output current exceeds
1. Check whether the motor is overloaded.
the over-torque detection
2. Check whether motor rated current setting
level (Pr.06-07 or
(Pr.05-01) is suitable
Pr.06-10) and exceeds
3. Take the next higher power AC motor drive
over-torque detection
model.
(Pr.06-08 or Pr.06-11)
and it is set to 2 or 4 in
Pr.06-06 or Pr.06-09.
Low current detection
Check Pr.06-71, Pr.06-72, Pr.06-73.
Under torque
Fault
LMIT
Limit error
Limit Error
Fault
cF1
Internal EEPROM can

not be programmed.
1. Press RESET key to the factory setting

2. Return to the factory.
Internal EEPROM can

not be read.
1. Press RESET key to the factory setting

2. Return to the factory.
U-phase error
Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the

keypad please return to the factory
EEPROM write err
Fault
cF2
EEPROM read err
Fault
cd1
Ias sensor err
14-4
Fault Name
Fault
cd2
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
V-phase error

W-phase error

CC (current clamp)

OC hardware error

OV hardware error

Occ hardware error

Auto tuning error
1. Check cabling between drive and motor

2. Try again.
PID loss (ACI)
1.
2.
Ibs sensor err
Fault
cd3
Ics sensor err
Fault
Hd0
cc HW error
Fault
Hd1
Oc HW error
Fault
Hd2
Ov HW error
Fault
Hd3
occ HW error
Fault
AUE
Auto tuning err
Fault
AFE
Check the wiring of the PID feedback

Check the PID parameters settings
PID Fbk error
Fault
PG feedback error
Check if encoder parameter setting is accurate when

it is PG feedback control.
PG feedback loss
Check the wiring of the PG feedback
PGF1
PG Fbk error
Fault
PGF2
PG Fbk loss
14-5
Fault Name
Fault
PGF3
Fault Descriptions
PG feedback stall
Corrective Actions
1.
2.
PG Fbk over SPD
3.
Fault
1.
2.
PGF4
3.

Check if the setting of PI gain and deceleration
is suitable
Pulse input error
1.
2.
Check the pulse wiring

Pulse input loss
1. Check the pulse wiring

2. Return to the factory
ACI loss
1. Check the ACI wiring

2. Check if the ACI signal is less than 4mA
External Fault
1. Input EF (N.O.) on external terminal is closed to

GND. Output U, V, W will be turned off.
2. Give RESET command after fault has been
cleared.
Emergency stop
1. When the multi-function input terminals MI1 to

MI6 are set to emergency stop, the AC motor
drive stops output U, V, W and the motor coasts
to stop.
2. Press RESET after fault has been cleared.
External Base Block
1. When the external input terminal (B.B) is active,

the AC motor drive output will be turned off.
2. Deactivate the external input terminal (B.B) to
operate the AC motor drive again.
Password is locked.
Keypad will be locked. Turn the power ON after

power OFF to re-enter the correct password. See
Pr.00-07 and 00-08.
PG slip error
PG Fbk deviate
Fault
PGr1

Check if the setting of PI gain and deceleration is
suitable
PG Ref error
Fault
PGr2
PG Ref loss
Fault
ACE
ACI loss
Fault
EF
External fault
Fault
EF1
Emergency stop
Fault
bb
Base block
Fault
Pcod
Password error
Fault
ccod
Software code error
SW Code Error
14-6
Fault Name
Fault
CE1
Fault Descriptions
Illegal function code
Corrective Actions
Check if the function code is correct (function code
must be 03, 06, 10, 63)
PC err command
Fault
CE2
Illegal data address (00H

Check if the communication address is correct
to 254H)
PC err address
Fault
CE3
Illegal data value
Check if the data value exceeds max./min. value
PC err data
Fault
CE4
Data is written to read-only

Check if the communication address is correct
address
PC slave fault
Fault
CE10
Modbus transmission time-out
PC time out
Fault
CP10
Keypad transmission time-out
PU time out
Fault
bF
Brake resistor fault
If the fault code is still displayed on the keypad after

pressing RESET key, please return to the factory.
Braking fault
Fault
ydc
Y-connection/-connecti
on switch error
1.
2.
Check the wiring of the Y-connection/-connection

Check the parameters settings
Y-delta connect
Fault
dEb
Dec. Energy back
Fault
oSL
Over slip error
When Pr.07-13 is not set

to 0 and momentary
1.
power off or power cut, it
2.
will display dEb during
accel./decel. stop.
Set Pr.07-13 to 0
Check if input power is stable
It will be displayed when

1.
slip exceeds Pr.05-26
setting and time exceeds
2.
Pr.05-27 setting.
Check if motor parameter is correct (please

decrease the load if overload
Check the settings of Pr.05-26 and Pr.05-27
14-7
Fault Name
Fault
S1
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
Emergency stop for external safety
S1-emergy stop
Fault
Uocc
Phase A short circuit
A phase short
Fault
Vocc
Phase B short circuit
B phase short
Fault
Wocc
C phase short circuit
C phase short
Fault
The electromagnet switch of the power board is not sealed. (For larger power
ryF
MC Fault
Fault
PGF5
model: Frame E and above)
Hardware error of PG Card
PG HW Error
Fault
ocU
Unknown over current
Unknow over Amp
Fault
ovU
Unknown over voltage
Unknow over volt.
Fault
OPHL
Output phase loss (Phase U)
U phase lacked
Fault
OPHL
Output phase loss (Phase V)
V phase lacked
14-8
Fault Name
Fault
OPHL
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
Output phase loss (Phase W)
W phase lacked
Fault
TRAP
CPU trap error
CPU Trap Error
Fault
CGdE
CANopen guarding error
Guarding T-out
Fault
CHbE
CANopen heartbeat error
Heartbeat T-out
Fault
CSYE
CANopen synchronous error
SYNC T-out
Fault
CbFE
CANopen bus off error
Can bus off
Fault
CIdE
CANopen index error
Can bus Index Err
Fault
CAdE
CANopen station address error
Can bus Add. Err
Fault
CFrE
CANopen memory error
Can bus off
14-9
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview

Newest version is available at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/
1 CANopen Overview
2 CANopen Wiring
3 How to control by CANopen
3-1 CANopen Control Mode
3-2 DS402 Standard Mode
3-3 Delta Standard Mode
4 CANopen Supporting Index
5 CANopen Fault Code
6 CANopen LED Function
The built-in CANopen function is a kind of remote control. Master can control the AC motor drive by using CANopen
protocol. CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol. It provides standardized communication objects, including
real-time data (Process Data Objects, PDO), configuration data (Service Data Objects, SDO), and special functions
(Time Stamp, Sync message, and Emergency message). And it also has network management data, including
Boot-up message, NMT message, and Error Control message. Refer to CiA website http://www.can-cia.org/ for
details. The content of this instruction sheet may be revised without prior notice. Please consult our distributors or
download the most updated version at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation
Delta CANopen supporting functions:
Support CAN2.0A Protocol;
Support CANopen DS301 V4.02;
Support DSP-402 V2.0.
Delta CANopen supporting services:
PDO (Process Data Objects): PDO1~ PDO2
SDO (Service Data Object):
Initiate SDO Download;
Initiate SDO Upload;
Abort SDO;
SDO message can be used to configure the slave node and access the Object Dictionary in every node.
SOP (Special Object Protocol):
Support default COB-ID in Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set in DS301 V4.02;
Support SYNC service;
Support Emergency service.
NMT (Network Management):
Support NMT module control;
Support NMT Error control;
Support Boot-up.
Delta CANopen not supporting service:
Time Stamp service
15-1
15.1 CANopen Overview

CANopen Protocol
CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol, and was designed for motion-oriented machine
control networks, such as handling systems. Version 4 of CANopen (CiA DS301) is standardized as
EN50325-4. The CANopen specifications cover application layer and communication profile (CiA
DS301), as well as a framework for programmable devices (CiA 302), recommendations for cables
and connectors (CiA 303-1) and SI units and prefix representations (CiA 303-2).
Device Profile CiA

DSP-401
OSI Layer 7
Application
OSI Layer 2
Data Link Layer
OSI Layer 1
Physical Layer
Device Profile CiA

DSP-404
Device Profile CiA

DSP-XXX
Communication Profile CiA DS-301
CAN Controller
CAN 2.0A
+ + -
ISO 11898
CAN bus
RJ-45 Pin Definition
8~1
8~1
socket
PIN
1
2
3
7
Signal
CAN_H
CAN_L
CAN_GND
CAN_GND
plug
Description
CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
Ground / 0V /VGround / 0V /V-
15-2
Pre-Defined Connection Set

To reduce configuration effort for simple networks, CANopen define a mandatory default identifier
allocation scheme. The 11-bit identifier structure in predefined connection is set as follows:
COB Identifier (CAN Identifier)
10
Function Code
Object
Node Number
Function Code Node Number
COB-ID
Object Dictionary Index
Broadcast messages
NMT
0000
SYNC
0001
80H
1005H, 1006H, 1007H
TIME STAMP
0010
100H
1012H, 1013H
Emergency
0001
1-127
81H-FFH
1014H, 1015H
TPDO1
0011
1-127
181H-1FFH
1800H
RPDO1
0100
1-127
201H-27FH
1400H
TPDO2
0101
1-127
281H-2FFH
1801H
RPDO2
0110
1-127
301H-37FH
1401H
TPDO3
0111
1-127
381H-3FFH
1802H
RPDO3
1000
1-127
401H-47FH
1402H
TPDO4
1001
1-127
481H-4FFH
1803H
RPDO4
1010
1-127
501H-57FH
1403H
Default SDO (tx)
1011
1-127
581H-5FFH
1200H
Default SDO (rx)
1100
1-127
601H-67FH
1200H
NMT Error Control
1110
1-127
701H-77FH
1016H, 1017H
Point-to-point messages
CANopen Communication Protocol

It has services as follows:
NMT (Network Management Object)
SDO (Service Data Objects)
PDO (Process Data Object)
EMCY (Emergency Object)
NMT (Network Management Object)

The Network Management (NMT) follows a Master/Slave structure for executing NMT service. Only
one NMT master is in a network, and other nodes are regarded as slaves. All CANopen nodes have
a present NMT state, and NMT master can control the state of the slave nodes. The state diagram
of a node is shown as follows:
15-3
(1)
Initializing
(15)
Reset Application
(9)
(10)
(11)
(16)
Reset Communication
(14)
(2)F
Pre-Operation ABCD
(3)
(4)
(13)
(12)
Stopped AB
(8)
(6)
Operation ABCD
(1) After power is applied, it is auto in initialization state

(2) Enter pre-operational state automatically
(3) (6) Start remote node
(4) (7) Enter pre-operational state
(5) (8) Stop remote node
(9) (10) (11) Reset node
(12) (13) (14) Reset communication
(15) Enter reset application state automatically
(16) Enter reset communication state automatically
PDO
SDO
SYNC
Time Stamp
EMCY
Boot-up
NMT
(7)
(5)
Initializing Pre-Operational Operational
A: NMT
B: Node Guard
C: SDO
D: Emergency
E: PDO
F: Boot-up
Stopped
NMT Protocol is shown as follows:

NMT Master
Request
request
Start Remote Node

byte 0 byte 1
CS Node-ID
COB-ID=0
NMT Slave(s)
Indication(s)
Indication
Indication
Indication
15-4
Value
1
CS
Definition
Start
Stop
128
Enter Pre-Operational
129
Reset Node
130
Reset Communication
SDO (Service Data Objects)

SDO is used to access the Object Dictionary in every CANopen node by Client/Server model. One
SDO has two COB-ID (request SDO and response SDO) to upload or download data between two
nodes. No data limit for SDOs to transfer data. But it needs to transfer by segment when data
exceeds 4 bytes with an end signal in the last segment.
The Object Dictionary (OD) is a group of objects in CANopen node. Every node has an OD in the
system, and OD contains all parameters describing the device and its network behavior. The access
path of OD is the index and sub-index, each object has a unique index in OD, and has sub-index if
necessary. The request and response frame structure of SDO communication is shown as follows:
Data 0
Type
Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Index
Index
Index
Data
Data
Data
Data
Sub
LL
LH
HL
HH
command
Initiate
Domain
Download
Initiate
Domain
Upload
Abort Domain
Transfer
Client
0 1
E S
Server
1 1
Client
1 0
Server
1 0
Client
0 0
Server
0 0
E S
N: Bytes not use

E: normal(0)/expedited(1)
S: size indicated
PDO (Process Data Object)

PDO communication can be described by the producer/consumer model. Each node of the network
will listen to the messages of the transmission node and distinguish if the message has to be
processed or not after receiving the message. PDO can be transmitted from one device to one
another device or to many other devices. Every PDO has two PDO services: a TxPDO and a
RxPDO. PDOs are transmitted in a non-confirmed mode.
PDO Transmission type is defined in the PDO communication parameter index (1400h for the 1st
RxPDO or 1800h for the 1st TxPDO), and all transmission types are listed in the following table:
Type Number
PDO
Cyclic
0
1-240
Acyclic
Synchronous
Asynchronous
RTR only
241-251
Reserved
252
253
254
255
Type number 1-240 indicates the number of SYNC message between two PDO transmissions.
Type number 252 indicates the data is updated (but not sent) immediately after receiving SYNC.
Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR.
Type number 254: Delta CANopen doesnt support this transmission format.
Type number 255 indicates the data is asynchronous transmission.
15-5
All PDO transmission data must be mapped to index via Object Dictionary.
Example:
Master transmits PDO data to Slave
PDO1
CAN(H)
CAN(L)
Slave
Master
PDO1 data value Data 0, Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, Data 4, Data 5, Data 6, Data 7,
0x11, 0x22, 0x33, 0x44, 0x55, 0x66, 0x77, 0x88,
PDO1 Map
0x60400010
Index
Sub
0x1600
0
1
2
3
0x1600
0x1600
0x1600
0x1600
0x6040
Definition
0. Number
1. Mapped Object
2. Mapped Object
3. Mapped Object
4. Mapped Object
0. Control word
Value
R/W
Size
1
0x60400010
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
U8
U32
U32
U32
U32
0x2211
R/W
U16
(2 Bytes)
Slave returns message to Master

PDO1
CAN(H)
CAN(L)
Slave
Master
PDO1 data value Data 0, Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, Data 4, Data 5, Data 6, Data 7,
0xF3, 0x00,
PDO1 Map
Index
Sub
0x1A00
0
1
2
3
0x1A00
0x1A00
0x1A00
0x1A00
0x6041
Definition
0. Number
1. Mapped Object
2. Mapped Object
3. Mapped Object
4. Mapped Object
Status Word
Value
R/W
Size
1
0x60410010
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
U8
U32
U32
U32
U32
0xF3
R/W
U16
EMCY (Emergency Object)

Emergency objects are triggered when hardware failure occurs for a warning interrupt. The data
format of a emergency object is a 8 bytes data as shown in the following:
Byte
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Content
Emergency Error Code
Error register
(Object 1001H)
Manufacturer specific Error Field
Please refer to Chapter 5 CANopen error codes for emergency definition of C2000.
15-6
Example:
Master send NM message to slave 1 for RESET request.

Slave 1 responds no error
Slave 1 responds a boot up message
Master enter Index6040 = 7EH in slave 1
Slave 1 responds OK
Master enter Index6040= 7FH in slave 1
Slave 1 responds OK
Master enter value for Index6041 to slave 1
Slave 1 responds 0640H
Master enter SYNC
Master enter PD01=2211H to slave 1
15-7
15.2 CANopen Wiring

An external adapter card: EMC-COP01 is used for CANopen wiring; establish CANopen to VFD C2000
connection. The link is enabled by using RJ45 cable. The two farthest ends must be terminated with 120
terminating resistors.
15-8
15.3 How to Control by CANopen

15.3.1 CANopen Control Mode
There are two control modes for CANopen; Pr.09.40 set to 1 is the factory setting mode DS402
standard and Pr.09.40 set to 0 is Deltas standard setting mode.
15.3.2 DS402 Standard Mode

To control the AC motor drive by CANopen, please set the parameters by the following steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Wiring for hardware (refer to Chapter 2 Wiring for CANopen)

Operation source setting: set Pr.00.21 to 3 (CANopen communication. Keypad STOP/RESET
disabled.)
Frequency source setting: set Pr.02.00 to 6 (CANopen communication)
Torque source setting: set Pr.11-33
CANopen station setting: set Pr.09-36 (Range of setting is 1~127. When Pr.09-36=0, CANopen
slave function is disabled. ) (Note: If error arised (CAdE or CANopen memory error) as station
setting is completed, press Pr.00-02=7 for reset.)
6.
7.
8.
CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr.09.37 (CANBUS Baud Rate: 1M(0), 500K(1), 250K(2),
125K(3), 100K(4) and50K(5))
Set multiple input functions to Quick Stop (it can also be enable or disable, default setting is
disable). If it is necessary to enable the function, set MI terminal to 53 in one of the following
parameter: Pr.02.01 ~Pr.02.08 or Pr.02.26 ~ Pr.02.31. (Note: This function is available in DS402
only.)
Switch to C2000 operation mode via the NMT string; control word 0x6040 (bit 0, bit 1, bit 2, bit 3
and bit 7) and status word 0x6041.
For example:
1. If the multi-function input terminal MI set Quick Stop to disable, enable the responsive
terminal of such MI terminal.
2. Set index 6040H to 7EH.
3. Set index 6040H to 7FH, the drive is now in operation mode.
4. Set index 6042H to 1500 (rpm), the default setting for pole is 4 (50Hz). Set the pole in
Pr.05.04 (Motor1) and Pr.05.16 (Motor 2).
Calculation for motor speed: n f
120
p
where n = ramp per minute (rpm);

P = poles
f = frequency (Hz)
Example 1: set motor running in forward direction, f = 30Hz, P = 4.

(120*30)/4 = 900rpm
Example 2: set motor running in reverse direction, f = 20Hz, P = 6.
(120*15)/6 = 300rpm; 300rpm = 0x012C
Also,
Bit15 defines the positive and negative sign.
i.e. Index 6042 = -300 = ( 300 + 1) = 012CH + 1 = FED3H +1 = FED4H
15-9
Switching mode:
Power
Disable
Start
Fault Reaction Active

X0XX1111
Not Ready to Switch On

Fault
X0XX0000
X0XX1000
XXXXXXX
Switch On Disable
X1XX0000
0XXXXX0X
0XXXX110
and
Disable QStop=1
0XXXXX0X
or
0XXXX01X
or
Disable QStop=0
Ready to Switch On
0XXXXX0X
or
0XXXX01X
or
Disable QStop=0
X01X0001
0XXXX111
0XXXX110
Switch On
X01X0011
0XXX1111
0XXX1111
0XXX0110
Operation Enable
X01X0111
0XXXX01X
or
Disable QStop=0
0XXX1111
and
Disable QStop=1
Fault
Power
Enable
0XXXXX0X
or
Fout=0
Quick Stop Active

X00X0111
< Status Switching Graph>

9.
The operation of AC motor drive in DS402 standard is controlled by the Control Word 0x6040
(bit4~bit6), as shown in the following chart:
bit 6
bit 5
bit 4
ramp function reference ramp function disable
ramp function enable
Outcome
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
RUN
LOCK
(at present frequency)
10. Follow the same steps, refer to status switching process for status word 0x6041(bit 0 to bit 6), bit
7= warn, bit 9 = 1 (permanently), bit 10= target frequency reached, bit 11= output exceeds
maximum frequency.
15-10
15.3.3 Delta Standard Mode

1.
Wiring (refer to Chapter 2 Wiring for CANopen).
2.
Rest CANopen Index, set Pr. 00.02 to 7. (Note, CANopen Index will return to factory setting)
3.
Operating source setting: set Pr.00.21 to 3 (Select CANopen communication mode)
4.
Frequency source setting: set Pr.00.20 to 6 (CANopen setting. If torque control or position
control is required, set Pr.0.02 to 2. Also set Pr.09.30 to 1(default setting) to allow new address
60XX to function, the old address 20XX can not support the control function for position and
torque.
5.
Torque source setting: Pr.11.33
6.
CANopen station setting: set Pr.09.36 (CANopen communication address 0-127)
7.
CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr.09.37 (Baud rate options: 1M(0), 500K(1), 250K(2), 125K(3),
100K(4) and 50K(5)
8.
CANopen decode method setting: set Pr.09.40 to 0.
9.
20XX address (old): in index 2020.01 enter 0002H for motor run; 0001H for motor stop. In index
2020.02 enter 1000, frequency will be 10.00Hz. Refer to Index 2020 and 2021 for more detail.
10. 60XX address (new): in index 2060.01 enter 0080H for motor servo on; enter 0x81 for motor run
to the target frequency. Various control mode options are available in Pr.00.40, select your
control mode.
15-11
15.4 CANopen Supporting Index

Basic Index Support by C2000:
Definition
Index Sub
1000H
Device type
1001H
Error register
1005H
COB-ID SYNC message
R/W Size
Factory Setting
00010192H
U32
U8
80H
U32
Note
1006H
Communication cycle period
Unit: us
The setting value should be in a
0 RW U32
multiple of 500us (integer)
within the range 500us to 16ms
1008H
Manufacturer device name
U32
1009H
U32
100AH
U32
100CH
Guarding time
0 RW U16
100DH
Guarding factor
0 RW
Store Parameter
Save all parameters
0 RW U32
Save communication
parameter
1 RW U32
Restore Parameter
Restore all parameters
0 RW U32
Restore communication
parameter
1 RW U32
1014H
COB-ID emergency
1015H
Inhibit time EMCY
Unit:100us
RW
U16
The
setting
value should be in a
0
multiple of 10 (integer)
Consumer heartbeat time
Consumer 1
0 RW U32
Producer heartbeat time
0 RW U16
Number
U8
Vender ID
000001DDH
U32
Product code
2A00+machine
code
U32
Revision
00010000H
U32
Server SDO Parameter
U8
COB-ID Client -> Server
U32
COB-ID Client <- Server
U32
Number
U8
1010H
1011H
1016H
1017H
1018H
1200H
1400H
Manufacturer hardware
version
Manufacturer software
version
0000080H+Node-I
D
0000600H+Node-I
D
0000580H+Node-I
D
2
15-12
Unit: ms
U8
U8
U8
U32
U8
Unit: 1ms
Disable Guarding time to
function properly
Unit: 1ms
Disable Guarding time to
function properly

Definition
Index Sub
1
COB-ID used by PDO
R/W Size
Factory Setting
Note
00000200H+NodeRW U32
ID
00:Acyclic& Synchronous
5 RW
Transmission Type
U8
01~240:Cyclic & Synchronous

255:Asynchronous
Number
COB-ID used by PDO
1401H
U8
ID
00: Acyclic & Synchronous
5 RW
Transmission Type
U8

255:Asynchronous
Number
COB-ID used by PDO
1402H
U8
ID
5 RW
Transmission Type
U8

255:Asynchronous
Number
COB-ID used by PDO
1403H
U8
ID
5H RW
Transmission Type
U8

255:Asynchronous
1600H
1601H
1602H
1603H
Number
2 RW
1.Mapped Object
60400010H RW U32
2.Mapped Object
60420010H RW U32
3.Mapped Object
0 RW U32
4.Mapped Object
0 RW U32
Number
3 RW
1.Mapped Object
20264110H RW U32
2.Mapped Object
2026A110H RW U32
3.Mapped Object
2026A210H RW U32
4.Mapped Object
0 RW U32
Number
3 RW
1.Mapped Object
60400010H RW U32
2.Mapped Object
607A0020H RW U32
3.Mapped Object
60600008H RW U32
4.Mapped Object
0 RW U32
Number
3 RW
1.Mapped Object
60400010H RW U32
2.Mapped Object
60710010H RW U32
3.Mapped Object
60600008H RW U32
4.Mapped Object
0 RW U32
15-13
U8
U8
U8
U8

Definition
Index Sub
0
Number
COB-ID used by PDO
R/W Size
Factory Setting
5
Note
U8
ID
5 RW
Transmission Type
1800H
U8
255:Asynchronous
Unit: 100us
0 RW U16 The setting value should be in a
Inhibit time
CMS-Priority Group
3 RW
Event timer
0 RW U16
Number
COB-ID used by PDO
U8
Unit: 1ms
U8
ID
5 RW
Transmission Type
1801H
U8
255:Asynchronous
Unit: 100us
Inhibit time
CMS-Priority Group
3 RW
Event timer
0 RW U16
Number
COB-ID used by PDO
U8
Unit: 1ms
U8
ID
5 RW
Transmission Type
1802H
U8
255:Asynchronous
Unit: 100us
RW
U16
The
setting
value should be in a
0
Inhibit time
CMS-Priority Group
3 RW
Event timer
0 RW U16
Number
COB-ID used by PDO
U8
Unit: 1ms
U8
ID
5 RW
Transmission Type
1803H
1A00H
U8
255:Asynchronous
Unit: 100us
Inhibit time
CMS-Priority Group
3 RW
Event timer
0 RW U16
Number
2 RW
1.Mapped Object
60410010H RW U32
2.Mapped Object
60430010H RW U32
15-14
U8
U8
Unit: 1ms

Definition
Index Sub
1A01H
1A02H
1A03H
Factory Setting
Note
R/W Size
3.Mapped Object
0 RW U32
4.Mapped Object
0 RW U32
Number
4 RW
1.Mapped Object
20260110H RW U32
2.Mapped Object
20266110H RW U32
3.Mapped Object
20266210H RW U32
4.Mapped Object
20266310H RW U32
Number
1.Mapped Object
60410010H RW U32
2.Mapped Object
60640020H RW U32
3.Mapped Object
60610008H RW U32
4.Mapped Object
0 RW U32
Number
3 RW
1.Mapped Object
60410010H RW U32
2.Mapped Object
60770010H RW U32
3.Mapped Object
60610008H RW U32
4.Mapped Object
0 RW U32
3 RW
U8
U8
U8
C2000 Index:
Parameter index corresponds to each other as following:
Index
sub-Index
2000H + Group
member+1
For example:
Pr.10.15 (Encoder Slip Error Treatment)
Group
member
10(0 A H)
15(0FH)
Index = 2000H + 0AH = 200A

Sub Index = 0FH + 1H = 10H
C2000 Control Index:

Delta Standard Mode (Old definition)
Index Sub
2020H
Definition
0 Number
1 Control word
Factory
Setting
3
0
R/W
Size
R
RW
U8
U16
15-15
Note
Bit 0~1 00B:disable
01B:stop
10B:disable

Index Sub
Definition
Factory
Setting
R/W
Size
Note
11B: JOG Enable
Bit2~3 Reserved
Bit4~5 00B:disable
01B: Direction forward
10B: Reverse
11B: Switch Direction
Bit6~7 00B: 1st step
acceleration/deceleration
01B: 2nd step
acceleration/deceleration
Bit8~15 Reserved
2021H
2021H
2 vl target velocityHz
RW
U16
3 Other trigger
RW
U16
DH
0
0
R
R
R
U8
U16
U16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
0
0
R
R
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
0 Number
1 Error code
2 AC motor drive status
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
10
Frequency commandF
Output frequencyH
Output currentAXX.X
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Display output currentA
Display counter valuec
Display actual output
frequency (H)
Display DC-BUS voltage (u)
Display output voltage (E)
Display output power angle
(n)
Display output power in kW
(P)
Display actual motor speed
in rpm (r)
15-16
Bit0 1: E.F. ON
Bit1 1: Reset
Bit2~15 Reserved
00B: stop
01B: decelerate to stop
10B: waiting for operation
command
11B: in operation
Bit 2
1: JOG command
Bit 3~4
00B: forward running
01B: switch from reverse
running to forward running
10B: switch from forward
running to reverse running
11B: reverse running
Bit 5~7
reserved
Bit 8 1: master frequency command
controlled by communication
interface
Bit 9
1: master frequency command
controlled by analog signal input
Bit 10
1: operation command
controlled by communication
interface
Bit
reserved
11~15
Bit 0~1

Index Sub
Definition
Factory
Setting
R/W
Size
U16
U16
U16
0
0
0
R
R
R
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
0
0
0
R
R
R
U16
U16
U16
U16
Display estimate output

11 torque N-m (t)
Display PG feedback (G)
(refer to Pr.10.00 and
12
Pr.10.01)
13
14
15
16
17
2021H
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
Display PID feedback in %

(b)
Display AVI in % (1.)
Display ACI in % (2.)
Display AUI in % (3.)
Display the temperature of
heat sink in oC (i.)
Display the IGBT
temperature of drive power
module oC (c.)
The status of digital input
(ON/OFF) (i)
The status of digital output
(ON/OFF) (o)
Display the multi-step
speed that is executing (S)
The corresponding CPU pin
status of digital input (d.)
The corresponding CPU pin
status of digital output (0.)
Number of actual motor
revolution (PG1 of PG card)
(P.)
Pulse input frequency (PG2
of PG card) (S.)
Pulse input position (PG2 of
PG card) (4.)
Position command tracing
error (P.)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Display PLC register D1043
data (C)
Note
Delta Standard Mode (New definition):

Index sub R/W bit
2060h 00h R
01h RW
0
1
Bit
Bit name Limit
0
Pulse 0
CMD_ACT
1
Pulse 1
EXT_CMD
Tcmd = 0
fcmd = Fset(Fpid)
Tcmd =Tset
Pulse 00
Pulse 01
Pulse 10
Pulse 11
HALT
Torque mode
fcmd =0
2
3
Speed
None
Forward running
Reverse running
Change current
running direction
Running till target speed is

15-17
Free (running till target
Index sub R/W bit
Bit
Bit name Limit
1
0
4
LOCK
1
0
JOG
1
Pulse 1
0
6
QSTOP
1
0
SERVO_O
7
N
1
0000
11~8 0001~11 GEAR
11
5
2
1
4
01
ACC/DEC
10
11
0
14
EN_SW
RST
1
15
Pulse 1
02h RW
03h RW
04h RW
05h RW
06h RW
07h RW
Torque mode
torque is reached)
Lock (torque stop at present
speed)
JOG RUN
None
Quick Stop
Servo OFF
Servo ON
Main speed
1~15 multi-steps frequency
switch
1st step
acceleration/deceleration time
2nd step acceleration/
deceleration time
3rd step acceleration/
deceleration time
4th step acceleration/
deceleration time
JOG RUN
None
Quick Stop
Servo OFF
Servo ON
Main torque
JOG OFF
00
13~12
Speed
reached
Temporary stop according to
deceleration setting
Running till target speed is
reached
Frequency stop at present
frequency level
JOG OFF
Switch in multi-step
Switch in multi-step frequency
frequency and acceleration/
and acceleration/deceleration
deceleration time are not
time are not allow
allow
Switch
in multi-step
Switch in multi-step frequency
and acceleration/deceleration frequency and acceleration/
time are allow
deceleration time are allow
Clear error code
Clear error code
Velocity command (unsigned) Profile velocity(unsigned)
Torque command(signed)
2061h01h R
ARRIVE
0
1
00
DIR
01
2~1
10
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
JOG
QSTOP
SERVO_O
N
PRLOCK
WARN
ERROR
Target frequency is not

Target torque is not reached
reached
Target frequency is not
Target torque is not reached
reached
Forward direction
Forward run
Switch from reverse direction to Switch
from
reverse
forward direction
direction to forward direction
Switch from forward direction to Switch
from
forward
reverse direction
direction to reverse direction
Reverse direction
Reverse direction
None
None
On JOG
On JOG
None
None
On Quick Stop
On Quick Stop
PWM OFF
PWM OFF
PWM ON
Parameter is not locked
Parameter locked
No warning
Warning
No error
PWM ON
Parameter is not locked
Parameter locked
No warning
Warning
No error
15-18
Index sub R/W bit

11
15~11
Bit
1
0
1
-
02h R
03h
04h
05h
06h
07h
R
R
R
R
R
Bit name Limit

IGBT_OK
Velocity
cmd
Pos Cmd
Speed
Torque mode
Error
IGBT OFF
IGBT ON
-
Error
IGBT OFF
IGBT ON
-
Actual frequency output
Actual frequency output
Actual position (Absolute)
Actual position (Absolute)
Actual torque
Actual torque
Torq Cmd
DS402 Standard
Index
Su
Definition
6007h
0 Abort connection option code
603Fh
6040h
6041h
6042h
6043h
6044h
604Fh
6050h
6051h
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Error code
Control word
Status word
vl target velocity
vl velocity demand
vl control effort
vl ramp function time
vl slow down time
vl quick stop time
605Ah
0 Quick stop option code
605Ch
6060h
Uni PD Mod
R/W Size
O
Setting
t Map e
Factory
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
10000
10000
1000
RW S16
Yes
R0
RW
R0
RW
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
U16
U16
U16
S16
S16
S16
U32
U32
U32
rpm
rpm
rpm
1ms
1ms
1ms
Note
0: No action
2: Disable Voltage,
3: quick stop
vl
vl
vl
vl
vl
vl
Unit must be: 100ms, and

check if the setting is set to 0.
0 : disable drive function
1 :slow down on slow down
ramp
2: slow down on quick stop
ramp
5 slow down on slow down
ramp and stay in QUICK
STOP
6 slow down on quick stop
ramp and stay in QUICK
STOP
0: Disable drive function
1: Slow down with slow down
ramp; disable of the drive
function
1: Profile Position Mode
2: Velocity Mode
4: Torque Profile Mode
6: Homing Mode
RW S16
No
RW S16
No
0 Mode of operation
RW
S8
Yes
6061h
0 Mode of operation display
RO
S8
Yes
6064h
0 pp Position actual value
RO S32
Yes
pp
6071h
0 tq Target torque
RW S16
Yes
tq Valid unit: 1%
6072h
0 tq Max torque
150
RW U16
No
tq Valid unit: 1%
6075h
0 tq Motor rated current
RO U32 mA No
tq
6077h
0 tq torque actual value
RO S16 0.1 Yes
tq
Disable operation option

code
15-19
0.1
%
0.1
%
Same as above
Index
Su
b
Definition
Factory
Setting
R/W Size
Uni PD Mod
O
t Map e
%
0.1
6078h
0 tq current actual value
RO S16
Yes
tq
6079h
0 tq DC link circuit voltage
RO U32 mV Yes
tq
607Ah
0 pp Target position
RW S32
pp
15-20
Yes
Note
15.5 CANopen Fault Code

Display
Fault
ocA
Fault code
0009H
Description
Over-current during acceleration
CANopen
fault code
CANopen
fault
register
(bit 0~7)
2310H
2310H
2310H
2240H
2240H
2310H
3210H
3210H
3210H
Oc at accel
ocd
000AH
Over-current during deceleration
Oc at decel
Fault
ocn
000BH
Oc at normal SPD
Over-current during steady status

operation
Ground fault. When (one of) the output
terminal(s) is grounded, short
circuit current is more than 50% of AC
Fault
GFF
000CH
motor drive rated current.

NOTE: The short circuit protection is
Ground fault
provided for AC motor drive

Protection, not for protection of the user.
Short-circuit is detected between upper
Fault
occ
000DH
IGBT module.
Short Circuit
Fault
ocS
000EH
Oc at stop
ovA
bridge and lower bridge of the
000FH
Ov at accel
Over-current at stop. Hardware failure in

current detection
Over-current during acceleration.

Hardware failure in current detection
Over-current during steady speed.
Fault
ovn
0010H
Hardware failure in current detection.

230V: 450Vdc; 460V: 900Vdc
Ov at normal SPD
Over-voltage at stop. Hardware failure in
Fault
ovS
0011H
current detection
Ov at stop
15-21
Fault
LvA
0012H
Lv at accel
Fault
Lvd
0013H
Lv at decel
Fault
Lvn
0014H
Lv at normal SPD
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00

during acceleration.
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00

during deceleration.
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00 in

constant speed.
3220H
3220H
3220H
3220H
3130H
4310H
4310H
4300H
4200H
3120H
2310H
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06-00 at
Fault
LvS
0015H
stop
Lv at stop
Fault
PHL
0016H
Phase Loss.
Phase Lacked
IGBT overheat
IGBT temperature exceeds protection
Fault
oH1
0017H
level.
1~15HP: 90
IGBT over heat
20~100HP: 100
Heatsink overheat
Fault
oH2
0018H
Heat sink temperature exceeds 90oC
Hear Sink oH
Temperature detection circuit error
Fault
tH1o
0019H
(IGBT)
IGBT NTC
Thermo 1 open
Temperature detection circuit error
Fault
tH2o
001AH
CAP NTC
Thermo 2 open
Fault
PWR
(capacity module)
001BH
Power RST off
Power RST OFF
Overload. The AC motor drive detects

excessive drive output current.
Fault
oL
Inverter oL
001CH
NOTE: The AC motor drive can

withstand up to 150% of the rated current
for a maximum of 60 seconds.
15-22
Fault
EoL2
EoL1
001DH
Electronics thermal relay 1 protection
2310H
2310H
7120H
8311H
8311H
8321H
8321H
5530H
5530H
2300H
2300H
2300H
Thermal relay 1
2
Fault
EoL2
001EH
Electronics thermal relay 2 protection
Thermal relay 2
Motor overheating
Fault
EoL2
oH3
001FH
Thermal
Motor
over
relay
heat
2
The AC motor drive detects that the

internal temperature exceeds
Pr.06-30 (PTC level)
These two fault codes will be displayed
Fault
EoL2
ot1
0020H
when output current exceeds

the over-torque detection level (Pr.06.07
Thermal
Over
torque
relay
1 2
or Pr.06.10) and exceeds

over-torque detection(Pr.06.08 or
Fault
EoL2
ot2
0021H
Thermal
Over
torque
relay
2 2
Fault
EoL2
UC1
Pr.06.11) and it is set 2 or 4 in

Pr.06-06 or Pr.06-09.
0022H
Low torque 1
Thermal
Under
torque
relay12
Fault
EoL2
UC2
0023H
Low torque 2
Thermal
Under
torque
relay22
Internal EEPROM can not be
Fault
EoL2
cF1
0024H
programmed.
Thermal relay
EEPROM
write2Err
Fault
EoL2
cF2
0025H
Internal EEPROM can not be read.
Thermal relay
EEPROM
read2Err
Fault
EoL2
cd0
0026H
Current and calculation error
Thermal
Isum
sensor
relayErr
2
Fault
EoL2
cd1
0027H
U-phase error
Thermal
Ias
sensor
relay
Err 2
Fault
EoL2
cd2
0028H
V-phase error
Thermal
Ibs
sensor
relay
Err 2
15-23
Fault
EoL2
cd3
0029H
W-phase error
2300H
5000H
5000H
5000H
5000H
7120H
7300H
7300H
7300H
7300H
7300H
7300H
Thermal
Ics
sensor
relay
Err 2
Fault
EoL2
Hd0
002AH
CC (current clamp) hardware error.
Thermal
cc
HW Error
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
Hd1
002BH
OC hardware error.
Thermal
oc
HW Error
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
Hd2
002CH
OV hardware error.
Thermal
ov
HW Error
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
Hd3
002DH
GFF hardware error.
Thermal
GFF
HW relay
Error 2
Fault
EoL2
AUE
002DH
Auto tuning error
Thermal
Auto
tuning
relay
Err2
Fault
EoL2
AFE
002EH
PID loss (ACI)
Thermal
PID
Fbk Error
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
PGF1
002FH
PG feedback error
Thermal
PG
Fbk Error
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
PGF2
0030H
PG feedback loss
Thermal
PG
Fbk Loss
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
PGF3
0031H
PG feedback stall
Thermal
PG
Fbk Over
relaySPD
2
Fault
EoL2
PGF4
0032H
PG slip error
Thermal
PG
Fbk deviate
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
PGr1
0033H
Pulse input error
Thermal
PG
ref Error
relay 2
15-24
Fault
EoL2
PGr2
0034H
Pulse input loss
7300H
FF00H
9000H
9000H
9000H
6320H
6320H
7500H
7500H
7500H
Thermal
PG
ref loss
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
ACE
0035H
ACI loss
Thermal
ACI
loss relay 2
External Fault
When input EF (N.O.) on external
Fault
EoL2
EF
0036H
terminal is closed to GND, AC motor

drive stops output U, V, and W.
Thermal relay
External
Fault 2
Emergency stop
When the multi-function input terminals
MI1 to MI6 are set to
Fault
EoL2
EF1
0037H
emergency stop, the AC motor drive

stops output U, V, W and
Thermal relay
Emergency
stop
2
the motor coasts to stop

External Base Block
When the external input terminals MI1 to
Fault
EoL2
bb
0038H
MI16 are set as bb and active, the AC

motor drive output will be turned off
Thermal
Base
block
relay 2
Password will be locked if three fault
Fault
EoL2
Pcod
0039H
passwords are entered
Thermal relay
Password
Error
2
Fault
EoL2
ccod
003AH
Software error
Thermal
SW
coderelay
Error2
Fault
EoL2
cE1
0031H
Illegal function code
Thermal CMD
Modbus
relay err
2
Fault
cE2
0032H
Illegal data address (00H to 254H)
Thermal ADDR
Modbus
relay 2err
Fault
cE3
0033H
Illegal data value
Thermal DATA
Modbus
relay 2err
15-25
Fault
cE4
0034H
Data is written to read-only address
7500H
7500H
7500H
7110H
3330H
FF00H
Thermal slave
Modbus
relay FLT
2
Fault
cE10
0035H
Modbus transmission timeout.
Thermal time
Modbus
relayout
2
Fault
cP10
0036H
Keypad transmission timeout.
Thermaltime
Keypad
relayout
2
Fault
bF
0037H
Brake resistor fault
Thermalfault
Braking
relay 2
Fault
Ydc
0038H
Y-connection/-connection switch error
Thermalconnect
Y-delta
relay 2
Overslip error occurs when the slip

Fault
oSL
0039H
Thermal
Over
sliprelay
Error2
Fault
ovU
ocU
exceeds Pr.05.26 limit and the time

exceeds Pr.05.27 setting.
003AH
Unknown over current
2310H
003BH
Unknown over voltage
3210H
9000H
2240H
2240H
2240H
Thermal
Over
Apm.
volt.relay
Unknow
unknow
2
Fault
ovU
Thermal
Over
volt.relay
Unknow
2
Fault
S1
003CH
External emergency stop
Thermal relay
S1-Emergy
stop
2
Fault
aocc
003DH
A-phase short-circuit
Thermal
A
phase short
relay 2
Fault
bocc
003EH
B-phase short-circuit
Thermal
B
phase short
relay 2
Fault
cocc
003FH
C-phase short-circuit
Thermal
C
phase short
relay 2
15-26
Fault
CGdE
0040H
Guarding time-out 1
8130H
0041H
Heartbeat time-out
8130H
0042H
CAN synchrony error
8700H
8140H
8110H
0x8100
0x8100
Thermal relay
Guarding
T-out2
Fault
CHbE
Thermal relay
Heartbeat
T-out
2
Fault
CSyE
Thermal
SYNC
T-out
relay 2
Fault
CbFE
0043H
CAN bus off
Thermalbus
CAN/S
relay
off 2
Fault
CIdE
0044H
Can index exceed
Thermal relay 2
Fault
CAdE
0045H
CAN address error
Thermal relay 2
CAN frame fail
Fault
CFdE
0046H
Thermal relay 2
15-27
15.6 CANopen LED Function

There are two CANopen flash signs: RUN and ERR.
RUN LED:
LED status
Condition
CANopen State
OFF
Initial
Pre-Operation
Blinking
Stopped
Single flash
ON
Operation
ERR LED:
LED status
Condition/ State
OFF
No Error
Single
One Message fail
flash
Double
Guarding fail or heartbeat fail
flash
Triple flash SYNC fail
ON
Bus off
15-28
Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series
Chapter 16 PLC Function

16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
16.7
PLC Overview
Start-up
PLC Ladder Diagram
PLC Devices
Commands
Error Code and Troubleshoot
CANopen Master Application
16-1
16.1 PLC Overview

16.1.1 Introduction
The built in PLC function in C2000 allows following commands: WPLSoft, basic commands and
application commands; the operation methods are the same as Delta DVPPLC series. Other than
that, CANopen master provides 8 station synchronous control and 126 asynchronous controls.
NOTE
In C2000, CANopen master synchronous control complies with DS402 standard and supports control mode as return to
origin point, speed, torque and point to point control; CANopen slave supports two control modes, speed and torque.
16.1.2 Ladder Diagram Editor WPLSoft

WPLSoft is a program editor of Delta DVP-PLC series and C2000 series for WINDOWS. Besides
general PLC program planning and general WINDOWS editing functions, such as cut, paste,
copy, multi-windows, WPLSoft also provides various Chinese/English comment editing and other
special functions (e.g. register editing, settings, the data readout, the file saving, and contacts
monitor and set, etc.).
Following is the system requirement for WPLSoft:
Item
System Requirement
Operation System
Windows 95/98/2000/NT/ME/XP
CPU
Memory
Pentium 90 and above

16MB and above (32MB and above is recommended)
Capacity: 50MB and above
CD-ROM (for installing WPLSoft)
Resolution: 640480, 16 colors and above,
It is recommended to set display setting of Windows to
800600.
General mouse or the device compatible with Windows
Hard Disk
Monitor
Mouse
Printer
RS-232 port
Applicable Models
Printer with Windows driver

At least one of COM1 to COM8 can be connected to
PLC
All Delta DVP-PLC series and C2000 series
16-2
16.2 Start-up
16.2.1 The Steps for PLC Execution
Please operate PLC follows the five steps.
1.
Press menu key on KPC-CC01 select 3: PLC

MENU
1.Pr Setup
2.Copy Pr
3.PLC
F 60.00Hz
H 0.00Hz
A 0.00Hz
Press
ENTER. (See the figure below)

PLC
1.Disable
2.PLC Run
3.PLC Stop
Select 3.PLC
MENU
Press ENTER
NOTE
Operate the KPC-CE01 (the optional digital keypad) by following steps (switch PLC mode to PLC2 for program
download/upload):
A. Go to PLC0 page by pressing the MODE key
B. Change to PLC2 by pressing the UP key and then press the ENTER key after confirmation
C. If succeeded, END is displayed and back to PLC2 after one or two seconds.
The PLC warning that is displayed before the program is downloaded to C2000 can be ignored, please continue the
operation.
Disable
2.
Run PLC
PLC Stop
AC d i
Connection: Please connect the RJ-45 of AC motor drive to computer via RS485-to-RS232
converter.
RS485
C2000
3.
Run the program.
PLC
1.Disable
2.PLC Run
3.PLC Stop
PLC function, select function 2 (PLC Run).

1: Disable
(PLC0)
2: PLC Run
(PLC1)
3: PLC Stop
(PLC2)
Optional accessories: Digital keypad KPC-CE01, display

PLC function as shown in the ( ).
When external input terminals (MI1~MI8) are set to PLC Mode select bit0 (51) or PLC Mode
select bit1 (52), it will force to switch to
PLC mode regardless the terminal is ON or OFF.
16-3
Meanwhile, switching via keypad is disabled. Please refer to the chart below:
PLC Mode
PLC Mode select bit1(52)
PLC Mode select bit0 (51)
Disable (PLC 0)
OFF
OFF
PLC Run (PLC 1)
OFF
ON
PLC Stop (PLC 2)
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Previous state
When KPC-CE01 execute PLC function:
1.
When switching the page from PLC to PLC1, it will execute PLC. The motion of PLC
(Execute/Stop) is controlled by WPL editor.
2.
When switching the page from PLC to PLC2, it will stop PLC. Again the motion of PLC
(Execute/Stop) is controlled by WPL editor.
3.
The control of external terminals follows the same method.
NOTE
When input/output terminals (FWD REV MI1~MI8 MI10~15, Relay1, Relay2 RY10~RY15, MO1~MO2 MO10~MO11,)
are used in PLC program, they cannot be used in other places. Fro example, when PLC program (PLC1 or PLC2) is
activated, such as when it controls Y0, the corresponding output terminals Relay (RA/RB/RC) will be used. At this
moment, Pr.03.00 setting will be invalid since the terminal has been used by PLC. Refer to Pr.02-52, 02-53, 03-30 to
check which DI DO AO are occupied by PLC.
16.2.2 I/O Device Reference Table

Input device:
Device X0
1
X1
FWD REV
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X10
X11
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
X12
X13
X14
X15
X16
X17
MI10 MI11 MI12 MI13 MI14 MI15
MI10 MI11 MI12 MI13
1: I/O extension card

2: I/O extension card EMC-D611A (D1022=4)
Output device:
Device Y0
1
RY
1
Y1
RY2
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y10
Y11
Y12
MO1 MO2
MO10 MO11
RY10 RY11 RY12 RY13 RY14 RY15
1: I/O extension card

3: I/O extension card EMC-R6AA (D1022=6)
16-4
Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17
16.2.3 WPLSoft Installation

Download PLC program toC2000: Refer to D.3 to D.7 for program coding and download the editor
(WPLSoft V2.09) at DELTA website http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/
16.2.4 Program Input
16.2.5 Program Download

Please download the program by following steps:
Step 1. Press
button for compiler after inputting program in WPLSoft.
Step 2. After compiler is finished, choose the item Write to PLC in the communication items.
After finishing Step 2, the program will be downloaded from WPLSoft to the AC motor drive by the
communication format.
16-5
16.2.6 Program Monitor

If you execute start monitor in the communication item during executing PLC, the ladder
diagram will be shown as follows.
16.2.7 Restriction of PLC

1.
2.
3.
4.
The protocol of PLC is 7,N,2 ,9600, station number 2

Make sure that the AC drive is in stop status.
Stop the PLC before upload/download the program.
When using WPR command, do not change the value over 109 times or serious error would
result.
5. Set Pr. 00.04 to 28 to display the value in PLC register D1043, as shown in the figure follows:
Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 can display 0~65535 Digital keypad KPC-CE01 can display 0~9999
H 0.00Hz
A 0.00Hz
C _____
When exceed 9999:
6. When PLC is Stop, communication RS-485 is occupied by PLC.

7. When PLC is in Run and Stop mode, Pr00.02 can not be set to 9 or 10, which means can not
return to factory setting.
8. Set Pr.00.02 to 6, return to factory setting of PLC.
16-6
16.3 Ladder Diagram

16.3.1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram
Read input state from outside
X0
Calculate the result by
X1
Start
Y0
Y0
ladder diagram
algorithm (it doesnt
X10
M100 X3
Repeats the
Y1
sent to the outer output

:
:
point but the inner

equipment will output
execution in
cycle.
X100 M505
immediately.)
Y126
End
Send the result to the output point
16.3.2 Ladder Diagram
Ladder diagram is a diagram language that applied on the automatic control and it is also a
diagram that made up of the symbols of electric control circuit. PLC procedures are finished after
ladder diagram editor edits the ladder diagram. It is easy to understand the control flow that
indicated with diagram and also accept by technical staff of electric control circuit. Many basic
symbols and motions of ladder diagram are the same as mechanical and electrical equipments of
traditional automatic power panel, such as button, switch, relay, timer, counter and etc.
The kinds and amounts of PLC internal equipment will be different with brands. Although internal
equipment has the name of traditional electric control circuit, such as relay, coil and contact. It
doesnt have the real components in it. In PLC, it just has a basic unit of internal memory. If this bit
is 1, it means the coil is ON and if this bit is 0, it means the coil is OFF. You should read the
corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Open, NO or contact a). Otherwise,
you should read the opposite sate of corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally
Closed, NC or contact b). Many relays will need many bits, such as 8-bits makes up a byte. 2
bytes can make up a word. 2 words make up double word. When using many relays to do
calculation, such as add/subtraction or shift, you could use byte, word or double word.
Furthermore, the two equipments, timer and counter, in PLC not only have coil but also value of
counting time and times.
In conclusion, each internal storage unit occupies fixed storage unit. When using these
equipments, the corresponding content will be read by bit, byte or word.
Brief introduction to the internal devices of PLC:
Internal Device
Function
16-7
Input Relay
Input relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to
external input point (it is the terminal that used to connect to external input switch
and receive external input signal). Input signal from external will decide it to
display 0 or 1. You couldnt change the state of input relay by program design or
forced ON/OFF via WPLSoft. The contacts (contact a, b) can be used unlimitedly.
If there is no input signal, the corresponding input relay could be empty and cant
be used with other functions.
Output Relay
Output relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to
external output point (it is used to connect to external load). It can be driven by
input relay contact, the contact of other internal equipment and itself contact. It
uses a normally open contact to connect to external load and other contacts can
be used unlimitedly as input contacts. It doesnt have the corresponding output
relay, if need, it can be used as internal relay.
Internal Relay
Equipment indication: C0, C1 C79. The symbol of equipment is C and

numbering in decimal system.
Timer is used to control time. There are coil, contact and timer storage. When coil
is ON, its contact will act (contact a is close, contact b is open) when attaining
desired time. The time value of timer is set by settings and each timer has its
regular period. User sets the timer value and each timer has its timing period.
Once the coil is OFF, the contact wont act (contact a is open and contact b is
close) and the timer will be set to zero.
Data register
Equipment indication: M0, M1M799. The symbol of equipment is M and

Counter is used to count. It needs to set counter before using counter (i.e. the
pulse of counter). There are coil, contacts and storage unit of counter in counter.
When coil is from OFF to ON, that means input a pulse in counter and the counter
should add 1. There are 16-bit, 32-bit and high-speed counter for user to use.
Timer
Equipment indication: Y0, Y1Y7, Y10, Y11 The symbol of equipment is

Y and numbering in octal.
The internal relay doesnt connect directly to outside. It is an auxiliary relay in

PLC. Its function is the same as the auxiliary relay in electric control circuit. Each
auxiliary relay has the corresponding basic unit. It can be driven by the contact of
input relay, output relay or other internal equipment. Its contacts can be used
unlimitedly. Internal auxiliary relay cant output directly, it should output with
output point.
Counter
Equipment indication method: X0, X1X7, X10, X11 The symbol of

equipment is X and numbering in octal.
Equipment indication: T0, T1T159. The symbol of equipment is T and

numbering in decimal system. The different number range corresponds with
the different timing period.
PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order, timer value
and counter value. The data register is used to store data or parameters. It stores
16-bit binary number, i.e. a word, in each register. It uses two continuous number
of data register to store double words.
Equipment indication: D0, D1,,D399. The symbol of equipment is D and

16-8
The structure of ladder diagram and information:

Ladder Diagram
Structure
Explanation
Command
Device
Normally open, contact a
LD
X, Y, M, T, C
Normally closed, contact b
LDI
X, Y, M, T, C
Serial normally open
AND
X, Y, M, T, C
Parallel normally open
OR
X, Y, M, T, C
Parallel normally closed
ORI
X, Y, M, T, C
Rising-edge trigger switch
LDP
X, Y, M, T, C
Falling-edge trigger switch
LDF
X, Y, M, T, C
Rising-edge trigger in serial
ANDP
X, Y, M, T, C
Falling-edge trigger in
serial
ANDF
X, Y, M, T, C
Rising-edge trigger in
parallel
ORP
X, Y, M, T, C
Falling-edge trigger in
parallel
ORF
X, Y, M, T, C
Block in serial
ANB
none
Block in parallel
ORB
none
Multiple output
MPS
MRD
MPP
none
16-9
Output command of coil

drive
Basic command,
Application command
Inverse logic
OUT
Y, M
Basic command/
Application
command
INV
none
16.3.3 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram

The program edited method is from left power line to right power line. (The right power line will be
omitted during the edited of WPLSoft.) After editing a row, go to editing the next row. The
maximum contacts in a row are 11 contacts. If you need more than 11 contacts, you could have
the new row and start with continuous line to continue more input devices. The continuous
number will be produced automatically and the same input point can be used repeatedly. The
drawing is shown as follows.
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 C0 C1
00000
X11 X12 X13
Y0
00000
Row Number
The operation of ladder diagram is to scan from left upper corner to right lower corner. The output
handling, including the operation frame of coil and application command, at the most right side in
ladder diagram.
Take the following diagram for example; we analyze the process step by step. The number at the
right corner is the explanation order.
X0
X1
Y1
X4
Y1
M0
T0
M3
TMR
X3
T0
M1
The explanation of command order:

1
2
3
4
LD
X0
OR
M0
AND X1
LD
X3
AND M1
ORB
5
LD
Y1
AND X4
The explanation of command order:
6
LD
T0
AND M3
ORB
7
ANB
8
OUT Y1
TMR T0
K10
The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram
1. LD (LDI) command: give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block.
16-10
K10
LD command
LD command
AND Block
OR Block
The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD. The difference is that
command LDP and LDF will act in the rising-edge or falling-edge when contact is ON as shown in
the following.
Rising-edge
Falling-edge
X0
X0
Time
OFF
ON
Time
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
2. AND (ANI) command: single device connects to a device or a block in series.

AND command
AND command
The structures of ANDP and ANDF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.
3. OR (ORI) command: single device connects to a device or a block.
OR command
OR command
OR command
The structures of ORP and ORF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.
4. ANB command: a block connects to a device or a block in series.

ANB command
5. ORB command: a block connects to a device or a block in parallel.
ORB command
If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB, they should be combined to blocks or
network from up to down or from left to
right.
16-11
6. MPS, MRD, MPP commands: Divergent memory of multi-output. It can produce many various
outputs.
7. The command MPS is the start of divergent point. The divergent point means the connection place
between horizontal line and vertical line. We should determine to have contact memory command
or not according to the contacts status in the same vertical line. Basically, each contact could have
memory command but in some places of ladder diagram conversion will be omitted due to the
PLC operation convenience and capacity limit. MPS command can be used for 8 continuous times
and you can recognize this command by the symbol .
8. MRD command is used to read memory of divergent point. Because the logical status is the same
in the same horizontal line, it needs to read the status of original contact to keep on analyzing
other ladder diagram. You can recognize the command MRD by the symbol .
9. MPP command is used to read the start status of the top level and pop it out from stack. Because
it is the last item of the horizontal line, it means the status of this horizontal line is ending.
MPS
MRD
MPP
16.3.4 The Example for Designing Basic Program

Start, Stop and Latching
In the same occasions, it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop
switch. Therefore, if you want to keep the action, you should design latching circuit. There are
several latching circuits in the following:
Example 1: the latching circuit for priority of stop
When start normally open contact X1=On,
stop normally contact X2Off, and Y1=On
are set at the same time, if X2=On, the coil
Y1 will stop acting. Therefore, it calls
priority of stop.
Y1
X2
Y1
X1
START
Example 2: the latching circuit for priority of start
16-12
STOP
When start normally open contact X1=On,

stop normally contact X2Off and Y1=On
(coil Y1 will be active and latching) are valid
at the same time, if X2=On, coil Y1 will be
active due to latched contact. Therefore, it
calls priority of start.
X1
X2
Y1
Y1
Example 3: the latching circuit of SET and RST commands

The figure at the right side is latching circuit
Top priority of stop
that made up of RST and SET command.
It is top priority of stop when RST command
X1
is set behind SET command. When
executing PLC from up to down, The coil Y1
is ON and coil Y1 will be OFF when X1 and
X2
X2 act at the same time, therefore it calls
priority of stop.
It is top priority of start when SET command
is set after RST command. When X1 and
X2 act at the same time, Y1 is ON so it calls
Top priority of start
top priority of start.
X2
SET
Y1
RST
Y1
RST
Y1
SET
Y1
X1
The common control circuit

Example 4: condition control
X1 and X3 can start/stop Y1 separately, X2 and X4 can start/stop Y2 separately and they are all self
latched circuit. Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact
connects to Y2 in series. Therefore, Y1 is the input of Y2 and Y2 is also the input of Y1.
X1
X3
Y1
Y1
X2
X1
X3
X4
X2
Y1
Y2
Y2
X4
Y1
Y2
Example 5: Interlock control
16-13
The figure above is the circuit of interlock control. Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start
contact X1 and X2. Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time, once one of them acts and the other
wont act. (This is called interlock.) Even if X1 and X2 are valid at the same time, Y1 and Y2
wont act at the same time due to up-to-down scan of ladder diagram. For this ladder diagram,
Y1 has higher priority than Y2.
X1
X3
Y2
X1
Y1
Y1
X3
X2
X2
X4
X4
Y1
Y2
Y1
Y2
Y2
Example 6: Sequential Control

X1
X3
If add normally close contact Y2 into Y1 circuit to

be an input for Y1 to do AND function. (as shown in
the left side) Y1 is an input of Y2 and Y2 can stop
Y1 after acting. In this way, Y1 and Y2 can execute
in sequential.
Y2
Y1
Y1
X2
X4
Y1
Y2
Y2
Example 7: Oscillating Circuit

The period of oscillating circuit is T+T
Y1
Y1
Y1
T
T
The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram. When starting to scan Y1 normally close
contact, Y1 normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF. Then it will scan Y1 and the
coil Y1 will be ON and output 1. In the next scan period to scan normally close contact Y1, Y1
normally close contact will be open due to Y1 is ON. Finally, coil Y1 will be OFF. The result of
repeated scan, coil Y will output the vibrating pulse with cycle time T (On) +T (Off).
The vibrating circuitry of cycle time T (On) +T (Off):
X0
Y1
TMR
T0
Kn
X0
T0
Y1
Y1
nT
The figure above uses timer T0 to control coil Y1 to be ON. After Y1 is ON, timer T0 will be
closed at the next scan period and output Y1. The oscillating circuit will be shown as above. (n is
the setting of timer and it is decimal number. T is the base of timer. (clock period))
Example 8: Blinking Circuit
16-14

X0
T2
TMR
T1
Kn1
TMR
T2
Kn2
X0
n2 *T
T1
X0
Y1
T1
Y1
n1 * T
The figure above is common used oscillating circuit for indication light blinks or buzzer alarms. It
uses two timers to control On/OFF time of Y1 coil. If figure, n1 and n2 are timer setting of T1 and T2.
T is the base of timer (clock period)
Example 9: Triggered Circuit
X0
X0
M0
M0
Y1
Y1
M0
M0
Y1
Y1
In figure above, the rising-edge differential command of X0 will make coil M0 to have a single
pulse of T (a scan time). Y1 will be ON during this scan time. In the next scan time, coil M0 will be
OFF, normally close M0 and normally close Y1 are all closed. However, coil Y1 will keep on being
ON and it will make coil Y1 to be OFF once a rising-edge comes after input X0 and coil M0 is ON
for a scan time. The timing chart is as shown above. This circuit usually executes alternate two
actions with an input. From above timing: when input X0 is a square wave of a period T, output coil
Y1 is square wave of a period 2T.
Example 10: Delay Circuit
X0
TMR
T10
K1000
X0
T10
Y1
Y1
TB = 0.1 sec
100 seconds
When input X0 is ON, output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding
normally close contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF. Output coil Y1 will be OFF after delaying
100 seconds (K1000*0.1 seconds =100 seconds) once input X0 is OFF and T10 is ON. Please
refer to timing chart above.
Example 11: Output delay circuit, in the following example, the circuit is made up of two
timers.
No matter input X0 is ON or OFF, output Y4 will be delay.
16-15

X0
TMR
T5
T5
K50
X0
T6
Y4
5 seconds
T5
Y4
Y4
Y0
X0
TMR
T6
K30
T6
3 seconds
Example12: Extend Timer Circuit

In this circuit, the total delay time from input X0 is close and output Y1 is ON= (n1+n2)* T. where T is
clock period. Timer: T11, T12; Timer cycle: T.
X0
TMR
T11
Kn1
TMR
T12
Kn2
X0
n1* T
T11
T11
n2* T
T12
T12
Y1
Y1
(n1+n2)* T
16-16
16.4 PLC Devices Function

Items
Program Language
Program Capacity
Specifications
Stored program, cyclic scan
system
Batch processing (when END
instruction is executed)
Basic commands (minimum 0.24
us)
Instruction, Ladder Logic, SFC
1000 STEPS
Commands
80 commands
Input/Output Contact
Input (X): 10, output (Y): 4
Control Method
I/O Processing Method
Execution Speed
Device
X
Relay bit mode
Y
M
Constant
Register WORD data
T
C
Item
Remarks
I/O refresh instruction is

available
Application commands (1 ~
dozens us)
30 basic commands
50 application commands
Range
Function
Correspond to external
Total is
input point
32
Correspond to external
points
External Output Relay
output point
For general
Total is
Contacts can switch to
Auxiliary
192
On/Off in program
For special
points
When the timer
indicated by TMR
Total is
command attains the
Timer 100ms timer
T0~T159, 160 points
16
setting, the T contact
points
with the same number
will be On.
When the counter
indicated by CNT
Total is
16-bit count up
command attains the
Counter
C0~C79, 80 points
80
for general
setting, the C contact
points
with the same number
will be On.
When timer attains, the
Present value of timer
T0~T15, 160 points
contact of timer will be
On.
When timer attains, the
C0~C79, 16-bit counter, 80
contact of timer will be
Present value of counter
points
On.
For latched
D0~D399, 400 points
Total is
D1000~D1099, 100
It can be memory area
Data
For general
1300
points
register
for storing data.
points
D2000~D2799, 800
For special
points
External Input Relay
X0~X17, 16 points,
octal number system
Y0~Y17, 16 points,
octal number system
M0~M799, 800 points
M1000~M1079, 80
points
Decimal
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
Hexadecimal
H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)
Communication port (program read/write) RS485 (slave)

Analog input/output
Built-in 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output
16-17
Function extension module (optional)
EMC-D42A; EMC-R6AA; EMCD611A
16-18
16.4.1 Devices Functions

The Function of Input/output Contacts
The function of input contact X: input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with
input equipment. It is unlimited usage times for contact A or contact B of each input contact X in
program. The On/Off of input contact X can be changed with the On/Off of input equipment but cant
be changed by using peripheral equipment (WPLSoft).
The Function of Output Contact Y

The mission of output contact Y is to drive the load that connects to output contact Y by sending
On/Off signal. There are two kinds of output contact: one is relay and the other is transistor. It is
unlimited usage times for A or B contact of each output contact Y in program. But there is number for
output coil Y and it is recommended to use one time in program. Otherwise, the output result will be
decided by the circuit of last output Y with PLC program scan method.
X0
The output of Y0 will be decided by

Y0
2, i.e. decided by On/Off of

circuit
X10.
Y0 is repeated
X10
Y0
Value, Constant [K] / [H]

Constant
K
H
Decimal
Hexadecimal
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)

H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)
There are five value types for DVP-PLC to use by the different control destination. The following is
the explanation of value types.
Binary Number (BIN)
It uses binary system for the PLC internal operation or storage. The relative information of binary
system is in the following.
Bit
Bit is the basic unit of binary system, the status are 1 or 0.
Nibble
It is made up of continuous 4 bits, such as b3~b0. It can be used to

represent number 0~9 of decimal or 0~F of hexadecimal.
Byte
It is made up of continuous 2 nibbles, i.e. 8 bits, b7~b0. It can used to

represent 00~FF of hexadecimal system.
Word
It is made up of continuous 2 bytes, i.e. 16 bits, b15~b0. It can used to

represent 0000~FFFF of hexadecimal system.
Double Word
It is made up of continuous 2 words, i.e. 32 bits, b31~b0. It can used to

represent 00000000~FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal system.
The relations among bit, nibble, byte, word, and double word of binary number are shown as follows.
16-19

DW
Double Word
W1
W0
BY3
NB7
BY2
NB6
NB5
Word
BY1
NB4
NB3
BY0
NB2
NB1
Byte
NB0
Nibble
Bit
Octal Number (OCT)

The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP-PLC use octal number.
Example:
External input: X0~X7, X10~X17 (device number)
External output: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17 (device number)
Decimal Number, DEC

The suitable time for decimal number to be used in DVP-PLC system.
To be the setting value of timer T or counter C, such as TMR C0 K50. (K constant)
To be the device number of M, T, C and D. For example: M10, T30. (device number)
To be operand in application command, such as MOV K123 D0. (K constant)
Binary Code Decimal (BCD)

It shows a decimal number by a unit number or four bits so continuous 16 bits can use to represent
the four numbers of decimal number. BCD code is usually used to read the input value of DIP switch
or output value to 7-segment display to be display.
Hexadecimal Number (HEX)

The suitable time for hexadecimal number to be used in DVP-PLC system.
To be operand in application command. For example: MOV H1A2B D0. (constant H)
Constant K:
In PLC, it is usually have K before constant to mean decimal number. For example, K100 means 100
in decimal number.
Exception: The value that is made up of K and bit equipment X, Y, M, S will be bit, byte, word or
double word. For example, K2Y10, K4M100. K1 means a 4-bit data and K2~K4 can be 8, 12
and 16-bit data separately.
Constant H:
In PLC, it is usually have H before constant to mean hexadecimal number. For example, H100
means 100 in hexadecimal number.
The Function of Auxiliary Relay

There are output coil and A, B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y. It is unlimited usage
times in program. User can control loop by using auxiliary relay, but cant drive external load directly.
There are two types divided by its characteristics.
16-20
1.Auxiliary relay for general

2.Auxiliary relay for special
: It will reset to Off when power loss during running. Its

state will be Off when power on after power loss.
: Each special auxiliary relay has its special function.
Please dont use undefined auxiliary relay.
The Function of Timer

The unit of timer is 1ms, 10ms and 100ms. The count method is count up. The output coil will be On
when the present value of timer equals to the settings. The setting is K in decimal number. Data
register D can be also used as settings.
The real setting time of timer = unit of timer * settings
The Features and Functions of Counter

Item
Type
Count direction
Settings
Designate for
constant
Present value
change
General
Count up
0~32,767
16 bits counters
32 bits counters
General
High speed
Count up/down
-2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647
Constant K or data register D
Constant K or data register D (2 for designated)
Counter will stop when attaining

settings
Counter will keep on counting when attaining

settings
When count up attains settings, contact will be
When count attains the settings
On and latched.
Output contact value, contact will be On and
When count down attains settings, contact will
latched.
reset to Off.
The present value will reset to 0 when RST command is executed and contact will
Reset action
reset to Off.
Present register 16 bits
32 bits
After scanning, act together.
Contact action After scanning, act together.
Act immediately when count attains. It has no
relation with scan period.
Functions:
When pulse input signal of counter is from Off to On, the present value of counter equals to settings
and output coil is On. Settings are decimal system and data register D can also be used as settings.
16-bit counters C0~C79:
Setting range of 16-bit counter is K0~K32, 767. (K0 is the same as K1. output contact will be
On immediately at the first count.
General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If counter is latched, it will remember the
value before power loss and keep on counting when power on after power loss.
If using MOV command, WPLSoft to send a value, which is large than setting to C0, register, at
the next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and present value will be
set to the same as settings.
The setting of counter can use constant K or register D (not includes special data register
D1000~D1044) to be indirect setting.
If using constant K to be setting, it can only be positive number but if setting is data register D, it
can be positive/negative number. The next number that counter counts up from 32,767 is
-32,768.
16-21
Example:
LD
RST
LD
CNT
LD
OUT
X0
C0
X1
C0 K5
C0
Y0
X0
X1
RST C0
CNT
C0
K5
C0
Y0
1. When X0=On, RST command is executed,

C0 reset to 0 and output contact reset to
Off.
2. When X1 is from Off to On, counter will
count up (add 1).
3. When counter C0 attains settings K5, C0
contact is On and C0 = setting =K5. C0
wont accept X1 trigger signal and C0
remains K5.
X0
X1
5
4
C0
present
value
settings
2
1
0
Contacts Y0, C0
16.4.2 Special Auxiliary Relays

Special
Read(R)/
Function
M
Write(W)
M1000 Normally open contact (a contact). This contact is On when running and it is
Read only
On when the status is set to RUN.
M1001 Normally closed contact (b contact). This contact is Off when running and it is Read only
Off when the status is set to RUN.
M1002
On only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get positive
pulse in the RUN moment. Pulse width=scan period.
M1003 Off only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get negative
pulse in the RUN moment. Pulse width=scan period.
M1004 Reserved
M1005 Fault indication of the AC motor drives
Read only
M1006
Output frequency is 0
M1007 Operation direction of AC motor drives (FWD: 0, REV: 1)
Read only
M1008
~
Reserved
M1010
M1011 10ms clock pulse, 5ms On/5ms Off
M1012 100ms clock pulse, 50ms On / 50ms Off
Read only
M1013 1s clock pulse, 0.5s On / 0.5s Off

M1014 1min clock pulse, 30s On / 30s Off
Read only
M1015 Frequency attained

M1016 Parameter read/write error
Read only
M1017
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Succeed to write parameter
M1018 Reserved
Read only
M1019 Reserved
Read only
16-22
M1020
Zero flag
Read only
M1021
Borrow flag
Read only
M1022
Carry flag
Read only
M1023 Divisor is 0
Read only
M1024
Reserved
Read only
M1025
RUN(ON) / STOP(OFF) the AC motor drive
Read/Write
M1026
The operation direction of the AC motor drive (FWD: OFF, REV: ON)
Read/Write
M1027 Reset
Read/Write
M1028 Reserved
Read/Write
M1029 Reserved
Read/Write
M1030 Reserved
Read/Write
M1031 Reserved
Read/Write
M1032 Reserved
Read/Write
M1033 Reserved
Read/Write
M1034 Activate CANopen instant control

M1035
~
Reserved
M1039
M1040 Power On
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
M1041 Reserved
Read/Write
M1042 Quick stop
Read/Write
M1043 Reserved
Read/Write
M1044
M1045
~
M1051
M1052
M1053
~
M1055
M1056
Read/Write
Halt
Read/Write
Reserved
Lock
Read/Write
Read/Write
Reserved
Power on ready
Read only
M1057 Reserved
Read only
M1058 On quick stopping
Read only
M1059 CANopen master setting complete
Read only
M1060 Initializing CANopen slave
Read only
M1061 Initialize CANopen slave failed
Read only
M1062 Reserved
Read only
M1063 Target torque attained
Read only
M1064 Reserved
Read only
M1065 Reserved
Read only
M1066 Read/ Write CANopen data complete
Read only
M1067 Read/ Write CANopen data complete
Read only
16-23
M1068
~
Reserved
M1071
M1072 Reserved
M1073 Reserved
~
M1079
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
16.4.3 Special Registers

D1000
Reserved
Read(R)/
Write(W)
-
D1001
PLC firmware version
Read only
D1002
Program capacity
Read only
D1003
D1004
~
D1009
D1010
Checksum
Read only
Reserved
Present scan time (Unit: 0.1ms)
Read only
D1011
Minimum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms)
Read only
D1012
D1013
~
D1019
D1020
Maximum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms)
Read only
Output frequency (0.000~600.00Hz)
Read only
D1021
Output current (####.#A)
Read only
The ID of the extension card:

0: no card
1: Relay Card( 6 out )
2: I/O Card ( 4 in 2 out )
3~7: Reserved
The ID of the extension card:
0: no car
1: DeviceNet Slave
3: CANopen Slave
4: Modbus-TCP Slave
5: EtherNet/IP Slave
6~8: Reserved
Read only
Special D
D1022
D1023
Function
Reserved
Read only
D1024
~
D1026
D1027
Frequency command of the PID control
Read only
D1028
The responsive value of AUI AVI (analog voltage input) (0.00~100.00%)
Read only
D1029
The responsive value of AUI ACI (analog current input) (0.0~100.00%)
Read only
D1030
D1031
~
D1035
D1036
The corresponding value for AUI (-100.0~100.00%)
Read only
Reserved
Reserved
AC motor drive error code
Read only
16-24
D1037
Output frequency from AC motor drive command
Read(R)/
Write(W)
Read only
D1038
DC Bus voltage
Read only
D1039
D1040
D1041
~
D1042
Output voltage
Analog output value AFM1 (-100.00~100.00%)
Read only
Read/Write
Special D
D1043
D1044
D1045
D1046
~
D1049
D1050
D1051
~
D1052
D1053
D1054
~
D1059
Function
Reserved
User defined (When Pr.00.04 is set to 28, the register data will be displayed
Read/Write
as C xxx)
Reserved
Analog output value AFM2 (-100.00~100.00%)
Read/Write
Reserved
Actual mode
0: speed
2: torque
Read only
Reserved
Actual torque
Read only
Read only
Reserved
D1060
Mode setting
0: speed
2: torque
D1061
~
D1069
Reserved
Read/Write
-
CANopen Master Special D (It can be written only when PLC is at STOP)
Special D
PDO
Map
Function
Power
Factory
Failure
R/W
Setting
Memory
D1075
The station which completed CANopen

initialization (bit0=Machine code0 .)
The station which error occurs during CANopen
initialization (bit0=Machine code0 .)
Reserved
CANopen station cut off (bit0=Machine
code0 .)
Error code of main station error
0: no error
1: slave setting error
2: synchronous cycle setting error (the setting is
too low)
Reserved
D1076
SDO fault (main index value)
NO
NO
D1077
SDO fault (sub-index value)
NO
NO
D1070
D1071
D1072
D1073
D1074
16-25
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Special D
PDO
Map
Function
Power
Factory
Failure
R/W
Setting
Memory
NO
R
D1078
SDO fault (error code)
NO
D1079
SDO fault (error code)
NO
NO
D1080
Reserved
D1081
Reserved
NO
NO
D1082
Reserved
NO
NO
D1083
Reserved
NO
NO
D1084
Reserved
NO
NO
D1085
Reserved
NO
NO
D1086
D1087
~
D1089
D1090
Reserved
NO
NO
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
FFFFH
RW
D1092
Synchronous cycle setting

The station which request for initialization during
initializing process.
Delay time before initializing
NO
YES
RW
D1093
Break off detection time
NO
YES
1000ms
RW
D1094
D1095
~
D1096
Break off detection frequency
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
15 sec
RW
D1091
D1097
D1098
D1099
Reserved
Reserved
Type of P to P send (PDO)
Setting range: 1~240
Type of P to P received (PDO)
Delay time of initialization complete
Setting range: 1~60000 sec.
C2000 supports up to 8 CANopen protocol slaves; each slave occupies 100 of special D register
and is numbered in 1~8. There are in total of 8 stations.
Slave No.
Slave No. 1
D2000
Station number
D2001
Factory code(L)
~
~
Slave No. 2
D2099
Mapping address 4 (H)of receiving station
D2100
Station number
D2101
Factory code(L)
~
~
D2199
Mapping address 4(H) of receiving station

4
Slave No. 3
D2200
Station number
D2201
Factory code(L)
~
D2299
16-26
~
Mapping address 4(H) of receiving station
Slave No. 8
D2700
Station number
D2701
Factory code(L)
~
~
D2799
Mapping address 4(H)of receiving station

4
Slave No. 0~7
Special D
PDO
Pre-defined
Save
R/W
Map
setting
Function
Station number of slave No. n

D2000+100*
n
0: CANopen disable
The category of slave No. n
D2001+100*
192H: AC motor drive/ AC servo motor and drive
n
191H: remote I/O module
D2002+100*
Factory code (L) of slave No. n
n
D2003+100*
Factory code (H) of slave No. n
n
D2004+100*
Factory product code (L) of slave No. n
n
D2005+100*
Factory product code (H) of slave No. n
n
NO
RW
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Basic definition
Slave No. 0~7
Special D
D2006+100*n
Function
PDO
Pre-defined
Save
Map
setting
Treatment for slave No. n

YES
communication disconnect
D2007+100*n Error code of slave No. n

D2008+100*n Control word of slave No. n
D2009+100*n Status word of slave No. n
D2010+100*n Control mode of slave No. n
D2011+100*n Actual mode of slave No. n
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Speed Control
16-27
0
0
0
0
2
2
CAN
PDO
R/W
Index
1 2 3 4
6007H-001
RW
0H
603FH-001
0H
6040H-001
0H
6041H-001
0H
6060H-000
8H
6061H-000
8H
R
RW
R
RW
R

Slave No. 0~7
Special D
PDO
Pre-define
Save
Map
d Setting
Function
YES
D2012+100*n Target speed of slave No. n
YES
D2013+100*n Actual speed of slave No. n

D2014+100*n
Speed deviation of slave No.

n
0
0
YES
D2015+100*n Accel. Time of slave No. n
YES
1000
D2016+100*n Decel. Time of slave No. n
YES
1000
CAN
Index
6042H-001
0H
6043H-001
0H
PDO
R/W
1 2 3 4
RW
6044H-001
0H
604FH-002
0H
6050H-002
RW
0H
Torque control
Slave No. 0~7
Special D
PDO
Pre-defined
Save
Map
Setting
Function
D2017+100*n Target torque of slave No. n
YES
D2018+100*n Actual torque of slave No. n
YES
D2019+100*n Actual current of slave No. n
YES
CAN
PDO
R/W
Index
1 2 3 4
6071H-001
RW
0H
6077H-001
0H
6078H-001
R
R
0H
Position control
Slave No. 0~7
Special D
D2020+100*n
D2021+100*n
D2022+100*n
D2023+100*n
D2024+100*n
D2025+100*n
PDO
Pre-defined
Save
Map
Setting
Function
Target position(L) of slave
No. n
Target position(H) of slave
No. n
Actual position(L) of slave
No. n
Actual position(H) of slave
No. n
Speed diagram(L) of slave
No. n
Speed diagram (H) of slave
No. n
YES
CAN
Index
607AH-002
YES
0H
YES
6064H-002
YES
0H
YES
10000
6081H-002
YES
0H
PDO
R/W
1 2 3 4
RW
RW
R
R
RW
RW
20XXH address corresponds to MI MO AI AO.

Slave No. n=0~7
Special D
Function
D2026+100*n MI status of slave No. n
PDO
Pre-defined
Save
Map
Setting
YES
16-28
CAN
PDO
R/W
Index
1 2 3 4
2026H-011
RW
0H
D2027+100*n MO setting of slave No. n

D2028+100*n AI1 status of slave No. n
YES
YES
YES
0
0
0
YES
D2031+100*n AO1 status of slave No. n
YES

Special D
YES
YES
Function
D2034+100*n Transmission setting of slave No. n

D2035+100*n
D2036+100*n
D2037+100*n
D2038+100*n
D2039+100*n
D2040+100*n
D2041+100*n
D2042+100*n
D2043+100*n
D2044+100*n
D2045+100*n
D2046+100*n
D2047+100*n
D2048+100*n
The mapping address 1(L) for slave No. n

transmitting station 1
The mapping address 1(H) for slave No.n
16-29
0
0
2026H-411
0H
2026H-611
0H
2026H-621
0H
2026H-631
0H
2026H-A11
0H
2026H-A2
10H
2026H-A3
10H
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
PDO
Map
Save
Pre-defined
Setting
R/W
NO
YES
000AH
RW
NO
YES
0010H
RW
NO
YES
6040H
RW
NO
YES
0010H
RW
NO
YES
6042H
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
0110H
RW
NO
YES
2026H
RW
NO
YES
6110H
RW
NO
YES
2026H
RW
NO
YES
6210H
RW
NO
YES
2026H
RW
Special D
D2049+100*n
D2050+100*n
D2051+100*n
D2052+100*n
D2053+100*n
D2054+100*n
D2055+100*n
D2056+100*n
D2057+100*n
D2058+100*n
D2059+100*n
D2060+100*n
D2061+100*n
D2062+100*n
D2063+100*n
D2064+100*n
D2065+100*n
D2066+100*n
D2067+100*n
D2068+100*n
D2069+100*n
D2070+100*n
D2071+100*n
D2072+100*n
D2073+100*n
Function
Receiving setting of slave No. n
receiving station 1
receiving station 1
receiving station 1
receiving station 1
receiving station 1
receiving station 1
16-30
PDO
Map
Save
Pre-defined
Setting
R/W
NO
YES
6310H
RW
NO
YES
2026H
RW
NO
YES
0010H
RW
NO
YES
6040H
RW
NO
YES
0020H
RW
NO
YES
607AH
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
0010H
RW
NO
YES
6040H
RW
NO
YES
0010H
RW
NO
YES
6071H
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
0000H
RW
NO
YES
0010H
RW
NO
YES
6041H
RW
NO
YES
0010H
RW
NO
YES
6043H
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
Special D
D2074+100*n
D2075+100*n
D2076+100*n
D2077+100*n
D2078+100*n
D2079+100*n
D2080+100*n
D2081+100*n
D2082+100*n
D2083+100*n
D2084+100*n
D2085+100*n
D2086+100*n
D2087+100*n
D2088+100*n
D2089+100*n
D2090+100*n
D2091+100*n
D2092+100*n
D2093+100*n
D2094+100*n
D2095+100*n
D2096+100*n
D2097+100*n
Function
receiving station 1
receiving station 1
receiving station 2
receiving station 2
receiving station 2
receiving station 2
receiving station 2
receiving station 2
receiving station 2
receiving station 2
receiving station 3
receiving station 3
receiving station 3
receiving station 3
receiving station 3
receiving station 3
receiving station 3
receiving station 3
receiving station 4
receiving station 4
receiving station 4
receiving station 4
receiving station 4
receiving station 4
16-31
PDO
Map
Save
Pre-defined
Setting
R/W
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
4110H
RW
NO
YES
2026H
RW
NO
YES
A110H
RW
NO
YES
2026H
RW
NO
YES
A210H
RW
NO
YES
2026H
RW
NO
YES
A310H
RW
NO
YES
2026H
RW
NO
YES
0010H
RW
NO
YES
6041H
RW
NO
YES
0020H
RW
NO
YES
6064H
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
0010H
RW
NO
YES
6041H
RW
NO
YES
0010H
RW
NO
YES
6077H
RW
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW
Special D
Function
PDO
Map
Save
Pre-defined
Setting
R/W
NO
YES
RW
NO
YES
RW

receiving station 4
D2099+100*n
receiving station 4
D2098+100*n
16.4.4 Communication Address for PLC Devices

Device
Range
Type
Address (Hex)
00~17 (Octal)
bit
0400~040F
00~17 (Octal)
bit
0500~050F
00~159
bit/word
0600~069F
000~799
bit
0800~0B1F
1000~1079
bit
0BE8~0C37
0~79
bit/word
0E00~0E47
00~399
word
1000~118F
1000~1099
word
13E8~144B
2000~2799
word
17D0~1AEF
Function Code
Function Code
Description
01
Read coil status
02
Read input status
X,Y,M,T,C
03
Read one data
T,C,D
05
Force changing one coil status
Y,M,T,C
06
Write in one data

Force changing multiple coil
status
Write in multiple data
T,C,D
0F
10
Supported Devices
Y, M, T, C
Y,M,T,C
T,C,D
Only when PLC is at Stop status, PLC data can be read/write via communication device. When PLC
is at Run status, the communication address should be the mapping address, e.g. for Pr.04-00 it
maps to 0400H.
NOTE
When PLC function is activated, C2000 can Read/Write the PLC and drives parameter by different addresses (pre-defined
station number for the AC motor drive is 1, for PLC station number is 2)
16-32
16.5 Commands
16.5.1 Basic Commands
Commands
Commands
LD
LDI
AND
ANI
OR
ORI
ANB
ORB
MPS
MRD
MPP
Function
Load contact A
Load contact B
Series connection with A contact
Series connection with B contact
Parallel connection with A contact
Parallel connection with B contact
Series connects the circuit block
Parallel connects the circuit block
Save the operation result
Read the operation result (the pointer is
not moving)
Read the result
Operands
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
------
Output Command
Commands
OUT
SET
RST
Function
Drive coil
Action latched (ON)
Clear the contacts or the registers
Operands
Y, M
Y, M
Y, M, T, C, D
Timer and Counter

Commands
TMR
CNT
Function
Operands
T-K or T-D
C-K or C-D16 bit
Function
Connect the common series connection
contacts
Disconnect the common series connection
contacts
Operands
16-bit timer
16-bit counter
Main Control Command

Commands
MC
MCR
N0~N7
N0~N7
Rising-edge/falling-edge Detection Commands of Contact

Commands
LDP
LDF
ANDP
ANDF
ORP
ORF
Function
Rising-edge detection operation starts
Falling-edge detection operation starts
Rising-edge detection series connection
Falling-edge detection series connection
Rising-edge detection parallel connection
Falling-edge detection parallel connection
Operands
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
Rising-edge/falling-edge Output Commands

Commands
PLS
PLF
Function
Rising-edge output
Falling-edge output
16-33
Operands
Y, M
Y, M
End Command
Commands
END
Function
Operands
--
Program end
Other Command
Commands
NOP
INV
P
Function
No function
Inverse operation result
Indicator
Operands
--P
16.5.2 Explanation for the Command

Mnemonic
LD
Operand
Function
Load A contact
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
L The LD command is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or
the A contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to
save present contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status
into the accumulative register.
Example
Ladder diagram
X0
Command code
X1
LD
X0
AND
X1
OUT
Y1
Y1
Mnemonic
LDI
Operand
Operation
Load contact A of X0
Connect to contact A of
X1 in series
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Load B contact
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
The LDI command is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or
the B contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to
save present contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status
into the accumulative register.
Example
Ladder diagram:
X0
X1
Y1
16-34
Command code:
Operation:
LDI
X0
Load contact B of X0
AND
X1
X1 in series
OUT
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
Mnemonic
AND
Function
Series connection- A contact
Operand
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
The AND command is used in the series connection of A contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first,
and then to perform the AND calculation with the logic calculation result before the
contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.
Ladder diagram:
Command code: Operation:
Example
LDI
X1
Load contact B of
X1
AND
X0
Connect to contact
A of X0 in series
OUT
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
X0
X1
Y1
Mnemonic
ANI
Operand
Function
Series connection- B contact
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
The ANI command is used in the series connection of B contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first,
and then to perform the AND calculation with the logic calculation result before the
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
Example
X1
X0
Y1
Mnemonic
OR
Operand
LD
X1
ANI
X0
OUT
Y1
Operation:
Load contact A of
X1
Connect to contact
B of X0 in series
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Parallel connection- A contact
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
16-35
The OR command is used in the parallel connection of A contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and
then to perform the OR calculations with the logic calculation result before the
Ladder diagram:
X0
Example
Y1
LD
X0
OR
X1
OUT
Y1
X1
Mnemonic
ORI
Operand
Load contact A of
X0
Connect to contact
A of X1 in parallel
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Parallel connection- B contact
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
The ORI command is used in the parallel connection of B contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and
then to perform the OR calculations with the logic calculation result before the
Example
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
LD
X0
ORI
X1
OUT
Y1
X0
Y1
X1
Mnemonic
ANB
Operation:
Connect to contact B of
X1 in parallel
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Series connection (Multiple Circuits)
None
Operand
To perform the ANB calculation between the previous reserved logic results and
contents of the accumulative register.
Example
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
X0
ANB
X1
Y1
LD
X0
ORI
X2
X2
X3
LDI
X1
Block A
Block B
OR
X3
ANB
OUT
Mnemonic
Function
16-36
Y1
Operation:
X2 in parallel
X3 in parallel
Connect circuit block in
series
Drive Y1 coil
ORB
Parallel connection (Multiple circuits)

None
Operand
ORB is to perform the OR calculation between the previous reserved logic results
and contents of the accumulative register.
Example
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
X0
X2
X1 Block A
Y1
LD
X0
ANI
X1
X3
LDI
X2
AND
X3
ORB
Block B
ORB
OUT
Mnemonic
MPS
Y1
Operation:
X1 in series
X3 in series
Connect circuit block in
parallel
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Store the current result of the internal PLC operations
None
Operand
To save contents of the accumulative register into the operation result. (the result
operation pointer pluses 1)
Mnemonic
MRD
Function
Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations
None
Operand
Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the pointer of
operation result doesnt move)
Mnemonic
MPP
Function
Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations
None
Operand
Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the stack pointer
will decrease 1)
Example
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
X0
MPS
LD
X1
Y1
MPP
MPS
AND
X1
M0
OUT
Y1
Y2
MRD
END
AND
X2
OUT
M0
X2
MRD
X0
16-37
Operation:
Save in stack
X1 in series
Drive Y1 coil
Read from the stack
(without moving
pointer)
X2 in series
Drive M0 coil
MPP
OUT
Y2
End program
END
Mnemonic
OUT
Operand
Read from the stack

Drive Y2 coil
Function
Output coil
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device.
Motion of coil contact:
OUT command
Contact
Operation
result
Coil
A contact
(normally open)
Example
X1
Y1
Mnemonic
SET
Operand
(normally
closed)
Non-continuity Continuity
Continuity
Non-continuity
Command code:
FALSE
Off
TRUE
On
Ladder diagram:
X0
B contact
LD
X0
AND
X1
OUT
Y1
Operation:
X1 in series
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Latch (ON)
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
When the SET command is driven, its specific device is set to be ON, which will
keep ON whether the SET command is still driven.
You can use the RST command
to set the device to OFF.

Command code:
Ladder diagram:
Example
X0
Y0
SET
Y1
Mnemonic
RST
Operand
LD
X0
AN
Y0
SET
Y1
Operation:
Y0 in series
Y1 latch (ON)
Function
Clear the contacts or the registers
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
16-38
When the RST command is driven, motion of its specific device is as follows:
Device
Status
Coil and contact will be set to OFF.
Y, M
Present values of the timer or counter will be set to 0, and the coil
T, C
and contact will be set to OFF.
The content value will be set to 0.
D
When the RST command is not driven, motion of its specific device is unchanged.
Example
Command code:
Ladder diagram
X0
RST
Y5
Mnemonic
TMR
Operand
Operation:
LD
X0
RST
Y5
Clear contact Y5
Function
16-bit timer
T-K
T0~T159, K0~K32,767
T-D
T0~T159, D0~D399
When TMR command is executed, the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to
count. When the setting value of timer is attained (counting value >= setting value),
the contact will be as following
NO(Normally Open)
Open
contact
NC(Normally Closed)
collector
contact
Close
collector
When the RST command is not driven, motion of its specific device remains
unchanged.
Example
Ladder Diagram:
Command code:
X0
TMR
T5
K1000
LD
TMR
Mnemonic
CNT
Operand
Function
Clear contact or register
C-K
C0~C79, K0~K32,767
C-D
C0~C79, D0~D399
16-39
Operation:
X0
T5
Setting of T5 counter
K1000 is K1000.
When the CNT command is executed from OFFON, which means that the counter
coil is driven, and 1 should thus be added to the counters value; when the counter
achieved specific set value (value of counter = the setting value), motion of the
contact is as follows:
Open
NO(Normally Open) contact
collector
Close
NC(Normally Close) contact
collector
If there is counting pulse input after counting is attained, the contacts and the counting
values will be unchanged. To re-count or to conduct the CLEAR motion, please use
the RST command.
Example
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
LD
X0
CNT
C2
K100
Mnemonic
MC/MCR
Operand
CNT
Operation
X0
Load contact A of
Setting of C2 counter is
C2 K100
K100.
Function
Master control Start/Reset
N0~N7
1. MC is the main-control start command. When the MC command is executed, the
execution of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted. When MC
command is OFF, the motion of the commands that between MC and MCR is
described as follows:
Command
Timer
Accumulative timer
Subroutine timer
Counter
Description
The counting value is set back to zero, the coil and
the contact are both turned OFF
The coil is OFF, and the timer value and the
contact stay at their present condition
The counting value is back to zero. Both coil and
contact are turned OFF.
The coil is OFF, and the counting value and the
contact stay at their present condition
Coils driven up by the OUT

All turned OFF
command
Devices driven up by the SET
Stay at present condition
and RST commands
All of them are not acted , but the nest loop
FOR-NEXT command will still be executed for
Application commands
times defined by users even though the MC-MCR
commands is OFF.
2. MCR is the main-control ending command that is placed at the end of the
main-control program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the
MCR command.
3. Commands of the MC-MCR main-control program support the nest program
structure, with 8 layers as its greatest. Please use the commands in order from N0~
N7, and refer to the following:
Command code:
Ladder Diagram:
16-40
Operation:
Load A contact of X0
LD
X0
MC
N0
LD
X1
Enable N0 common
series connection
contact
OUT
Y0
Drive Y0 coil
X2
N1
Enable N1 common
series connection
contact
LD
X3
OUT
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
N1
Disable N1 common
series connection
contact
N0
Disable N0 common
series connection
contact
X10
:
LD
MC
:
MCR
:
MCR
:
LD
MC
N0
LD
X11
OUT
Y10
:
MCR
Mnemonic
LDP
Operand
N0
Enable N0 common
series connection
contact
Enable N0 common
series connection
contact
Drive Y0 coil
Function
Rising-edge detection operation
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
Usage of the LDP command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is
different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the
Example
detection status of the acquired contact rising-edge into the accumulative register.
Ladder diagram:
Start X0 rising-edge
LDP
X0
X0
X1
detection
Y1
Series connection A
X1
AND
contact of X1
OUT
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
16-41
Remarks
Please refer to the specification of each model series for the applicable range of
operands.
If rising-edge status is ON when PLC power is off, then the rising-edge status will be
TRUE when PLC power is on.
Mnemonic
LDF
Operand
Function
Falling-edge detection operation
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
Usage of the LDF command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is different. It is
used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the detection status of the
acquired contact falling-edge into the accumulative register.
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
Example
X0
X1
Y1
Mnemonic
ANDP
Operand
LDF
X0
AND
X1
OUT
Y1
Operation:
Start X0 falling-edge
detection
Series connection A
contact of X1
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Rising-edge series connection
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
ANDP command is used in the series connection of the contacts rising-edge detection.
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
Example
X0
X1
Y1
LD
X0
ANDP
X1
OUT
Mnemonic
ANDF
Operand
Y1
Operation:
X1 rising-edge
detection in series
connection
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Falling-edge series connection
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts falling-edge detection.
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
Example
X0
X1
Y1
LD
X0
ANDF
X1
OUT
16-42
Y1
Operation:
X1 falling-edge
detection in series
connection
Drive Y1 coil
Mnemonic
ORP
Operand
Function
Rising-edge parallel connection
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contacts
rising-edge detection.
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
Example
LD
X0
Y1
ORP
X1
OUT
Mnemonic
ORF
Operand
Operation:
X0
X1
X1 rising-edge
detection in parallel
connection
Drive Y1 coil
Y1
Function
Falling-edge parallel connection
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contacts falling-edge
detection.
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
Example
LD
X0
Y1
ORF
X1
OUT
Mnemonic
PLS
Operand
X0
X1
Y1
Operation:
X1 falling-edge
detection in parallel
connection
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Rising-edge output
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
When X0=OFFON (rising-edge trigger), PLS command will be executed and M0 will
send the pulse of one time which the length is the time needed for one scan cycle.
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
Example
LD
X0
PLS
M0
SET
Y0
PLS
M0
LD
16-43
Operation:
X0
M0
M0 rising-edge output
M0
Load the contact A of

M0
SET
Mnemonic
PLF
Y0
Y0 latched (ON)
Function
Falling-edge output
Operand
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
When X0= ONOFF (falling-edge trigger), PLF command will be executed and M0
will send the pulse of one time which the length is the time for scan one time.
Ladder diagram:
Example
X0
LD
X0
PLS
M0
PLF
M0
SET
Y0
LD
M0
M0 falling-edge output
Load contact A of M0
SET
Y0
Y0 latched (ON)
M0
Timing Diagram:
X0
M0
Time for one scan cycle
Y0
Mnemonic
END
Function
Program End
None
Operand
It needs to add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or
command program. PLC will scan from address o to END command, after the
execution it will return to address 0 and scan again.
Mnemonic
NOP
Function
No action
None
Operand
NOP command does no operation in the program; the result of executing this
command will remain the logic operation. Use NOP command if user wants to delete
Example
certain command without changing the length of the program.

Ladder diagram:
LD
X0
NOP command will be simplified and not
displayed when the ladder diagram is
displayed.
X0
NOP
OUT
Y1
Mnemonic
INV
NOP
Function
Inverse operation result
None
Operand
16-44
No function
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
The operation result (before executing INV command) will be saved inversely into
cumulative register.
Example
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
LD
X0
Y1
INV
OUT
Mnemonic
P
X0
Y1
Operation:
Operation result
inversed
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Indicator
P0~P255
Operand
Indicator P allows API 00 CJ command and API 01 CALL command to skip from 0.
Though it is not necessary to start from number 0, same number can not be used
twice or serious error would occur.
Example
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
X0
CJ
P10
X1
P10
LD
CJ
X0
P10
Operation:
Skip command CJ to
P10
Y1
Indicator P10
P10
LD
X1
OUT
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
16.5.3 Description of the Application Commands

API
Loop control
Transmission
Comparison
Four
Fundamental
Operations of
Arithmetic
Rotation and
Mnemonic Codes
16 bits
32 bits
Command
01
06
10
11
12
15
CALL
FEND
CMP
ZCP
MOV
BMOV
20
ADD
21
SUB
22
MUL
23
DIV
24
25
30
INC
DEC
ROR
16-45
Function
CALL subroutine
The end of main program
Compare
Zone compare
Data Move
Block move
Perform the addition of BIN
data
Perform the subtraction of
BIN data
Perform the multiplication
of BIN data
Perform the division of BIN
data
Perform the addition of 1
Perform the subtraction of 1
Rotate to the right
STEPS
16bit
32bit
3
1
7
9
5
7
13
17
9
13
7
7
7
7
3
3
5
13
13
13
5
5
Data
Processing
Contact type
logic
operation
Contact Type
Comparison
31
ROL
40
ZRST
215
LD&
DLD&
216
LD|
DLD|
217
LD^
DLD^
218
AND&
DAND&
219
ANDl
DANDl
220
AND^
DAND^
221
OR&
DOR&
222
OR|
DOR|
223
OR^
DOR^
224
LD
DLD
AND#
Contact Logical Operation
OR
OR
OR
Load Compare LD
225
LD
DLD
226
LD
DLD
228
LD
229
Load Compare LD
Load Compare LD
DLD
Load Compare LD
LD
DLD
Load Compare LD
230
LD
DLD
Load Compare LD
232
AND
DAND
AND Compare
233
AND
DAND
AND Compare
234
AND
DAND
AND Compare
236
AND
AND Compare
AND Compare
AND Compare
OR compare
OR compare
OR compare
OR compare
OR compare
OR compare
5
5
5
5
5
5
9
9
9
9
9
9
237
238
240
241
242
244
245
246
DAND
DAND
AND
DAND
AND
OR
DOR
OR
DOR
OR
DOR
OR DOR
OR DOR
OR DOR
Rotate to the left

Zero Reset
LD#
Contact type logic
operation LD
LD#
AND#
AND#
Special
139
RPR
Read the parameters
command for
140
WPR
Write the parameters
AC motor
141
FPID
Drive PID control
drive
142
FREQ
Control the drive frequency
261
CANRX
Read CANopen Slave data
16-46
263
TORQ
Set target torque
264
CANTX
265
CANFLS
Write CANopen Slave data

Update the mapping
special D of CANopen
16-47
16.5.4 Explanation for the Application Commands

API
01
CALL
Bit Devices
X
Y M
Operands:
Call Subroutine
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
16 bits command (3 STEPS)

CALLP
D CALL
32 bits command
S: Operand S can designate P.

Operand S of C2000 series can designate P0~P63.
Explanation
Flag signal: None
1. S: The pointer of call subroutine.

2. Edit the subroutine designated by the pointer after FEND instruction.
3. If only CALL instruction is in use, it can call subroutines of the same pointer
number with no limit of times.
4. Subroutine can be nested for 5 levels including the initial CALL instruction. (If
entering the sixth level, the subroutine wont be executed.)
16-48
API
Bit Devices
X
Y M
The end of the main program (First End)
FEND
06
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
Operands:
16 bits command (1 STEP)
D FEND
No operand
32 bits command
No contact to drive the instruction is required.
Flag signal: None
Explanation
1.
This instruction denotes the end of the main program. It has the same function
as that of END instruction when being executed by PLC.
2.
CALL must be written after FEND instruction and add SRET instruction in the
end of its subroutine. Interruption program has to be written after FEND
instruction and IRET must be added in the end of the service program.
3.
If several FEND instructions are in use, place the subroutine and interruption
service programs between the final FEND and END instruction.
4.
After CALL instruction is executed, executing FEND before SRET will result in
errors in the program.
CALL
Command
Main
program
0
X1
The program
flow:
when X1=OFF
CALL
P63
Main
program
Main
program
P0
CALL instruction of
subroutine
P63
16-49
The program
flow when th
program jum
to P0.
API
10
CMP
S1
S2
Compare
Bit Devices
X Y M K
S1
S2

D
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM T

Operand
Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices.
Explanation
D 16 bits command ( 7 STEPS)

CMPP
CMP
32bits command (13 STEPS)
Flag signal: None
S1 : value comparsion 1,
1.
S2 : value comparison 2 ,
: result
comparison
The contents in S1 and S2 are compared and result is stored in D .
The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values
are signed binary values. When b15 = 1 in 16-bit instruction, the comparison
will regard the value as negative binary values.
5. Designate device Y0, and operand D automatically occupies Y0, Y1, and Y2.
6. When X10 = On, CMP instruction will be executed and one of Y0, Y1, and Y2
will be On. When X10 = Off, CMP instruction will not be executed and Y0, Y1,
and Y2 remain their status before X10 = Off.
7. If the user need to obtain a comparison result with , and , make a series
parallel connection between Y0 ~ Y2.
2.
3.
Example
X10
CMP
K10
D10
Y0
Y0
If K10>D10, Y0 = On
Y1
If K10=D10, Y1 = On
Y2
If K10<D10, Y2= On
8. To clear the comparison result, use RST or ZRST instruction.

X10
RST
M0
RST
M1
RST
M2
16-50
API
11
S1
S2
S
D
ZCP
S1
S2
Zone Compare
Bit Devices
X Y M K
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM T

D 16 bits command (9 STEPS)
ZCP
ZCPP
Operands:
S1: Lower bound of zone comparison
bound of zone comparison
S2: Upper
Flag signal: none
S: Comparison value
D: Comparison result
1.
Explanation
2.
3.
4.
1.
Example
2.
3.
S1: Lower bound of zone comparison

S2: Upper bound of zone
comparison S: Comparison value D: Comparison result
S is compared with its S1 S2 and the result is stored in D.
When S1 > S2, the instruction performs comparison by using S1 as the
lower/upper bound.
The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two
values are signed binary values. When b15 = 1 in 16-bit instruction or
b31 = 1 in 32-bit instruction, the comparison will regard the value as
negative binary values.
Designate device M0, and operand D automatically occupies M0, M1 and
M2.
When X0 = On, ZCP instruction will be executed and one of M0, M1, and
M2 will be On. When X10 = Off, ZCP instruction will not be executed and
M0, M1, and M2 remain their status before X0 = Off.
If the user need to obtain a comparison result with , and , make a
series parallel connection between Y0 ~ Y2.
X0
ZCP
K10
K100
C10
M0
M0
If C10 < K10, M0 = On
M1
M2
4.
If K10 =
< C10 =
< K100, M1 = On
If C10 > K100, M2 = On
To clear the comparison result, use RST or ZRST instruction.

X0
X0
RST
M0
RST
M1
RST
M2
16-51
ZRST
M0
M2
API
12
MOV
Moving the data
Bit Devices
X Y M K
S
D
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM T

Operand: None
Explanation
Example

MOV
MOVP
Flag signal: None
1.
S: Source of data
2.
When this instruction is executed, the content of S will be moved directly

to D. When this instruction is not executed, the content of D remains
unchanged.
1.
When X0 = Off, the content in D10 will remain unchanged. If X0 = On, the
value K10 will be moved to D10 data register.
When X1 = Off, the content in D10 will remain unchanged. If X1 = On, the
present value T0 will be moved to D10 data register.
2.
D: Destination of data
X0
MOV
K10
D0
MOV
T0
D10
X1
16-52
API
BMOV
15
Bit Devices
X Y M K
S
D
n
Operand:
Range of n 1~512
Explanation
Example
Block Move
P
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM T


BMOVP
BMOV
32 bits command
Flag signal: None
1.
S: Start of source devices

data to be moved
D: Start of destination devices
2.
The contents in n registers starting from the device designated by S will

be moved to n registers starting from the device designated by D. If n
exceeds the actual number of available source devices, only the devices
that fall within the valid range will be used.
D20 ~ D23.
D20
D0
D1
K4
D20
D21
D22
D23
D2
D3
n: Number of
When X10 = On, the contents in registers D0 ~ D3 will be moved to the 4 registers
X10
Example
n=4
Assume the bit devices KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS are designated for moving, the
number of digits of S and D has to be the same, i.e. their n has to be the same.
M1000
D0
D20
K4
M0
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
n=3
M6
M7
16-53
M8
M9
Y10
Y11
M10
M11
Y12
Y13
Example
To avoid coincidence of the device numbers to be moved designated by the two

operands and cause confusion, please be aware of the arrangement on the
designated device numbers.
When S > D, the BMOV command is processed in the order as
X10
BMOV D20
D19
K3
1
2
3
D20
D21
D22
D19
D20
D21
When S < D, the BMOV command is processed in the order as

X11
BMOV D10
D11
K3
16-54
D10
D11
D12
3
2
1
D11
D12
D13
API
20
ADD
S1
Bit Devices
X Y M K
S1
S2
D
Operands: None
Explanation
BIN Addition
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM T


ADD
ADDP
Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag

M1021 Borrow flag
M1022 Carry flag
1.
S1: Summand
2.
3.
This instruction adds S1 and S2 in BIN format and store the result in D.
The highest bit is symbolic bit 0 (+) and 1 (-), which is suitable for algebraic
addition, e.g. 3 (-9) -6.
Flag changes in binary addition
16-bit command:
A. If the operation result 0, zero flag M1020 = On.
B. If the operation result -32,768, borrow flag M1021 = On.
C. If the operation result 32,767, carry flag M1022 = On.
4.
Example
S2
S2: Addend
D: Sum
16-bit command:
When X0 = On, the content in D0 will plus the content in D10 and the sum will be
stored in D20.
X0
ADD
D0
16-55
D10
D20
Remarks
Flags and the positive/negative sign of the values:

Zero flag
16 bit: Zero flag

-2, -1, 0
-32,768
-1, 0
32 bit: Zero flag
API
21
SUB
S1
Explanation
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM T

1 2
Carry flag
Zero flag
2,147,483,647 0 1 2
The highest bit

of the data
= 0 (positive)
Carry flag
Subtraction

SUB
SUBP
Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag

M1021 Borrow flag
M1022 Carry flag
1.
S1: Minuend
2.
3.
This instruction subtracts S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D.
The highest bit is symbolic bit 0 (+) and 1 (-), which is suitable for algebraic
subtraction.
Flag changes in binary subtraction
In 16-bit instruction:
If the operation result 0, zero flag M1020 = On.
If the operation result -32,768, borrow flag M1021 = On.
If the operation result 32,767, carry flag M1022 = On.
4.
Example
Bit Devices
X Y M K
S1
S2
D
Operands: None
-1, 0
The highest bit

of the data
= 1 (negative)
S2
32,767
Zero flag
-2, -1, 0 -2,147,483,648
Borrow flag
The highest bit

of the data
= 0 (positive)
The highest bit

of the data
= 1 (negative)
Borrow flag
Zero flag
S2: Subtrahend
D: Remainder
In 16-bit BIN subtraction:

When X0 = On, the content in D0 will minus the content in D10 and the remainder will
be stored in D20.
X0
SUB
D0
16-56
D10
D20
16-57
API
22
MUL
S1
S2
BIN Multiplication

Bit Devices
Word devices
MUL
MULP
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D

S1

S2

D
Operands:
Flag signal: None
In 16-bit instruction, D occupies 2 consecutive devices.
Explanation
1.
2.
S1: Multiplicand
S2: Multiplication
D: Product
This instruction multiplies S1 by S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D.
Be careful with the positive/negative signs of S1, S2 and D when doing
16-bit and 32-bit operations.
16-bit command:
S1
S2
b15..........b0
b15..........b0
X
b15 is a symbol bit
+1
b31..........b16b15..............b0
=
b31 is a symbol bit (b15 of D+1)
b15 is a symbol bit
Symbol bit = 0 refers to a positive value.

Symbol bit = 1 refers to a negative value.
When D serves as a bit device, it can designate K1 ~ K4 and construct a 16-bit result,
occupying consecutive 2 groups of 16-bit data.
Example
The 16-bit D0 is multiplied by the 16-bit D10 and brings forth a 32-bit product. The
higher 16 bits are stored in D21 and the lower 16-bit are stored in D20. On/Off of the
most left bit indicates the positive/negative status of the result value.
X0
MUL
D0
D10
MUL
D0
D10 K8M0
16-58
D20
API
23
DIV
S1
S2
BIN Division
Bit Devices
Word devices
DIV
DIVP
X Y M K
H KnX KnY KnM T
C
D
S1
S2

D
Flag signal: none`
Operands:
In 16-bit instruction, D occupies 2 consecutive devices.
S1: Dividend
S2: Divisor
D: Quotient and remainder
Explanation 1.
2.
This instruction divides S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D. Be
careful with the positive/negative signs of S1, S2 and D when doing 16-bit and
32-bit operations.
16-bit instruction:
Quotient
Remainder
+1
If D is the bit device, it allocates K1~K14 to 16 bits and occupies 2 continuous

sets of quotient and remainder.
Example
When X0 = On, D0 will be divided by D10; the quotient will be stored in D20 and
remainder in D21. On/Off of the highest bit indicates the positive/negative value of the
result.
X0
DIV
D0
D10
D20
DIV
D0
D10
K4Y0
16-59
API
24
INC
Bit Devices
X Y M K
D
Operands: none
Increment: BIN plus 1
P
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM T


INC
INCP
Flag signal: none

Explanation
1.
2.
3.
4.
Example
D: Destination device
If the instruction is not a pulse execution one, the content in the
designated device D will plus 1 in every scan period whenever the
instruction is executed.
This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (INCP).
In 16-bit operation, 32,767 pluses 1 and obtains -32,768. In 32-bit
operation, 2,147,483,647 pluses 1 and obtains -2,147,483,648.
When X0 goes from Off to On, the content in D0 pluses 1 automatically.
X0
INCP
16-60
D0
API
25
DEC
Decrement: BIN minus 1
Bit Devices
X Y M K
D
Operands: none
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM T


DEC
DECP
Flag signal: none

Explanation
D: Destination
1. If the command is not a pulse execution type, the content in the designated
device D will minus 1 in every scan period whenever the instruction is
executed.
2. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (DECP).
3. In 16-bit operation, -32,768 minuses 1 and obtains 32,767. In 32-bit operation,
-2,147,483,648 minuses 1 and obtains 2,147,483,647.
Example
When X0 goes from Off to On, the content in D0 minuses 1 automatically.

X0
DECP
16-61
D0
API
ROR
30
Bit Devices
X
Rotate to the Right
P
Word devices
K
H KnX KnY KnM T
16 bit command (5 STEPS)

ROR
RORP

D
32 bits command

n
Operands:
Flag signal: M1022 Carry flag
D: if in KnY and KnM, only K4 (16 bits) is valid
n: n=K1~K16 (16 bits)
1. D: Device to be rotated
n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation
Explanation
2. This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the right for
n bits.
3. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (RORP).
Example
When X0 goes from Off to On, the 16 bits (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to
the right, as shown in the figure below. The bit marked with will be sent to carry
flag M1022.
X0
RORP D10
K4
Rotate to the right

upper bit
lower bit
Carry
flag
D10 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
upper bit
16 bits
After one rotation
to the right
lower bit
D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
*
16-62
Carry
flag
API
31
ROL
Rotate to the Left
Bit Devices
X Y M K
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM T

n
Operands:
D: if in KnY and KnM, only K4 (16 bits) is valid
n: n=K1~K16 (16 bits)
Explanation
1.
2.
3.
Example

ROL
ROLP
32 bits command
Flag signal: M1022
Carry flag
D: Device to be rotated; n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation

This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the left for
n bits.
This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (ROLP).
When X0 goes from Off to On, the 16 bits (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to
the left, as shown in the figure below. The bit marked with will be sent to carry
flag M1022.
X0
D10
K4
Rotate to the left

upper bit
lower bit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Carry
flag
upper bit
1
16 bits
After one rotation
to the left
lower bit
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Carry
flag
16-63
D10
D10
API
40
ZRST
D1
Zero Reset
D2
Bit Devices
Word devices
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T

D1

D2
Operands:
No of D1 operand. No. of D2 operand
D1 and D2 must select same device type

ZRSTP
ZRST
32 bits command
Flag signal: none

Please refer to the specification of each model series
for applicable range of the device.
D2: End device of the range to be reset
Explanation D1: Start device of the range to be reset
When D1 > D2, only operands designated by D2 will be reset.
1. When X0 = On, auxiliary relays M300 ~ M399 will be reset to Off.
Example
2. When X1 = On, 16 counters C0 ~ C127 will all be reset (writing in 0; contact

and coil being reset to Off).
3. When X10 = On, timers T0 ~ T127 will all be reset (writing in 0; contact and coil
being reset to Off).
4. When X3 = On, data registers D0 ~ D100 will be reset to 0.
X0
ZRST
M300
M399
ZRST
C0
C127
ZRST
T0
T127
ZRST
D0
D100
X1
X10
X3
Remarks
1.
Devices, e.g. bit devices Y, M, S and word devices T, C, D, can use RST
instruction.
2.
API 16 FMOV instruction is also to send K0 to word devices T, C, D or bit

registers KnY, KnM, KnS for reset.
X0
16-64
RST
M0
RST
T0
RST
Y0
FMOV
K0
D10
K5
API
215~
217
S1
LD#
Contact Logical Operation LD#
S2
Bit Devices
Word devices
LD#
ZRSTP

S1
S2
DLD#
Operands: : &, |, ^
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
S1: Data source device 1
Explanation 1.
2.
This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. If the result is not 0, the
continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the result is 0, the continuity of the
instruction is disabled.
3.
Example
LD#
(#: &, |, ^) instruction is used for direct connection with BUS.

16 -bit
32 -bit
No-continuity
API No.
Continuity condition
instruction instruction
condition
215
LD&
DLD&
S1
&
S2
S1
&
S2
216
LD|
DLD|
S1
S2
S1
S2
217
LD^
DLD^
S1
S2
S1
S2
4.
&: Logical AND operation
5.
|: Logical OR operation
6.
^: Logical XOR operation

1.
When the result of logical AND operation of C0 and C10 0, Y10 = On.
2.
When the result of logical OR operation of D200 and D300 0 and X1 = On,
Y11 = On will be retained.
LD &
C0
C10
LD I
D200
D300
Y10
X1
16-65
SET
Y11
API
218~
220
S1
AND#
Contact Logical Operation AND#
S2
Bit Devices
Word devices
ZRSTP
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D AND#

S1
S2
DAND#
Operands: : &, |, ^
range of operands.
Explanation 1. S1: Data source device 1
2.
3.
AND# (#: &, |, ^) is an operation instruction used on series contacts.

API No.
Example
16 -bit
32 -bit
No-continuity
condition
218
AND&
DAND&
S1
&
S2
S1
&
S2
219
AND|
DAND|
S1
S2
S1
S2
220
AND^
DAND^
S1
S2
S1
S2
4.
5.
6.
1. When X0 = On and the result of logical AND operation of C0 and C10 0,

Y10 = On.
2. When X1 = Off and the result of logical OR operation of D10 and D0 0 and
X1 = On, Y11 = On will be retained.
3. When X2 = On and the result of logical XOR operation of 32-bit register
D200 (D201) and 32-bit register D100 (D101) 0 or M3 = On, M50 = On.
X0
AND &
C0
C10
Y10
AND I
D10
D0
SET
DAND ^
D200
D100
M50
X1
X2
M3
16-66
Y11
API
221~
223
S1
OR#
Contact Logical operation OR#
S2
Bit Devices
Word devices
OR#
ZRSTP

S1
S2
DOR#
Operand: : &, |, ^
range of operands.
Explanation 1.
2.
3.
OR# (#: &, |, ^) is an operation instruction used on parallel contacts.

API No.
Example
16 -bit
32 -bit
No-continuity
condition
221
OR&
DOR&
S1
&
S2
S1
&
S2
222
OR|
DOR|
S1
S2
S1
S2
223
OR^
DOR^
S1
S2
S1
S2
4.
5.
6.
When X1 = On and the result of logical AND operation of C0 and C10 0, Y10 = On.
1.
M60 will be On, if X2 and M30 are On with one of the following two conditions: 1.
The OR operation result of 32-bit register D10 (D11) and 32 bits register
D20(D21) does not equal to 0. 2. The XOR operation result of 32 bits counter
C235 and 32bits register D200 (D201) does not equal 0.
LD=
K200
C10
LD>
D200
K-30
Y10
X1
16-67
SET
Y11
API
224~
230
S1
LD
Load Compare
S2

Bit Devices
Word devices
LD
ZRSTP

S1
S2
DLD
Operands: : =, >, <, <>,,

range of operands.
Explanation 1. S1: Data source device 1
2.
This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take API224 (LD=) for
example, if the result is =, the continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the
result is , the continuity of the instruction is disabled.
3.
LD (: =, >, <, <>, , ) instruction is used for direct connection with BUS.
16 -bit
instruction
32 -bit
instruction
Continuity
condition
No-continuity
condition
224
LD
DLD
S1 S2
S1 S2
225
LD
DLD
S1 S2
S1 S2
226
LD
DLD
S1 S2
S1 S2
228
LD
DLD
S1 S2
S1 S2
229
LD
DLD
S1 S2
S1 S2
230
LD
DLD
S1 S2
S1 S2
API No.
Example
1.
When the content in C10 = K200, Y10 = On.
2.
When the content in D200 > K-30 and X1 = On, Y11= On will be retained.
X1
Y0
OR &
X2
C0
C10
M30
M60
DOR I
D10
16-68
D20
API
232~
238
S1
AND
AND Compare
S2

Bit Devices
Word devices
ZRSTP
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D AND

S1
S2
DAND
Operands: : =, >, <, <>,,

range of operands.
Explanation 1.
2.
This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take API232 (AND=) for
example, if the result is =, the continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the result
is , the continuity of the instruction is disabled.
3.
AND (: =, >, <, <>, , ) is a comparison instruction is used on series

contacts
16 bit
instruction
API No.
Example
32 bit
instruction
Continuity
condition
No-continuity
condition
232
AND
DAND
S1 S2
S1 S2
233
AND
DAND
S1 S2
S1 S2
234
AND
DAND
S1 S2
S1 S2
236
AND
DAND
S1 S2
S1 S2
237
AND
DAND
S1 S2
S1 S2
238
AND
DAND
S1 S2
S1 S2
1.
When X0 = On and the content in C10 = K200, Y10 = On.
2.
When X1 = Off and the content in D0 K-10, Y11= On will be retained.
3.
When X2 = On and the content in 32-bit register D0 (D11) < 678,493 or M3 =

On, M50 = On.
X0
AND=
K200
C10
Y10
AND<>
K-10
D0
SET
X1
X2
DAND>
K678493
M3
16-69
D10
M50
Y11
API
240~
246
S1
OR
OR Compare
S2

Bit Devices
Word devices
ZRSTP
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D OR

S1
S2
DOR
Operands: : =, >, <, <>,,

range of operands.
Explanation
1.
2.
This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take API240 (OR=) for
example, if the result is =, the continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the

result is , the continuity of the instruction is disabled.
3.
OR (: =, >, <, <>, , ) is an comparison instruction used on parallel

contacts.
API No.
Example
16 -bit
instruction
32 -bit
instruction
Continuity
condition
No-continuity
condition
232
AND
DAND
S1 S2
S1 S2
233
AND
DAND
S1 S2
S1 S2
234
AND
DAND
S1 S2
S1 S2
236
AND
DAND
S1 S2
S1 S2
237
AND
DAND
S1 S2
S1 S2
238
AND
DAND
S1 S2
S1 S2
4.
When X1 = On and the present value of C10 = K200, Y0 = On.
5.
When X1 = Off and the content in D0 K-10, Y11= On will be retained.
6.
M50 will be On when X2=On and the content of 32 bits register D0(D11) <678,493
or M3= On.
X0
AND=
K200
C10
Y10
AND<>
K-10
D0
SET
X1
X2
DAND>
K678493
M3
16-70
D10
M50
Y11
16.5.5 Description to drives special commands

API
139
RPR
S1
Read the AC motor drives parameters
S2
Bit Devices
X Y M K
S1
S2
Operands: none
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM T

RPR
RPRP
32 bits command
Flag signal: none

S1: Data address for reading
Explanation
S2: The register that saves the read data
API
140
WPR
S1
Bit Devices
X Y M K
S1
S2
Operands: None
Explanation
Example
S2
P
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
Write the AC motor drives parameters

WPR
WPRP
32 bits command
Flag signal: none
S1: The data for writing; S2: The parameters address for the write data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
It will read the data in parameter H2100 of the C2000 and write into D0;
the data in parameter H2101 is read and write into D1.
When M0=On, data in D10 will be written into Pr. H2001 of C2000.
When M1=ON, data in H2 will be written into Pr. H2001 of C2000, which
is to activate the AC motor drive.
When M2=ON, data in H1 will be written into H2000 of C2000, which is to
stop the AC motor drive.
When data writing successfully, M1017 will be on.
M1000
RPR
H2100
D0
RPR
H2101
D1
WPR
D10
H2001
WPRP
H2
H2000
WPRP
H1
H2000
M0
M1
M2
M1017
Y0
END
16-71
API
141
S1
FPID
S2
S3
S4
Bit Devices
X Y M K
S1
S2
S3
S4
Operands: None
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
1.
Explanation
PID control for the AC motor drive

D
FPID
FPIDP
32 bits command
Flag signal: None
S1: PID Set Point Selection(0-4), S2: Proportional gain P (0-100), S3:
Integral Time I (0-10000), S4: Derivative control D (0-100)
2.
Example
1.
2.
3.
4.
This command FPID can control the PID parameters of the AC motor
drive directly, including Pr.08.00 PID set point selection, Pr.08.01
Proportional gain (P), Pr.08.02 Integral time (I) and Pr.08.03 Derivative
control (D)
Assume that when M0=ON, S1 is set to 0 (PID function is disabled), S2=0,
S3=1 (unit: 0.01 seconds) and S4=1 (unit: 0.01 seconds).
Assume that when M1=ON, S1 is set to 0 (PID function is disabled), S2=1
(unit: 0.01), S3=0 and S4=0.
Assume that when M2=ON, S1 is set to 1(frequency is inputted by digital
keypad), S2=1 (unit: 0.01), S3=0 and S4=0.
D1027: frequency command after PID calculation.
M0
FPID
H0
H0
H1
H1
FPID
H0
H1
H0
H0
FPID
H1
H1
H0
H0
MOV
D1027
D1
M1
M2
M1000
END
16-72
API
142
FREQ
S1
S2
S3
Operation control of the AC motor drive

Bit Devices
Word devices
FREQP
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FREQ

S1
32 bits command

S2
S3
Flag signal: M1028
Operands: None
S1: frequency command, S2: acceleration time, S3: deceleration time
Explanation 1.
2.
This command can control frequency command, acceleration time and
deceleration time of the AC motor drive. Special register control is shown as
following:
M1025: controls RUN (On)/STOP (Off) of the drive. (Run is valid when Servo is
On (M1040 On).)
M1026: Operation directions FWD (On)/REV (Off) of the drive.
M1040: controls Servo On (On)/ Servo Off (Off).
M1042: enable quick stop(ON)/ disable quick stop(Off)
M1044: enable Stop (On)/ disable stop(Off)
M1052: frequency locked (On)/ disable frequency locked(Off)
Example
1.
2.
3.
M1025: controls RUN (On)/STOP (Off) of the drive. M1026: operation direction
FWD (On)/REV (Off) of the drive. M1015: frequency attained.
When M10=ON, setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to
K300(3.00Hz) and acceleration/deceleration time is 0.
When M11=ON, setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to
K3000(30.00Hz), acceleration time is 50 and deceleration time is 60.
M1000
M1025
M11
M1026
M1000
M1040
M12
M1042
M13
M1044
M14
M1052
M10
M11
M11
FREQP
K300
K0
K0
FREQ
K3000
K50
K60
M10
END
16-73
API
261
CANRX
Bit Devices
X Y M K
S1
S2
S3
D
Operand: none
Explanation
S1
S2
S3
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
Read CANopen slave data

FREQ
FREQP
32 bits command
Flag signal: M1028
S1: Slave station number, S2: main index,

S3: sub-index + bit length, D: save address
Command CANRX can read the corresponding slave. Index.

When executing this command, it will send SDO message to
the slave. At this time, M1066 and M1067 are 0 but when
reading is complete M1066 will set to 1. If the slave replied an
accurate response, the value will be written to the designated
register and M1067 is now set to 1. However, if the slave replied
an inaccurate response, this error message will be recorded in
D1076~D1079.
Example
M1002: touch once to activate PLC and change K4M400=K1. After the change,
different message will be displayed when M1066 is set to 1.
16-74
API
264
CANTX
Bit Devices
X Y M
S1
S2
S3
S4
Operands: None
Explanation
S1
S2
S3
S4
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
Write CANopen slave data

FREQ
FREQP
32 bits command
Flag signal: M1028
S1: slave station number, S2: the address to write,

S3: main index, S4: sub-index+ bit length.
Command CANTX can read the corresponding index of the
slave. When executing this command, it will send SDO
message to the slave. At this time, M1066 and M1067 are 0 but
when reading is complete M1066 will set to 1. If the slave
replied an accurate response, the value will be written to the
designated register and M1067 is now set to 1. However, if the
slave replied an inaccurate response, this error message will
be recorded in D1076~D1079.
16-75
API
265
CANFLS
Bit Devices
X Y M
D
Operands: None
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
Update the mapping special D of CANopen

FREQP
D FREQ
32 bits command
Flag signal: M1028

Explanation
D: the special D for update.
CANFLS can update the Special D command.
When it
executes in read only mode, it sends equivalent message as

CANRX to the slave and saves the slave response to this
particular Special D. When it executes in read/write mode, it
sends equivalent message as CANTX to the slave and saves
this special D value to the corresponding slave.
M1066 and M1067 are both 0. When reading is complete,

M1066 will be 1 and this value will write to the designated
register if the slave replies an accurate response. When slave
replies a fault response then M1067 will be 0 and this error
message will be recorded to D1076~D1079.
16-76
16.6 Error and Troubleshoot

Fault
ID
Fault Descript
Corrective Action
PLod
50
Data write error
Check if there is error in the program and

download the program again.
PLSv
51
Data write error when executing
Re-apply the power and download the

program again.
PLdA
52
Program upload error
Upload again. If error occurs continuously,

please return to the factory.
PLFn
53
PLor
54
Program capacity exceeds memory Re-apply the power and download the
program again.
capacity
PLFF
55
Command error when executing
PLSn
56
Check sum error
PLEd
57
PLCr
58
PLdF
59
PLSF
60
Command error when download

program


There is no END command in the Check if there is error in the program and
program
The command MC is continuous
used more than 9 times

Download program error

PLC scan time over-time
Check if the program code is inaccurately

written and download the program again.
16-77
16.7 CANopen Master Application

Simple control of multiple-axes for certain application can be done by C2000 if the device supports
CANopen protocol. One of the C2000 could acts as Master to perform simple synchronous control,
e.g. position, speed, zero return, and torque control. The setup can be done in 7 steps:
Step 1: Activate CANopen Master

1.
Set Pr.09-45 to 1. (To activate Master function, turn off the power after setting and reboot.
The digital keypadKPC-CC01 status will display CAN Master.)
2.
Set Pr.00-02 to 6 for PLC reset. (Note: This action will erase the program and PLC register
and will be set to factory setting.)
3.
Turn off the power and reboot.
4.
Set PLC control toPLC Stop mode by digital keypad KPC-CC01. (If the digital keypad is
KPC-CE01 series, set PLC control toPLC 2. If the drive just came out of the factory, since
PLC program is not yet installed, the digital keypad will show PLFF warning code.)
Step 2: Configuration of the Special D in Master

Each slave occupies 100 of Special D space and is numbered 1 to 8. There are in total of 8
stations. Please refer to 4-3 Special Register in this chapter for Special D register definition.
Slave No.
Slave No. 1
D2000
Station number
D2001
Factory code(L)
~
D2099
~
The mapping address 4(H) of receiving
station 4
Slave No. 2
D2100
Station number
D2101
Factory code(L)
~
D2199
~
The mapping address 4 (H)of receiving
station 4
Slave No. 3
D2200
D2201
~
D2299
Station number
Factory code(L)
~
The mapping address 4 (H)of receiving
station 4
Slave No. 8
D2700
Station number
D2701
Factory code(L)
~
D2799
~
The mapping address 4(H) of receiving
station 4
1.
When communication cable 485 is connected, set PLC status to stop by WPL soft. (If PLC
had already switched to PLC Stop mode then PLC status should be stop already.)
16-78
2.
To control the slave address and corresponding station. For example, control 2 stations of
the slave (max. 8 stations synchronous control), if the station number is 21 and 22, set
D2000 and D2100 to 20 and 21 and then set D2200, D2300, D2400, D2500, D2600 and
D2700 to 0. The setting can be done via PLC software editor WPL, follow the steps shown:
Open WPL Editor > communication> Edit Register Memory(T C D)
When the Register window appears, click Transmit.
When transmission window appear, select read and input the range D2000~D2799
then press enter. The value in D2000~D2799 will be read. If communication failed,
check the communication format (pre-defined PLC station is 2, 9600, 7N2, ASCII).
Insert the slave station for control. Set D2000 and D2100 to 20 and 21 then set D2200,
D2300, D2400, D2500, D2600 and D2700 to 0.
ClickTransmit again. When transmission window appears, input the range

D2000~D2799 and enter. The value in D2000~D2799 will be write (If communication
16-79
error occur and display failed, it means PLC is not in stop status. The value can only
be write in stop status, pleas switch PLC to stop.)
Another method is by setting D1091. Set the corresponding bit of the excluding slave
to 0 (slave station range from No.1~8). For example, if the user wants to exclude slave
No. 2, 6 and 7, please set D1091 = 003B by following steps: WPL Editor >
communication> Edit Register Memory(T C D)
3.
Setup the communication setting. If following conditions apply to you then no additional
setting needs to be done:
If the only control in this application is the speed mode of AC motor drive.
(For
other control such as position and torque control, D2000~D2799 should be set. Please
refer to synchronous control on position, torque and zero return for more set up detail.
To perform synchronous control on position for the slave, please enable the
corresponding function PDO 3. (P to P function is not yet supported by C2000.)
To activate PDO 3 TX (Master sending command to Slave), please set up bit

8~11 of the PLC address D2034+n*100. This special D register is defined as
below:
Bit
PDO4
PDO3
PDO2
PDO1
Torque
Position
Remote I/O
Speed
15
14 ~ 12
11
10 ~ 8
6~4
2~0
Definition En
Number
En
Number
En
Number
En
Number
The pre-defined setting of PDO 3 TX has corresponded to CANopen control word

Index 6040and CANopen target position Index 607A. If position control is the
only control in this application then simply set Special D register value to 0x0A00.
To activate PDO 3 RX (Slave response with the status to Master), please set up
bit 8~11 of the PLC address D2067+n*100. This special D register is defined as
below:
Bit
PDO4
PDO3
PDO2
PDO1
Torque
Position
Remote I/O
Speed
15
14 ~ 12
11
10 ~ 8
6~4
Definition En
Number
En
Number
En
Number
2~0
En Number
The pre-defined setting of PDO 3 TX has corresponded to CANopen control word

Index 6041and CANopen actual position Index 6064. If position control is the
only control in this application then simply set Special D register value to 0x0A00.
In same theory, to perform torque control, please enable the mapping function
PDO4.
The speed for 1 corresponding cycle is 8ms. (When shorten the cycle time to < 8ms,
make sure the time is enough for the data to be transmitted.
16-80
User should calculate the corresponding PDO quantity before setting the cycle. The
PDO quantity should not be greater than the N. The quantity can be calculated by the
following formula.
N = (1 cycle (ms) * rate (kbs) )/250
Example: 1 cycle is 2ms, speed= 1000k, max PDO value is 2*1000/250 = 8. If user
wants to set the cycle time to 2ms, turns off 4 of the C type AC motor drive slave
stations must be turned off (since the pre-defined setting is 8 slaves, half of the
slave station would be 4). The slave station can be turned off by setting the
D2000+n*100 of the unused slaves to 0.
Number of control station 8.

Controlling 8 slave stations at once can only be done by asynchronous control where
to Read/Write the slave is done by CANRX and CANTX command. This is similar to
the Read/Write action of Modbus protocol.
The slave complies with DS402 standard.

Does not control Slave IO terminal.
If above conditions do not apply, please set up the slave corresponding addresses
manually by open WPL editor > communication> Edit Register Memory (T C D).
Step 3: Set up Master station number and communication speed.
Set up the station number for the Master (the default setting of Pr.09-46=100). Do not
to set the same station number as the Slave.
Set up CANopen communication parameter Pr.09-37. It does not matter if the drive is
defined as a Master or a Slave, communication speed is set by Pr.09-37 in both case.
Step 4: Coding
Real-time corresponding action: the data can be Read/Write directly to the corresponding
special D register.
Non Real-time corresponding action:
Read: Reading is made by CANRX command. When reading process is complete,
M1066=1. If reading succeeded, M1067 =1; if reading failed, M1067= 0.
Write:
Writing is made by CANTX command. When writing process is complete, M1066

=1. If writing succeeded, M1067=1; if reading failed, M1067 =0.
Update: Updating the data is made by CANFLS command. (If special D register is defined
as RW type, Master will write the value into the slave. If special D register is
defined as RO type, then the data in the Slave will be read and write into the
Master.) When updating process is complete, M1066 will be 1. If updating
succeeded, M1067=1; if updating failed, M1067=0.
NOTE
When executing CANRX, CANTX and CANFLS commands, the device will wait till M1066 is
completed before the next CANRX, CANT or CANFLS begins. When the commands
completed, download the program to the drive. (Note: The factory setting of PLC
communication protocol is ASCII 7N2 9600 and station number is 2. Please change WPL
16-81
Editor setting at Setting> Communication Setting)
Step 5: Setting the Slave station number, communication speed, operation

source and command source
CANopen communication is supported by Delta C2000 series and EC series AC motor drive.
The corresponding slave and CANopen speed are shown as below:
Corresponding
Parameter of Drive
C2000
Slave
address
CANopen
speed
Source of
09-36
09-37
Disable CANopen Hardware

Interface
09-20
09-21
00-21
CANopen communication
00-20
1M
500K
250K
125K
100K
50K
5
6
02-00
command
address
3
02-01
frequency
command
E-C
1~127
command
Torque
Definition
operation
Source of
Value
11-34
5
3
The only servo motor and drive that supports CANopen communication interface is A2 series.
The corresponding slave station number and communication speed are shown as below:
Corresponding
Parameter of Drive
Value
Definition
A2
Slave address
CANopen speed
03-00
1~127
bit8~11 of Pr.03-01
XRXX
16-82
CANopen
communication address
R= 0
125K
R= 1
250K
R= 2
500K
R= 3
750K
R= 4
1M
Control/Command
Source
01-01
Step 6: Hardware connection

The terminating resistor must be installed at the two farthest ends as shown in the figure
below:
Characteristic
line impedance
Characteristic
line impedance
Step 7: Activate PLC Control Function

Download the program after coding is complete and switch PLC mode to Run status. Then
reboots the power for Slave and Master. Please refer to CANMaster Test 1 vs. 2 driver.dvp.
Example:
C2000 AC motor drive (1 master vs. 2 slave control)
Step 1: Activate CANopen Master
Set Pr.09-45 to 1. (To activate Master function, turn off the power after setting and
reboot. The digital keypadKPC-CC01 status will display CAN Master.)
Set Pr.00-02 to 6 for PLC reset. (Note: This action will erase the program and PLC
register and will be set to factory setting.)
Turn off the power and reboot.
Set PLC control toPLC Stop mode by digital keypad KPC-CC01. (If the digital
keypad is KPC-CE01 series, set PLC control toPLC 2. If the drive just came out of
the factory, since PLC program is not yet installed, the digital keypad will show PLFF
warning code.)
Step 2: Configuration of the Special D in Master
Open WPL editor
Set PLC mode to PLC Stop (PLC2) via the keypad
WPL
editor
read
16-83
D1070~D1099
and
D2000~D2799
Set D2000=10 and D2100=11
Set D2100, 2200, 2300
Download D2000~D2799 setting
2400
2500
2600
2700=0
Step 3: Set up Master station number and communication speed
Set up the station number for the Master (the default setting of Pr.09-46=100). Do not
to set the same station number as the Slave.
Set up CANopen communication speed to 1 M (parameter Pr.09-37= 0). It does not

matter if the drive is defined as a Master or a Slave, communication speed is set by
Pr.09-37 in both case.
Step 4: Coding
Real-time corresponding action: the data can be Read/Write directly to the corresponding
special D register.
Non Real-time corresponding action:
Read:
Reading is made by CANRX command. When reading process is complete,

M1066=1. If reading succeeded, M1067 =1; if reading failed, M1067= 0.
Write:
Writing is made by CANTX command. When writing process is complete, M1066

=1. If writing succeeded, M1067=1; if reading failed, M1067 =0.
Update: Updating the data is made by CANFLS command. (If special D register is defined
as RW type, Master will write the value into the slave. If special D register is
defined as RO type, then the data in the Slave will be read and write into the
Master.) When updating process is complete, M1066 will be 1. If updating
succeeded, M1067=1; if updating failed, M1067=0.
NOTE
When executing CANRX, CANTX and CANFLS commands, the device will wait till M1066 is completed before
the next CANRX, CANT or CANFLS begins. When the commands completed, download the program to the
drive. (Note: The factory setting of PLC communication protocol is ASCII 7N2 9600 and station number is 2.
Please change WPL setting at setting> communication setting)
Step 5: Set Slave station number and communication speed.

Slave No.1: Pr.09-37 = 0(speed 1M), Pr.09-36=10 (station number 10)
Slave No.2: Pr. 09-37 = 0(speed 1M), Pr.09-36=10 (station number 11)
Step 6: Hardware connection
The terminating resistor must be installed at the two farthest ends as shown in the figure
below:
16-84
Characteristic
line impedance
Characteristic
line impedance
Step 7: Activate PLC Control Function

Download the program after coding is complete and switch PLC mode to Run status. Then
reboots the power for Slave and Master. Please refer to CAN Master Test 1 vs. 2 driver.dvp.
16-85

Vfd150c43a Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vfd150c43a Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vfd150c43a Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2011-01-08

PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.

directly to the AC mains circuit power supply.

Summary of UpdatesC2000 Series

Chapter 7 Optional Accessories

Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings

Chapter 15 CANopen Overview

Chapter 16 PLC Function

(Applicable model, AC motor drive selection)

EMC-COP01: RJ45 Pin definition, Specification

[10 Digital Keypad]

Summary of UpdatesC2000 Series

[13 Warning Codes]

[14 Fault Codes and

Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series

Please install the AC motor drive according to this manual.

Output Voltage/Cur rent

F irmware Vers ion

F REQ UENCY RANGE :

Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series

Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series

D1*: Flange mounting

Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series

Detail A (Mounting Hole)

Detail B (Mounting Hole)

D1*: Flange mounting

Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series

Detail A (Mounting Hole)

Detail B (Mounting Hole)

D1*: Flange mounting

distributor or Delta representative for detailed launch schedule.

Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series

[10.83] [11.22] [21.65] [20.67] [19.37]

[27.10] [10.83] [11.22] [21.65]

D1*: Flange mounting

Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series

560.0 528.0 143.0

[11.81] [13.19 [23.19] [22.05] [20.80] [5.63] [0.71] [0.51] [0.71]

370.0 715.8 300.0 335.0

560.0 528.0 143.0

Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series

Detail B (Mounting Hole)

Detail A (Mounting Hole)

D1*: Flange mounting

Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series

397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0

500.0 1240.2 397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0

Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series

Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series

204.0 68.0 137.0

Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series

Chapter 2 InstallationC2000 Series

Multiple drives: side-by-side installationFrame A,B,C, G, H

Chapter 2 InstallationC2000 Series

Multiple drives side-by-side installation in rows (Frame A,B,C )

Minimum mounting clearance

200 (100, Ta=40)

Frame A VFD007C23A; VFD007C43A/E; VFD015C23A; VFD015C43A/E; VFD022C23A;